D-Link xStack DGS-3427 Reference Manual
Reklama
Reklama
®
CLI Reference Guide
Product Model:
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series
Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch
Release 3.0
T
ABLE OF
C
ONTENTS
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
1
INTRODUCTION
The Switch can be managed through the Switch’s serial port, Telnet, or the Web-based management agent. The
Command Line Interface (CLI) can be used to configure and manage the Switch via the serial port or Telnet interfaces.
The DGS-3400 Layer 2 stackable Gigabit Ethernet switch series are members of the D-Link xStack® family. Ranging from 10/100Mbps edge switches to core gigabit switches, the xStack® switch family has been future-proof designed to provide a stacking architecture with fault tolerance, flexibility, port density, robust security and maximum throughput with a user-friendly management interface for the networking professional.
This manual provides a reference for all of the commands contained in the CLI for the xStack® DGS-3426, DGS-3427,
DGS-3450 and DGS-3426P series of switches. Configuration and management of the Switch via the Web-based management agent is discussed in the User’s Guide.
NOTE: For the remainder of this manual, all versions of the DGS-3426, DGS-3427, DGS-3450, and
DGS-3426P switches will be referred to as simply the Switch or the DGS-3450.
Accessing the Switch via the Serial Port
The Switch’s serial port’s default settings are as follows:
• 115200 baud
• no parity
• 8 data bits
• 1 stop bit
A computer running a terminal emulation program capable of emulating a VT-100 terminal and a serial port configured as above is then connected to the Switch’s serial port via an RS-232 DB-9 cable.
With the serial port properly connected to a management computer, the following screen should be visible. If this screen does not appear, try pressing Ctrl+r o refresh the console screen.
DGS-3450 Gigabit Ethernet Switch
Command Line Interface
Firmware: Build 3.00.B10
Copyright(C) 2012 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
UserName:
Figure 1-1. Initial CLI screen
There is no initial username or password. Just press the Enter key twice to display the CLI input cursor
−DGS-
3650:admin# . This is the command line where all commands are input.
Setting the Switch’s IP Address
Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address, which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP/IP application (for example BOOTP, TFTP). The Switch’s default IP address is 10.90.90.90. You can change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address scheme.
The Switch is also assigned a unique MAC address by the factory. This MAC address cannot be changed, and can be found on the initial boot console screen – shown below.
1
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Boot Procedure 1.00-B13
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Power On Self Test ...................................... 100 %
MAC Address : 00-22-B0-DE-F0-46
H/W Version : A2
Please wait, loading V3.00.B10 Runtime image ............ 100 %
UART init ............................................... 100 %
Device Discovery ........................................ \
Figure 1-2. Boot screen
The Switch’s MAC address can also be found in the Web management program on the Switch Information (Basic
Settings) window in the Configuration menu.
The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web-based manager. The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols, in which case the actual address assigned to the
Switch must be known.
The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface (CLI) over the console serial port as follows:
1. Starting at the command line prompt, enter the commands config ipif System ipaddress
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy. Where the x’s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y’s represent the corresponding subnet mask.
2. Alternatively, you can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/z. Where the x’s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the z represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation.
The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management station to the Switch’s Telnet or Web-based management agent.
DGS-3450:admin#config ipif System ipaddress 10.24.22.200/255.0.0.0
Command: config ipif System ipaddress 10.24.22.200/8
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
Figure 1-3. Assigning an IP Address
In the above example, the Switch was assigned an IP address of 10.24.22.200 with a subnet mask of 255.0.0.0. The system message Success indicates that the command was executed successfully. The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet, SNMP MIB browser and the CLI or via the Web-based management agent using the above IP address to connect to the Switch.
2
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
2
U
SING THE
C
ONSOLE
CLI
The Switch supports a console management interface that allows the user to connect to the Switch’s management agent via a serial port and a terminal or a computer running a terminal emulation program. The console can also be used over the network using the TCP/IP Telnet protocol. The console program can be used to configure the Switch to use SNMPbased network management software over the network.
This chapter describes how to use the console interface to access the Switch, change its settings, and monitor its operation.
NOTE: Switch configuration settings are saved to non-volatile RAM using the save command. The current configuration will then be retained in the Switch’s NV-RAM, and reloaded when the Switch is rebooted. If the Switch is rebooted without using the save command, the last configuration saved to NV-RAM will be loaded.
Connecting to the Switch
The console interface is used by connecting the Switch to a VT100-compatible terminal or a computer running an ordinary terminal emulator program (e.g., the HyperTerminal program included with the Windows operating system) using an RS-232C serial cable. Your terminal parameters will need to be set to:
• VT-100 compatible
• 115200 baud
• 8 data bits
• No parity
• One stop bit
No flow control
Users can also access the same functions over a Telnet interface. Once an IP address has been set for the Switch, users can use a Telnet program (in VT-100 compatible terminal mode) to access and control the Switch. All of the screens are identical, whether accessed from the console port or from a Telnet interface.
After the Switch reboots and you have logged in, the console looks like this:
UserName:
PassWord:
DGS-3450:admin#
DGS-3450 Gigabit Ethernet Switch
Command Line Interface
Firmware: Build 3.00.B10
Copyright(C) 2012 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 2- 1. Initial Console Screen after logging in
Commands are entered at the command prompt, DGS-3450:admin# .
There are a number of helpful features included in the CLI. Entering the ? command will display a list of all of the toplevel commands.
3
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
..
? cable_diag ports cfm linktrace cfm lock md cfm loopback clear clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports clear arptable clear attack_log clear cfm pkt_cnt clear counters clear cpu port clear dhcp_binding clear dhcpv6 binding clear fdb clear igmp_snooping date_driven_group clear jwac auth_state clear log clear mac_based_access_control auth_state clear mld_snooping data_driven_group
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
Figure 2- 2. The ? Command
When users enter a command without its required parameters, the CLI will prompt a Next possible completions: message.
DGS-3450:admin#config account
Command: config account
Next possible completions:
<username>
DGS-3450:admin#
Figure 2- 3. Example Command Parameter Help
In this case, the command config account was entered with the parameter <username>. The CLI will then prompt to enter the <username> with the message, Next possible completions:. Every command in the CLI has this feature, and complex commands have several layers of parameter prompting.
In addition, after typing any given command plus one space, all of the next possible sub-commands can be seen, in sequential order, by repeatedly pressing the Tab key.
To re-enter the previous command at the command prompt, press the up arrow cursor key. The previous command will appear at the command prompt.
DGS-3450:admin#config account
Command: config account
Next possible completions:
<username>
DGS-3450:admin#config account
Figure 2- 4. Using the Up Arrow to Re-enter a Command
In the above example, the command config account was entered without the required parameter <username>, the CLI returned the Next possible completions: <username> prompt. The up arrow cursor control key was pressed to re-
4
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual enter the previous command (config account) at the command prompt. Now the appropriate username can be entered and the config account command re-executed.
All commands in the CLI function in this way. In addition, the syntax of the help prompts are the same as presented in this manual
− angle brackets < > indicate a numerical value or character string, braces { } indicate optional parameters or a choice of parameters, and brackets [ ] indicate required parameters.
If a command is entered that is unrecognized by the CLI, the top-level commands will be displayed under the Available
commands: prompt.
DGS-3450:admin#the
Available commands:
.. ? cable_diag cfm clear config create debug delete disable download enable login logout no ping ping6 reboot reconfig reset save show telnet traceroute traceroute6 upload
DGS-3450:admin#
Figure 2- 5. Available Commands
The top-level commands consist of commands such as show or config. Most of these commands require one or more parameters to narrow the top-level command. This is equivalent to show what? or config what? Where the what? is the next parameter.
For example, if you enter the create command with no additional parameters, the CLI will then display all of the possible next parameters.
DGS-3450:admin#create
Command: create
Next possible completions:
802.1x access_profile account address_binding arpentry authen authen_enable authen_login authentication cfm cpu dhcp dhcpv6 dot1v_protocol_group double_vlan erps fdb host_name igmp_snooping ip_tunnel ipif ipmc_vlan_replication_entry iproute ipv6 ipv6route jwac link_aggregation mac_based_access_control mac_based_access_control_local mac_based_vlan mirror multicast_fdb nlb route rspan sflow snmp stp subnet_vlan syslog trusted_host vlan vlan_translation wac
DGS-3450:admin#
Figure 2- 6. Next possible completions: Create command
In the above example, all of the possible next parameters for the create command are displayed.
5
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
3
C
OMMAND
S
YNTAX
The following symbols are used to describe how command entries are made and values and arguments are specified in this manual. The online help contained in the CLI and available through the console interface uses the same syntax.
NOTE: All commands are case-sensitive. Be sure to disable Caps Lock or any other unwanted function that changes text case.
<angle brackets>
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Example Command
Encloses a variable or value that must be specified.
create ipif <ipif_name 12> <network_address> (<ip_addr/netmask>) <vlan_name 32>
{secondary | state [enable | disable]}
In the above syntax example, users must supply an IP interface name in the <ipif_name> space, a VLAN name in the <vlan_name 32> space, and the network address, including the netmask, in the <network_address> (<ip_addr/netmask>) space. Do not type the angle brackets.
create ipif Engineering 10.24.22.5/255.0.0.0 Design
[square brackets]
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Encloses a required value or set of required arguments. One value or argument can be specified.
create account [admin | operator | user] <username 15>
In the above syntax example, users must specify the admin, operator, or user level account to be created. Do not type the square brackets.
create account admin ctsnow
Example Command
| vertical bar
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Separates two or more mutually exclusive items in a list, one of which must be entered.
create account [admin | operator |user] <username 15>
In the above syntax example, you must specify the admin, operator, or user level account to be created. Do not type the backslash.
create account admin ctsnow
Example Command
{braces}
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Encloses an optional value or set of optional arguments.
reset {[config | system]}
In the above syntax example, users have the option to specify config or system. It is not
6
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
{braces}
Example command necessary to specify either optional value, however the effect of the system reset is dependent on which, if any, value is specified. Therefore, with this example there are three possible outcomes of performing a system reset. See the following chapter, Basic Commands for more details about the reset command.
reset config
Line Editing Key Usage
Space n p
CTRL+c
ESC q r a
Enter
Delete
Backspace
Insert or Ctrl+R
Left Arrow
Right Arrow
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Tab
Deletes the character under the cursor and then shifts the remaining characters in the line to the left.
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor and then shifts the remaining characters in the line to the left.
Toggle on and off. When toggled on, inserts text and shifts previous text to the right.
Moves the cursor to the left.
Moves the cursor to the right.
Repeats the previously entered command. Each time the up arrow is pressed, the command previous to that displayed appears. This way it is possible to review the command history for the current session. Use the down arrow to progress sequentially forward through the command history list.
The down arrow will display the next command in the command history entered in the current session. This displays each command sequentially as it was entered. Use the up arrow to review previous commands.
Shifts the cursor to the next field to the left.
Multiple Page Display Control Keys
Displays the next page.
Stops the display of remaining pages when multiple pages are to be displayed.
Stops the display of remaining pages when multiple pages are to be displayed.
Displays the next page.
Displays the previous page.
Stops the display of remaining pages when multiple pages are to be displayed.
Refreshes the pages currently displayed.
Displays the remaining pages without pausing between pages.
Displays the next line or table entry.
7
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
4
B
ASIC
S
WITCH
C
OMMANDS
The basic switch commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create account config account show account delete account show session show switch show serial_port config serial_port enable clipaging disable clipaging enable telnet disable telnet telnet enable web disable web
Save reboot reset login logout show device_status config command_prompt config greeting_message show greeting_message
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
Parameters
[admin | operator | user] <username 15>
<username> {encrypt [plain_text| sha_1] <password>}
<username> {<string>}
{baud_rate [9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 115200] auto_logout [never | 2_minutes |
5_minutes | 10_minutes | 15_minutes]}
<tcp_port_number 1-65535>
[<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {tcp_port <value 0-65535>}
<tcp_port_number 1-65535>
{[config <config_id 1-2> | log | all]}
{<string>}
{[config |system]} {<string>}
[<string 16> | username | default]
{default}
8
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create account
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create user accounts.
create account [admin | operator | user] <username 15>
The create account command is used to create user accounts that consist of a username of 1 to
15 characters and a password of 0 to 15 characters. Up to eight user accounts can be created.
admin <username 15> – Enter a name between 1 and 15 alphanumeric characters to define the administrator account created here.
operator <username 15> – Enter a name between 1 and 15 alphanumeric characters to define the operator account created here.
user <username 15> – Enter a name between 1 and 15 alphanumeric characters to define the user account created here.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create an administrator-level user account with the username “dlink”.
DGS-3450:admin# create account admin dlink
Command: create account admin dlink
Enter a case-sensitive new password:****
Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To create an operator-level user account with the username “frazier”.
DGS-3450:admin# create account operator frazier
Command: create account operator frazier
Enter a case-sensitive new password:****
Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To create a user-level user account with the username “reed”.
DGS-3450:admin# create account user reed
Command: create account user reed
Enter a case-sensitive new password:****
Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
9
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config account
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure user accounts.
config account <username> {encrypt [plain_text| sha_1] <password>}
The config account command configures a user account that has been created using the
create account command.
<username> – Enter a name between 1 and 15 alphanumeric characters to define the administrator account to configure here.
encrypt - Specifies that the account uses encryption.
plain_text - Specifies that the account uses the plain text encryption.
sha_1 - Specifies that the account uses the SHA-1 encryption.
<password> - Enter the password here.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the user password of “dlink” account:
DGS-3450:admin# config account dlink
Command: config account dlink
Enter a old password:****
Enter a case-sensitive new password:****
Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show account
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display user accounts
show account
Displays all user accounts created on the Switch. Up to eight user accounts can exist at one time.
None.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display the accounts that have been created:
DGS-3450:admin# show account
Command: show account
Current Accounts:
Username Access Level
--------------- ------------ dlink Admin
DGS-3450:admin#
10
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete account
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete an existing user account.
delete account <username> {<string>}
The delete account command deletes a user account that has been created using the
create account command.
<username>
<string> – Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the username.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the user account “System”:
DGS-3450:admin# delete account System
Command: delete account System
Are you sure to delete the last administrator account?(y/n)y
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show session
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display a list of currently logged-in users.
show session
This command displays a list of all the users that are logged-in at the time the command is issued.
None
None.
Example usage:
To display the way that the users logged in:
DGS-3450:admin# show session
Command: show session
ID Live Time From Level Name
-- --------- ------------ ----- -----------
8 03:36:27 Serial Port 5 Anonymous
Total Entries: 1
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
11
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show switch
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display general information about the Switch.
show switch
This command displays information about the Switch.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the Switch’s information:
DGS-3450:admin#show switch
Command: show switch
Device Type : DGS-3450 Gigabit Ethernet Switch
Unit ID : 1
MAC Address : 00-22-B0-DE-F0-46
IP Address : 10.90.90.90 (Manual)
VLAN Name : default
Subnet Mask : 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway : 0.0.0.0
Boot PROM Version : Build 1.00-B13
Firmware Version : Build 3.00.B10
Hardware Version : A2
System Name :
System Location :
System Uptime : 0 days, 2 hours, 11 minutes, 7 seconds
System Contact :
Spanning Tree : Disabled
GVRP : Disabled
IGMP Snooping : Disabled
MLD Snooping : Disabled
RIP : Disabled
RIPng : Disabled
TELNET : Enabled (TCP 23)
WEB : Enabled (TCP 80)
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
show serial_port
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current serial port settings.
show serial_port
This command displays the current serial port settings.
None.
None
Example usage:
To display the serial port setting:
12
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show serial_port
Command: show serial_port
Baud Rate : 115200
Data Bits : 8
Parity Bits : None
Stop Bits : 1
Auto-Logout : 10 mins
DGS-3450:admin#
config serial_port
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the serial port.
config serial_port {baud_rate [9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 115200] | auto_logout [never | 2_minutes |
5_minutes | 10_minutes | 15_minutes]}
This command is used to configure the serial port’s baud rate and auto logout settings.
baud_rate [9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 115200]
− The serial bit rate that will be used to communicate with the management host. There are four options: 9600, 19200, 38400, and 115200.
never
− No time limit on the length of time the console can be open with no user input.
2_minutes
− The console will log out the current user if there is no user input for 2 minutes.
5_minutes
− The console will log out the current user if there is no user input for 5 minutes.
10_minutes
− The console will log out the current user if there is no user input for 10 minutes.
15_minutes
− The console will log out the current user if there is no user input for 15 minutes.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure baud rate:
DGS-3450:admin# config serial_port baud_rate 115200
Command: config serial_port baud_rate 115200
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable clipaging
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to pause the scrolling of the console screen when the show command displays more than one page.
enable clipaging
This command is used when issuing the show command which causes the console screen to rapidly scroll through several pages. This command will cause the console to pause at the end of each page. The default setting is enabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable pausing of the screen display when the show command output reaches the end of the page:
13
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# enable clipaging
Command: enable clipaging
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable clipaging
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the pausing of the console screen scrolling at the end of each page when the show command displays more than one screen of information.
disable clipaging
This command is used to disable the pausing of the console screen at the end of each page when the show command would display more than one screen of information.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable pausing of the screen display when show command output reaches the end of the page:
DGS-3450:admin# disable clipaging
Command: disable clipaging
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable telnet
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable communication with and management of the Switch using the Telnet protocol.
enable telnet {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
This command is used to enable the Telnet protocol on the Switch. The user can specify the
TCP or UDP port number the Switch will use to listen for Telnet requests.
{<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
− The TCP port number. TCP ports are numbered between 1 and 65535. The “well-known” TCP port for the Telnet protocol is 23.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable Telnet and configure port number:
DGS-3450:admin# enable telnet 23
Command: enable telnet 23
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
14
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
disable telnet
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the Telnet protocol on the Switch.
disable telnet
This command is used to disable the Telnet protocol on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the Telnet protocol on the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# disable telnet
Command: disable telnet
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
telnet
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to login remote system with telnet protocol.
telnet [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {tcp_port <value 0-65535>}
This command is used to login remote system with Telnet protocol on the Switch.
<ipaddr> – Specify the IP address of telnet server system
<domain_name 255> - Specify the domain name used.
tcp_port – The TCP port number. TCP ports are numbered between 1 and 65535. The “ well-known” TCP port for the Telnet protocol is 23.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To login to the remote system using telnet on the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# telnet 10.0.0.8
Command: telnet 10.0.0.8
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
15
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
enable web
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to enable the HTTP-based management software on the Switch.
enable web {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
This command is used to enable the Web-based management software on the Switch. The user can specify the TCP port number the Switch will use to listen for Telnet requests.
{<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
− The TCP port number. TCP ports are numbered between 1 and 65535. The “well-known” port for the Web-based management software is 80.
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable HTTP and configure port number:
DGS-3450:admin# enable web 80
Command: enable web 80
Note: SSL will be disabled if web is enabled.
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable web
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the HTTP-based management software on the Switch.
disable web
This command disables the Web-based management software on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable HTTP:
DGS-3450:admin# disable web
Command: disable web
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
16
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
save
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to save changes in the Switch’s configuration to non-volatile RAM.
save {[config <config_id 1-2> | log | all]}
This command is used to enter the current switch configuration or log file into non-volatile
RAM. The saved switch configuration will be loaded into the Switch’s memory each time the
Switch is restarted.
log – Specify to save current Switch log to NV-RAM.
all – Use to save the configuration and log file to NV-RAM.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To save the Switch’s current configuration to non-volatile RAM:
DGS-3450:admin# save
Command: save
Saving all configurations to NV-RAM... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
reboot
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to restart the Switch.
reboot {<string>}
This command is used to restart the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To restart the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# reboot
Command: reboot
Are you sure want to proceed with the system reboot? (y|n) y
Please wait, the switch is rebooting...
17
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
reset
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to reset the Switch to the factory default settings.
reset {[config |system]} {<string>}
This command is used to restore the Switch’s configuration to the default settings assigned from the factory.
config
− If the keyword ‘config’ is specified, all of the factory default settings are restored on the Switch including the IP address, user accounts, and the switch history log. The Switch will not save or reboot.
system
− If the keyword ‘system’ is specified all of the factory default settings are restored on the Switch. The Switch will save and reboot after the settings are changed to default.
Rebooting will clear all entries in the Forwarding Data Base.
If no parameter is specified, the Switch’s current IP address, user accounts, and the switch history log are not changed. All other parameters are restored to the factory default settings.
The Switch will not save or reboot.
Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To restore all of the Switch’s parameters to its default values:
DGS-3450:admin#reset config
Command: reset config
Are you sure you want to proceed with system reset except stack information?(y/n) y
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
login
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to log in a user to the Switch’s console.
login
This command is used to initiate the login procedure. The user will be prompted for a
Username and Password.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To initiate the login procedure:
DGS-3450:admin# login
Command: login
UserName:
18
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
logout
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to log out a user from the Switch’s console.
logout
This command terminates the current user’s session on the Switch’s console.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To terminate the current user’s console session:
DGS-3450:admin# logout
show device_status
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to display the current status of the hardware of the Switch.
show device_status
This command displays the current status of the power and fans on the system. In the fan status display there are fans on the left of the switch, on the right, at the back and a CPU fan, if the fans are working normally the display will read “OK” in the fan field. If any of the fans fail the corresponding field will read ‘Fail’.
Parameters
Restrictions
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show the device status of the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# show device_status
Command: show device_status
Unit 1:
Internal Power: Active
External Power: Fail
Left Fan : OK
Right Fan : OK
Back Fan : OK
CPU Fan : OK
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
19
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config command_prompt
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the command prompt for the Command Line Interface.
config command_prompt [<string 16> | username | default]
This command is used to configure the command prompt for the CLI interface of the Switch. The current command prompt consists of “product name + : + user level + product name” (ex. DGS-
3450:admin# ). The user may replace all parts of the command prompt, except the # by entering a string of 16 alphanumerical characters with no spaces, or the user may enter the current login username configured on the Switch.
<string 16> – Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 16 characters to define the command prompt for the CLI interface.
username – Entering this parameter will replace the current CLI command prompt with the login username configured on the Switch.
default – Entering this parameter will return the command prompt to its original factory default setting.
The reset command will not alter the configured command prompt, yet the reset system command will return the command prompt to its original factory default setting.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the command prompt:
DGS-3450:admin# config command_prompt Tiberius
Command: config command_prompt Tiberius
Success.
Tiberius:admin#
config greeting_message
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the greeting message or banner for the opening screen of the Command Line
Interface.
config greeting_message {default}
This command is used to configure the greeting message or login banner for the opening screen of the CLI.
default – Adding this parameter will return the greeting command to its original factory default configuration.
The reset command will not alter the configured greeting message, yet the reset system command will return the greeting message to its original factory default setting.
The maximum character capacity for the greeting banned is 6 lines and 80 characters per line.
Entering Ctrl+W will save the current configured banner to the DRAM only. To save it into the
FLASH memory, the user must enter the save command.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the greeting message:
20
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config greeting_message
Command: config greeting_message
Greeting Messages Editor
===============================================================================
DGS-3450 Gigabit Ethernet Switch
Command Line Interface
Firmware: Build 2.70.B56
Copyright(C) 2010 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
================================================================================
<Function Key> <Control Key>
Ctrl+C Quit without save left/right/
Ctrl+W Save and quit up/down Move cursor
Ctrl+D Delete line
Ctrl+X Erase all setting
Ctrl+L Reload original setting
show greeting_message
Purpose Used to view the currently configured greeting message configured on the Switch.
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
show greeting_message
This command is used to view the currently configured greeting message on the
Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To view the currently configured greeting message:
GS-3450:admin#show greeting_message
Command: show greeting_message
================================================================================
DGS-3450 Gigabit Ethernet Switch
Command Line Interface
Firmware: Build 3.00.B10
Copyright(C) 2012 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
================================================================================
DGS-3450:admin#
21
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
5
802.1X
C
OMMANDS
The Switch implements the server-side of the IEEE 802.1X Port-based and MAC-based Network Access Control. This mechanism is intended to allow only authorized users, or other network devices, access to network resources by establishing criteria for each port on the Switch that a user or network device must meet before allowing that port to forward or receive frames.
The 802.1X commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
22
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Command
enable 802.1x disable 802.1x create 802.1x user delete 802.1x user show 802.1x user config 802.1x auth_protocol config 802.1x fwd_pdu system config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports config 802.1x authorization network radius show 802.1x config 802.1x capability ports config 802.1x max_users config 802.1x auth_parameter ports config 802.1x auth_mode config 802.1x init config 802.1x reauth create 802.1x guest_vlan delete 802.1x guest_vlan config 802.1x guest_vlan ports show 802.1x guest_vlan config radius add config radius delete config radius show radius show auth_statistics show auth_diagnostics show auth_session_statistics
Parameters
< username 15 >
< username 15 >
[ local | radius_eap ]
[ enable | disable ]
[ < portlilst > | all ] [ enable | disable ]
[ enable | disable ]
{ [ auth_state | auth_configuration ] ports { < portlist > } }
[ < portlist > | all ] [ authenticator | none ]
[<value 1 – 4000> | no_limit]
[<portlist> | all] [default | {direction [both | in] | port_control [force_unauth | auto | force_auth] | quiet_period <sec 0-65535> | tx_period <sec 1-65535> | supp_timeout <sec 1-65535> | server_timeout <sec 1-65535> | max_req <value
1-10> | reauth_period <sec 1-65535> | max_users [<value 1-128> | no_limit] | enable_reauth [enable|disable]}(1)]
[ port_based | mac_based ]
[ port_based ports [ < portlist | all > ] | mac_based ports [ < portlist > | all ] { mac_address < macaddr > }]
[ port_based ports [ < portlist | all >]| mac_based ports [ < portlist > | all ] { mac_address < macaddr > }]
{ < vlan_name 32 > }
{ < vlan_name 32 > }
[ < portlist > | all ] state [ enable | disable ]
<server_index 1-3> [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr>] [key <password 32> | encryption_key <password 56>] [default | {auth_port <udp_port_number 1-
65535 > | acct_port <udp_port_number 1-65535 > | timeout <sec 1-255> | retransmit<int 1-20>}]
< server_index 1-3 >
<server_index 1-3> { ipaddress [ <server_ip> | <ipv6addr> ] | key <passwd 32> | auth_port [<udp_port_number>| default ] | acct_port [ <udp_port_number> | default ] | timeout [ <int 1-255> | default ] | retransmit [ <int 1-20> | default ]} (1)
<server_index 1-3> {ipaddress [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr> ] | [ key <password
32> | encryption_key < password 56 >] | auth_port [<udp_port_number 1-
65535> | default] | acct_port [<udp_port_number 1-65535 > | default] | timeout
[<sec 1-255> | default] | retransmit [<int 1-20> | default]}
{ports [<portlist> | all]}
{ports [<portlist> | all]}
{ports [<portlist> | all]}
23
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Command
show auth_client show acct_client config accounting service show accounting service
Parameters
[ network | shell | system ] state [ enable | disable ]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable 802.1x
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the 802.1X function.
enable 802.1x
The enable 802.1x command enables 802.1X function.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Used to enable the 802.1X function:
DGS-3450:admin#enable 802.1x
Command: enable 802.1x
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable 802.1x
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the 802.1X function.
disable 802.1x
The disable 802.1x command disable 802.1X function.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the 802.1X function:
DGS-3450:admin# disable 802.1x
Command: disable 802.1x
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create 802.1x user
Purpose Used to create an 802.1X user.
24
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create 802.1x user
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
create 802.1x user < username 15 >
The create 802.1x user command create an 802.1X user.
username - Specifies adding user name.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create an 802.1x user “test”:
DGS-3450:admin# create 802.1x user test
Command: create 802.1x user test
Enter a case-sensitive new password:
Enter the new password again for confirmation:
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete 802.1x user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete an 802.1X user.
delete 802.1x user < username 15 >
The delete 802.1x user command delete an 802.1X user.
username - Specifies the adding user name.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete user “test”:
DGS-3450:admin# delete 802.1x user test
Command: delete 802.1x user test
Are you sure to delete the user?(y/n)
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show 802.1x user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the 802.1X user.
show 802.1x user
The show 802.1x user command displays the 802.1X user account information.
None.
None.
Example usage:
25
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To display the 802.1X user information:
DGS-3450:admin# show 802.1x user
Command: show 802.1x user
Username Password
---------- ----------
user1 abcds
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
config 802.1x auth_protocol
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the 802.1X auth protocol.
config 802.1x auth_protocol [ local | radius_eap ]
The config 802.1x auth_protocol command configures the 802.1X authentication protocol.
local - Specifies the authentication protocol as local.
radius_eap - Specifies the authentication protocol as RADIUS EAP.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the 802.1X authentication protocol to RADIUS EAP:
DGS-3450:admin# config 802.1x auth_protocol radius_eap
Command: config 802.1x auth_protocol radius_eap
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config 802.1x fwd_pdu system
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure forwarding of EAPOL PDU when 802.1X is disabled.
config 802.1x fwd_pdu system [ enable | disable ]
This is a global setting to control the forwarding of EAPOL PDU. When 802.1X functionality is disabled globally or for a port, and if 802.1X fwd_pdu is enabled both globally and for the port, a received EAPOL packet on the port will be flooded in the same VLAN to those ports for which 802.1X fwd_pdu is enabled and 802.1X is disabled (globally or just for the port).
The default state is disabled.
enable - Enable the forwarding of EAPOL PDU.
disable - Disable the forwarding of EAPOL PDU.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure forwarding of EAPOL PDU system state enable:
26
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config 802.1x fwd_pdu system enable
Command: config 802.1x fwd_pdu system enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure if the port will flood EAPOL PDU when 802.1X functionality is disabled.
config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports [ < portlilst > | all ] [ enable | disable ]
This is a per port setting to control the forwarding of EAPOL PDU. When 802.1X functionality is disabled globally or for a port, and if 802.1X fwd_pdu is enabled both globally and for the port, a received EAPOL packet on the port will be flooded in the same VLAN to those ports for which 802.1X fwd_pdu is enabled and 802.1X is disabled (globally or just for the port).
The default state is disabled.
ports - Specifies a range of ports to be configured.
all - All ports.
enable - Enable forwarding EAPOL PDU receive on the ports.
disable - Disable forwarding EAPOL PDU receive on the ports.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure 802.1X fwd_pdu for ports:
DGS-3450:admin# config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports 1,2 enable
Command: config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports 1,2 enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config 802.1x authorization network radius
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
The enable or disable the acceptation of an authorized configuration.
config 802.1x authorization network radius [ enable | disable ]
The command config 802.1x authorization attributes is used to enable or disable the acception of authorized configuration.
When the authorization is enabled for 802.1X’s RADIUS authentication, the authorized attributes (for example VLAN and 802.1p default priority) assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization status is enabled.
radius - If specified to enable, the authorization attributes (for example VLAN and 802.1p default priority) assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization status is enabled. The default state is enabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
The following example will disable to accept the authorized data assigned from the RADIUS server:
27
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config 802.1x authorization network radius disable
Command: config 802.1x authorization network radius disable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show 802.1x
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the 802.1X state or configurations.
show 802.1x { [ auth_state | auth_configuration ] ports { < portlist > } }
The show 802.1x command displays the 802.1X state or configurations.
auth_state - Used to display 802.1X authentication state machine of some or all ports
auth_configuration - Used to display 802.1X configurations of some or all ports.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be displayed.
If no port is specified, all ports will be displayed.
If no parameter is specified, the 802.1X system configurations will be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To display the 802.1X states:
DGS-3450:admin# show 802.1x auth_state ports 1-4
Command: show 802.1x auth_state ports 1-4
Status: A – Authorized; U – Unauthorized; (P): Port-Based 802.1X
Port MAC Address PAE State Backend State Status VID Priority
---- --------------------- ---------------- -------------- ------- ----
1 00-00-00-00-00-01 Authenticated Idle A 4004 3
1 00-00-00-00-00-02 Authenticated Idle A 1234 -
1 00-00-00-00-00-04 Authenticating Response U - -
2 -(P) Authenticating Request U - -
3 -(P) Connecting Idle U - -
4 -(P) Held Idle U - -
Total Authenticating Hosts :2
Total Authenticated Hosts :2
DGS-3450:admin#
To display the 802.1X system level configurations:
28
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show 802.1x
Command: show 802.1x
802.1X : Disabled
Authentication Mode : None
Authentication Protocol : RADIUS_EAP
Forward EAPOL PDU : Disabled
Max Users : 4000
RADIUS Authorization : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
To display the 802.1X port level configurations:
DGS-3450:admin# show 802.1x auth_configuration ports 1:1
Command: show 802.1x auth_configuration ports 1:1
Port number : 1:1
Capability
AdminCrlDir
OpenCrlDir
Port Control
: None
: Both
: Both
: Auto
QuietPeriod
TxPeriod
SuppTimeout
ServerTimeout
: 60 sec
: 30 sec
: 30 sec
: 30 sec
MaxReq
ReAuthPeriod
: 2 times
: 3400 sec
ReAuthenticate : Disabled
Forward EAPOL PDU On Port : Enabled
Max Users On Port : 10
DGS-3450:admin#
config 802.1x capability
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the port capability.
config 802.1x capability ports [ < portlist > | all ] [ authenticator | none ]
The config 802.1x capability command configures the port capability.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specifies all ports to be configured.
authenticator - The port that wishes to enforce authentication before allowing access to services that are accessible via that port adopts the authenticator role.
none - Disable authentication on the specified ports.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the port capability:
29
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config 802.1x capability ports 1:1-1:10 authenticator
Command: config 802.1x capability ports 1:1-1:10 authenticator
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config 802.1x max_users
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the maximum number of users that can be learned via 802.1X authentication.
config 802.1x max_users [<value 1 – 4000> | no_limit]
The setting is a global limitation on the maximum number of users that can be learned via
802.1X authentication.
In addition to the global limitation, maximum user for per port is also limited. It is specified by config 802.1x auth_parameter command.
max_users - Specifies the maximum number of users.
The range is 1 to 4000. By default, there is no limit on the maximum users.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure 802.1X number of users to be limited to 200:
DGS-3450:admin# config 802.1x max_users 200
Command: config 802.1x max_users 200
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config 802.1x auth_parameter
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the parameters that control the operation of the authenticator associated with a port.
config 802.1x auth_parameter ports [<portlist> | all] [default | {direction [both | in] | port_control [force_unauth | auto | force_auth] | quiet_period <sec 0-65535> | tx_period
<sec 1-65535> | supp_timeout <sec 1-65535> | server_timeout <sec 1-65535> | max_req
<value 1-10> | reauth_period <sec 1-65535> | max_users [<value 1-128> | no_limit] | enable_reauth [enable|disable]}(1)]
The config 802.1x auth_parameter command configures the parameters that control the operation of the authenticator associated with a port.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be configured.
all - All ports.
default - Sets all parameter to be default value.
direction - Sets the direction of access control.
both - For bidirectional access control.
in - For unidirectional access control.
port_control - You can force a specific port to be unconditionally authorized or unauthorized by setting the parameter of port_control to be force_authorized or force_unauthorized.
Besides, the controlled port will reflect the outcome of authentication if port_control is auto.
force_authorized - Force a specific port to be unconditionally authorized.
auto - The controlled port will reflect the outcome of authentication.
30
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config 802.1x auth_parameter
Restrictions
force_unauthorized - Force a specific port to be unconditionally unauthorized.
quiet_period - It is the initialization value of the quietWhile timer. The default value is 60 seconds and can be any value among 0 to 65535.
tx_period - It is the initialization value of the txWhen timer. The default value is 30 seconds and can be any integer value among 1 to 65535.
supp_timeout - The initialization value of the aWhile timer when timing out the supplicant. Its default value is 30 seconds and can be any integer value among 1 to 65535.
server_timeout - The initialization value of the aWhile timer when timing out the authentication server. Its default value is 30 seconds and can be any integer value among 1 to 65535.
max_req - The maximum number of times that the authentication PAE state machine will retransmit an EAP Request packet to the supplicant. Its default value is 2 and can be any integer number among 1 to 10.
reauth_period - It’s a nonzero number of seconds, which is used to be the re-authentication timer. The default value is 3400.
max_users - Specifies per port maximum number of users.
The range is 1 to 128.The default value is 16.
enable_reauth - You can enable or disable the re-authentication mechanism for a specific port.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the parameters that control the operation of the authenticator associated with a port:
DGS-3450:admin# config 802.1x auth_parameter ports 1:1-1:20 direction both
Command: config 802.1x auth_parameter ports 1:1-1:20 direction both
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config 802.1x auth_mode
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure 802.1X authentication mode.
config 802.1x auth_mode [ port_based | mac_based ]
The config 802.1x auth_mode command configures the authentication mode.
port_based - Configure the authentication as port based mode.
mac_based - Configure the authentication as MAC based mode.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the authentication mode:
DGS-3450:admin# config 802.1x auth_mode port_based
Command: config 802.1x auth_mode port_based
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
31
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config 802.1x init
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to initialize the authentication state machine of some or all ports.
config 802.1x init [ port_based ports [ < portlist | all > ] | mac_based ports [ < portlist >
| all ] { mac_address < macaddr > }]
The config 802.1x init command used to initialize the authentication state machine of some or all.
port_based - Configure the authentication as port based mode.
mac_based - Configure the authentication as MAC based mode.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be configured.
all - All ports.
mac_address - MAC address of client.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To initialize the authentication state machine of some or all:
DGS-3450:admin# config 802.1x init port_based ports all
Command: config 802.1x init port_based ports all
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config 802.1x reauth
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to re-authenticate the device connected to the port.
config 802.1x reauth [ port_based ports [ < portlist | all >]| mac_based ports [ < portlist
> | all ] { mac_address < macaddr > }]
The config 802.1x reauth command re-authenticates the device connected to the port. During the re-authentication period, the port status remains authorized until failed re-authentication.
port_based - Configure the authentication as port based mode.
mac_based - Configure the authentication as MAC based mode.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be configured.
all - All ports.
mac_address - MAC address of client.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To re-authenticate the device connected to the port:
DGS-3450:admin# config 802.1x reauth port_based ports all
Command: config 802.1x reauth port_based ports all
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
32
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create 802.1x guest_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to assign a static VLAN to be guest VLAN.
create 802.1x guest_vlan { < vlan_name 32 > }
The create 802.1x guest_vlan command will assign a static VLAN to be guest VLAN.
The specific VLAN which assigned to guest VLAN must be existed.
The specific VLAN which assigned to guest VLAN can’t be deleting.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the static VLAN to be guest VLAN.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a VLAN named “guestVLAN” as 802.1X guest VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# create 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN
Command: create 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete 802.1x guest_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete guest VLAN configuration.
delete 802.1x guest_vlan { < vlan_name 32 > }
The delete 802.1x guest_vlan command will delete guest VLAN setting, but not delete the static VLAN. All ports which enabled guest VLAN will remove to original VLAN after deleted guest VLAN.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the static VLAN to be guest VLAN.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the guest VLAN named “guestVLAN”:
DGS-3450:admin# delete 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN
Command: delete 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config 802.1x guest_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure guest VLAN settings.
config 802.1x guest_vlan ports [ < portlist > | all ] state [ enable | disable ]
The config 802.1x guest_vlan command configures guest VLAN setting.
If the specific port state is changed from enabled state to disable state, this port will move to its original VLAN.
ports - A range of ports enable or disable guest VLAN function.
state - Specify the guest VLAN port state of the configured ports.
33
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config 802.1x guest_vlan
Restrictions
enable - join the guest VLAN.
disable - remove from guest VLAN.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Enable on port 1 – 8 to configure 802.1X guest VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# config 802.1x guest_vlan ports 1-8 state enable
Command: config 802.1x guest_vlan ports 1-8 state enable
Warning! GVRP of the ports were disabled!
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show 802.1x guest_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show guest VLAN setting.
show 802.1x guest_vlan
The show guest_vlan command allows you to show the information of guest VLANs.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show 802.1X guest VLAN on the switch:
DGS-3450:admin# show 802.1x guest_vlan
Command: show 802.1x guest_vlan
Guest VLAN Setting
-----------------------------------------------------------
Guest VLAN : guest
Enable Guest VLAN Ports : 1-10
DGS-3450:admin#
config radius add
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Use to add a new RADIUS server. The server with lower index has higher authenticative priority.
config radius add <server_index 1-3> [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr>] [key <password 32> | encryption_key <password 56>] [default | {auth_port <udp_port_number 1-65535 > | acct_port <udp_port_number 1-65535 > | timeout <sec 1-255> | retransmit<int 1-20>}]
This command is used to add a new RADIUS server.
server_index - RADIUS server index.
server_ip - The IP address of the RADIUS server.
ipv6addr - The IPv6 address of the RADIUS server.
passwd - The key pre-negotiated between switch and the RADIUS server. It is used to
34
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config radius add
Restrictions encrypt user’s authentication data before being transmitted over internet. The maximum length of the key is 32.
encryption_key - Specifies the encryption key.
<password 56> - Enter the encryption key here. This can be up to 56 characters long.
default - Sets the authentication UDP port number to 1812 accounting UDP port number to
1813, timeout to 5 seconds and retransmit to 2.
auth_port - Specifies the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS authentication data between the switch and the RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 65535.
acct_port - Specifies the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS accounting statistics between the switch and the RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 65535.
timeout - The time in second for waiting server reply. Default value is 5 seconds.
retransmit - The count for re-transmitting. Default value is 2.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add a new RADIUS server:
DGS-3450:admin# config radius add 1 10.48.74.121 key dlink default
Command: config radius add 1 10.48.74.121 key dlink default
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config radius delete
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete a RADIUS server.
config radius delete < server_index 1-3 >
The config radius delete command delete a RADIUS server.
server_index - RADIUS server index.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a radius server:
DGS-3450:admin# config radius delete 1
Command: config radius delete 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config radius
Purpose
Syntax
Used to configure a RADIUS server.
config radius <server_index 1-3> { ipaddress [ <server_ip> | <ipv6addr> ] | key
<passwd 32> | auth_port [<udp_port_number>| default ] | acct_port [
<udp_port_number> | default ] | timeout [ <int 1-255> | default ] | retransmit [ <int 1-20>
| default ]} (1)<server_index 1-3> {ipaddress [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr> ] | [ key
35
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config radius
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
<password 32> | encryption_key < password 56 >] | auth_port [<udp_port_number 1-
65535> | default] | acct_port [<udp_port_number 1-65535 > | default] | timeout [<sec 1-
255> | default] | retransmit [<int 1-20> | default]}(1)
The config radius command configures a RADIUS server.
server_index - RADIUS server index.
<server_ip> - The IP address of the RADIUS server.
<ipv6addr> - The IPv6 address of the RADIUS server
<password> - The key pre-negotiated between switch and RADIUS server. It is used to encrypt user’s authentication data before being transmitted over internet. The maximum length of the key is 32.
encryption_key - Specifies the encryption key.
<password 56> - Enter the encryption key here. This can be up to 56 characters long.
auth_port - Specifies the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS authentication data between the switch and the RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 65535. Default value is
1812.
acct_port - Specifies the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS accounting statistics between the switch and the RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 65535. Default value is 1813.
timeout - The time in second for waiting server reply. Default value is 5 seconds.
retransmit - The count for re-transmitting. Default value is 2.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure a radius server:
DGS-3450:admin# config radius server 1 auth_port 60
Command: config radius server 1 auth_port 60
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show radius
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display RADIUS server configurations.
show radius
The show radius command displays RADIUS server configurations.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display RADIUS server configurations:
36
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show radius
Command: show radius
Index 1
IP Address
Auth-Port
Acct-Port
Timeout
: fe80:fec0:56ab:34b0:20b2:6aff:fecf:7ec6
: 1812
: 1513
: 5
: 2
: adfdslkfjefiefdkgjdassdwtgjk6y1w
Retransmit
Key
Index 2
IP Address
Auth-Port
Acct-Port
Retransmit
: 172.18.211.71
: 1812
: 1813
: 2
: 1234567 Key
Index 3
IP Address
Auth-Port
Acct-Port
Retransmit
Key
: 172.18.211.108
: 1812
: 1813
: 2
: adfdslkfjefiefdkgjdassdwtgjk6y1w
Total Entries: 3
DGS-3450:admin#
show auth_statistics
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use to display information of authenticator statistics.
show auth_statistics {ports [<portlist> | all]}
The show auth_statistics command displays information of authenticator statistics.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be displayed.
all - Specifies that all the ports will be used for the configuration.
None.
Example usage:
To display authenticator statistics information for port 1:
37
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show auth_statistics ports 1
Command: show auth_statistics ports 1
Port number : 1
EapolFramesRx
EapolFramesTx
EapolStartFramesRx
0
6
0
EapolReqIdFramesTx
EapolLogoffFramesRx
EapolReqFramesTx
EapolRespIdFramesRx
EapolRespFramesRx
InvalidEapolFramesRx
EapLengthErrorFramesRx
LastEapolFrameVersion
LastEapolFrameSource
DGS-3450:admin#
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00-00-00-00-00-00
show auth_diagnostics
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display information of authenticator diagnostics.
show auth_diagnostics {ports [<portlist> | all]}
The show auth_diagnostics command displays information of authenticator diagnostics.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be displayed.
all - Specifies that all the ports will be used for the configuration.
None.
Example usage:
To display authenticator diagnostics information for port 1:
38
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show auth_diagnostics ports 1
Command: show auth_diagnostics ports 1
Port number : 1
EntersConnecting
EapLogoffsWhileConnecting
EntersAuthenticating
20
0
0
SuccessWhileAuthenticating
TimeoutsWhileAuthenticating
FailWhileAuthenticating
ReauthsWhileAuthenticating
EapStartsWhileAuthenticating
EapLogoffWhileAuthenticating
ReauthsWhileAuthenticated
EapStartsWhileAuthenticated
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
EapLogoffWhileAuthenticated
BackendResponses
BackendAccessChallenges
BackendOtherRequestsToSupplicant
BackendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant
BackendAuthSuccesses
BackendAuthFails
DGS-3450:admin#
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
show auth_session_statistics
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use to display information of authenticator session statistics.
show auth_session_statistics {ports [<portlist> | all]}
The show auth_session_statistics command displays information of authenticator session statistics.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be displayed.
all - Specifies that all the ports will be used for the configuration.
None.
Example usage:
To display authenticator session statistics information for port 1:
39
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show auth_session_statistics ports 1
Command: show auth_session_statistics ports 1
Port number : 1
SessionOctetsRx 0
SessionOctetsTx 0
SessionFramesRx 0
SessionFramesTx 0
SessionId
SessionAuthenticMethod
SessionTime
Remote Authentication Server
0
SupplicantLogoff SessionTerminateCause
SessionUserName
DGS-3450:admin#
show auth_client
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use to display information of RADIUS authentication client.
show auth_client
The show auth_client command displays information of RADIUS authentication client.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display authentication client information:
40
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show auth_client
Command: show auth_client radiusAuthClient ==> radiusAuthClientInvalidServerAddresses 0 radiusAuthClientIdentifier D-Link radiusAuthServerEntry ==> radiusAuthServerIndex :1 radiusAuthServerAddress 0.0.0.0 radiusAuthClientServerPortNumber 0 radiusAuthClientRoundTripTime 0 radiusAuthClientAccessRequests 0 radiusAuthClientAccessRetransmissions 0 radiusAuthClientAccessAccepts 0 radiusAuthClientAccessRejects 0 radiusAuthClientAccessChallenges 0 radiusAuthClientMalformedAccessResponses 0 radiusAuthClientBadAuthenticators 0 radiusAuthClientPendingRequests 0 radiusAuthClientTimeouts 0 radiusAuthClientUnknownTypes 0 radiusAuthClientPacketsDropped 0
DGS-3450:admin#
show acct_client
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display information of RADIUS accounting client.
show acct_client
The show acct_client command displays information of RADIUS accounting client.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display information of RADIUS accounting client:
41
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show acct_client
Command: show acct_client radiusAcctClient ==> radiusAcctClientInvalidServerAddresses 0 radiusAcctClientIdentifier D-Link radiusAuthServerEntry ==> radiusAccServerIndex : 1 radiusAccServerAddress 0.0.0.0 radiusAccClientServerPortNumber 0 radiusAccClientRoundTripTime 0 radiusAccClientRequests 0 radiusAccClientRetransmissions 0 radiusAccClientResponses 0 radiusAccClientMalformedResponses 0 radiusAccClientBadAuthenticators 0 radiusAccClientPendingRequests 0 radiusAccClientTimeouts 0 radiusAccClientUnknownTypes 0 radiusAccClientPacketsDropped 0
DGS-3450:admin#
config accounting service
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the state of the specified RADIUS accounting service.
config accounting service [ network | shell | system ] state [ enable | disable ]
The config accounting service command is used to enable or disable the specified RADIUS accounting service.
network - Accounting service for 802.1X port access control. By default, the service is disabled.
shell - Accounting service for shell events:
When user logs on or out the switch (via the console, Telnet, or SSH) and timeout occurs, accounting information will be collected and sent to RADIUS server. By default, the service is disabled.
system - Accounting service for system events: reset, reboot. By default, the service is disabled.
enable - Enable the specified accounting service.
disable - Disable the specified accounting service.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Enable it to configure accounting shell state:
42
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config accounting service shell state enable
Command: config accounting service shell state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show accounting service
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the status of RADIUS accounting services.
show accounting service
The show accounting service command displays the state for RADIUS accounting service.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be configured.
None.
Example usage:
To show information of RADIUS accounting services:
DGS-3450:admin# show accounting service
Command: show accounting service
Accounting Service
-------------------
Network : Enabled
Shell : Enabled
System : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
43
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
6
A
CCESS
A
UTHENTICATION
C
ONTROL
C
OMMANDS
The TACACS / XTACACS / TACACS+ / RADIUS commands allow users to secure access to the Switch using the
TACACS / XTACACS / TACACS+ / RADIUS protocols. When a user logs in to the Switch or tries to access the administrator level privilege, he or she is prompted for a password. If TACACS / XTACACS / TACACS+ / RADIUS authentication is enabled on the Switch, it will contact a TACACS / XTACACS / TACACS+ / RADIUS server to verify the user. If the user is verified, he or she is granted access to the Switch.
There are currently three versions of the TACACS security protocol, each a separate entity. The Switch’s software supports the following versions of TACACS:
• TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System) —Provides password checking and authentication, and notification of user actions for security purposes utilizing via one or more centralized TACACS servers, utilizing the UDP protocol for packet transmission.
• Extended TACACS (XTACACS) — An extension of the TACACS protocol with the ability to provide more types of authentication requests and more types of response codes than TACACS. This protocol also uses UDP to transmit packets.
• TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System plus) — Provides detailed access control for authentication for network devices. TACACS+ is facilitated through Authentication commands via one or more centralized servers. The TACACS+ protocol encrypts all traffic between the Switch and the TACACS+ daemon, using the TCP protocol to ensure reliable delivery.
The Switch also supports the RADIUS protocol for authentication using the Access Authentication Control commands.
RADIUS or Remote Authentication Dial In User Server also uses a remote server for authentication and can be responsible for receiving user connection requests, authenticating the user and returning all configuration information necessary for the client to deliver service through the user. RADIUS may be facilitated on this Switch using the commands listed in this section.
In order for the TACACS / XTACACS / TACACS+ / RADIUS security function to work properly, a TACACS / XTACACS /
TACACS+ / RADIUS server must be configured on a device other than the Switch, called a server host and it must include usernames and passwords for authentication. When the user is prompted by the Switch to enter usernames and passwords for authentication, the Switch contacts the TACACS / XTACACS / TACACS+ / RADIUS server to verify, and the server will respond with one of three messages: a. The server verifies the username and password, and the user is granted normal user privileges on the Switch. b. The server will not accept the username and password and the user is denied access to the Switch. c. The server doesn’t respond to the verification query. At this point, the Switch receives the timeout from the server and then moves to the next method of verification configured in the method list.
The Switch has four built-in server groups, one for each of the TACACS, XTACACS, TACACS+ and RADIUS protocols.
These built-in server groups are used to authenticate users trying to access the Switch. The users will set server hosts in a preferable order in the built-in server group and when a user tries to gain access to the Switch, the Switch will ask the first server host for authentication. If no authentication is made, the second server host in the list will be queried, and so on. The built-in server group can only have hosts that are running the specified protocol. For example, the TACACS server group can only have TACACS server hosts.
The administrator for the Switch may set up five different authentication techniques per user-defined method list
(TACACS / XTACACS / TACACS+ / RADIUS / local / none) for authentication. These techniques will be listed in an order preferable, and defined by the user for normal user authentication on the Switch, and may contain up to eight authentication techniques. When a user attempts to access the Switch, the Switch will select the first technique listed for authentication. If the first technique goes through its server hosts and no authentication is returned, the Switch will then go to the next technique listed in the server group for authentication, until the authentication has been verified or denied, or the list is exhausted.
44
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Please note that user granted access to the Switch will be granted normal user privileges on the Switch. To gain access to admin level privileges, the user must enter the enable admin command and then enter a password, which was previously configured by the administrator of the Switch.
NOTE: TACACS, XTACACS and TACACS+ are separate entities and are not compatible. The Switch and the server must be configured exactly the same, using the same protocol. (For example, if the
Switch is set up for TACACS authentication, so must be the host server.)
The Access Authentication Control commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
enable password encryption disable password encryption create account config account show account delete account enable authen_policy disable authen_policy show authen_policy create authen_login method_list_name config authen_login
Parameters
[admin | operator | user] <username 15>
<username> {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1] <password>}
<username>
<string 15>
[default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | server_group <string 15> | local | none}
<string 15> delete authen_login method_list_name show authen_login create authen_enable method_list_name config authen_enable
[default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
<string 15>
[default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | server_group <string 15> | local _enable | none}
<string 15> delete authen_enable method_list_name show authen_enable config authen application show authen application create authen server_group config authen server_group delete authen server_group show authen server_group create authen server_host
[default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
[console | telnet | ssh | http | all] [login | enable] [default | method_list_name
<string 15>]
<string 15>
[tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | <string 15>] [add | delete] server_host
<ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius]
<string 15>
{<string 15>}
<ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius] {port <int 1-65535> | [key
[<key_string 254> | none] | encryption_key <key_string 344>] | timeout <int 1-
255> | retransmit <int 1-20>}
45
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Command
config authen server_host delete authen server_host show authen server_host config authen parameter response_timeout config authen parameter attempt show authen parameter enable admin config admin local_enable enable authen_policy_encryption disable authen_policy_encryption
Parameters
<ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius] {port <int 1-65535> | [key
[<key_string 254> | none] | encryption_key <key_string 344>] | timeout <int 1-
255> | retransmit <int 1-20>}
<ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius]
<int 0-255>
<int 1-255>
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable password encryption
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to enable password encryption.
enable password encryption
The user account configuration information will be stored in the configuration file, and can be applied to the system later.
If password encryption is enabled, the passwords will be in encrypted form.
When password encryption is disabled, if the user specifies the password in plain text form, the password will be in plan text form. However, if the user specifies the password in encrypted form, or if the password has been converted to encrypted form by the last enable password encryption command, the password will always be in the encrypted form and can not be reverted back to plaintext.
None
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable password encryption:
DGS-3450:admin# enable password encryption
Command: enable password encryption
DGS-3450:admin#
disable password encryption
Purpose
Syntax
Description
This command is used to disable password encryption.
disable password encryption
The user account configuration information will be stored in the configuration file, and can be applied to the system later.
If password encryption is enabled, the passwords will be in encrypted form.
When password encryption is disabled, if the user specifies the password in plain text form,
46
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
disable password encryption
Parameters
Restrictions the password will be in plan text form. However, if the user specifies the password in encrypted form, or if the password has been converted to encrypted form by the last enable password encryption command, the password will always be in the encrypted form and can not be reverted back to plaintext.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable password encryption:
DGS-3450:admin# disable password encryption
Command: disable password encryption
DGS-3450:admin#
create account
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to create user accounts.
create account [admin | operator | user] <username 15>
The create account command is used to create user accounts. A username can be between
1 and 15 characters. The password is between 0 and 15 characters and is case sensitive.
The total number of accounts supported by the Switch (including admin and user level accounts) is 8.
admin - Specify an administrator level account. The administrator is the highest privilege level in the Switch.
operator - Specify an operator level account.
user - Specify a user level account.
<username 15> - The user name, which must be a minimum of 1 character and a maximum of 15 characters.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create the admin-level user “alpha”:
DGS-3450:admin# create account admin alpha
Command: create account admin alpha
Enter a case-sensitive new password:****
Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config account
Purpose
Syntax
Description
This command is used to configure user accounts.
config account <username> {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1] <password>}
When the password information is not specified in the command, the system will prompt the
47
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config account
Parameters
Restrictions user to input the password interactively. In this case, the user can only input a plain text password.
If the user specifies a password in the command, the user can select to input the password in plain text form or in encrypted form. The encryption algorithm is based on SHA-1.
<username> - Specify the name of the account. The account must already be defined.
plain_text - Specify the password in plain text form.
sha_1 - Specify the password in SHA-1 encrypted form.
password - The password for the user account. The length of a password in plain-text form and encrypted form are different. For a plain-text form password, the password must be a minimum of 0 characters and a maximum of 15 characters. For an encrypted form password, the length is fixed to 35 bytes long. The password is case-sensitive.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the user password of the “alpha” account:
DGS-3450:admin# config account alpha
Command: config account alpha
Enter an old password:****
Enter a case-sensitive new password:****
Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show account
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to display the user accounts that have been created on the Switch.
show account
The show account command displays the user accounts that have been created on the
Switch.
None
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display the user accounts that have been created on the Switch:
48
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show account
Command: show account
Current Accounts:
Username Access Level
--------------- ------------
System User dlink Admin
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3450:admin#
delete account
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to delete an existing account.
delete account <username>
The delete account command deletes an existing account.
<username> - Specify the name of the user that will be deleted.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the user account “System”:
DGS-3450:admin# delete account System
Command: delete account System
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable authen_policy
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to enable the system access authentication policy.
enable authen_policy
Enable system access authentication policy- When authentication is enabled, the device will adopt the login authentication method list to authenticate the user attempting to log in, and adopt the enable authentication method list to authenticate the enable password for promoting the user‘s privilege to Admin level.
None.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the system access authentication policy:
49
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# enable authen_policy
Command: enable authen_policy
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable authen_policy
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to disable the system access authentication policy.
disable authen_policy
Disable system access authentication policy- When authentication is disabled, the device will adopt the local user account database to authenticate the user attempting to log in, and adopt the local enable password to authenticate the enable password for promoting the user
‘s privilege to Admin level.
None.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the system access authentication policy:
DGS-3450:admin# disable authen_policy
Command: disable authen_policy
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show authen_policy
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to display if the system access authentication policy is enabled or disabled.
show authen_policy
Displays if the system access authentication policy is enabled or disabled.
None.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display if the system access authentication policy is enabled or disabled:
DGS-3450:admin#show authen_policy
Command: show authen_policy
Authentication Policy : Disabled
Authentication Policy Encryption: Disabled
DGS-3450:admin#
50
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create authen_login method_list_name
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to create a user-defined method list of authentication methods for users attempting to log in to the Switch.
create authen_login method_list_name <string 15>
Creates a user-defined method list of authentication methods for users attempting to log into the Switch. The maximum number of supported login method lists is 8.
<string 15> - The user-defined method list name
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a user-defined method list called “login_list_1” for users attempting to log in to the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# create authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Command: create authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config authen_login
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure a user-defined or default method list of authentication methods for users attempting to log in to the Switch.
config authen_login [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs | xtacacs
| tacacs+ | radius | server_group <string 15> | local | none}
Configures a user-defined or default method list of authentication methods for users attempting to log in to the Switch. The method sequence will affect the authentication result.
For example, if the user specifies tacacs+ first, then tacacs and local, when the user tries to log in, the authentication request will be sent to the first server host in the tacacs+ built-in server group. If the first server host in the tacacs+ group is missing, the authentication request will be sent to the second server host in the tacacs+ group, and so on. If all server hosts in the tacacs+ group are missing, the authentication request will be sent to the first server host in the tacacs group. If all server hosts in the tacacs group are missing, the local account database in the device will be used to authenticate the user. When a user logs in to the device successfully, using either the tacacs/xtacacs/tacacs+/radius built-in, user-defined server groups methods, or none, only the “user” privilege level will be assigned. If the user wants to access admin privilege level, the user must use the “enable admin” command to promote the privilege level. However, when the local method is used, the privilege level will depend on the account privilege level stored in the local device.
default - Specify the default method list of authentication methods.
method_list_name - Specify the user-defined method list of authentication methods.
tacacs - Specify authentication by the built-in server group “tacacs”.
xtacacs - Specify authentication by the built-in server group “xtacacs”.
tacacs+ - Specify authentication by the built-in server group “tacacs+”.
radius - Specify authentication by the built-in server group “radius”.
server_group - Specify authentication by the user-defined server group.
local - Specify authentication by the local user account database in the device.
none - Specify no authentication.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
51
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To configure a user-defined method list called “login_list_1”, that specifies a sequence of the built-in “tacacs+” server group, followed by the “tacacs” server group, and finally the local account database for users attempting to log in to the
Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# config authen_login method_list_name login_list_1 method tacacs+ tac acs local
Command: config authen_login method_list_name login_list_1 method tacacs+ tacac s local
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete authen_login method_list_name
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to delete a user-defined method list of authentication methods for users logging into the Switch.
delete authen_login method_list_name <string 15>
Deletes a user-defined method list of authentication methods for users attempting to log in to the Switch.
<string 15> - The user-defined method list name.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the user-defined method list called “login_list_1” for users attempting to log in to the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# delete authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Command: delete authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show authen_login
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to display the method list of authentication methods that will be used for users attempting to log in to the Switch.
show authen_login [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
Displays the method list of authentication methods that will be used for users attempting to log in to the Switch.
default - Displays the default user-defined method list for users logging into the Switch.
method_list_name - Displays the specific user-defined method list for users logging into the
Switch.
all - Displays all the method lists for users attempting to log in to the Switch.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display the user-defined method list called “login_list_1” for users attempting to log in to the Switch:
52
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Command: show authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Method List Name Priority Method Name Comment
---------------- -------- --------------- ------------------ login_list_1 1 tacacs+ Built-in Group
2 tacacs Built-in Group
3 mix_1 User-defined Group
4 local Keyword
DGS-3450:admin#
create authen_enable method_list_name
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to create a user-defined method list of authentication methods for promoting a user's privilege to Admin level.
create authen_enable method_list_name <string 15>
Creates a user-defined method list of authentication methods for promoting a user's privilege to Admin level. The maximum number of supported enable method lists is 8.
<string 15> - The user-defined method list name
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a user-defined method list called “enable_list_1” for promoting a user's privilege to Admin level:
DGS-3450:admin# create authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Command: create authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config authen_enable
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to configure a user-defined or default method list of authentication methods for promoting a user's privilege to Admin level.
config authen_enable [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | server_group <string 15> | local _enable | none}
Configures a user-defined or default method list of authentication methods for promoting a user's privilege to Admin level. The sequence of methods will affect the authentication result.
For example, if the sequence is tacacs+ first, followed by tacacs and local_enable, when a user tries to login, the authentication request will be sent to the first server host in the tacacs+ built-in server group. If the first server host in the tacacs+ group is missing, the authentication request will be sent to the second server host in the tacacs+ group, and so on. If all server hosts in the tacacs+ group are missing, the authentication request will be sent to the first server host in the tacacs group. If all server hosts in the tacacs group are missing, the local enable password in the device will be used to authenticate the user’s password. The local enable password in the device can be configured using the “config admin local_password”
CLI command.
default - Specify the default method list of authentication methods.
method_list_name - Specify the user-defined method list of authentication methods.
tacacs - Specify authentication by the built-in server group “tacacs”.
xtacacs - Specify authentication by the built-in server group “xtacacs”.
53
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config authen_enable
Restrictions
tacacs+ - Specify authentication by the built-in server group “tacacs+”.
radius - Specify authentication by the built-in server group “radius”.
server_group - Specify authentication by the user-defined server group.
local_enable - Specify authentication by the local enable password in the device.
none - Specify no authentication.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure a user-defined method list called “method_list_name” that will be used to promote a user's privilege to
Admin level:
DGS-3450:admin# config authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1 method tacacs+ tac acs local_enable
Command: config authen_ enable method_list_name enable_list_1 method tacacs+ tacac s local_enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete authen_enable method_list_name
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to delete a user-defined method list of authentication methods for promoting a user's privilege to Admin level.
delete authen_enable method_list_name <string 15>
Deletes a user-defined method list of authentication methods for promoting a user's privilege to Admin level.
<string 15> - The user-defined method list name
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the user-defined method list called “enable_list_1”, that is used to promote a user's privilege to Admin level:
DGS-3450:admin# delete authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Command: delete authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show authen_enable
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to display the method list of authentication methods for promoting a user's privilege to Admin level.
show authen_enable [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
Displays the method list of authentication methods used for promoting a user's privilege to
Admin level.
default - Display the default user-defined method list for promoting a user's privilege to Admin level.
54
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show authen_enable
Restrictions
method_list_name - Display the specific user-defined method list for promoting a user's privilege to Admin level.
all - Display all the method lists for promoting a user's privilege to Admin level.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display all the method lists that are used for promoting a user's privilege to Admin level:
DGS-3450:admin# show authen_enable all
Command: show authen_enable all
Method List Name Priority Method Name Comment
---------------- -------- --------------- ------------------ enable_list_1 1 tacacs+ Built-in Group
2 tacacs Built-in Group
3 mix_1 User-defined Group
4 local Keyword enable_list_2 1 tacacs+ Built-in Group
2 radius Built-in Group
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3450:admin#
config authen application
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure login or enable method lists for all or the specified applications.
config authen application [console | telnet | ssh | http | all] [login | enable] [default | method_list_name <string 15>]
Configures login or enable method lists for all or the specified applications.
console - Application: Console.
telnet - Application: Telnet.
ssh - Application: SSH.
http - Application: Web.
all - Application: Console, Telnet, SSH, and Web.
login - Specify the method list of authentication methods for user’s attempting to log in.
enable - Specify the method list of authentication methods for promoting a user's privilege to
Admin level.
default - Specify the default method list.
method_list_name - Specify the user-defined method list name.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure a login method list for Telnet called “login_list_1”:
55
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config authen application telnet login method_list_name login_list_1
Command: config authen application telnet login method_list_name login_list_1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show authen application
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to display the login/enable method list for all applications.
show authen application
Displays the login/enable method list for all applications.
None.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display the login/enable method lists for all applications:
DGS-3450:admin# show authen application
Command: show authen application
Application Login Method List Enable Method List
----------- ----------------- ------------------
Console default default
Telnet login_list_1 default
HTTP default default
DGS-3450:admin#
create authen server_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to create a user-defined authentication server group.
create authen server_group <string 15>
Creates a user-defined authentication server group. The maximum number of supported server groups, including the built-in server groups, is 8. Each group can have a maximum of
8 server hosts..
<string 15> - Specify the user-defined server group name.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a user-defined authentication server group called “mix_1”:
DGS-3450:admin# create authen server_group mix_1
Command: create authen server_group mix_1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
56
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config authen server_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to add or remove an authentication server host to or from the specified server group.
config authen server_group [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | <string 15>] [add | delete] server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius]
Adds or removes an authentication server host to or from the specified server group. The built-in “tacacs”, “xtacacs”, “tacacs+”, and “radius” server groups only accept server hosts with the same protocol, but a user-defined server group can accept server hosts with different protocols. The server host must be created first by using the “create authen server_host” CLI command.
server_group tacacs - Specify the built-in server group “tacacs”.
server_group xtacacs - Specify the built-in server group “xtacacs”.
server_group tacacs+ - Specify the built-in server group “tacacs+”.
server_group radius - Specify the built-in server group “radius”.
server_group - Specify a user-defined server group.
add - Add a server host to a server group.
delete - Remove a server host from a server group.
server_host - Specify the server host’s IP address.
protocol tacacs - Specify TACACS for the server host’s authentication protocol
protocol xtacacs - Specify XTACACS for the server host’s authentication protocol
protocol tacacs+ - Specify TACACS+ for the server host’s authentication protocol
protocol radius - Specify RADIUS for the server host’s authentication protocol
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add an authentication server host with an IP address of 10.1.1.222 to server group “mix_1”, specifying the TACACS+ protocol:
DGS-3450:admin# config authen server_group mix_1 add server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Command: config authen server_group mix_1 add server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete authen server_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to delete a user-defined authentication server group.
delete authen server_group <string 15>
Deletes a user-defined authentication server group.
<string 15> - Specify the user-defined server group name that will be deleted.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a user-defined authentication server group called “mix_1”:
57
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# delete authen server_group mix_1
Command: delete authen server_group mix_1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show authen server_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to display the authentication server groups.
show authen server_group {<string 15>}
Displays the authentication server groups.
<string 15> - Specify the built-in or user-defined server group name to display.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display all authentication server groups:
DGS-3450:admin# show authen server_group
Command: show authen server_group
Server Group : mix_1
Group Name IP Address Protocol
--------------- --------------- -------- mix_1 10.1.1.222 TACACS+
10.1.1.223 TACACS radius 10.1.1.224 RADIUS tacacs 10.1.1.225 TACACS tacacs+ 10.1.1.226 TACACS+ xtacacs 10.1.1.227 XTACACS
Total Entries : 5
DGS-3450:admin#
create authen server_host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to create an authentication server host.
create authen server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius] {port
<int 1-65535> | [key [<key_string 254> | none] | encryption_key <key_string 344>] | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-20>}
Creates an authentication server host. When an authentication server host is created, the IP address and protocol are the index. This means that more than one authentication protocol service can be run on the same physical host. The maximum number of supported server hosts is 16.
server_host - Specify the server host’s IP address.
protocol tacacs - Specify that the server host’s authentication protocol will be TACACS.
protocol xtacacs - Specify that the server host’s authentication protocol will be XTACACS.
protocol tacacs+ - Specify that the server host’s authentication protocol will be TACACS+.
protocol radius - Specify that the server host’s authentication protocol will be RADIUS.
port - The port number of the authentication protocol for the server host. Default value for
58
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create authen server_host
Restrictions
TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+ is 49. Default value for RADIUS is 1812.
key - The key for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. If the value is null, no encryption will apply. This value is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS.
encryption_key – Specifies the encrypted form key string for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. This value is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS. The encryption algorithm is based on DES.
<key_string 344> - Enter the encryption key here. This must be up to 344 characters long.
none - No encryption for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. This value is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS.
timeout - The time in seconds to wait for the server reply. Default value is 5 seconds.
retransmit - The count for re-transmissions. This value is meaningless for TACACS+. Default value is 2.
Only Administrator level can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a TACACS+ authentication server host, specifying a listening port number of 15555 and a timeout value of 10 seconds:
DGS-3450:admin# reate authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+ port 15555 timeout
10
Command: create authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+ port 15555 timeout 10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config authen server_host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure an authentication server host.
config authen server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius] {port
<int 1-65535> | [key [<key_string 254> | none] | encryption_key <key_string 344>] | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-20>}
Configures an authentication server host.
server_host - Specify the server host’s IP address.
protocol tacacs - Specify that the server host’s authentication protocol will be TACACS.
protocol xtacacs - Specify that the server host’s authentication protocol will be XTACACS.
protocol tacacs+ - Specify that the server host’s authentication protocol will be TACACS+.
protocol radius - Specify that the server host’s authentication protocol will be RADIUS.
port - The port number of the authentication protocol for the server host. Default value for
TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+ is 49. Default value for RADIUS is 1812.
key - The key for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. If the value is null, no encryption will apply. This value is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS.
none - No encryption for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. This value is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS.
encryption_key – Specifies the encrypted form key string for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. This value is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS. The encryption algorithm is based on DES.
timeout - The time in seconds for waiting for the server reply. Default value is 5 seconds.
retransmit - The count for re-transmissions. This value is meaningless for TACACS+. Default value is 2.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
59
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To configure the TACACS+ authentication server host with an IP address of 10.1.1.222 to have the key value “This is a secret”:
DGS-3450:admin# config authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+ key "This is a secret"
Command: config authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+ key "This is a se cret"
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete authen server_host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to delete an authentication server host.
delete authen server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius]
Deletes an authentication server host.
server_host - Specify the server host’s IP address.
protocol tacacs - Specify that the server host’s authentication protocol is TACACS.
protocol xtacacs - Specify that the server host’s authentication protocol is XTACACS.
protocol tacacs+ - Specify that the server host’s authentication protocol is TACACS+.
protocol radius - Specify that the server host’s authentication protocol is RADIUS.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete an authentication server host, with an IP address of 10.1.1.222, that is running the TACACS+ protocol:
DGS-3450:admin# delete authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Command: delete authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show authen server_host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to display the authentication server hosts.
show authen server_host
Displays the authentication server hosts.
None.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display all authentication server hosts:
60
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show authen server_host
Command: show authen server_host
SRV IP Address Protocol Port Timeout Retransmit Key
--------------- -------- ----- ------- ---------- -------------------------
10.1.1.222 TACACS+ 15555 10 No Use This is a secret
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
config authen parameter response_timeout
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the amount of time the Switch will wait for a user to authenticate through a console, Telnet, or SSH application.
config authen parameter response_timeout <int 0-255>
Configure the amount of time the Switch will wait for a user to authenticate through a console, Telnet, or SSH application.
<int 0-255> - The amount time the Switch will wait for a user to authenticate through a console, Telnet, or SSH application. 0 means there is no time out. Default value is 30 seconds.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the amount of time the Switch will wait for a user to authenticate through a console, Telnet, or SSH application to 60 seconds:
DGS-3450:admin# config authen parameter response_timeout 60
Command: config authen parameter response_timeout 60
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config authen parameter attempt
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the maximum number of attempts a user can try to login or promote the privilege on a console, Telnet, or SSH application.
config authen parameter attempt <int 1-255>
Used to configure the maximum number of attempts that a user can try to login or promote the privilege on a console, Telnet, or SSH application. If failed login attempts exceeds this number, the connection or access will be locked.
<int 1-255> - Specify the maximum number of attempts that a user can try to login or promote the privilege on a console or telnet or SSH application. Default value is 3.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the maximum attempts for user's trying to login or promote the privilege to be 9:
61
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config authen parameter attempt 9
Command: config authen parameter attempt 9
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show authen parameter
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to display the parameters of authentication.
show authen parameter
Displays the parameters of authentication.
None.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display the parameters of authentication:
DGS-3450:admin# show authen parameter
Command: show authen parameter
Response timeout : 60 seconds
User attempts : 9
DGS-3450:admin#
enable admin
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to enter the administrator level privilege
enable admin
Promote the "user" privilege level to "admin" level. When the user enters this command, the authentication method tacacs, xtacacs, tacacs+, user-defined server groups, local_enable or none will be used to authenticate the user. Since TACACS, XTACACS and RADIUS do not support the "enable" function by their selves,, if the user wants to use either one of these three protocols to enable authentication, the user must create a special account on the server host first, which has a username of "enable", and then configure its password as the enable password to support the "enable" function.
This command can not be used when the authentication policy is disabled.
For switches with 3-levels of privilege, this command can be used by users with user level and operator level privileges to access the administrator privilege level.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To enable administrator level privileges:
DGS-3450:admin# enable admin
Password:********
DGS-3450:admin#
62
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config admin local_enable
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the local enable password of the administrator level privilege.
config admin local_enable
Configure the local enable password for the enable command. When the user chooses the
“local_enable” method to promote the privilege level, the enable password of the local device is needed.
When the password information is not specified in the command, the system will prompt the user to input the password interactively. In this case, the user can only input a plain text password. If the password is present in the command, the user can select to input the password in plain text or encrypted form. The encryption algorithm is based on SHA-1.
None.
Only Administrator can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the administrator password:
DGS-3450:admin# config admin local_enable
Command: config admin local_enable
Enter the old password:
Enter the case-sensitive new password:******
Enter the new password again for confirmation:******
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable authen_policy_encryption
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the authentication policy encryption.
enable authen_policy_encryption
When enabled, TACACS+ and RADIUS key will be in the encrypted form.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the authentication policy encryption:
DGS-3450:admin#enable authen_policy_encryption
Command: enable authen_policy_encryption
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable authen_policy_encryption
Purpose
Syntax
Used to disable the authentication policy encryption.
disable authen_policy_encryption
63
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
disable authen_policy_encryption
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
When disabled, TACACS+ and RADIUS key will be in the plain text form.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the authentication policy encryption:
DGS-3450:admin#disable authen_policy_encryption
Command: disable authen_policy_encryption
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
64
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
7
A
CCESS
C
ONTROL
L
IST
(ACL) C
OMMANDS
The Access Control List (ACL) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create access_profile delete access_profile config access_profile
Parameters
[ethernet {vlan | source_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac
<macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | 802.1p | ethernet_type} | ip {vlan | source_ip_mask
<netmask> | destination_ip_mask <netmask> | dscp | [icmp {type | code} | igmp {type} | tcp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | flag_mask [ all |
{urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask <hex 0x0-0xff> {user_define_mask <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff>}]}| packet_content_mask { offset_chunk_1 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_2 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_3 <value 0-31> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_4 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}| ipv6 {class | flowlabel | source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | destination_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | [ tcp
{src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | udp {src_port_mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}]}] profile_id <value 1-6>
[profile_id <value 1-6> |all] profile_id <value 1-6>[add access_id [ auto_assign | <value 1-128>] [ethernet {[vlan
<vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_mac <macaddr 000000000000ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macaddr 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | 802.1p <value 0-7> | ethernet_type <hex 0x0-0xffff>} port [<portlist> | all] [permit { priority <value 0-7>
{replace_priority} | rx_rate [no_limit | <value 1-156249>] | replace_dscp <value 0-63> | counter [enable | disable]} | mirror {group_id <value 1-4>} | deny] | ip{[vlan <vlan_name
32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_ip <ipaddr> | destination_ip <ipaddr> | dscp
<value 0-63> | [icmp {type <value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-
255>} | tcp {src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535> urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin } | udp {src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535>} | protocol_id
<value 0 - 255> {user_define <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]} port [<portlist> | all] [permit { priority
<value 0-7> { replace_priority} | rx_rate [ no_limit | <value 1-156249>] | replace_dscp
<value 0-63> | counter [enable | disable]} | mirror {group_id <value 1-4>} | deny] | packet_content {offset_chunk_1 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_2 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_3 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_4 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} port [<portlist> | all] [permit { priority <value 0-7> {replace_priority} | rx_rate [no_limit | <value 1-156249>] | replace_dscp <value 0-63> | counter [enable | disable]} | mirror {group_id <value 1-4>} | deny] | ipv6 {class <value 0-255> | flowlabel <hex 0x0-0xfffff> | source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> | destination_ipv6 <ipv6addr> | [tcp { src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-
65535>} | udp {src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535>}]} port [<portlist> | all] [permit { priority <value 0-7> {replace_priority} | rx_rate [no_limit | <value 1-156249>] | counter [enable | disable]} | mirror {group_id <value 1-4>} | deny] ] {time_range
<range_name 32>} | delete access_id <value 1-128>]
65
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Command
create cpu access_profile profile_id config cpu access_profile profile_id delete cpu access_profile show cpu access_profile enable cpu_interface_filtering disable cpu_interface_filtering
Parameters
<value 1-5> [ethernet {vlan | source_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | ethernet_type} | ip {vlan | source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask <netmask> | dscp | [icmp {type | code}
| igmp {type} | tcp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | flag_mask [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask <hex 0x0-0xff> {user_define_mask
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]} | packet_content_mask {offset_0-15 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_16-31 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_32-47 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_48-63 <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_64-79 <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | ipv6 {[{class | flowlabel} | source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | destination_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask>]}]
<value 1-5> [ add access_id <value 1-100>[ ethernet { [vlan <vlan_name32> | vlan_id
<vlanid 1-4094>] | source_mac <macaddr 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac
<macaddr 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | ethernet_type <hex 0x0-0xffff> }| ip{ [vlan
<vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_ip <ipaddr> | destination_ip
<ipaddr> | dscp <value 0-63> |[ icmp {type <value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-255>} | tcp {src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535> | urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin } | udp {src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-
65535>} | protocol_id <value 0 - 255> {user_define <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]}| packet_content {offset_0-15 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_16-31 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_32-47 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_48-63 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_64-79 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> }| ipv6 {[ { class <value 0-255> | flowlabel <hex 0x0-0xfffff>} | source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> | destination_ipv6
<ipv6addr>]}]port [<portlist> | all ][ permit | deny] {time_range <range_name 32>}| delete access_id <value 1-100> ]
[profile_id <value 1-5> |all ]
{profile_id <value 1-5>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create access_profile
Purpose
Syntax
Used to create access list rules.
create access_profile [ethernet {vlan | source_mac <macmask 000000000000ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | 802.1p | ethernet_type} | ip {vlan | source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask
<netmask> | dscp | [icmp {type | code} | igmp {type} | tcp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-
0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | flag_mask [ all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask <hex 0x0-0xff> {user_define_mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]}| packet_content_mask { offset_chunk_1 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_2 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_3 <value 0-31> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_4 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}| ipv6 {class | flowlabel
| source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | destination_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | [ tcp
{src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | udp
{src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}]}] profile_id <value
1-6>
66
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create access_profile
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
The create access_profile command creates access list rules.
vlan - Specifies a vlan mask. Only the last 12 bits of the mask will be considered.
source_mac - Specifies the source mac mask.
destination_mac - Specifies the destination mac mask.
802.1p - Specifies 802.1p priority tag mask.
ethernet_type - Specifies the ethernet type mask.
vlan - Specifies a vlan mask. Only the last 12 bits of the mask will be considered.
source_ip_mask - Specifies an IP source submask.
destination_ip_mask - Specifies an IP destination submask.
dscp - Specifies the dscp mask.
icmp - Specifies that the rule applies to icmp traffic.
type - Specifies that the rule applies to icmp type traffic.
code - Specifies that the rule applies to icmp code traffic.
igmp - Specifies that the rule applies to igmp traffic.
type - Specifies that the rule applies to igmp type traffic.
tcp - Specifies that the rule applies to tcp traffic.
src_port_mask - Specifies the tcp source port mask.
dst_port_mask - Specifies the tcp destination port mask.
flag_mask - Specifies the TCP flag field mask.
udp - Specifies that the rule applies to udp traffic.
src_port_mask - Specifies theudp source port mask.
dst_port_mask - Specifies theudp destination port mask.
protocod_id_mask - Specifies that the rule applies to the ip protocol id traffic.
user_define_mask - Specifies that the rule applies to the ip protocol id and the mask options behind the IP header length is 20 bytes.
ipv6 - Specifies ipv6 filtering mask. The field is optional by project.
class - Specifies the ipv6 class.
flowlabel - Specifies the ipv6 flowlabel.
source_ipv6_mask - Specifies an IPv6 source submask.
destination_ipv6_mask - Specifies an IPv6 destination submask.
src_port_mask - Specifies an IPv6 L4(TCP/UDP) source port submask
des_port_mask - Specifies an IPv6 L4(TCP/UDP) destination port submask
profile_id - Specifies the index of access list profile. The range is depend on project..
offset_chunk_1, offset_chunk_2, offset_chunk_3, offset_chunk_4 - Specifies the frame content offset and mask. Up to 4 trunk offset and masks in maximum could be configured. A trunk mask presents 4 bytes.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create an Ethernet access profile:
67
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# create access_profile ethernet vlan source_mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 destination_mac 00-00-00-00-00-02 802.1p ethernet_type profile_id 1
Command: create access_profile ethernet vlan source_mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 destination_mac
00-00-00-00-00-02 802.1p ethernet_type profile_id 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin# create access_profile ip source_ip_mask 20.0.0.0 destination_ip_mask
10.0.0.0 dscp icmp type code profile_id 2
Command: create access_profile ip source_ip_mask 20.0.0.0 destination_ip_mask 10.0.0.0 dscp icmp type code profile_id 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To create an option 2 packet content mask access profile:
DGS-3450:admin# create access_profile packet_content_mask offset_chunk_1 0 0xFFFFFFFF offset_chunk_2 1 0xFFFFFFFF offset_chunk_3 2 0xFFFFFFFF offset_chunk_4 3 0xFFFFFFFF profile_id 3
Command: create access_profile packet_content_mask offset_chunk_1 0 0xFFFFFFFF offset_chunk_2 1 0xFFFFFFFF offset_chunk_3 2 0xFFFFFFFF offset_chunk_4 3 0xFFFFFFFF profile_id 3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete access_profile
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete access list rules.
delete access_profile [profile_id <value 1-6> |all]
The delete access_profile command deletes access list rules.
Delete access_profile command can only delete the profile which is created by ACL module.
profile_id - Specifies the index of access list profile. The range is depend on project..
all - Specifies the whole access list profile to delete.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete access list rules:
DGS-3450:admin#delete access_profile profile_id 6
Command: delete access_profile profile_id 6
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config access_profile
Purpose
Syntax
Used to configure access list entry.
config access_profile profile_id profile_id <value 1-6>[add access_id [ auto_assign |
<value 1-128>] [ethernet {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] |
68
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config access_profile
Description
Parameters
source_mac <macaddr 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macaddr
000000000000-ffffffffffff> | 802.1p <value 0-7> | ethernet_type <hex 0x0-0xffff>} port
[<portlist> | all] [permit { priority <value 0-7> {replace_priority} | rx_rate [no_limit |
<value 1-156249>] | replace_dscp <value 0-63> | counter [enable | disable]} | mirror
{group_id <value 1-4>} | deny] | ip{[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_ip <ipaddr> | destination_ip <ipaddr> | dscp <value 0-63> | [icmp {type <value
0-255> | code <value 0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-255>} | tcp {src_port <value 0-
65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535> urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin } | udp {src_port <value
0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535>} | protocol_id <value 0 - 255> {user_define <hex
0x0-0xffffffff>}]} port [<portlist> | all] [permit { priority <value 0-7> { replace_priority} | rx_rate [ no_limit | <value 1-156249>] | replace_dscp <value 0-63> | counter [enable | disable]} | mirror {group_id <value 1-4>} | deny] | packet_content {offset_chunk_1 <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_2 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_3 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>
| offset_chunk_4 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} port [<portlist> | all] [permit { priority <value 0-7>
{replace_priority} | rx_rate [no_limit | <value 1-156249>] | replace_dscp <value 0-63> | counter [enable | disable]} | mirror {group_id <value 1-4>} | deny] | ipv6 {class <value
0-255> | flowlabel <hex 0x0-0xfffff> | source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> | destination_ipv6
<ipv6addr> | [tcp { src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535>} | udp
{src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535>}]} port [<portlist> | all] [permit { priority <value 0-7> {replace_priority} | rx_rate [no_limit | <value 1-156249>] | counter
[enable | disable]} | mirror {group_id <value 1-4>} | deny] ] {time_range <range_name
32>} | delete access_id <value 1-128>]
The config access_profile command configures access list entry.
ACL mirror function will be worked after mirror enabled and mirror port has been configured by mirror command.
When apply a access rule to a target, if the target is VLAN, then the setting for value the
VLAN field will not take effect.
profile_id - Specifies the index of access list profile. The range is depend on project.
access_id - Specifies the index of access list entry. The range of this value is 1-65535, but the supported max entry number is depend on project.
auto_assign - while add to multiple ports , the access id will be auto assigned.
vlan - Specifies a vlan name.
vlan_id – Specifies the ID of VLAN.
source_mac - Specifies the source mac.
destination_mac - Specifies the destination mac.
802.1p - Specifies the value of 802.1p priority tag, the vaule can be configured between 1 to 7.
ethernet_type - Specifies the Ethernet type.
vlan - Specifies a vlan name.
vlan_id – Specifies the ID of VLAN.
source_ip - Specifies an IP source address.
destination_ip - Specifies an IP destination address.
dscp - Specifies the value of dscp, the value can be configured 0 to 63.
icmp – See below:
type - Specifies that the rule applies to the value of icmp type traffic.
code - Specifies that the rule applies to the value of icmp code traffic.
igmp – See below:
type - Specifies that the rule applies to the value of igmp type traffic.
tcp – See below:
src_port - Specifies that the rule applies the range of tcp source port.
dst_port - Specifies the range of tcp destination port range.
flag - Specifies the TCP flag fields.
udp – See below:
69
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config access_profile
Restrictions
src_port - Specifies the range of tcp source port range.
dst_port - Specifies the range of tcp destination port mask.
protocod_id - Specifies that the rule applies to the value of ip protocol id traffic.
user_define - Specifies that the rule applies to the ip protocol id and the mask options behind the IP header length is 20 bytes.
packet_content - Specifies the packet content for the user defined mask.
ipv6 - Specifies the rule applies to ipv6 fields . The field is optional by project.
class - Specifies the value of ipv6 class.
flowlabel - Specifies the value of ipv6 flowlabel.
source_ipv6 - Specifies the value of ipv6 source address.
destination_ipv6 - Specifies the value of ipv6 destination address.
src_port - Specifies the value of ipv6 L4(TCP/UDP) source port.
dst_port - Specifies the value of ipv6 L4(TCP/UDP) destination port.
port - Specifies a list of port to apply the rule.
permit - Specifies the packets that match the access profile are permit by the switch.
priority - Specifies that priority of the packet will be changed if the packet match the access rule.
replace_priority - Specifies 802.1p priority of the outgoing packet will be marked too.
replace_dscp - Specifies that DSCP of the outgoing packet will be marked by the new value.
counter - Specifies whether counter feature will be enabled / disabled. If the rule is binded with flow_meter, then “counter” here will be overrided.
deny - Specifies the packets that match the access profile are filtered by the switch.
mirror - Specifies the packets that match the access profile are sent the copied one to the mirror port.
time_range - Specifies name of this time range entry.
offset_chunk_1, offset_chunk_2, offset_chunk_3, offset_chunk_4 - Specifies the content of the trunk to be monitored.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure an access list rule entry:
DGS-3450:admin# config access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ip vlan default source_ip 20.2.2.3 destination_ip 10.1.1.252 dscp 3 icmp type 11 code 32 port 1 mirror group_id 1 time_range testdaily
Command: config access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ip vlan default source_ip
20.2.2.3 destination_ip 10.1.1.252 dscp 3 icmp type 11 code 32 port 1 mirror group_id 1 time_range testdaily
Mirror function must be enabled and mirror port must be configured.
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure an rule entry for packet content mask profile:
70
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config access_profile profile_id 5 add access_id auto_assign packet_content offset_chunk_1 0xAAAAAAAA offset_chunk_2 0xBBBBBBBB offset_chunk_3
0xFFFFFFFF offset_chunk_4 0xEEEEEEEE port all permit
Command: config access_profile profile_id 5 add access_id auto_assign packet_content offset_chunk_1 0xAAAAAAAA offset_chunk_2 0xBBBBBBBB offset_chunk_3 0xFFFFFFFF offset_chunk_4 0xEEEEEEEE port all permit
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show access_profile
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display current access list table.
show access_profile {profile_id <value 1-6>}
The show access_profile command displays current access list table.
profile_id - Specifies the index of access list profile. The range is depend on project.
None.
Example usage:
To display current access list table:
DGS-3450:admin# show access_profile
Command: show access_profile
Access Profile Table
Total Unused Rule Entries: 765
Total Used Rule Entries : 3
Access Profile ID: 1 TYPE : Packet Content
================================================================================
Owner : ACL
MASK Option :
-------------------------------------
Offset_chunk_1: 1 value:FFFFFFFF
Offset_chunk_2: 2 value:EEEEEEEE
Offset_chunk_3: 3 value:DDDDDDDD
Offset_chunk_4: 4 value:CCCCCCCC
Access ID : 1 Mode: Permit priority: 3
Port: 1:1
-------------------------------------
Offset_chunk_1: 1 value:11111111
Offset_chunk_2: 2 value:22222222
Offset_chunk_3: 3 value:11111111
Offset_chunk_4: 4 value:44444444
================================================================================
Unused rule entries: 127
DGS-3450:admin#
71
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create cpu access_profile profile_id
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to create CPU access list profiles.
create cpu access_profile profile_id <value 1-5> [ethernet {vlan | source_mac
<macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macmask 000000000000ffffffffffff> | ethernet_type} | ip {vlan | source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask <netmask> | dscp | [icmp {type | code} | igmp {type} | tcp
{src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | flag_mask [all |
{urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask <hex 0x0-0xff> {user_define_mask <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff>}]} | packet_content_mask {offset_0-15 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_16-31 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_32-47 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_48-63 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_64-79 <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | ipv6 {[{class | flowlabel} | source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | destination_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask>]}]
This command is used to create CPU access list profiles.
<value 1-5> - Specify a value between 1 and 5.
ethernet - Specify an Ethernet CPU access control list rule.
vlan - Specify a VLAN mask.
source_mac - Specify the source MAC mask.
<macmask000000000000-ffffffffffff> - Specify the source MAC mask.
destination_mac - Specify the destination MAC mask.
<macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> - Specify the destination MAC mask.
ethernet_type - Specify the Ethernet type mask.
ip - Specify an IP CPU access control list rule.
vlan - Specify a VLAN mask.
source_ip_mask - Specify an IP source submask.
<netmask> - Specify an IP source submask.
destination_ip_mask - Specify an IP destination submask.
<netmask> - Specify an IP destination submask.
dscp - Specify the DSCP mask.
icmp - Specify that the rule applies to ICMP traffic.
type - (Optional) Specify the ICMP packet type.
code - (Optional) Specify the ICMP code.
igmp - Specify that the rule applies to IGMP traffic.
type - (Optional) Specify the IGMP packet type.
tcp - Specify that the rule applies to TCP traffic.
src_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Specify the TCP source port mask.
dst_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Specify the TCP destination port mask.
flag_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP flag field mask.
all – Specify to check all paramenters below.
urg - (Optional) Specify Urgent Pointer field significant.
ack - (Optional) Specify Acknowledgment field significant.
psh - (Optional) Specify Push Function.
rst - (Optional) Specify to reset the connection.
syn - (Optional) Specify to synchronize sequence numbers.
fin - (Optional) No more data from sender.
udp - Specify that the rule applies to UDP traffic.
src_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the UDP source port mask.
72
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create cpu access_profile profile_id
Restrictions
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Specify the UDP source port mask.
dst_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the UDP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Specify the UDP destination port mask.
protocol_id_mask - Specify that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID traffic.
<hex 0x0-0xff> - Specify that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID traffic.
user_define_mask - (Optional) Specify the L4 part mask
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the L4 part mask
packet_content_mask - Specify the packet content mask.
offset_0-15 - Specify the mask for packet bytes 0-15.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 0-3.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 4-7.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 8-11.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 12-15.
offset_16-31 - Specify the mask for packet bytes 16-31.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 16-19.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 20-23.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 24-27.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 28-31.
offset_32-47 - Specify the mask for packet bytes 32-47
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 32-35.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 36-39.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 40-43.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 44-47.
offset_48-63 - Specify the mask for packet bytes 48-63.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 48-51.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 52-55.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 56-59.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 60-63.
offset_64-79 - Specify the mask for packet bytes 64-79.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 64-67.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 68-71.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 72-75.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 76-79.
ipv6 - Specify the IPv6 mask.
class - Specify the IPv6 class mask.
flowlabel - Specify the IPv6 flow label mask.
source_ipv6_mask - Specify the IPv6 source IP mask.
<ipv6mask> - Specify the IPv6 source IP mask.
destination_ipv6_mask - Specify the IPv6 destination IP mask.
<ipv6mask> - Specify the IPv6 destination IP mask.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create CPU access list profiles:
73
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#create cpu access_profile profile_id 1 ethernet vlan
Command: create cpu access_profile profile_id 1 ethernet vlan
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#create cpu access_profile profile_id 2 ip source_ip_mask 255.255.255.255
Command: create cpu access_profile profile_id 2 ip source_ip_mask 255.255.255.255
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config cpu access_profile profile_id
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to configure CPU access list entries.
config cpu access_profile profile_id <value 1-5> [ add access_id <value 1-100>[ ethernet { [vlan <vlan_name32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_mac <macaddr
000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macaddr 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | ethernet_type <hex 0x0-0xffff> }| ip{ [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_ip <ipaddr> | destination_ip <ipaddr> | dscp <value 0-63> |[ icmp {type
<value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-255>} | tcp {src_port
<value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535> | urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin } | udp
{src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535>} | protocol_id <value 0 - 255>
{user_define <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]}| packet_content {offset_0-15 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_16-31 <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_32-47 <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_48-63
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_64-79 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> }| ipv6 {[ { class <value 0-255> | flowlabel <hex 0x0-0xfffff>} | source_ipv6
<ipv6addr> | destination_ipv6 <ipv6addr>]}]port [<portlist> | all ][ permit | deny]
{time_range <range_name 32>}| delete access_id <value 1-100> ]
This command is used to configure CPU access list entries.
<value 1-5> - Specify the index of the CPU access list profile.
add access_id - Specify the index of an access list entry to add. The range of this value is 1 to 100.
auto_assign - Specify to automatically assign the access ID.
<value 1-100> - Specify an access ID between 1 and 100.
ethernet - Specify an Ethernet CPU access control list rule.
vlan - Specify the VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> -Specify the VLAN name. The maximum length is 32 characters.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Specify the VLAN ID between 1 and 4094.
source_mac - Specify the source MAC address.
<macaddr> - Specify the source MAC address.
destination_mac - Specify the destination MAC address.
<macaddr> - Specify the destination MAC address.
802.1p - Specify the value of the 802.1p priority tag.
<value 0-7> - Specify the value of the 802.1p priority tag. The priority tag ranges from 1 to 7.
ethernet_type - Specify the Ethernet type.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Specify the Ethernet type.
ip - Specify an IP access control list rule.
vlan - Specify the VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> -Specify the VLAN name. The maximum length is 32 characters.
74
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config cpu access_profile profile_id
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Specify the VLAN ID between 1 and 4094.
source_ip - Specify an IP source address.
<ipaddr> - Specify an IP source address.
destination_ip - Specify an IP destination address.
<ipaddr> - Specify an IP destination address.
dscp - Specify the value of DSCP.
<value 0-63> - Specify the value of DSCP. The DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63.
icmp - Specify the ICMP.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the ICMP Type traffic value.
<value 0-255> - Specify the value between 0 and 255.
code - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the ICMP Code traffic value.
<value 0-255> - Specify the value between 0 and 255.
igmp - Specify the IGMP.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the IGMP Type traffic value.
<value 0-255> - Specify the value between 0 and 255.
tcp - Specify TCP.
src_port - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to a range of TCP source ports.
<value 0-65535> - Specify the value between 0 and 65535.
dst_port - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to a range of TCP destination ports.
<value 0-65535> - Specify the value between 0 and 65535.
flag - Specify the TCP flag field value.
all – Specify to check all paramenters below.
urg - (Optional) Specify Urgent Pointer field significant.
ack - (Optional) Specify Acknowledgment field significant.
psh - (Optional) Specify Push Function.
rst - (Optional) Specify to reset the connection.
syn - (Optional) Specify to synchronize sequence numbers.
fin - (Optional) No more data from sender.
udp - Specify UDP.
src_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP source port range.
<value 0-65535> - Specify the value between 0 and 65535.
dst_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP destination port range.
<value 0-65535> - Specify the value between 0 and 65535.
protocol_id - Specify that the rule will apply to the value of IP protocol ID traffic.
<value 0-255> - Specify the value between 0 and 255.
user_define - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the IP protocol ID and that the mask options behind the IP header, which has a length of 4 bytes.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify that the rule will apply to the IP protocol ID and that the mask options behind the IP header , which has a length of 4 bytes.
packet_content - Specifies that the access control list rule will be set to packet content.
offset_0-15 - Specify the mask for packet bytes 0-15.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 0-3.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 4-7.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 8-11.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 12-15.
offset_16-31 - Specify the mask for packet bytes 16-31.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 16-19.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 20-23.
75
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config cpu access_profile profile_id
Restrictions
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 24-27.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 28-31.
offset_32-47 - Specify the mask for packet bytes 32-47
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 32-35.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 36-39.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 40-43.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 44-47.
offset_48-63 - Specify the mask for packet bytes 48-63.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 48-51.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 52-55.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 56-59.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 60-63.
offset_64-79 - Specify the mask for packet bytes 64-79.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 64-67.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 68-71.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 72-75.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask for packet bytes 76-79.
ipv6 - Specify that the rule applies to IPv6 fields.
class - Specify the value of the IPv6 class.
<value 0-255> - Specify the value between 0 and 255.
flowlabel - Specify the value of the IPv6 flow label.
<hex 0x0-0xfffff> - Specify the value of the IPv6 flow label.
source_ipv6 - Specify the value of the IPv6 source address.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the value of the IPv6 source address.
destination_ipv6 - Specify the value of the IPv6 destination address.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the value of the IPv6 destination address.
port - Specify the port number to configure.
<portlist> - Specify a list of ports.
all - Specify to configure all ports.
permit - Specify the packets that match the access profile are permitted by the switch.
deny - Specify the packets that match the access profile are filtered by the switch.
time_range - (Optional) Specify the name of this time range entry.
<range_name 32> - Specify the name of this time range entry. The maximum length is 32 characters.
delete access_id - Specify to delete the access ID.
<value 1-100> - Specify the value between 1 and 100.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure access list entry:
DGS-3450:admin#config cpu access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ethernet vlan default port 1:1-1:3 deny
Command: config cpu access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ethernet vlan default port 1:1-1:3 deny
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
76
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete cpu access_profile
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to delete CPU access list profiles.
delete cpu access_profile [profile_id <value 1-5> |all ]
This command is used to delete CPU access list profiles.
profile_id - Specify the index of the access list profile.
<value 1-5> - Specify the value between 1 and 5.
all - Specify to delete all the access list profiles.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete access list rules:
DGS-3450:admin#delete cpu access_profile profile_id 3
Command: delete cpu access_profile profile_id 3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show cpu access_profile
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to display the current CPU access list table.
show cpu access_profile {profile_id <value 1-5>}
This command is used to display the current CPU access list table.
profile_id - (Optional) Specify the index of an access list profile.
<value 1-5> - Specify value between 1 and 5.
None. Restrictions
Example usage:
To display the current CPU access list table:
77
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show cpu access_profile
Command: show cpu access_profile
CPU Interface Filtering State: Disabled
CPU Interface Access Profile Table
Access Profile ID: 1 Type : Ethernet
================================================================================
MASK Option :
VLAN Ethernet type
----------- -------------
Access ID : 1 Mode: Permit
Ports: 1:1
----------- ------------- default 0x0
================================================================================
Access Profile ID: 2 Type : IP
================================================================================
MASK Option :
VLAN Source IP MASK Dst. IP MASK DSCP ICMP TYPE CODE
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
----------- --------------- --------------- ---- -----------------
Access ID : 1 Mode: Permit
Ports: 1:1
----------- --------------- --------------- ---- ----------------- default 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 0
================================================================================
Access Profile ID: 3 Type : Packet Content
================================================================================
MASK Option :
Offset 0-15 : 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
Offset 16-31 : 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
Offset 32-47 : 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
Offset 48-63 : 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
Offset 64-79 : 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
Access ID : 1 Mode: Permit
Ports: 1:1
Offset 0-15 : 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
Offset 16-31 : 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
Offset 32-47 : 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
Offset 48-63 : 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
Offset 64-79 : 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
================================================================================
Access Profile ID: 4 Type : IPv6
78
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
================================================================================
MASK Option :
Class Flow Label
----- ----------
Access ID : 1 Mode: Permit
Ports: 1:1
----- ----------
10 FFFFF
================================================================================
Total Rule Entries: 4
DGS-3450:admin#
enable cpu_interface_filtering
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to enable CPU interface filtering.
enable cpu_interface_filtering
This command is used to enable CPU interface filtering.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable CPU interface filtering:
DGS-3450:admin#enable cpu_interface_filtering
Command: enable cpu_interface_filtering
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable cpu_interface_filtering
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to disable CPU interface filtering.
disable cpu_interface_filtering
This command is used to disable CPU interface filtering.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable CPU interface filtering:
79
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#disable cpu_interface_filtering
Command: disable cpu_interface_filtering
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
80
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
8
ACL
FLOW
M
ETERING
C
OMMANDS
Before configuring the ACL Flow Meter, here is a list of acronyms and terms users will need to know.
trTCM – Two Rate Three Color Marker. This, along with the srTCM, are two methods available on the switch for metering and marking packet flow. The trTCM meters and IP flow and marks it as a color based on the flow’s surpassing of two rates, the CIR and the PIR.
• CIR – Committed Information Rate. Common to both the trTCM and the srTCM, the CIR is measured in bytes of
IP packets. IP packet bytes are measured by taking the size of the IP header but not the link specific headers.
For the trTCM, the packet flow is marked green if it doesn’t exceed the CIR and yellow if it does. The configured rate of the CIR must not exceed that of the PIR. The CIR can also be configured for unexpected packet bursts using the CBS and PBS fields.
• CBS – Committed Burst Size. Measured in bytes, the CBS is associated with the CIR and is used to identify packets that exceed the normal boundaries of packet size. The CBS should be configured to accept the biggest
IP packet that is expected in the IP flow.
• PIR – Peak Information Rate. This rate is measured in bytes of IP packets. IP packet bytes are measured by taking the size of the IP header but not the link specific headers. If the packet flow exceeds the PIR, that packet flow is marked red. The PIR must be configured to be equal or more than that of the CIR.
• PBS – Peak Burst Size. Measured in bytes, the PBS is associated with the PIR and is used to identify packets that exceed the normal boundaries of packet size. The PBS should be configured to accept the biggest IP packet that is expected in the IP flow.
srTCM – Single Rate Three Color Marker. This, along with the trTCM, are two methods available on the switch for metering and marking packet flow. The srTCM marks its IP packet flow based on the configured CBS and EBS. A packet flow that does not reach the CBS is marked green, if it exceeds the CBS but not the EBS its marked yellow, and if it exceeds the EBS its marked red.
• CBS – Committed Burst Size. Measured in bytes, the CBS is associated with the CIR and is used to identify packets that exceed the normal boundaries of packet size. The CBS should be configured to accept the biggest
IP packet that is expected in the IP flow.
• EBS – Excess Burst Size. Measured in bytes, the EBS is associated with the CIR and is used to identify packets that exceed the boundaries of the CBS packet size. The EBS is to be configured for an equal or larger rate than the CBS.
DSCP – Differentiated Services Code Point. The part of the packet header where the color will be added. Users may change the DSCP field of incoming packets.
The ACL Flow Meter function will allow users to color code IP packet flows based on the rate of incoming packets. Users have two types of Flow metering to choose from, trTCM and srTCM, as explained previously. When a packet flow is placed in a color code, the user can choose what to do with packets that have exceeded that color-coded rate.
Green – When an IP flow is in the green mode, its configurable parameters can be set in the Conform field, where the packets can have their DSCP field changed. This is an acceptable flow rate for the ACL Flow Meter function.
Yellow – When an IP flow is in the yellow mode, its configurable parameters can be set in the Exceed field. Users may choose to either Permit or Drop exceeded packets. Users may also choose to change the DSCP field of the packets.
Red – When an IP flow is in the red mode, its configurable parameters can be set in the Exceed field. Users may choose to either Permit or Drop exceeded packets. Users may also choose to change the DSCP field of the packets.
Users may also choose to count exceeded packets by clicking the Counter check box. If the counter is enabled, the counter setting in the access profile will be disabled.
The ACL Flow Meter commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
81
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Command
config flow_meter profile_id
Parameters
<value 1-6> access_id <value 1-128>[ [ tr_tcm cir <value 0-156249> {cbs
<value 0-16384>} pir <value 0-156249> {pbs <value 0-16384>} | sr_tcm cir
<value 0-156249> cbs <value 0-16384> ebs <value 0-16384> ] {conform [permit
|replace_dscp <value 0-63>] {counter [enable |disable]}} exceed [permit | replace_dscp <value 0-63> | drop] {counter [enable |disable]} violate [permit | replace_dscp <value 0-63> | drop] {counter [enable |disable]} | delete ]
{profile_id <value 1-6> {access_id <value 1-128>}} show flow_meter
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
82
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config flow_meter profile_id
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the flow metering function for ACL..
config flow_meter profile_id <value 1-6> access_id <value 1-128>[ [ tr_tcm cir <value 0-
156249> {cbs <value 0-16384>} pir <value 0-156249> {pbs <value 0-16384>} | sr_tcm cir
<value 0-156249> cbs <value 0-16384> ebs <value 0-16384> ] {conform [permit
|replace_dscp <value 0-63>] {counter [enable |disable]}} exceed [permit | replace_dscp
<value 0-63> | drop] {counter [enable |disable]} violate [permit | replace_dscp <value 0-63>
| drop] {counter [enable |disable]} | delete ]
This command is used to configure the parameters for the flow metering function for ACL entries created on the switch.
profile_id <value 1-6>
− Enter the pre-configured Profile ID for which to configure the ACL Flow
Metering parameters.
access_id <value 1-128>
− Enter the pre-configured Access ID for which to configure the ACL
Flow Metering parameters.
tr_tcm - Choosing this field will allow users to employ the Two Rate Three Color Mode and set the following parameters to determine the color rate of the IP packet flow.
•
cir <value 0-156249> – The Committed Information Rate can be set between 1 and
156249. IP flow rates at or below this level will be considered green. IP flow rates that exceed this rate but not the PIR rate are considered yellow.
•
cbs <value 0-16384>
− The Committed Burst Size. Used to gauge packets that are larger than the normal IP packets. This field does not have to be set for this feature to function properly but is to be used in conjunction with the CIR setting. The CBS should be configured to accept the biggest IP packet that is expected in the IP flow.
•
pir <value 0-16384>
− The Peak information Rate. IP flow rates that exceed this setting will be considered as red. This field must be set at an equal or higher value than the
CIR.
•
pbs <value 0-16384>
− The Peak Burst Size. This optional field is to be used in conjunction with the PIR. The PBS should be configured to accept the biggest IP packet that is expected in the IP flow.
sr_tcm
− Choosing this field will allow users to employ the Single Rate Three Color Mode and set the following parameters to determine the color rate of the IP packet flow.
•
cir <value 0-156249> – The Committed Information Rate can be set between 1-156249.
The color rates are based on the following two fields which are used in conjunction with the CIR.
•
cbs <value 0-16384>
− Committed Burst Size. Measured in bytes, the CBS is associated with the CIR and is used to identify packets that exceed the normal boundaries of packet size. The CBS should be configured to accept the biggest IP packet that is expected in the IP flow. Packet flows which are lower than this configured value are marked green. Packet flows which exceed this value but are less than the
EBS value are marked yellow.
ebs <value 0-16384>
− Excess Burst Size. Measured in bytes, the EBS is associated with the
CIR and is used to identify packets that exceed the boundaries of the CBS packet size. The EBS is to be configured for an equal or larger rate than the CBS. Packet flows that exceed this value are marked as red.
conform
− This field denotes the green packet flow. Green packet flows may have their DSCP field rewritten to a value stated in this field. Users may also choose to count green packets by checking the Counter check box.
•
permit – Enter this parameter to allow packet flows that are in the green flow.
•
replace_dscp <value 0-63>
− Packets that are in the green flow may have their DSCP field rewritten using this parameter and entering the DSCP value to replace.
•
counter [enable | disable] – Use this parameter to enable or disable the packet counter for the specified ACL entry in the green flow.
exceed
− This field denotes the yellow packet flow. Yellow packet flows may have excess packets permitted through or dropped. Users may replace the DSCP field of these packets by checking its radio button and entering a new DSCP value in the allotted field.
•
permit – Enter this parameter to allow packet flows that are in the yellow flow.
83
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config flow_meter profile_id
•
replace_dscp <value 0-63>
− Packets that are in the yellow flow may have their DSCP field rewritten using this parameter and entering the DSCP value to replace.
•
drop – Enter this parameter to drop packets that are in the yellow flow.
•
counter [enable | disable] – Use this parameter to enable or disable the packet counter for the specified ACL entry in the yellow flow.
violate
− This field denotes the red packet flow. Red packet flows may have excess packets permitted through or dropped. Users may replace the DSCP field of these packets by checking its radio button and entering a new DSCP value in the allotted field.
•
permit – Enter this parameter to allow packet flows that are in the red flow.
•
replace_dscp <value 0-63>
− Packets that are in the red flow may have their DSCP field rewritten using this parameter and entering the DSCP value to replace.
•
drop – Enter this parameter to drop packets that are in the red flow.
•
counter [enable | disable] – Use this parameter to enable or disable the packet counter for the specified ACL entry in the red flow.
delete – Use this parameter to delete the specified flow meter.
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Only two counters may be enabled at any given time.
Example usage:
To configure a two rates three color flow meter:
DGS-3450:admin# config flow_meter profile_id 1 access_id 1 tr_tcm cir 1000 cbs 200 pir
2000 pbs 200 exceed replace_dscp 21 violate drop
Command: config flow_meter profile_id 1 access_id 1 tr_tcm cir 1000 cbs 200 pir 2000 pbs
200 exceed replace_dscp 21 violate drop
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show flow_meter
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Example usage:
To display the flow meter configuration:
Used to display the ACL flow meter parameters set on the switch.
show flow_meter {profile_id <value 1-6> {access_id <value 1-128>}}
This command will display the flow meter parameters set on the switch.
profile_id <value 1-6>
− Enter the profile ID of the ACL entry to be viewed for flow metering.
access_id <value 1-128>
− Enter the access ID corresponding to the ACL entry to be viewed.
None.
84
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show flow_meter profile_id 1 access_id 1
Command: show flow_meter profile_id 1 access_id 1
Profile ID : 1 Access ID : 1 Mode: trTCM
CIR: 1000(64kbps) CBS: 200(Kbyte) PIR: 2000(64kbps) PBS : 200(Kbyte)
Action:
Conform : Permit Counter : Disabled
Exceed : Permit Replace DSCP: 21 Counter : Disabled
Violate : Drop Counter : Disabled
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
85
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
9
A
DDRESS
R
ESOLUTION
P
ROTOCOL
(ARP) C
OMMANDS
The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create arpentry delete arpentry config arpentry config arp_aging time config arp_retry times clear arptable show arpentry
Parameters
<ipaddr> <macaddr>
[<ipaddr> | all]
<ipaddr> <macaddr>
<min 0-65535>
<value 0-4>
{ipif <ipif_name 12> | ipaddress <ipaddr> | static | mac_address <macaddr>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create arpentry
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create a static entry in the ARP table.
create arpentry <ipaddr> <macaddr>
This command is used to enter a static ARP entry into the switch’s ARP table.
ipaddr - The IP address of the end node or station.
macaddr - The MAC address corresponding to the IP address above.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a static ARP entry for the IP address 10.48.74.121 and MAC address 00-50-BA-00-07-36:
DGS-3450:admin# create arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-36
Command: create arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-36
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete arpentry
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to delete a static entry from the ARP table.
delete arpentry [<ipaddr> | all]
This command is used to delete an ARP entry, by specifying either the IP address of the entry or all. Specifying ‘all’ clears the switch’s ARP table.
ipaddr - The IP address of the end node or station.
all - Delete all ARP entries.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
86
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To delete an entry of IP address 10.48.74.121 from the ARP table:
DGS-3450:admin# delete arpentry 10.48.74.121
Command: delete arpentry 10.48.74.121
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config arpentry
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure a static entry’s MAC address in the ARP table.
config arpentry <ipaddr> <macaddr>
This command configures a static entry’s MAC address in the ARP table. Specify the IP address and MAC address of the entry.
ipaddr - The IP address of the end node or station.
macaddr - The MAC address corresponding to the IP address above.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure a static ARP entry with IP address 10.48.74.121 to have a MAC address of 00-50-BA-00-07-37:
DGS-3450:admin# config arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-37
Command: config arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-37
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config arp_aging time
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the aging out time for an ARP entry.
config arp_aging time <min 0-65535>
This command sets the maximum amount of time, in minutes, that a dynamic ARP entry can remain in the switch’s ARP table, without being accessed, before it is dropped from the table.
min - The ARP age-out time, in minutes. The default is 20. The range is 0 to 65535.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure an ARP aging time of 30 minutes:
DGS-3450:admin# config arp_aging time 30
Command: config arp_aging time 30
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
87
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config arp_retry times
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to set the ARP retry times.
config arp_retry times <value 0-4>
You can set the value for ARP retry,If the values is setting to 0 means there will only send one ARP request for one data, without retry.
<value 0-4> - Enter the ARP retry times value. The default value is 4. The range is 0 to 4.
Only Administrator, Operator, and User level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set the ARP retry times:
DGS-3450:admin#config arp_retry times 2
Command: config arp_retry times 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
clear arptable
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to clear all the dynamic ARP entries from the ARP table.
clear arptable
This command is used to clear all the dynamic entries from ARP table.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear the ARP table:
DGS-3450:admin# clear arptable
Command: clear arptable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show arpentry
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to display the ARP table.
show arpentry {ipif <ipif_name 12> | ipaddress <ipaddr> | static | mac_address
<macaddr> }
This command is used to displays the ARP table. You can filter the display by IP address, interface name, static entries or MAC address.
ipif_name - The name of the IP interface the end node or station for which the ARP table entry was made, resides on.
ipaddr - The IP address of the end node or station.
static - Display the static entries in the ARP table.
macaddr - Displays the ARP entry by MAC address.
88
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show arpentry
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display the ARP table:
DGS-3450:admin#show arpentry
Command: show arpentry
ARP Aging Time : 30
ARP Retry Times : 2
Interface IP Address MAC Address Type
------------- --------------- ----------------- ---------------
System 10.0.0.0 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Local/Broadcast
System 10.1.1.1 00-02-03-04-05-06 Static
System 10.1.1.2 00-02-03-04-05-06 Dynamic
System 10.1.1.3 00-02-03-04-05-06 Static
System 10.90.90.90 00-01-02-03-04-00 Local
System 10.255.255.255 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Local/Broadcast
Total Entries: 6
DGS-3450:admin#
89
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
10
ARP S
POOFING
P
REVENTION
C
OMMANDS
The ARP Spoofing Prevention commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config arp_spoofing_prevention show arp_spoofing_prevention
Parameters
[add gateway_ip <ipaddr> gateway_mac <macaddr> ports [<portlist> | all] | delete gateway_ip <ipaddr>]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config arp_spoofing_prevention
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
The user can configure the spoofing prevention entry to prevent spoofing of MAC for the protected gateway.
config arp_spoofing_prevention [add gateway_ip <ipaddr> gateway_mac <macaddr> ports [<portlist> | all] | delete gateway_ip <ipaddr>]
The user can configure the spoofing prevention entry to prevent spoofing of MAC for the protected gateway. When an entry is created, those ARP packets whose sender IP matches the gateway IP of an entry, but either its sender MAC field or source MAC field doesnot match the gateway MAC of the entry will be dropped by the system.
add - Specifies to add an ARP spoofing prevention entry.
gateway_ip - Specifies a gateway IP address to be configured.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
gateway_mac - Specifies a gateway MAC address to be configured.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used for this configuration here. ports - Specifies a range of ports to be configured.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specifies all of ports to be configured.
delete - Specifies to delete an ARP spoofing prevention entry.
gateway_ip - Specifies a gateway ip to be configured.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the ARP spoofing prevention entry:
DGS-3450:admin#config arp_spoofing_prevention add gateway_ip 10.254.254.251 gate way_mac 00-00-00-11-11-11 ports 1:1-1:2
Command: config arp_spoofing_prevention add gateway_ip 10.254.254.251 gateway_ma c 00-00-00-11-11-11 ports 1:1-1:2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
90
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show arp_spoofing_prevention
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the ARP spoofing prevention entry.
show arp_spoofing_prevention
This command is used to show the ARP spoofing prevention entry.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the ARP spoofing prevention entries:
DGS-3450:admin#show arp_spoofing_prevention
Command: show arp_spoofing_prevention
ARP Spoofing Prevention Table
Gateway IP Address Gateway MAC Address Port
------------------ ------------------- --------------------
10.254.254.251 00-00-00-11-11-11 1:1-1:2
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
91
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
11
BPDU A
TTACK
P
ROTECTION
C
OMMANDS
Users at different sites connected across a service-provider network need to use various Layer 2 protocols to scale their topologies to include all remote sites, as well as the local sites. STP must run properly, and every VLAN should build a proper spanning tree that includes the local site and all remote sites across the service-provider network.
Layer 2 protocol tunneling is a feature designed for service providers who carry traffic of multiple customers across their networks and are required to maintain the Layer 2 protocol configurations of each customer without impacting the traffic of other customers.
The BPDU Attack Protection commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config bpdu_protection ports
Parameters
[<portlist> | all ] {state [enable | disable] | mode [ drop | block | shutdown} (1) config bpdu_protection recovery_timer [<sec 60-1000000> | infinite] config bpdu_protection [trap | log ] [ none | attack_detected | attack_cleared | both ] enable bpdu_protection disable bpdu_protection show bpdu_protection {ports {<portlist>}}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config bpdu_protection ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure bpdu_protection state and mode.
config bpdu_protection ports [<portlist> | all ] {state [enable | disable] | mode [ drop | block | shutdown} (1)
The config bpdu_protection ports command is used to configure the BPDP protection function for the ports on the switch. In generally, there are two states in BPDU protection function. One is normal state, and another is under attack state. The under attack state have three modes: drop, block, and shutdown. A BPDU protection enabled port will enter under attack state when it receives one STP BPDU packet. And it will take action based on the configuration. Thus, BPDU protection can only be enabled on STP disabled port.
BPDU protection has high priority than fbpdu setting configured by configure STP command in determination of BPDU handling. That is, when fbpbu is configured to forward STP BPDU but BPDU protection is enabled, then the port will not forward STP BPDU.
BPDU protection also has high priority than BPDU tunnel port setting in determination of
BPDU handling.
That is, when a port is configured as BPDU tunnel port for STP, it will forward STP BPDU.
But if the port is BPDU protection enabled. Then the port will not forward STP BPDU
portlist - Specified a range of ports to be configured (port number).
all - For set all ports in the system, you may use “all” parameter.
state - Specified the bpdu_protection state. The default state is disable
enable - Enable bpdu_protection
disable - Disable bpdu_protection
mode - Specified the bpdu_protection mode. The default mode is shutdown
drop - Drop all received BPDU packets when the port enters under_attack state.
block - Drop all packets (include BPDU and normal packets) when the port enters
under_attack state.
shutdown - Shut down the port when the port enters under_attack state.
92
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config bpdu_protection ports
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
93
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To set the port state enable and drop mode:
DGS-3450:admin# config bpdu_protection ports 1 state enable mode drop
Commands: config bpdu_protection ports 1 state enable mode drop
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config bpdu_protection recovery_interval
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure bpdu_protection recovery timer.
config bpdu_protection recovery_timer [<sec 60-1000000> | infinite]
When a port enters under attack state, it can be disabled or blocked based on the configuration. The state can be recovered manually or by the auto recovery mechanism. This command is used to configure the auto-recovery timer. To manually recover the port, the user needs to disable and re-enable the port.
recovery_timer - Specified the bpdu_protection Auto-Recovery recovery_timer. The default value of recovery_timer is 60.
infinite - The port will not be auto recovered.
<sec 60 –1000000> - The timer (in seconds) used by the Auto-Recovery mechanism to recover the port. The valid range is 60 to 1000000.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the bpdu_protection recovery_timer to 120 seconds for the entire switch:
DGS-3450:admin# config bpdu_protection recovery_timer 120
Commands: config bpdu_protection recovery_timer 120
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config bpdu_protection
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure bpdu_protection trap state or log state.
config bpdu_protection [trap | log ] [ none | attack_detected | attack_cleared | both ]
The config bpdu_protection trap command is used to configure the bpdu_protection trap state or state for the entire switch.
trap - To specify the trap state.
log - To specify the log state.
none - Neither attack_detected nor attack_cleared is trapped or logged.
attack_detected - Events will be logged or trapped when the BPDU attacks is detected.
attack_cleared - Events will be logged or trapped when the BPDU attacks is cleared.
both - The events of attack_detected and attack_cleared shall be trapped or logged.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
94
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To config the bpdu_protection trap state as both for the entire switch:
DGS-3450:admin# config bpdu_protection trap both
Commands: config bpdu_protection trap both
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable bpdu_protection
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable bpdu_protection globally.
enable bpdu_protection
The enable bpdu_protection command is used to enable bpdu_protection function globally for the entire switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable bpdu_protection function globally for the entire switch:
DGS-3450:admin# enable bpdu_protection
Commands: enable bpdu_protection
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable bpdu_protection
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disalbe bpdu_protection globally.
disable bpdu_protection
The disable bpdu_protection command is used to disable bpdu_protection function globally for the entire switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable bpdu_protection function globally for the entire switch:
DGS-3450:admin# disable bpdu_protection
Commands: disable bpdu_protection
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
95
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show bpdu_protection
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show bpdu_protection status.
show bpdu_protection {ports {<portlist> }}
The show bpdu_protection command is used to display bpdu_protection global configuration or per port configuration and current status.
portlist - Specified a range of ports to be configured.
None.
Example usage:
To show the bpdu_protection for the entire switch:
DGS-3450:admin# show bpdu_protection
Commands: show bpdu_protection
BPDU Protection Global Settings
---------------------------------------
BPDU Protection status : Enabled
BPDU Protection Recovery Time : 60 seconds
BPDU Protection Trap State : None
BPDU Protection Log State : None
DGS-3450:admin#
To show the bpdu_protection status ports 1-12:
DGS-3450:admin# show bpdu_protection ports 1-12
Commands: show bpdu_protection ports 1-12
Port State Mode Status
------ ------------ ----------- ----------
1 Enabled shutdown Normal
2 Enabled shutdown Normal
3 Enabled shutdown Normal
4 Enabled shutdown Normal
5 Enabled shutdown Under Attack
6 Enabled shutdown Normal
7 Enabled shutdown Normal
8 Enabled shutdown Normal
9 Enabled shutdown Normal
10 Enabled Block Normal
11 Disabled shutdown Normal
12 Disabled shutdown Normal
DGS-3450:admin#
96
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
12
C
OMMAND
H
ISTORY
L
IST
The switch history commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
? config command_history show command_history
Parameters
{<command>}
<value 1-40>
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
?
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display all commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI).
? {<command>}
This command will display all of the commands available through the Command Line Interface
(CLI).
{<command>} – Entering the question mark with an appropriate command will list all the corresponding parameters for the specified command, along with a brief description of the commands function and similar commands having the same words in the command.
None.
Example usage:
To display all of the commands in the CLI:
97
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# ?
..
? cd clear clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports clear arptable clear attack_log clear counters clear dhcp_binding clear fdb clear log clear mac_based_access_control auth_mac clear port_security_entry port config 802.1p default_priority config 802.1p user_priority config 802.1x auth_mode config 802.1x auth_parameter ports config 802.1x auth_protocol config 802.1x capability ports config 802.1x guest_vlan ports config 802.1x init
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page Enter Next Entry a All
To display the parameters for a specific command:
DGS-3450:admin# ? config stp
Command:? config stp
Command: config stp
Usage: {maxage <value 6-40>|maxhops <value 1-20> |hellotime <value 1-10>| forwa rddelay <value 4-30>|txholdcount <value 1-10>|fbpdu [enable|disable]|lbd [enable
|disable] |lbd_recover_timer [<value 0> | <value 60-1000000>]}
Description: Used to update the STP Global Configuration. config stp instance_id config stp mst_config_id config stp mst_ports config stp ports config stp priority config stp version
DGS-3450:admin#
config command_history
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the command history.
config command_history <value 1-40>
This command is used to configure the command history.
<value 1-40>
− The number of previously executed commands maintained in the buffer. Up to 40 of the latest executed commands may be viewed.
None.
Example usage
To configure the command history:
98
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config command_history 20
Command: config command_history 20
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show command_history
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the command history.
show command_history
This command will display the command history.
None.
None.
Example usage
To display the command history:
DGS-3450:admin# show command_history
Command: show command_history
?
? show show vlan show command history
DGS-3450:admin#
99
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
13
C
OMMAND
L
OGGING
C
OMMANDS
The command logging function is used to log the commands that have successfully been configured to the switch via the command line interface. The requirement is to log the command itself, along with information about the user account that entered the command into the system log and the informational severity level. Commands that do not cause a change in the switch configuration or operation (such as show) will not be logged. A save command will change the configuration file hence it will be logged. Information about saving or viewing the system log is described in the syslog functional specification and is out of the scope of this UIS.
The Command Logging commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
enable command logging disable command logging show command logging
Parameters
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable command logging
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable command logging.
enable command logging
The enable command logging command is used to enable the command logging function.
NOTE: When the switch is under the booting procedure, all configuration commands will not be logged. When the user has logged in using AAA authentication, the user name should not changed if the user has used the “enable admin” command to replace its privilege.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the command logging function:
DGS-3450:admin# enable command logging
Command: enable command logging
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable command logging
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to disable the command logging function.
disable command logging
The disable command logging command is used to disable the command logging function.
None.
100
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
disable command logging
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the command logging function:
DGS-3450:admin# disable command logging
Command: disable command logging
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show command logging
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command displays the switch’s general command logging configuration status
show command logging
Use this command to show the command logging configuration status.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show the command logging configuration status:
DGS-3450:admin# show command logging
Command: show command logging
Command Logging State : Disabled
DGS-3450:admin#
101
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
14
C
OMPOUND
A
UTHENTICATION
C
OMMANDS
The Compound Authentication chapter describes the Common feature for access control functionalities and specifications.
The Compound Authentication commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create authentication guest_vlan delete authentication guest_vlan config authentication guest_vlan config authentication ports show authentication guest_vlan show authentication ports enable authorization attributes disable authorization attributes show authorization config authentication server failover show authentication
Parameters
[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] [add | delete ] ports [ <portlist>
|all ]
[<portlist> | all] {auth_mode [port_based | host_based { vlanid <vidlist> state
[enable | disable] }]| multi_authen_methods[none | any | dot1x_impb | impb_jwac]} (1)
{<portlist>}
[local | permit | block]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create authentication guest_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to assign a static VLAN to be guest VLAN.
create authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
The create guest_vlan command will assign a static VLAN to be guest VLAN.
The specific VLAN which assigned to guest VLAN must be existed.
The specific VLAN which assigned to guest VLAN can’t be deleted.
For further description of this command please see description for config authentication guest_vlan ports.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the guest VLAN by VLAN name.
vlanid - Specify the guest VLAN by VLAN ID.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
102
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To create an authentication guest VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# create authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN
Command: create authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete authentication guest_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete guest VLAN configuration.
delete authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
The delete guest_vlan command will delete guest VLAN setting, but won’t delete the static
VLAN.
All ports which enable guest VLAN will move to original VLAN after deleting guest VLAN.
For further description of this command please see description for config authentication guest_vlan ports.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the guest VLAN by VLAN name.
vlanid - Specify the guest VLAN by VLAN ID.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete an authentication guest VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# delete authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN
Command: delete authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config authentication guest_vlan ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure security port(s) as specified guest VLAN member.
config authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] [add | delete ] ports [ <portlist> |all ]
Used to configure security port(s) as specified guest VLAN member.
vlan_name - Assigned a VLAN as guest VLAN. The VLAN must be an existed static VLAN.
vlanid - Assigned a VLAN as guest VLAN. The VLAN must be an existed static VLAN.
add - Specifies to add port list to the guest VLAN.
delete - Specifies to delete port list from the guest VLAN.
portlist - Specify the configured port(s).
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure an authentication guest VLAN:
103
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config authentication guest_vlan vlan gv add ports all
Command: config authentication guest_vlan vlan gv add ports all
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config authentication ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure security port(s).
config authentication ports [<portlist> | all] {auth_mode [port_based | host_based { vlanid <vidlist> state [enable | disable] }]| multi_authen_methods[none | any | dot1x_impb | impb_jwac]} (1)
The user can use this command to configure authorization mode and authentication method on ports.
portlist - Specify port(s) to configure.
auth_mode - port_based - If one of the attached hosts passes the authentication, all hosts on the same port will be granted to access network. If the user fails to authorize, this port will keep trying the next authentication
host_based - Every user can be authenticated individually. V2.01 and later, can authenticate client on specific authentication VLAN(s).
vlanid - Specific authentication VLAN(s).
enable - Assign the specified VID list as authentication VLAN(s).
disable - Remove the specified VID list from authentication VLAN(s).
If "vlanid" is not specified, or all VLANs is disabled,means do not care whitch VLAN the client comes from,the client will be authenticated if the client's MAC(not care the VLAN) is not authenticated. After the client is authenticated,the client will not be re-authenticated when received from other VLANs.
All VLANs are disabled by default.
NOTE: When port’s authorization mode is changed to port based, previously authentication
VLAN(s) on this port will be clear.
multi_authen_methods - Specifies the method for compound authentication.
none - Compound authentication is not enabled,
For project that support single authentication mode, the authentication method is defined by individual authentication module.
For project that does not support single authentication mode, access authentication is disabled on the port.
any - If any one of the authentication method (802.1X, MAC-AC, WAC and JWAC) passes, then pass.
dot1x_impb - Dot1x will be verified first, and then IMPB will be verified. Both authentication need to be passed.
impb_jwac - JWAC will be verified first, and then IMPB will be verified. Both authentication need to be passed.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
The following example sets authorization mode and authentication VLAN for all port:
104
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config authentication ports all auth_mode host_based vlanid 1-3 state enable
Command: config authentication ports all auth_mode host_based vlanid 1-3 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show authentication guest_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show guest VLAN setting.
show authentication guest_vlan
The show guest VLAN command allows you to show the information of guest VLAN.
None.
None.
Example usage:
This example displays the guest VLAN setting:
DGS-3450:admin# show authentication guest_vlan
Command: show authentication guest_vlan
Guest VLAN VID : 1
Guest VLAN Member Ports : 4
Guest VLAN VID : 3
Guest VLAN Member Ports : 1,8
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3450:admin#
show authentication ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display authentication setting on port(s).
show authentication ports {<portlist>}
User can use this command to display authentication method and authorization mode on ports.
portlist - Display compound authentication on specify port(s).
If not specify the port, displays compound authentication setting of all ports.
None.
Example usage:
This example displays authentication setting for all ports:
105
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show authentication ports
Command: show authentication ports
Port Methods Auth Mode Authentication VLAN(s)
---- ------------
1 None
2 Any
----------- ---------------------
Host based 1,3,5,9,11,88,16
18,56
Port based
3 802.1X_IMPB
4 None
5 IMPB_JWAC
6 None
7 None
8 802.1X_IMPB
9 None
DGS-3450:admin#
Host based
Host based 2000,2005
Port based
Host based
Host based 1-20
Host based
Host based
enable authorization
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
The enable authorization command will enable authorization.
enable authorization attributes
Used to enable authorization attributes.
When the authorization for attributes is enabled, whether the authorized attributes (for example VLAN, 802.1p default priority, and ACL) assigned by the RADUIS server or local database will be accepted which depends on the individual module’s setting.
Authorization for attributes is enabled by default.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
This example sets authorization global state enabled:
DGS-3450:admin# enable authorization attributes
Command: enable authorization attributes
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable authorization
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
The disable authorization command will disable authorization.
disable authorization attributes
Used to disable authorization attributes.
When the authorization for attributes is disabled, the authorized attributes (for example
VLAN, 802.1p default priority, and ACL) assigned by the RADUIS server or local database will be ignored even if the individual module’s setting is enabled.
Authorization for attributes is enabled by default.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
106
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
This example sets authorization global state disabled:
DGS-3450:admin# disable authorization attributes
Command: disable authorization attributes
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show authorization
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show authorization status.
show authorization
Used to show authorization status.
None.
None.
Example usage:
This example displays authorization status:
DGS-3450:admin# show authorization
Command: show authorization
Authorization for Attributes: Enabled.
DGS-3450:admin#
config authentication server failover
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure authentication server failover function.
config authentication server failover [local | permit | block]
Description
When authentication server fails, administrator can configure to:
• Use local DB to authenticate the client o
The switch will resort to using local database to authenticate the client. If the client fails on local authentication, the client is regarded as un-authenticated, otherwise, it authenticated.
• Pass authentication o
The client is always regarded as authenticated. If guest VLAN enabled, client will stay at guest VLAN, otherwise, it will stay at original VLAN.
• Block the client (default setting) o
The client is always regarded as un-authenticated.
local - Use local DB to authenticate the client.
permit - The client is always regarded as authenticated.
block - Block the client (Default setting)
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
107
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Set authentication server auth fail over state:
DGS-3450:admin# config authentication server failover local
Command: config authentication server failover local
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show authentication
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show authentication global configuration.
show authentication
Used to show authentication global configuration.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show authentication:
DGS-3450:admin# show authentication
Command: show authentication
Authentication Server Failover: Block.
DGS-3450:admin# show authentication
Command: show authentication
Authentication Server Failover: Permit.
DGS-3450:admin# show authentication
Command: show authentication
Authentication Server Failover: Local.
DGS-3450:admin#
108
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
15
C
ONFIGURATION
C
OMMANDS
Configuration function is used to conserve several configuration files in switch. With configuration function, user could conserve several same configurations in switch, one for currently use, other for back up, and user could conserve several different configurations in switch for different condition use.
The Configuration commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
download cfg_fromTFTP upload cfg_toTFTP show config config configuration save config
Parameters
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] src_file <path_filename 64>
{[<config_id 1-2> | increment]}
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] dest_file <path_filename 64>
{<config_id 1-2>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin ] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string
80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin ] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}
[current_config { [include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string
80>{<filter_string 80>}}{ [include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}{ [include | exclude | begin] <filter_string
80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}|config_in_nvram <config_id 1-2> {
[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>{<filter_string
80>}}{ [include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80>}}{ [include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string
80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}| information] config_id <config_id 1-2> [delete | boot_up | active]
<config_id 1-2>
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
download cfg_fromTFTP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to down load a switch configuration file from TFTP server
download cfg_fromTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] src_file
<path_filename 64> {[<config_id 1-2> | increment]}
This command is used to download a config file from a TFTP server. For projects that support file system, the stored file name must be specified, for projects that support multiple configurations, the configuration ID can be specified. If the configuration ID is not specified, the boot up configuration is implied.
ipaddr - The IPv4 address of the TFTP server.
ipv6addr - The IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
domain_name - The domain name of the host.
src_file - The pathname specifies the DOS pathname on the TFTP server. It can be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname.
config_id - Specifies the configuration file ID. If config_id is not specified, it refers to the boot up configuration file.
increment - If increment is specified, then the existing configuration will not be cleared before applying of the new configuration. If it is not specified, then the existing configuration will be cleared before applying of the new configuration.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
109
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To download the configuration file “desxxxx.cfg” from TFTP server at IP address 10.54.71.1:
DGS-3450:admin# download cfg_fromTFTP 10.54.71.1 src_file desxxxx.cfg
Command: download cfg_fromTFTP 10.54.71.1 src_file desxxxx.cfg
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download configuration................. Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
To download configuration file from TFTP server tftp.cfgmgmt.com:
DGS-3450:admin# download cfg_fromTFTP tftp.cfgmgmt.com src_file desxxxx.cfg
Command: download cfg_fromTFTP tftp.cfgmgmt.com src_file desxxxx.cfg
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download configuration................. Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
upload cfg_toTFTP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to upload a configuration file from device to TFTP server.
upload cfg_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] dest_file
<path_filename 64> {<config_id 1-2>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin ] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin ] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}
Used to upload a configuration file from the device to the TFTP server. Note that, for stacking system, only the master’s configuration file is allowed to be uploaded.
The output stream of the configuration data can be filtered by the expression specified at the end of the command. The expression can contain up to three multiple filter evaluations. A filter evaluation begins with a filter type (include, exclude, and begin), followed by up to three filter strings (ex: “stp”). A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". The following describes the meaning of the each filter type.
include: includes lines that contain the specified filter string.
exclude: excludes lines that contain the specified filter string
begin: The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the output.
The relationship of multiple filter strings following the same filter type is OR. That is, one line is qualified if one of specified filter strings is matched.
If more than one filter evaluation is specified; the output of filtered by the former evaluation will be used as the input of the latter evaluation.
For example, if the following expression is specified include “stp” exclude “port”
The result of the above example is all lines that include the “stp” string but exclude the “port” string.
ipaddr - The IPv4 address of the TFTP server.
ipv6addr - The IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
domain_name - The domain name of the host.
110
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
upload cfg_toTFTP
Restrictions
dest_file - The pathname specifies the DOS pathname on the TFTP server. It can be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname.
config_id - Specifies the configuration file ID. If configuration ID is not specified, it refers to the boot up configuration file.
filter_string - A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the “character. The filter string is case sensitive.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To upload the boot up configuration file to TFTP server and save as “cfg”:
DGS-3450:admin# upload cfg_toTFTP 10.48.74.121 dest_file c:\cfg\DGS-XXXXS\cfg
Command: upload cfg_toTFTP 10.48.74.121 dest_file c:\cfg\DGS-XXXXS\cfg
Connecting to server... Done.
Upload Configuration... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
In case that the designated file does not exist:
DGS-3450:admin# upload cfg_toTFTP 10.48.74.121 dest_file c:\cfg\DGS-XXXXS\cfg
Command: upload cfg_toTFTP 10.48.74.121 dest_file c:\cfg\DGS-XXXXS\cfg
The designated file does not exist.
Abort.
DGS-3450:admin#
show config
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Display the content of the current configuration, the configuration to be used in next boot, or the configuration file specified by the command.
show config current_config [current_config {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string
80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}} | config_in_nvram <config_id 1-2> { [include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}| information]
Display the content of the current configuration, the configuration to be used in next boot, or the configuration file specified by the command.
The output stream of the configuration data can be filtered by the expression specified at the end of the command. The expression can contain up to three multiple filter evaluations. A filter evaluation begins with a filter type (include, exclude, and begin), followed by up to three filter strings (ex: “stp”). A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". The following describes the meaning of the each filter type.
include: includes lines that contain the specified filter string.
exclude: excludes lines that contain the specified filter string
begin: The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the output.
111
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show config
Parameters
Restrictions
The relationship of multiple filter strings following the same filter type is OR. That is, one line is qualified if one of specified filter strings is matched.
If more than one filter evaluation is specified; the output of filtered by the former evaluation will be used as the input of the latter evaluation.
For example, if the following expression is specified, Include “stp” exclude “port”
The result of the above example is all lines that include the “stp” string but exclude the “port” string.
current_config - Specifies the current configuration.
config_in_nvram - Specifies which configuration file. If the configuration ID is not specified, the boot up configuration is implied.
filter_string - A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the “character. The filter string is case sensitive.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
The following example illustrates how the special filters ‘account’affect the configuration display:
DGS-3450:admin# show config current_config include "account"
Command: show config current_config include "account" create account admin brent config accounting service network state disable config accounting service shell state disable config accounting service system state disable
DGS-3450:admin#
config configuration
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to select a configuration file as the next boot up configuration or to apply a specific configuration to the system. This command is required when multiple configuration files are supported.
config configuration config_id <config_id 1-2> [delete | boot_up | active]
Used to select a configuration file as the next boot up configuration or to apply a specific configuration to the system. This command is required when multiple configuration files are supported.
config_id - Specifies which configuration file.
delete - Specifies to delete the configuration.
boot_up - Specifies it as a boot up file.
active - Specifies to apply the configuration.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure configuration as boot-up 1:
112
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#config configuration 1 boot_up
Command: config configuration 1 boot_up
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
save config
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to save the current configuration to a file.
save {config <config_id 1-2>}
Used to save the current configuration to a file. This command is required to be supported regardless of whether file system is supported or whether multiple configuration files are supported. The configuration will only save to the master unit.
config_id - Specifies the configuration file ID. If configuration ID is not specified, it refers to the boot up configuration file.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To save the configuration:
DGS-3450:admin#save config 1
Command: save config
Saving configuration 1 to NV-RAM.......... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
113
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
16
C
ONNECTIVITY
F
AULT
M
ANAGEMENT
(CFM) C
OMMANDS
The Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create cfm md config cfm md create cfm ma config cfm ma create cfm mep config cfm mep delete cfm mep delete cfm ma delete cfm md enable cfm disable cfm config cfm ports show cfm ports show cfm show cfm fault show cfm port cfm lock md cfm loopback
Parameters
<string 22> {md_index <uint 1-4294967295>} level <int 0-7>
[<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {mip [none | auto | explicit] | sender_id [none | chassis | manage | chassis_manage]}
<string 22> {ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>} md [<string 22> | md_index <uint
1-4294967295>]
[<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] md [<string 22> | md_index <uint
1-4294967295>] {vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | mip [none | auto | explicit | defer] | sender_id [none | chassis | manage | chassis_manage | defer] | ccm_interval
[10ms | 100ms | 1sec | 10sec | 1min | 10min] | mepid_list [add | delete]
<mepid_list>}
<string 32> mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] direction
[inward | outward] port <port>
[mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {state [enable
| disable] | ccm [enable | disable] | pdu_priority <int 0-7> | fault_alarm [all | mac_status | remote_ccm | error_ccm | xcon_ccm | none] | alarm_time
<centisecond 250 -1000> | alarm_reset_time <centisecond 250-1000>}
[mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]]
[<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] md [<string 22> | md_index <uint
1-4294967295>]
[<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>]
<portlist> state [enable | disable]
<portlist>
{[md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index
<uint 1-4294967295>] {mepid <int 1-8191>}} | mepname <string 32>]}
{md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index
<uint 1-4294967295>]}}
<port> {level <int 0-7> | direction [inward | outward] | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>}
[<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint
1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> remote_mepid <int 1-8191> action [start | stop]
<macaddr> [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-
4294967295>]] {num <int 1-65535> | [length <int 0-1500> | pattern <string
1500>] | pdu_priority <int 0-7>}
114
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Command
cfm linktrace show cfm linktrace delete cfm linktrace show cfm mipccm config cfm mp_ltr_all show cfm mp_ltr_all show cfm remote_mep show cfm pkt_cnt clear cfm pkt_cnt config cfm ais md config cfm lock md
Parameters
<macaddr> [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-
4294967295>]] {ttl <int 2-255> | pdu_priority <int 0-7>}
[mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {trans_id
<uint>}
{[md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index
<uint 1-4294967295>] {mepid <int 1-8191>}} | mepname <string 32>]}
[enable | disable]
[mepname <string 32> | md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma
[<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191>] remote_mepid <int 1-8191>
{[ports <portlist> {[rx | tx]} | [rx | tx] | ccm]}
{[ports <portlist> {[rx | tx]} | [rx | tx] | ccm]}
[<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint
1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> {period [1sec | 1min] | level <int 0-7> | state
[enable | disable]}
[<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint
1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> {period [1sec | 1min] | level <int 0-7> | state
[enable | disable]}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create cfm md
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create a maintenance domain.
create cfm md <string 22> {md_index <uint 1-4294967295>} level <int 0-7>
When creating CFM maintenance domains, the name of each domain created should be unique within the network.
If there is no input for the MD index, the system will automatically assign a valid index for the created maintenance domain.
md <string 22> - Specify the maintenance domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance domain index.
level <int 0-7> - Specify the maintenance domain level.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a maintenance domain called “op_domain”, and assign its index as “1” and its level as “2”:
DGS-3450:admin#create cfm md op_domain md_index 1 level 2
Command: create cfm md op_domain md_index 1 level 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
115
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config cfm md
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to config cfm md configure the parameters of a maintenance domain.
config cfm md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {mip [none | auto | explicit] | sender_id [none | chassis | manage | chassis_manage]}
The creation of MIPs on an MA is useful for tracing the link, MIP by MIP. It also allows the user to perform a loopback from an MEP to an MIP.
md <string 22> - Specify the maintenance domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance domain index.
mip - Controls the creation of MIPs.
• none – Do not create MIPs. This is the default value.
• auto – MIPs can always be created on any port in this MD, if that port is not configured with an MEP of this MD. For an intermediate switch in an MA, the setting must be automatic in order for the MIPs to be created on this device.
• explicit – MIPs can be created on ports which has an existing lower level MEP configured on it, and that port is not configured with an MEP of this MD.
sender_id - Controls the transmission of the sender ID TLV.
• none – Do not transmit the sender ID TLV. This is the default value.
• chassis – Transmit the sender ID TLV with the chassis ID information.
• manage – Transmit the sender ID TLV with the managed address information.
• chassis_manage - Transmit the sender ID TLV with the chassis ID information and the managed address information.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure a maintenance domain called “op_domain” and specify the explicit option for creating MIPs:
DGS-3450:admin#config cfm md op_domain mip explicit
Command: config cfm md op_domain mip explicit
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create cfm ma
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to create a maintenance association.
create cfm ma <string 22> {ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>} md [<string 22> | md_index
<uint 1-4294967295>]
Different MAs in an MD must have different MA Names. Different MAs in different MDs may have the same MA Name.
ma <string 22> - Specify the maintenance association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance association index.
md <string 22> - Specify the maintenance domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance domain index.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
Example usage:
To create a maintenance association called “op1” which is assigned an MA index value of “1” and assigns it to the maintenance domain “op_domain”:
116
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#create cfm ma op1 ma_index 1 md op_domain
Command: create cfm ma op1 ma_index 1 md op_domain
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config cfm ma
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the parameters of a maintenance association.
config cfm ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] md [<string 22> | md_index<uint 1-4294967295>] {vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | mip [none | auto | explicit | defer] | sender_id [none | chassis | manage | chassis_manage | defer] | ccm_interval
[10ms | 100ms | 1sec | 10sec | 1min | 10min] | mepid_list [add | delete] <mepid_list>}
The MEP list specified for an MA can be located in different devices. MEPs must be created on the ports of these devices explicitly. An MEP will transmit a CCM packet periodically across the MA. The receiving MEP will verify these received CCM packets from the other
MEPs against this MEP list for the configuration integrity check.
ma <string 22> - Specify the maintenance association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance association index.
md <string 22> - Specify the maintenance domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance domain index. vlanid – Specify the VLAN Identifier. Different MAs must be associated with different VLANs. mip – This is the control creation of MIPs.
• none – Specify not to create MIPs.
• auto – MIPs can always be created on any ports in this MA, if that port is not configured with an MEP of that MA.
• explicit – MIP can be created on any ports in this MA, only if the next existing lower level has an MEP configured on that port, and that port is not configured with an
MEP of this MA.
• defer – Inherit the setting configured for the maintenance domain that this MA is associated with. This is the default value. sender_id – This is the control transmission of the sender ID TLV.
• none – Do not transmit the sender ID TLV. This is the default value.
• chassis – Transmit the sender ID TLV with the chassis ID information.
• manage – Transmit the sender ID TLV with the manage address information.
• chassis_manage – Transmit the sender ID TLV with the chassis ID information and the manage address information.
• defer - Inherit the setting configured for the maintenance domain that this MA is associated with. This is the default value. ccm_interval – This is the CCM interval.
• 10ms – Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 10 milliseconds.
• 100ms – Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 100 milliseconds. Not recommended.
• 1sec – Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 1 second.
• 10sec – Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 10 seconds. This is the default value.
• 1min – Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 1 minute.
• 10 min – Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 10 minutes. mepid <mepid_list> - Specify the MEPIDs contained in the maintenance association. The range of the MEPID is 1-8191.
• add – Specify to add MEPID(s).
• delete – Specify to delete MEPID(s). By default, there is no MEPID in a newly
117
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config cfm ma
Restrictions created maintenance association.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure a CFM MA:
DGS-3450:admin#config cfm ma op1 md op_domain vlanid 1 ccm_interval 1sec mepid_list add 1
Command: config cfm ma op1 md op_domain vlanid 1 ccm_interval 1sec mepid_list add 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create cfm mep
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create an MEP.
create cfm mep <string 32> mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] direction [inward | outward] port <port>
Different MEPs in the same MA must have a different MEPID. MD name, MA name, and
MEPID that together identify a MEP.
Different MEPs on the same device must have a different MEP name. Before creating an
MEP, its MEPID should be configured in the MA’s MEPID list.
mep <string 32> - Enter the MEP name. It is unique among all MEPs configured on the device.This name can be up to 32 characters long.
mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the MEP MEPID. It should be configured in the MA’s MEPID list first.
md <string 22> - Specify the maintenance domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance domain index.
ma <string 22> - Specify the maintenance association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance association index.
direction - Specify the MEP direction.
• inward – Specify the inward facing (up) MEP.
• outward – Specify the outward facing (down) MEP.
port <port> - Specify the port number. This port should be a member of the MA’s associated
VLAN.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a CFM MEP:
DGS-3450:admin#create cfm mep mep1 mepid 1 md op_domain ma op1 direction inward port 1:2
Command: create cfm mep mep1 mepid 1 md op_domain ma op1 direction inward port 1:2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
118
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config cfm mep
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the parameters of an MEP.
config cfm mep [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]]
{state [enable | disable] | ccm [enable | disable] | pdu_priority <int 0-7> | fault_alarm [all
| mac_status | remote_ccm | error_ccm | xcon_ccm | none] | alarm_time <centisecond
250 -1000> | alarm_reset_time <centisecond 250-1000>}
An MEP may generate 5 types of Fault Alarms, as shown below by their priorities from high to low:
• Cross-connect CCM Received: priority 5.
• Error CCM Received: priority 4.
• Some Remote MEPs Down: priority 3.
• Some Remote MEP MAC Status Errors: priority 2.
• Some Remote MEP Defect Indications: priority 1.
If multiple types of the fault occur on an MEP, only the fault with the highest priority will be alarmed.
mepname <string 32> - Specify the MEP name.
mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the MEP MEPID. It should be configured in the MA’s MEPID list first.
md <string 22> - Specify the maintenance domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance domain index.
ma <string 22> - Specify the maintenance association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance association index.
state - Specify the MEP administrative state.
• enable – Enable the MEP.
• disable – Disable the MEP. This is the default value.
ccm – Specify the CCM transmission state.
• enable – Enable the CCM transmission.
• disable – Disable the CCM transmission. This is the default value.
pdu_priority – The 802.1p priority is set in the CCM and the LTM messages transmitted by the MEP. The default value is 7.
fault_alarm – This controls the types of fault alarms sent by the MEP.
• all – All types of fault alarms will be sent.
• mac_status – Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than “Some
Remote MEP MAC Status Errors” will be sent.
• remot_ccm – Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than “Some
Remote MEPs Down” will be sent.
• error_ccm – Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than “Error
CCM Received” will be sent.
• xcon_ccm – Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than “Crossconnect CCM Received” will be sent.
• non – No fault alarm will be sent. This is the default value.
alarm_time – The time period to control when a fault alarm will be sent if a defect is reported continuously.The unit is in centiseconds, the range is 250-1000.The default value is 250.
alarm_reset_time – This is the dormant duration time before a defect is triggered before the fault can be re-alarmed. The unit is centisecond, the range is 250-1000. The default value is
1000.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
Example usage:
119
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To configure a CFM MEP:
DGS-3450:admin#config cfm mep mepname mep1 state enable ccm enable
Command: config cfm mep mepname mep1 state enable ccm enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete cfm mep
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete a previously created MEP.
delete cfm mep [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index
<uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]]
This command is used to delete a previously created MEP.
mepname <string 32> - Specify the MEP name.
mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the MEP MEPID. It should be configured in the MA’s MEPID list first.
md <string 22> - Specify the maintenance domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance domain index.
ma <string 22> - Specify the maintenance association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance association index.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a CFM MEP:
DGS-3450:admin#delete cfm mep mepname mep1
Command: delete cfm mep mepname mep1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete cfm ma
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to delete a created maintenance association.
delete cfm ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>]
All MEPs created in the maintenance association will be deleted automatically.
ma <string 22> - Specify the maintenance association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance association
md <string 22> - Specify the maintenance domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance domain index. index.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
Example usage:
To delete a CFM MA:
120
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#delete cfm ma op1 md op_domain
Command: delete cfm ma op1 md op_domain
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete cfm md
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete a maintenance domain.
delete cfm md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>]
All the MEPs and maintenance associations created in the maintenance domain will be deleted automatically.
md <string 22> - Specify the maintenance domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance domain index. index.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a CFM MD:
DGS-3450:admin#delete cfm md op_domain
Command: delete cfm md op_domain
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable cfm
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the CFM globally.
enable cfm
This command is used to enable the CFM globally.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the CFM globally:
DGS-3450:admin#enable cfm
Command: enable cfm
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
121
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
disable cfm
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the CFM globally.
disable cfm
This command is used to disable the CFM globally.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the CFM globally:
DGS-3450:admin#disable cfm
Command: disable cfm
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config cfm ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable or disable the CFM function on a per-port basis.
config cfm ports <portlist> state [enable | disable]
By default, the CFM function is disabled on all ports.
If CFM is disabled on a port:
• MIPs can never be created on the port.
• MEPs can still be created on the port, and the configuration can be saved.
• MEPs created on that port can not generate or process CFM PDUs. If the user issues a
Loopback or Link trace test on those MEPs, it will prompt a message that the CFM function is disabled on that port to user.
ports <portlist> - Specify the logical port list.
state [enable | disable] - Enable or disable the CFM function.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the CFM ports:
DGS-3450:admin#config cfm ports 1:2-1:5 state enable
Command: config cfm ports 1:2-1:5 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show cfm ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to show the CFM state of specified ports.
show cfm ports <portlist>
This command is used to show the CFM state of specified ports.
ports <portlist> - Specify the logical port list.
122
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show cfm ports
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To show the CFM ports:
DGS-3450:admin#show cfm ports 1:3-1:6
Command: show cfm ports 1:3-1:6
Port State
----- --------
1:3 Enabled
1:4 Enabled
1:5 Enabled
1:6 Disabled
DGS-3450:admin#
show cfm
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the CFM configuration.
show cfm {[md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {mepid <int 1-8191>}} | mepname <string 32>]}
This command is used to show the CFM configuration.
md <string 22> - Specify the maintenance domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance domain index.
ma <string 22> - Specify the maintenance association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance association index.
mep <string 32> - Enter the MEP name. It is unique among all MEPs configured on the device.This name can be up to 32 characters long.
mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the MEP MEPID. It should be configured in the MA’s MEPID list first.
None.
Example usage:
To show the CFM configuration:
DGS-3450:admin#show cfm
Command: show cfm
CFM State: Disabled
MD Index MD Name Level
---------- ---------------------- -----
1 op_domain 2
DGS-3450:admin#show cfm md op_domain
Command: show cfm md op_domain
MD Index : 1
MD Name : op_domain
MD Level : 2
123
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
MIP Creation: Explicit
SenderID TLV: None
MA Index MA Name VID
---------- ---------------------- ----
1 op1 1
DGS-3450:admin#show cfm md op_domain ma op1
Command: show cfm md op_domain ma op1
MA Index : 1
MA Name : op1
MA VID : 1
MIP Creation: Defer
CCM Interval: 1 second
SenderID TLV: Defer
MEPID List : 1
MEPID Direction Port Name MAC Address
----- --------- ----- ----------- -----------------
1 Inward 1:2 mep1 00-22-B0-DE-F0-46
DGS-3450:admin#show cfm mepname mep1
Command: show cfm mepname mep1
Name : mep1
MEPID : 1
Port : 1:2
Direction : Inward
CFM Port Status : Enabled
MAC Address : 00-22-B0-DE-F0-46
MEP State : Enabled
CCM State : Enabled
PDU Priority : 7
Fault Alarm : Disabled
Alarm Time : 250 centisecond((1/100)s)
Alarm Reset Time : 1000 centisecond((1/100)s)
Highest Fault : None
AIS State : Disabled
AIS Period : 1 Second
AIS Client Level : Invalid
AIS Status : Not Detected
LCK State : Disabled
LCK Period : 1 Second
LCK Client Level : Invalid
LCK Status : Not Detected
Out-of-Sequence CCMs: 0 received
Cross-connect CCMs : 0 received
Error CCMs : 0 received
Normal CCMs : 0 received
Port Status CCMs : 0 received
If Status CCMs : 0 received
CCMs transmitted : 0
In-order LBRs : 0 received
Out-of-order LBRs : 0 received
Next LTM Trans ID : 0
Unexpected LTRs : 0 received
LBMs Transmitted : 0
AIS PDUs : 0 received
124
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
AIS PDUs Transmitted: 0
LCK PDUs : 0 received
LCK PDUs Transmitted: 0
DGS-3450:admin#
show cfm fault
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the MEPs that have faults.
show cfm fault {md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]}}
This command is used to display all the fault conditions detected by the MEPs contained in a specified MA or MD.
The displayed output provides the overview of the fault status by MEPs.
md <string 22> - Specify the maintenance domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance domain index.
ma <string 22> - Specify the maintenance association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance association index.
None.
Example usage:
To show the CFM faults:
DGS-3450:admin#show cfm fault
Command: show cfm fault
MD Name MA Name MEPID Status AIS Status LCK Status
----------- ----------- ----- ---------------------- ------------ ------------ op_domain op1 1 Cross-connect CCM Received
DGS-3450:admin#
show cfm port
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the MEPs and MIPs created on a port.
show cfm port <port> {level <int 0-7> | direction [inward | outward] | vlanid <vlanid1-
4094>}
This command is used to show the MEPs and MIPs created on a port.
port <port> - Specify the port number.
level <int 0-7> - Specify the maintenance domain level.
direction - Specify the MEP direction.
• inward – Specify the inward facing (up) MEP.
• outward – Specify the outward facing (down) MEP.
Vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> - Specify the VLAN identifier. If not specified, all VLANs are shown.
None.
Example usage:
To show the MEPs and MIPs created on a port:
125
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show cfm port 1:2
Command: show cfm port 1:2
MAC Address: 00-22-B0-DE-F0-46
MD Name MA Name MEPID Level Direction VID
----------- ----------- ----- ----- --------- ---- op_domain op1 1 2 Inward 1
DGS-3450:admin#
cfm lock md
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to start/stop cfm management lock.
cfm lock md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index<uint 1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> remote_mepid <int 1-8191> action
[start | stop]
This command will result in the MEP sends a LCK PDU to client level MEP.
md <string 22> - Specify the maintenance domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance domain index.
ma <string 22> - Specify the maintenance association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance association index.
mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the MEP ID in the MD that sends the LCK frame.
remote_mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the peer MEP as the target of management action.
action [start | stop] – Specify the management lock action. This action can be set to start or stop.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To start management lock:
DGS-3450:admin#cfm lock md op_domain ma op1 mepid 1 remote_mepid 2 action start
Command: cfm lock md op_domain ma op1 mepid 1 remote_mepid 2 action start
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
cfm loopback
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to start a CFM loopback test.
cfm loopback <macaddr> [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]]
{num <int 1-65535> | [length <int 0-1500> | pattern <string 1500>] | pdu_priority<int 0-
7>}
Press Ctrl+C to exit the loopback test. The MAC address represents the destination MEP or
MIP that can be reached by this MAC address. The MEP represents the source MEP to initiate the loopback message.
<macaddr> - Specify the destination MAC address
mepname <string 32> - Enter the MEP name.
mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the MEP MEPID.
md <string 22> - Specify the maintenance domain name.
126
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
cfm loopback
Restrictions
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance domain index.
ma <string 22> - Specify the maintenance association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the maintenance association index.
num <int 1-65535> - Number of LBMs to be sent. The default value is 4.
length <int 0-1500> - The payload length of the LBM to be sent. The default is 0.
pattern <string 1500> - An arbitrary amount of data to be included in a Data TLV, along with an indication whether the Data TLV is to be included.
pdu_priority<int 0-7> - The 802.1p priority to be set in the transmitted LBMs. If not specified, it uses the same priority as CCMs and LTMs sent by the MA.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To transmit a LBM:
DGS-3450:admin#cfm loopback 00-01-02-03-04-05 mepname mep1
Command: cfm loopback 00-01-02-03-04-05 mepname mep1
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Reply from MPID 52: bytes=xxx time=xxxms
Request timed out.
CFM loopback statistics for 00-01-02-03-04-05:
Packets: Sent=4, Received=1, Lost=3(75% loss).
DGS-3450:admin#
cfm linktrace
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to issue a CFM link track message.
cfm linktrace <macaddr> [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {ttl
<int 2-255> | pdu_priority <int 0-7>}
This command is used to issue a CFM link track message.
<macaddr> - Specify the destination MAC address.
mepname <string 32> - Specify the MEP name.
mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the MEP ID.
md <string 22> - Specify the Maintenance Domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the Maintenance Domain index.
ma <string 22> - Specify the Maintenance Association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the Maintenance Association index.
ttl <int 2-255> - Specify the link trace message TTL value. The default value is 64.
pdu_priority <int 0-7> - Specify the 802.1p priority to be set in the transmitted LTM. If not specified, it uses the same priority as CCMs sent by the MA.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
Example usage:
To transmit an LTM:
127
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#cfm linktrace 00-01-02-03-04-05 mepname mep1
Command: cfm linktrace 00-01-02-03-04-05 mepname mep1
Transaction ID: 26
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show cfm linktrace
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the link trace responses.
show cfm linktrace [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]]
{trans_id <uint>}
The maximum link trace responses a device can hold is 128.
mepname <string 32> - Specify the MEP name.
mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the MEP ID.
md <string 22> - Specify the Maintenance Domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the Maintenance Domain index.
ma <string 22> - Specify the Maintenance Association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the Maintenance Association index.
trans_id <unit> - Specify the identifier of the transaction to be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To show the link trace reply when the "all MPs reply LTRs" function is enabled:
DGS-3450:admin#show cfm linktrace mepname mep1 trans_id 26
Command: show cfm linktrace mepname mep1 trans_id 26
Transaction ID: 26
From MEP mep1 to 00-11-22-33-44-55
Start Time 2008-01-01 12:00:00
Hop MEPID MAC Address Forwarded Relay Action
--- ----- ----------------- --------- ------------
1 00-22-33-44-55-66 Yes FDB
2 00-33-44-55-66-77 Yes MPDB
3 00-11-22-33-44-55 No Hit
DGS-3450:admin#
To show the link trace reply when the "all MPs reply LTRs" function is disabled:
128
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show cfm linktrace mep mep1 trans_id 26
Command: show cfm linktrace mep mep1 trans_id 26
Transaction ID: 26
From MEP mep1 to 00-11-22-33-44-55
Start Time 2008-01-01 12:00:00
Hop MEPID Ingress MAC Address Egress MAC Address Forwarded Relay Action
--- ----- ------------------- ------------------- --------- ------------
1 - 00-22-33-44-55-66 00-22-33-44-55-67 Yes FDB
2 - 00-33-44-55-66-77 00-33-44-55-66-78 Yes MPDB
3 X 00-44-55-66-77-88 00-11-22-33-44-55 No Hit
DGS-3450:admin#
delete cfm linktrace
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete the stored link trace response data that have been initiated by the specified
MEP.
delete cfm linktrace {[md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string
22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {mepid <int 1-8191>}} | mepname <string 32>]}
This command is used to delete the stored link trace response data that have been initiated by the specified MEP.
md <string 22> - Specify the Maintenance Domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the Maintenance Domain index.
ma <string 22> - Specify the Maintenance Association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the Maintenance Association index.
mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the MEP ID.
mepname <string 32> - Specify the MEP name.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the CFM link trace reply:
DGS-3450:admin#delete cfm linktrace mepname mep1
Command: delete cfm linktrace mepname mep1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show cfm mipccm
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the MIP CCM database entries.
show cfm mipccm
All entries in the MIP CCM database will be shown. A MIP CCM entry is similar to a FDB which keeps the forwarding port information of a MAC entry.
None.
None.
129
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To show MIP CCM database entries:
DGS-3450:admin#show cfm mipccm
Command: show cfm mipccm
MA VID MAC Address Port
---------- ---- ----------------- ----- opma 1 00-11-22-33-44-55 2 opma 1 00-22-33-44-55-66 3
Total: 2
DGS-3450:admin#
config cfm mp_ltr_all
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable or disable the "all MPs reply LTRs" function.
config cfm mp_ltr_all [enable | disable]
This command is used to enable or disable the "all MPs reply LTRs" function.
enable - Specify that the MP's reply to the LTR function will be set to all.
disable - Disable sending the all MPs replay LTRs function.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the "all MPs reply LTRs" function:
DGS-3450:admin#config cfm mp_ltr_all enable
Command: config cfm mp_ltr_all enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show cfm mp_ltr_all
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the current configuration of the "all MPs reply LTRs" function.
show cfm mp_ltr_all
This command is used to show the current configuration of the "all MPs reply LTRs" function.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show the configuration of the "all MPs reply LTRs" function:
130
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show cfm mp_ltr_all
Command: show cfm mp_ltr_all
All MPs reply LTRs: Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
show cfm remote_mep
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show remote MEPs.
show cfm remote_mep [mepname <string 32> | md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191>] remote_mepid <int 1-8191>
This command is used to show remote MEPs.
mepname <string 32> - Specify the MEP name.
md <string 22> - Specify the Maintenance Domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the Maintenance Domain index.
ma <string 22> - Specify the Maintenance Association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the Maintenance Association index.
mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the MEP ID.
remote_mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the remote MEP ID.
None.
Example usage:
To show the CFM remote MEP information:
DGS-3450:admin#show cfm remote_mep mepname mep1 remote_mepid 2
Command: show cfm remote_mep mepname mep1 remote_mepid 2
Remote MEPID : 2
MAC Address : 00-11-22-33-44-02
Status : OK
RDI : Yes
Port State : Blocked
Interface Status : Down
Last CCM Serial Number : 1000
Sender Chassis ID : 00-11-22-33-44-00
Sender Management Address: SNMP-UDP-IPv4 10.90.90.90:161
Detect Time : 2012-09-12 12:00:00
DGS-3450:admin#
show cfm pkt_cnt
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to show the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters.
show cfm pkt_cnt {[ports <portlist> {[rx | tx]} | [rx | tx] | ccm]}
This command is used to show the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters.
ports <portlist> - Specify the port counters to be displayed.
{[rx | tx]} - Show the RX or TX counters. If not specified, both counters will be shown.
[rx | tx] - Show the RX or TX counters of all ports.
ccm - Show the CCM RX counters of all ports.
131
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show cfm pkt_cnt
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To show the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters:
132
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show cfm pkt_cnt
Command: show cfm pkt_cnt
CFM RX Statistics
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port AllPkt CCM LBR LBM LTR LTM VidDrop OpcoDrop
----- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- all 204 204 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 204 204 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CFM TX Statistics
-----------------------------------------------------------
Port AllPkt CCM LBR LBM LTR LTM
----- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- all 3988 3984 0 0 0 4
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 204 204 0 0 0 4
3 578 578 0 0 0 0
4 578 578 0 0 0 0
5 578 578 0 0 0 0
6 578 578 0 0 0 0
7 578 578 0 0 0 0
8 578 578 0 0 0 0
9 578 578 0 0 0 0
10 578 578 0 0 0 0
11 578 578 0 0 0 0
12 578 578 0 0 0 0
DGS-3450:admin#show cfm pkt_cnt ccm
Command: show cfm pkt_cnt ccm
CCM RX counters:
XCON = Cross-connect CCMs
Error = Error CCMs
Normal = Normal CCMs
MEP Name VID Port Level Direction XCON Error Normal
----------- ---- ----- ----- --------- ---------- ---------- ---------- mep1 1 1 2 inward 9 8 100 mep2 1 2 2 inward 9 8 100 mep3 1 3 2 inward 9 8 100
-----------------------------------------
Total: 27 24 300
DGS-3450:admin#
133
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
clear cfm pkt_cnt
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to clear the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters.
clear cfm pkt_cnt {[ports <portlist> {[rx | tx]} | [rx | tx] | ccm]}
This command is used to clear the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters.
ports <portlist> - The ports which require need the counters clearing. If not specified, all ports will be cleared.
{[rx | tx]} – Specify to clear the RX or TX counters. If not specified, both counters will be shown.
[rx | tx] - Specify to clear the RX or TX counters of all ports.
ccm - Specify to clear the CCM RX counters of all ports.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters:
DGS-3450:admin#clear cfm pkt_cnt ccm
Command: clear cfm pkt_cnt ccm
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config cfm ais md
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the parameters of the AIS function on a MEP.
config cfm ais md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index<uint 1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> { period [ 1sec | 1min] | level <int 0-
7> | state [ enable | disable]}
This command is used to configure the parameters of the AIS function on a MEP.
md <string 22> - Specify the Maintenance Domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the Maintenance Domain index.
ma <string 22> - Specify the Maintenance Association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the Maintenance Association index.
mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the MEP ID.
period – Specify the transmitting interval of the AIS PDU. The default is 1 second.
level – Specify the client level ID to which the MEP sends AIS PDU. The default client MD level is the MD level that the most immediate client layer MIPs and MEPs exist on.
state – Specify the AIS function state used. This state can be enabled or disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the AIS function so that it is enabled and has a client level of 5:
134
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#config cfm ais md op_domain ma op1 mepid 1 state enable level 5
Command: config cfm ais md op_domain ma op1 mepid 1 state enable level 5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config cfm lock md
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the parameters of the LCK function on a MEP.
config cfm lock md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index<uint 1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> { period [1sec | 1min] | level <int 0-
7> | state [enable | disable]}
This command is used to configure the parameters of the LCK function on a MEP.
md <string 22> - Specify the Maintenance Domain name.
md_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the Maintenance Domain index.
ma <string 22> - Specify the Maintenance Association name.
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295> - Specify the Maintenance Association index.
mepid <int 1-8191> - Specify the MEP ID.
period – Specify the transmitting interval of the LCK PDU. The default is 1 second.
level – Specify the client level ID to which the MEP sends LCK PDU. The default client MD level is the MD level that the most immediate client layer MIPs and MEPs exist on.
state – Specify the LCK function state used. This state can be enabled or disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the LCK function state as enabled and specify a client level of 5:
DGS-3450:admin#config cfm lock md op_domain ma op1 mepid 1 state enable level 5
Command: config cfm lock md op_domain ma op1 mepid 1 state enable level 5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
135
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
17
C
OUNTER
C
OMMANDS
The Counter commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
show packet ports show error ports show utilization ports clear counters
Parameters
<portlist>
<portlist>
{ports <portlist>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
show packet ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show statistics about the packets which were sent and received by the switch.
show packet ports <portlist>
The show packet ports command shows statistics about the packets which were sent and received by the switch.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be displayed. (Unit ID: port number).
None.
Example usage:
To display the packets analysis for port 7 of unit 2:
136
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show packet ports 2:7
Command: show packet ports 2:7
Port number : 2:7
Frame Size/Type Frame Counts Frames/sec
--------------- ---------------------- -----------
64 0 0
65-127 0 0
128-255 0 0
256-511 0 0
512-1023 0 0
1024-1518 0 0
1519-1522 0 0
1519-2047 0 0
2048-4095 0 0
4096-9216 0 0
Unicast RX 0 0
Multicast RX 0 0
Broadcast RX 0 0
Frame Type Total Total/sec
--------------- ---------------------- -----------
RX Bytes 0 0
RX Frames 0 0
TX Bytes 0 0
TX Frames 0 0
show error ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use to show error statistics information for a range of ports.
show error ports <portlist>
The show error ports command shows error statistics for a range of ports.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be displayed. (Unit ID: port number).
None.
Example usage:
To display the errors of the port 3 of unit 1:
DGS-3450:admin# show error ports 1:3
Command: show error ports 1:3
Port number : 1:3
RX Frames TX Frames
------------------------------------------ ---------------------------
CRC Error 0 Excessive Deferral 0
Undersize 0 CRC Error 0
Oversize 0 Late Collision 0
Fragment 0 Excessive Collision 0
Jabber 0 Single Collision 0
Drop Pkts 0 Collision 0
Buffer Full Drop 0
ACL Drop 0
Multicast Drop 0
VLAN Ingress Drop 0
137
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show utilization
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use to show real-time port utilization statistics.
show utilization ports {<portlist>}
The show utilization command displays real-time ports utilization statistics.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be displayed. (Unit ID: port number).
None.
Example usage:
To show the ports utilization:
DGS-3450:admin# show utilization ports
Command: show utilization ports
Port TX/sec RX/sec Util Port TX/sec RX/sec Util
------ ---------- ---------- ---- ------ ---------- ---------- ----
1:1 0 0 0 1:22 0 0 0
1:2 0 0 0 1:23 0 0 0
1:3 0 0 0 1:24 0 0 0
1:4 0 0 0 1:25 0 0 0
1:5 0 0 0 1:26 19 49 1
1:6 0 0 0 2:1 0 0 0
1:7 0 0 0 2:2 0 0 0
1:8 0 0 0 2:3 0 0 0
1:9 0 0 0 2:4 0 0 0
1:10 0 0 0 2:5 0 0 0
1:11 0 0 0 2:6 0 0 0
1:12 0 0 0 2:7 0 30 1
1:13 0 0 0 2:8 0 0 0
1:14 0 0 0 2:9 30 0 1
1:15 0 0 0 2:10 0 0 0
1:16 0 0 0 2:11 0 0 0
1:17 0 0 0 2:12 0 0 0
1:18 0 0 0 2:13 0 0 0
1:19 0 0 0 2:14 0 0 0
1:20 0 0 0 2:15 0 0 0
1:21 0 0 0 2:16 0 0 0
clear counter
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to clear the switch’s statistics counters.
clear counters {ports <portlist>}
The clear counters command clears the switch’s statistics counters.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be configured. The port list is specified by listing the lowest switch number and the beginning port number on that switch, separated by a colon.
Then highest switch number, and the highest port number of the range (also separated by a colon) are specified. The beginning and the end of the port list range are separated by a dash.
For example:
1:3 would specify unit 1, port 3;
2:4 specifies unit 2, port 4;
1:3-
2:4 specifies all of the ports between unit 1, port 3 and unit 2, port 4 − in numerical order.
138
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
clear counter
Restrictions
If no parameter is specified, system will counter all of the ports.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear the switch’s statistics counters:
DGS-3450:admin#clear counters
Command: clear counters
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
139
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
18
D
EBUG
C
OMMANDS
Software Debug is used to define the common behavior of each module’s debug function and collect and save basic OS information when exceptions happen.
The Debug commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
debug error_log debug buffer debug output debug config error_reboot debug show status debug config state debug show error_reboot state debug show error ports debug show packet ports
Parameters
[dump | clear | upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>]
[utilization | dump | clear | upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>]
[module <module_list> | all] [buffer | console]
[enable | disable]
{ module <module_list> }
[enable | disable]
[sio1 | sio2]
[sio1 | sio2]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
debug error_log
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Use this command to dump, clear or upload the software error log to a TFTP server.
debug error_log [dump | clear | upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>]
Dump, clear or upload the debug log to a TFTP server. The “error log” here refers to the software error log stored in NVRAM.
dump - Display the debug message of the debug log.
clear - Clear the debug log.
upload_toTFTP - Upload the debug log to a TFTP server specified by IP address.
<ipaddr> - Specifies the IPv4 address of the TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> - The pathname specifies the DOS pathname on the TFTP server. It can be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
140
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To dump the error log:
DGS-3450:admin# debug error_log dump
Command: debug error_log dump
**************************************************************************
# debug log: 1
# level: fatal
# clock: 10000ms
# time : 2010/03/11 13:00:00
====================== SOFTWARE FATAL ERROR =======================
Invalid mutex handle : 806D6480
Current TASK : bcmARL.0
------------------------- TASK STACKTRACE ------------------------
->802ACE98
->8018C814
->8028FF44
->8028352C
->801D703C
->8013B8A4
->802AE754
->802A5E0C
->802A5D6C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
TASK NAME StackTop CurStkSP StackSize SchCnt PRIO(I) STATUS
8069E7D0
806A3E70 SysLogTask 80BD040C
E:SysLogEvent
806A4340
FWD-ETH
PktStorm
Q:ST_Storm
823E9798
80BF3188
823E95C4
80BD0298
80BF2DAC
1K/ 32K
1K/ 16K
2K/ 16K
2
3
160/160
180/180
807E4
Q:IP_PKT
190/190
To clear the error log:
DGS-3450:admin# debug error_log clear
Command: debug error_log clear
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To upload the error log to TFTP server:
DGS-3450:admin# debug error_log upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debug-log.txt
Command: debug error_log upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debug-log.txt
Connecting to server................... Done.
Upload error log ................... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
141
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
debug buffer
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use this command to show the debug buffer’s state, or dump, clear, or upload the debug buffer to a TFTP server.
debug buffer [utilization | dump | clear | upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>]
Show the debug buffer’s state or dump, clear or upload the debug buffer to TFTP server. The
“buffer” here refers to the module debug message stored in RAM.
utilization - Display the debug buffer’s state.
dump - Display the debug message in the debug buffer.
clear - Clear the debug buffer.
upload_toTFTP - Upload the debug buffer to a TFTP server specified by IP address.
<ipaddr> - Specifies the IPv4 address of the TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> - The pathname specifies the DOS pathname on the TFTP server. It can be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show the debug buffer’s state:
DGS-3450:admin# debug buffer utilization
Command: debug buffer utilization
System memory Allocate from
Total size :
:
2 MB
Utilization rate :
DGS-3450:admin#
30%
To clear the debug buffer:
DGS-3450:admin# debug buffer clear
Command: debug buffer clear
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To upload the messages stored in debug buffer to TFTP server:
DGS-3450:admin# debug buffer upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debugcontent.txt
Command: debug buffer upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debugcontent.txt
Connecting to server.................... Done.
Upload debug file ................... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug output
Purpose
Syntax
Use the command to set a specified module’s debug message output to debug buffer or local console. If the user uses the command in a Telnet session, the error message also is output to the local console.
debug output [module <module_list> | all] [buffer | console]
142
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
debug output
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Set specified module’s debug message output to debug buffer or local console.
<module_list> - The module list.
all - Control output method of all modules.
buffer - Direct the debug message of the module output to debug buffer(default).
console - Direct the debug message of the module output to local console.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set all module debug message outputs to local console:
DGS-3450:admin# debug output all console
Command: debug output all console
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug config error_reboot
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to set if the switch needs to be rebooted when a fatal error occurs.
When the error occurs, the watchdog timer will be disabled by the system first, and then all debug information will be saved in NVRAM. If the error_reboot is enabled, the watchdog shall be enabled after all information is stored into NVRAM.
debug config error_reboot [enable | disable]
Set if the switch needs to be rebooted when a fatal error occurs.
enable - Need reboot switch when fatal error happens.(if the project do not define the default setting, enable for default)
disable - Do not need reboot switch when fatal error happens, system will hang-up for debug and enter the debug shell mode for debug..
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set the switch to not need a reboot when a fatal error occurs:
DGS-3450:admin# debug config error_reboot disable
Command: debug config error_reboot disable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug show status
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Use the command to show the specified module’s debug status.
debug show status { module <module_list> }
Show the debug handler state and the specified module’s debug status.
If the input module list is empty, the states of all registered modules which support debug module will be shown.
143
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
debug show status
Parameters
Restrictions
<module_list> - The module list.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show the specified module’s debug state:
DGS-3450:admin# debug show status module MSTP
Command: debug show status module MSTP
Debug Global State: Enabled
MSTP : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
To show the debug state:
DGS-3450:admin# debug show status
Command: debug show status
Debug Global State: Enabled
SYS : Enabled
OS : Enabled
MSTP : Enabled
ACL : Disabled
CLI : Enabled
SNMP : Disabled
IGMP : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
debug config state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use the command to set the state of the debug.
debug config state [enable | disable]
Use the command to set the state of the debug.
enable - Enable the debug state.
disable - Disable the debug state.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set the debug state to disabled:
DGS-3450:admin# debug config state disable
Command: debug config state disable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
144
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
debug show error_reboot state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use the command to show the error reboot status.
debug show error_reboot state
Show the error reboot status.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show the error reboot status.
DGS-3450:admin# debug show error_reboot state
Command: debug show error_reboot state
Error Reboot: Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
debug show error ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the show error ports debugging command.
debug show error ports [sio1 | sio2]
This command is used to configure the show error ports debugging command.
sio1 – Specifies to use to SIO 1 option.
sio2 – Specifies to use to SIO 2 option.
None.
Example usage:
To configure the show error ports debugging command:
145
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#debug show error ports sio1
Command: debug show error ports sio1
Port number : 1:49
RX Frames TX Frames
--------- ---------
CRC Error 0 Excessive Deferral 0
Undersize 0 CRC Error 0
Oversize 0 Late Collision 0
Fragment 0 Excessive Collision 0
Jabber 0 Single Collision 0
Drop Pkts 0 Collision 0
Symbol Error 0
Buffer Full Drop 0
ACL Drop 0
Multicast Drop 0
VLAN Ingress Drop 0
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
debug show packet ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the show packet ports debugging command.
debug show packet ports [sio1 | sio2]
This command is used to configure the show packet ports debugging command.
sio1 – Specifies to use to SIO 1 option.
sio2 – Specifies to use to SIO 2 option.
None. Restrictions
Example usage:
To configure the show packet ports debugging command:
146
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#debug show packet ports sio1
Command: debug show packet ports sio1
Port number : 1:49
Frame Size/Type Frame Counts Frames/sec
--------------- ---------------------- -----------
64 0 0
65-127 0 0
128-255 0 0
256-511 0 0
512-1023 0 0
1024-1518 0 0
1519-2047 0 0
2048-4095 0 0
4096-9216 0 0
Unicast RX 0 0
Multicast RX 0 0
Broadcast RX 0 0
Frame Type Total Total/sec
--------------- ---------------------- -----------
RX Bytes 0 0
RX Frames 0 0
TX Bytes 0 0
TX Frames 0 0
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
147
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
19
DHCP L
OCAL
R
ELAY
C
OMMANDS
The DHCP Local Relay commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config dhcp_local _relay enable dhcp_local_relay disable dhcp_local_relay show dhcp_local_relay
Parameters
vlan [<vlan_name 32>| vlanid <vlanid>] state [enable | disable]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config dhcp_local_relay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable or disable DHCP local relay function to vlan.
config dhcp_local _relay vlan [<vlan_name 32>| vlanid <vlanid>] state [enable | disable]
The config dhcp_local_relay vlan command is used to enable /disable DHCP local relay function for specified vlan.
When DHCP local relay is enabled for the VLAN, the DHCP packet will be relayed in broadcast way without change of the source MAC address and gateway address. DHCP option 82 will be automatically added.
vlan_name - The name of the VLAN to be enabled DHCP local relay.
state - Enable or disable DHCP local relay for specified vlan.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable DHCP local relay for default vlan:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_local_relay vlan default state enable
Command: config dhcp_local_relay vlan default state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable dhcp_local_relay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the DHCP local relay function on the switch.
enable dhcp_local_relay
The enable dhcp_local _relay command globally enables the DHCP local relay function on the switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
148
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To enable the DHCP local relay function:
DGS-3450:admin# enable dhcp_local_relay
Command: enable dhcp_local_relay
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable dhcp_local_relay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the DHCP local relay function on the switch.
disable dhcp_local_relay
The disable dhcp_local _relay command globally disables the DHCP local relay function on the switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the DHCP local relay function:
DGS-3450:admin# disable dhcp_local_relay
Command: disable dhcp_local_relay
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcp_local_relay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current DHCP local relay configuration.
show dhcp_local_relay
The show dhcp_local_relay command displays the current DHCP local relay configuration.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display local dhcp relay status:
DGS-3450:admin# show dhcp_local_relay
Command: show dhcp_local_relay
DHCP/BOOTP Local Relay Status : Disabled
DHCP/BOOTP Local Relay VLAN List : 1,3-4
DGS-3450:admin#
149
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
20
DHCP R
ELAY
C
OMMANDS
The DHCP Relay commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config dhcp_relay config dhcp_relay add config dhcp_relay delete config dhcp_relay option_82 enable dhcp_relay disable dhcp_relay show dhcp_relay config dhcp_relay option_60 state config dhcp_relay option_60 add config dhcp_relay option_60 default config dhcp_relay option_60 delete show dhcp_relay option_60 config dhcp_relay option_61 state config dhcp_relay option_61 add config dhcp_relay option_61 default config dhcp_relay option_61 delete show dhcp_relay option_61
Parameters
{hops <value 1-16> | time <sec 0-65535>} ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr> ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
{ state [enable | disable] | check [enable | disable] | policy [replace | drop | keep]
{ipif <ipif_name 12>}
[enable | disable] string <mutiword 255> relay <ipaddr> [exact-match | partial-match]
[relay <ipaddr>| mode [relay | drop]
[string <mutiword 255> {relay <ipaddr>}| ipaddress <ipaddr> | all | default {< ipaddr>}]
{[string <mutiword 255> | ipaddress < ipaddr> | default]}
[enable | disable]
[mac_address <macaddr> | string <mutiword 255>] [relay <ipaddr> | drop]
[relay <ipaddr> | drop]
[mac_address <macaddr> | string <mutiword 255> | all]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config dhcp_relay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the DHCP relay feature of the switch.
config dhcp_relay { hops <value 1-16> | time <sec 0-65535>}
The config dhcp_relay command configures the DHCP relay feature of the switch.
hops - Specifies the maximum number of relay hops that the DHCP/BOOTP packets can cross. The range is 1 to 16. The default value is 4. The DHCP packet will be dropped when the relay hop count in the received packet is equal to or greater than this setting.
time - The secs field in the DHCP packet must be equal to or greater than this setting to be relayed by the router. The default value is 0.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure DHCP relay status:
150
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay hops 4 time 2
Command: config dhcp_relay hops 4 time 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp_relay add
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to add an IP destination address to the switch’s DHCP relay table. Used to configure a
DHCP server for relay of packets.
config dhcp_relay add ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
The config dhcp_relay add command adds an IP address as a destination to forward (relay)
DHCP/BOOTP packets.
This server IP can either have the same network address as the network address of this ipif or not. If the network address is different, the system will automatically route the relayed packet.
ipif - The name of the IP interface which contains the IP address below.
<ipaddr> - The DHCP/BOOTP server IP address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add a DHCP/BOOTP server to the relay table:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay add ipif System 10.43.21.12
Command: config dhcp_relay add ipif System 10.43.21.12
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp_relay delete
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete one or all IP destination addresses from the switch’s DHCP relay table.
config dhcp_relay delete ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
The config dhcp_relay delete command is used to delete one or all of the IP destination addresses in the swith’s relay table.
ipif - The name of the IP interface which contains the IP address below.
<ipaddr> - The DHCP/BOOTP server IP address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a DHCP/BOOTP server to the relay table:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay delete ipif System 10.43.21.12
Command: config dhcp_relay delete ipif System 10.43.21.12
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
151
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcp_relay option_82
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configurethe processing of DHCP 82 option for the DHCP relay function.
config dhcp_relay option_82 { state [enable | disable] | check [enable | disable] | policy
[replace | drop | keep]
Configures the processing of DHCP 82 option for the DHCP relay function.
When DHCP 82 option is enabled, the DHCP packet received from the client will be inserted with option 82 field before being relayed to the server. The DHCP 82 option contained 2 suboptions which is circuit ID suboption and remote ID suboption.
The formats for the circuit ID suboption and the remote ID suboption are as following. For the circuit ID suboption of a standalone switch, the module field is always zero.
state - When the state is enabled, the DHCP packet will be inserted with the option 82 field before being relayed to server. The DHCP packet will be processed based on the behaviour defined in check and policy setting. When the state is disabled, the DHCP packet will be relayed directly to server without further check and processing on the packet. The default setting is disabled.
check - When the state is enabled; For packet come from client side, the packet should not have the option 82’s field. If the packet has this option field, it will be dropped. For packets come from the server side, the packet should have the option 82’s field. If the packet does not have option field and does not have correct option fields, the packet will be dropped. The default setting is disabled.
policy - Specifies the way to process the packet come from the client side which has the 82 option field, and it is not dropped since the check function is disabled.
replace - Replace the exiting option 82 field in the packet.
drop - Discard if the packet has the option 82 field.
keep - Retain the existing option 82 field in the packet. The default setting is replace.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure dhcp_relay option 82:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay option_82 state enable
Command: config dhcp_relay option_82 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay option_82 check disable
Command: config dhcp_relay option_82 check disable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay option_82 policy replace
Command: config dhcp_relay option_82 policy replace
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable dhcp_relay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to enable the DHCP relay function on the switch.
enable dhcp_relay
The enable dhcp_relay command enables the DHCP relay function on the switch.
152
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
enable dhcp_relay
Parameters
Restrictions
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the DHCP relay function:
DGS-3450:admin# enable dhcp_relay
Command: enable dhcp_relay
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable dhcp_relay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable DHCP relay function on the switch.
disable dhcp_relay
The disable dhcp_relay command disables the DHCP relay function on the switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the DHCP relay function:
DGS-3450:admin# disable dhcp_relay
Command: disable dhcp_relay
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcp_relay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current DHCP relay configuration.
show dhcp_relay {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
The show dhcp_relay command displays the current DHCP relay configuration.
ipif - IP interface name.
If no parameter specified, the system will display all dhcp relay configuration.
None.
Example usage:
To display dhcp relay status:
153
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show dhcp_relay ipif System
Command: show dhcp_relay ipif System
DHCP/BOOTP Relay Status : Disabled
DHCP/BOOTP Hops Count Limit : 4
DHCP/BOOTP Relay Time Threshold : 0 second(s)
DHCP Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 State: Disabled
DHCP Client Identifier Option 61 State: Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 State : Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Check : Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Policy : Replace
Interface Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4
------------ --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------------
System 10.48.74.122 10.23.12.34 10.12.34.12 10.48.75.121
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp_relay option_60 state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to config dhcp_relay opton_60 state.
config dhcp_relay option_60 state [enable | disable]
This decides whether dhcp_relay will process the DHCP option 60 or not.
When option_60 is enabled, if the packet does not have option 60, then the relay servers cannot be determined based on option 60. The relay servers will be determined based on either option 61 or per IPIF configured servers.
If the relay servers are determined based on option 60 or option 61, then per IPIF configured servers will be ignored.
If the relay servers are not determined either by option 60 or option 61, then per IPIF configured servers will be used to determine the relay servers.
state - See below:
enable - Enables the fuction dhcp_relay use option_60 rules to relay dhcp packet.
disable - Disables the fuction dhcp_relay use option_60 rules to relay dhcp packet.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the state of dhcp_relay option 60:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay option_60 state enable
Command: config dhcp_relay option_60 state enable
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp_relay option_60 add
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to add a entry for DHCP Relay option 60.
config dhcp_relay option_60 add string <mutiword 255> relay <ipaddr> [exact-match | partial-match]
This command configures the option 60 relay rules. Note that different string can be specified with the same relay server, and the same string can be specified with multiple relay servers.
154
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcp_relay option_60 add
Parameters
Restrictions
The system will relay the packet to all the matching servers.
string - The specified string.
relay - Specify a relay server IP address.
exact-match - The option 60 string in the packet must full match with the specified string.
partial-match - The option 60 string in the packet only need partial match with the specified string.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add a entry for DHCP Relay option 60:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay option_60 add string "abc" relay 10.90.90.1 exact-match
Command: config dhcp_relay option_60 add string "abc" relay 10.90.90.1 exact-match
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp_relay option_60 default
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the DHCP Relay option 60 as the default Relay Server.
config dhcp_relay option_60 default [relay <ipaddr>| mode [relay | drop]
When there are no match servers found for the packet based on option 60, the relay servers will be determined by the default relay server setting.
When there is no matching found for the packet, the relay servers will be determined based on the default relay servers.
When drop is specified, the packet with no matching rules found will be dropped without further process.
If the setting is no- drop, then the packet will be processed further based on option 61. The final relay servers will be the union of option 60 default relay servers and the relay servers determined by option 61.
relay - The specified IP address for dhcp_relay forward. Specify a relay server IP for the packet that has mathcing option 60 rules.
drop - Specify to drop the packet that has no matching option 60 rules.
relay - The packet will be relayed based on the relay rules.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the DHCP Relay option 60 as the default Relay Server:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay option_60 default mode drop
Command: config dhcp_relay option_60 default mode drop
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
155
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcp_relay option_60 delete
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to delete the DHCP Relay option 60 entry.
config dhcp_relay option_60 delete [string <mutiword 255> {relay <ipaddr>} | ipaddress <ipaddr> | all | default {< ipaddr>}]
This can delete the entry by user specified.
When all is specified, all rules excluding the default rules are deleted.
string - Delete all the entry whose string is equal to the string of specified if ipaddress is not specified
relay <ipaddr> - Delete one entry, whose string and IP address are equal to the string and IP address specified by the user.
all - Delete all the entry. Default relay servers are excluded.
ipaddress - Delete all the entry whose ipaddress is equal to the specified ipaddress.
default - Delete all defaut relay ipaddress if ipaddress is not specified.
<ipaddr> - Delete the default relay ipaddress that is specified by the user.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the DHCP Relay option 60 entry:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay option_60 delete string "abc" relay 10.90.90.1
Command: config dhcp_relay option_60 delete string "abc" relay 10.90.90.1
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcp_relay option_60
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to show the DHCP Relay option 60 entry.
show dhcp_relay option_60 {[string <mutiword 255> | ipaddress < ipaddr> | default]}
This show dhcp_relay option_60 entry by the user specified.
string - Show the entry which’s string equal the string of specified.
ipadddress - Show the entry whose ipaddress equal the specified ipaddress.
default - Show the defaut behaviour of dhcp_relay option60.
None.
Example usage:
To show the DHCP Relay option 60 entry:
156
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show dhcp_relay option_60
Command: show dhcp_relay option_60
Default Processing Mode: Drop
Default Servers:
Matching Rules:
String Match Type IP Address
------- --------- ---------
101 Partial Match 110.1.1.4
102 Partial Match 110.1.1.4
103 Partial Match 110.1.1.4
Total Entries : 3
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp_relay option_61 state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the DHCP Relay opton 61 state.
config dhcp_relay option_61 state [enable | disable]
This decides whether dhcp_relay will process the DHCP option 61 or not.
When option_61 is enabled, if the packet does not have option 61, then the relay servers cannot be determined based on option 61.
If the relay servers are determined based on option 60 or option 61, then per IPIF configured servers will be ignored.
If the relay servers are not determined either by option 60 or option 61, then per IPIF configured servers will be used to determine the relay servers.
state - See below:
enable - Enable the fuction dhcp_relay use option_61 ruler to relay dhcp packet.
disable - Disable the fuction dhcp_relay use option_61 ruler to relay dhcp packet.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the state of dhcp_relay option 61:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay option_61 state enable
Command: config dhcp_relay option_61 state enable
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp_relay option_61 add
Purpose
Syntax
Description
This command is used to add a rule for DHCP Relay option 61.
config dhcp_relay option_61 add [mac_address <macaddr> | string <mutiword 255>]
[relay <ipaddr> | drop]
This command adds a rule to determine the relay server based on option 61.
The match rule can base on either MAC address or a user-specified string.
157
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcp_relay option_61 add
Parameters
Restrictions
Only one relay server can be specified for a MAC-address or a string,
If relay servers are determined based on option 60, and one relay server is determined based on option 61, the final relay servers will be the union of these two sets of the servers.
mac_address - The client’s client-ID which is the hardware address of client.
string - The client’s client-ID,which is specified by administrator.
relay - Specify to relay the packet to a IP address.
drop - Specify to drop the packet.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add a rule for DHCP Relay option 61:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay option_61 add mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55 drop
Command: config dhcp_relay option_61 add mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55 drop
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp_relay option_61 default
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the default ruler for option 61.
config dhcp_relay option_61 default [relay <ipaddr> | drop]
Up to default server IP address can be specified.This setting will be used to determine the rule to process those packets that have no option 61 matching rules.
The default default-rule is drop.
relay - Specify to relay the packet that has no option matching 61 matching rules to an IP address.
drop - Specify to drop the packet that have no option 61 matching rules.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the default ruler for option 61:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay option_61 default drop
Command: config dhcp_relay option_61 default drop
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp_relay option_61 delete
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to delete an option 61 rule.
config dhcp_relay option_61 delete [mac_address <macaddr> | string <mutiword 255>
| all]
This command is used to delete an option 61 rule.
mac_address - The entry with the specified MAC address will be deleted.
158
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcp_relay option_61 delete
Restrictions
string - The entry with the specified string will be deleted.
all - All rules excluding the default rule will be deleted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete an option 61 rule:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp_relay option_61 delete mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55
Command: config dhcp_relay option_61 delete mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcp_relay option_61
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to show all rulers for option 61.
show dhcp_relay option_61
This command is used to show all rulers for option 61.
None.
None,
Example usage:
To show all rulers for option 61:
DGS-3450:admin# show dhcp_relay option_61
Command: show dhcp_relay option_61
Default Relay Rule: 10.90.90.200
Matching Rules:
Client-ID Type Relay rule
----------- ---- ---------
00-0D-88-11-8B-6A MAC Address 101.1.90.20
00-11-22-33-44-55 MAC Address 111.111.111.111
00-11-22-33-44-56 MAC Address 111.111.111.111
Total Entries: 3
DGS-3450:admin#
159
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
21
DHCP S
ERVER
S
CREENING
C
OMMANDS
The DHCP Server Screening Commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
The DHCP Server Screening commands allow you not only to restrict all DHCP Server packets but also to receive any specified DHCP server packets by any specified DHCP client, it is useful when one or more than one DHCP servers are present on the network and both provide DHCP services to different distinct groups of clients. Enabling the DHCP filter for the first time will create both an access profile and access rule per port, following this other access rules can be created.
These rules are used to block all DHCP server packets. Similarly, the addition of a permit DHCP entry will create one access profile and one access rule the first time the DHCP client MAC address is the client MAC address, and the Source
IP address is the same as the DHCP server’s IP address (UDP port number 67). These rules are used to permit the
DHCP server packets with specific fileds, which the user configures.
When the DHCP Server filter function is enabled, all DHCP Server packets will be filtered from a specific port. Also, you are allowed to create entries for specific port-based Server IP address and Client MAC address binding entries. Be aware that the DHCP Server filter function must be enabled first. Once all settings are complete, all DHCP Server packets will be filtered from a specific port except those that meet the Server IP Address and Client MAC Address binding.
Command Parameters
config filter dhcp_server show filter dhcp_server
[add permit server_ip <ipaddr> {client_mac <macaddr>} ports [<portlist> | all] | delete permit server_ip <ipaddr> {client_mac <macaddr>} ports [<portlist> | all] | ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable] | illegal_server_log_suppress_duration [ 1min | 5min | 30min ] | trap_log [enable | disable]] config filter dhcp_server illegal_server_log_suppress_duration
[ 1min | 5min | 30min ]
Each command is listed in detail in the following sections.
config filter dhcp_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
DHCP server packets except those that have been IP/client MAC bound will be filtered. This command is used to configure the state of the function for filtering of DHCP server packet and to add/delete the DHCP server/client binding entry.
config filter dhcp_server [add permit server_ip <ipaddr> {client_mac <macaddr>} ports
[<portlist> | all] | delete permit server_ip <ipaddr> {client_mac <macaddr>} ports
[<portlist> | all] | ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable] | illegal_server_log_suppress_duration [ 1min | 5min | 30min ] | trap_log [enable | disable]]
This command has two purposes: to filter all DHCP server packets on the specified port(s) and to allow some DHCP server packets to be forwarded if they are on the pre-defined server
IP address/MAC address binding list. Thus the DHCP server can be restricted to service a specified DHCP client. This is useful when there are two or more DHCP servers present on a network.
ipaddr – The IP address of the DHCP server to be filtered.
macaddr – The MAC address of the DHCP client.
state – To Enable/disable the filter DHCP server state.
portlist – The port list of filter DHCP server.
160
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config filter dhcp_server
Restrictions
illegal_server_log_suppress_duration - Specify the suppress duration of illegal DHCP server feature.
trap_log – Enable or disable trap/log related to DHCP server filter.
Only Administratorand Operator-level users can issue this command.
Enabling the DHCP filter will create one access profile and create one access rule per port
(UDP port 67).
Addition of a DHCP filter permit entry will create one access profile and create one access rule (DA = client MAC address, SA = source IP address and UDP port 67).
Example usage:
To add an entry from the DHCP server/client filter list in the switch’s database:
DGS-3450:admin# config filter dhcp_server add permit server_ip 10.1.1.1 client_mac 00-00-
00-00-00-01 ports 1:1-1:3
Command: config filter dhcp_server add permit server_ip 10.1.1.1 client_mac 00-00-00-00-
00-01 ports 1:1-1:3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure the filter DHCP server state:
DGS-3450:admin# config filter dhcp_server ports 1:1-1:3 state enable
Command: config filter dhcp_server ports 1:1-1:3 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To disable log and trap for the DHCP server filter event:
DGS-3450:admin# config filter dhcp_server trap_log disable
Command: config filter dhcp_server trap_log disable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show filter dhcp_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display current DHCP server/client filter list created on the switch.
Show filter dhcp_server
This command is used to display DHCP server/client filter list created on the switch. The log ceasing unauthorized duration and the log/trap state.
None.
None.
Example usage:
161
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To display the DHCP server/client filter list created on the switch the log ceasing unauthorized duration and the log/trap state:
DGS-3450:admin# show filter dhcp_server
Command: show filter dhcp_server
Filter DHCP Server Trap_Log State: Disabled
Enabled Ports: 1:1-1:3
Illegal Server Log Suppress Duration:5 minutes
Filter DHCP Server/Client Table
Server IP Address Client MAC Address Port
----------------- ------------------ --------------------
10.1.1.1 00-00-00-00-00-01 1:1-1:3
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
config filter dhcp_server illegal_server_log_suppress_duration
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This function is used to configure the illegal server log suppress duration.
config filter dhcp_server illegal_server_log_suppress_duration [ 1min | 5min | 30min ]
The DHCP server filtering function filters any illegal DHCP server packets. The DHCP server who sends the illegal packets will be logged. This command is used to suppress the logging of
DHCP servers who continue to send illegal DHCP packets. The same illegal DHCP server IP address that is detected will be logged only once regardless of how many illegal packets are sent.
illegal _server_log_suppress_duration – The log can be suppressed by 1 minute, 5 minutes or
30 minutes. The default value is 5 minutes.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the illegal_server_log_suppress_duration for 30 minutes:
DGS-3450:admin# config filter dhcp_server illegal_server_log_suppress_duration 30min
Command: config filter dhcp_server illegal_server_log_suppress_duration 30min
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
162
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
22
DHCP S
ERVER
C
OMMANDS
For this release, the Switch now has the capability to act as a DHCP server to devices within its locally attached network.
DHCP, or Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, allows the switch to delegate IP addresses, subnet masks, default gateways and other IP parameters to devices that request this information. This occurs when a DHCP enabled device is booted on or attached to the locally attached network. This device is known as the DHCP client and when enabled, it will emit query messages on the network before any IP parameters are set. When the DHCP server receives this request, it returns a response to the client, containing the previously mentioned IP information that the DHCP client then utilizes and sets on its local configurations.
The user can configure many DHCP related parameters that it will utilize on its locally attached network, to control and limit the IP settings of clients desiring an automatic IP configuration, such as the lease time of the allotted IP address, the range of IP addresses that will be allowed in its DHCP pool, the ability to exclude various IP addresses within the pool as not to make identical entries on its network, or to assign the IP address of an important device (such as a DNS server or the IP address of the default route) to another device on the network.
Users also have the ability to bind IP addresses within the DHCP pool to specific MAC addresses in order to keep consistent the IP addresses of devices that may be important to the upkeep of the network that require a static IP address.
The DHCP Server Commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create dhcp pool
Parameters
<pool_name 12> delete dhcp pool create dhcp pool manual_binding delete dhcp pool manual_binding show dhcp pool manual_binding show dhcp_binding clear dhcp_binding config dhcp ping_packets config dhcp ping_timeout config dhcp pool boot_file config dhcp pool default_router
[<pool_name 12> | all]
<pool_name 12> <ipaddr> hardware_address <macaddr> {type [Ethernet |
IEEE802]}
<pool_name 12> [<ipaddr> | all]
{<pool_name 12>}
{<pool_name 12>}
{<pool_name 12>}
<number 2-10>
<millisecond 500-2000>
<pool_name 12> <file_name 64>
<pool_name 12> <ipaddr> {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>} config dhcp pool dns_server_address <pool_name 12> <ipaddr> {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>} config dhcp pool domain_name <pool_name 12> <domain_name 64> config dhcp pool lease config dhcp pool netbios_name_server
<pool_name 12> [<day 0-365> <hour 0-23> <minute 0-59> | infinite]
<pool_name 12> <ipaddr> {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>} config dhcp pool netbios_node_type config dhcp pool network_addr config dhcp pool next_server
<pool_name 12> [broadcast | peer_to_peer | mixed | hybrid]
<pool_name 12> <network_address>
<pool_name 12> <ipaddr>
163
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual enable dhcp_server disable dhcp_server show dhcp_server create dhcp excluded_address begin_address delete dhcp excluded_address show dhcp excluded_address show dhcp pool config dhcp pool option_43 config dhcp pool option_profile create dhcp option_profile delete dhcp option_profile config dhcp option_profile
<ipaddr> end_address <ipaddr>
[begin_address <ipaddr> end_address <ipaddr> | all]
{ <pool_name 12>}
<pool_name 12> [add string <mutiword 255> | delete]
<pool_name 12> [add | delete] <profile_name 12>
<profile_name 12>
<profile_name 12>
<profile_name 12> [add option <value 1-254> [string <mutiword 255> | hex
<string 254>]|delete option <value 1-254>]
{<profile_name 12>} show dhcp option_profile
Each command is listed in detail in the following sections.
create dhcp pool
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to create a DHCP pool.
create dhcp pool <pool_name 12>
This command will create a DCHP pool for the DHCP server. Once created, this pool may be modified for accepting DHCP clients into this pool.
Parameters
Restrictions
<pool_name 12>
− Enter an name of up to 12 alphanumeric characters to identify the pool to be created with this command.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create the DHCP pool Floor2:
DGS-3450:admin# create dhcp pool Floor2
Command:create dhcp pool Floor2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete dhcp pool
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to delete a DHCP pool.
delete dhcp pool [<pool_name 12> | all]
This command will delete a DHCP pool that was created with the create dhcp pool command.
164
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete dhcp pool
Parameters
Restrictions
<pool_name 12>
− Enter an name of up to 12 alphanumeric characters to identify the pool to be deleted with this command.
all – Enter this command to delete all created DHCP pool.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the DHCP pool Floor2:
DGS-3450:admin# delete dhcp pool Floor2
Command:delete dhcp pool Floor2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create dhcp pool manual_binding
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create a DHCP pool manual binding entry.
create dhcp pool manual_binding <pool_name 12> <ipaddr> hardware_address
<macaddr> {type [Ethernet | IEEE802]}
This command will create a DHCP manual pool binding entry for a previously created pool.
When a MAC address is entered in this command, it will be bound to a IP address from the given pool either by the user, or automatically by the Switch.
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the name of the previously created pool that will contain the manual binding entry.
<ipaddr>
− Enter the IP address to be statically bound to a device within the local network that will be specified by entering the Hardware Address in the following field.
hardware_address <macaddr>
− Enter the MAC address of the device to be statically bound to the IP address entered in the previous field.
type [Ethernet | IEEE802]
− This field is used to specify the type of connection for which this manually bound entry will be set. Ethernet will denote that the manually bound device is connected directly to the Switch, while the IEEE802 denotes that the manually bound device is outside the local network of the Switch.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a manual binding DHCP entry:
DGS-3450:admin# create dhcp pool manual_binding engineering 10.10.10.1 hardware_address
02.02.02.02.02.02 type Ethernet
Command: create dhcp pool manual_binding engineering 10.10.10.1 hardware_address
02.02.02.02.02.02 type Ethernet
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
165
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete dhcp pool manual_binding
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to delete a previously created DHCP manual binding entry.
delete dhcp pool manual_binding <pool_name 12> [<ipaddr> | all]
This command will delete a DHCP manual binding entry created with the create dhcp pool
manual_binding command.
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the previously created pool name from which to delete a manual binding DHCP entry.
<ipaddr>
− Enter the IP address of the manual binding entry to be deleted.
all – Enter this command to delete all manual binding entries for the given pool.
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a manual binding DHCP entry:
DGS-3450:admin# delete dhcp pool manual_binding Floor2 10.10.10.1
Command: delete dhcp pool manual_binding Floor2 10.10.10.1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcp pool manual_binding
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the manual binding settings for a DHCP pool.
show dhcp pool manual_binding {<pool_name 12>}
This command will display the manual binding entries for the selected DHCP pool.
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the name of the DHCP pool for which to view manual binding entries.
Entering this command without the pool name will display all manual binding entries of the
DHCP server.
None.
Example usage:
To display the manual binding entries of the DHCP pool accounting:
DGS-3450:admin# show dhcp pool manual_binding accounting
Command: show dhcp pool manual_binding accounting
Pool Name IP Address Identifier (Hardware_Address) Type
------------ ------------- ----------------- ----------- accounting 192.168.0.1 01-22-b7-35-ce-99 Ethernet accounting 192.168.0.2 0a-52-f7-34-ce-88 Ethernet
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3450:admin#
166
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show dhcp_binding
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the DHCP binding information.
show dhcp_binding {<pool_name 12>}
This command is used to display the DHCP binding information by created pool. Entering the command without the pool name will display all information regarding DHCP binding on the switch.
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the name of the DHCP pool for which to view binding information.
None.
Example usage:
To display the DHCP binding information on the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# show dhcp_binding
Command:show dhcp_binding
Pool Name IP Address Hardware Address Type Status Life Time (secs)
----------- ----------- -------------------- --------- --------- ---------------- engineering 192.168.0.1 01-22-b7-35-ce-99 Ethernet Manual 864000
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
clear dhcp_binding
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to clear the DHCP binding information.
clear dhcp_binding {<pool_name 12>}
This command is used to clear the DHCP binding settings for a particular created DHCP pool.
Parameters
Restrictions
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the name of the DHCP pool for which to clear the binding information.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display the DHCP binding information on the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# clear dhcp_binding
Command:clear dhcp_binding
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
167
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcp ping_packets
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to set the number of ping packets that will be sent out to find if an IP address is available.
config dhcp ping_packets <number 2-10>
This command will set the number of ping packets that will be sent out to find if an IP address is available to be allocated as a valid DHCP IP address.
Parameters
<number 2-10>
− Enter a number between 2 and 10 to denote the number of ping packets that the Switch will send out on the network containing the IP address to be allotted. If the ping request is not returned, the IP address is considered unique to the local network and then allotted to the requesting client. The default setting is 2 packets.
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the number of ping packets to be used for DHCP:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp ping_packets 2
Command: config dhcp ping_packets 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp ping_timeout
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to set the time the Switch will wait before timing out a ping packet.
config dhcp ping_timeout <millisecond 500-2000>
This command is used set the time the Switch will wait before timing out a ping packet. If no answer is received, the IP address is considered unused and may be allocated to a requesting client.
<millisecond 500-2000>
− The user may set a time between 500 and 2000 milliseconds that the Switch will wait before timing out a ping packet. The default setting is 500 milliseconds.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the Ping timeout:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp ping_timeout 500
Command: config dhcp ping_timeout 500
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
168
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcp pool boot_file
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to specify the Boot File that will be used as the boot image of the DHCP client
config dhcp pool boot_file <pool_name 12> <file_name 64>
This command is used to specify the Boot File that will be used as the boot image of the
DHCP client. This image is usually the operating system that the client uses to load its IP parameters.
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the previously created pool name from which the boot file will be set.
<file_name 64>
− Enter the name of the boot file that will be used for DHCP clients.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set the boot file:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp pool boot_file accounting boot.had
Command: config dhcp pool boot_file accounting boot.had
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp pool default_router
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the default router for the DHCP client.
config dhcp pool default_router <pool_name 12> <ipaddr> {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>}
This command is used to configure the default router for DHCP clients requesting DHCP information for the switch. Users may add up to three IP addresses to identify the router, but must specify at least one.
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the previously created pool name for which to add a default router.
<ipaddr>
− Enter the IP address for the default router for this pool. Users may specify up to three default routers but users must add at least one.
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the default router:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp pool default_router accounting 10.245.32.1
Command: config dhcp pool default_router accounting 10.245.32.1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
169
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcp pool dns_server_address
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the IP addresses of DNS servers for a specific DHCP pool.
config dhcp pool dns_server_address <pool_name 12> <ipaddr> {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>}
This command is used to configure the DNS server IP addresses for a specific DHCP pool for the switch. The DNS Server correlates IP addresses to host names when queried. Users may add up to three DNS Server addresses.
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the previously created pool name for which to add a DNS address.
<ipaddr>
− Enter the IP address for the DNS server for this pool. Users may specify up to three DNS servers.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the DNS server address foe a DHCP pool:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp pool dns_server_address accounting 10.245.32.1
Command: config dhcp pool dns_server_address accounting 10.245.32.1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp pool domain_name
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the domain name for the DHCP pool of the Switch.
config dhcp pool domain_name<pool_name 12> <domain_name 64>
This command is used to configure the domain name for the DHCP pool of the Switch. This domain name represents a general group of networks that collectively make up the domain.
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the previously created pool name for which to add a default router.
<domain_name 64>
− The Domain Name may be an alphanumeric string of up to 64 characters.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the domain name for a DHCP pool:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp pool domain_name accounting d_link.com
Command: config dhcp pool domain_name accounting d_link.com
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
170
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcp pool lease
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to configure the lease time of DCHP clients within a DHCP pool.
config dhcp pool lease<pool_name 12> [<day 0-365> <hour 0-23> <minute 0-59> | infinite]
Using this command, the user can specify the lease time for the DHCP client. This time represents the amount of time that the allotted address is valid on the local network.
Parameters
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the previously created pool name for which to set the lease time for accepted DHCP clients.
day 0-365 – Enter the amount of days for the lease. The default setting is one day.
hour 0-23 – Enter the number of hours for the lease.
minute 0-59
− Enter the number of minutes for the lease.
infinite – Enter this parameter to set the allotted IP address to never be timed out of its lease.
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the lease time for the DHCP pool:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp pool lease accounting infinite
Command: config dhcp pool lease accounting infinite
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp pool netbios_name_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the IP address(es) for the Net BIOS name server,
config dhcp pool netbios_name_server <pool_name 12> <ipaddr> {<ipaddr>}
{<ipaddr>}
This command is used to enter the IP address of a Net BIOS Name Server that will be available to a Microsoft DHCP Client. This Net BIOS Name Server is actually a WINS
(Windows Internet Naming Service) Server that allows Microsoft DHCP clients to correlate host names to IP addresses within a general grouping of networks. The user may establish up to three Net BIOS Name Servers.
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the previously created pool name for which to set the Net BIOS name server for DHCP clients.
<ipaddr>
− Enter the IP address for the Net BIOS name server for this pool. Users may specify up to three Net BIOS name servers.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the Net BIOS name server for the DHCP pool:
171
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp pool netbios_name_server accounting 10.98.254.2
Command: config dhcp pool netbios_name_server accounting 10.98.254.2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp pool netbios_node_type
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to set the Net BIOS node type for the DHCP server.
config dhcp pool netbios_node_type <pool_name 12> [broadcast | peer_to_peer | mixed | hybrid]
This command is used to allow users to set the type of node server for the previously configured Net BIOS Name server. The user has four choices for node types which are
Broadcast, Peer to Peer, Mixed and Hybrid.
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the previously created pool name for which to set the Net BIOS node type for DHCP clients.
[broadcast | peer_to_peer | mixed | hybrid] – Users may choose the node type for the Net
BIOS from one of the four listed.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the Net BIOS node type for the DHCP pool:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp pool netbios_node_type accounting hybrid
Command: config dhcp pool netbios_node_type accounting hybrid
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp pool network_addr
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the network address and corresponding subnet mask for the DHCP pool.
config dhcp pool network_addr <pool_name 12> <network_address>
This command will allow users to enter the IP address pool to be assigned to requesting
DHCP Clients. This address will not be chosen but the first 3 sets of numbers in the IP address will be used for the IP address of requesting DHCP Clients. (ex. If this entry is given the IP address 10.10.10.2, then assigned addresses to DHCP Clients will resemble 10.10.10.x, where x is a number between 1 and 255 but does not include the assigned 10.10.10.2)
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the previously created pool name for which to set the network address.
<network_address>
− IP address and netmask that is the address of this DHCP pool. The address and mask information can be specified using the traditional format (for example,
10.1.2.3/255.0.0.0 or in CIDR format, 10.1.2.3/8).
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the network address for the DHCP pool:
172
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp pool network_addr accounting 10.1.1.1/8
Command:config dhcp pool network_addr accounting 10.1.1.1/8
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp pool next_server
Purpose Used to configure the IP address of the server that has the boot file for the DHCP pool.
Syntax
Description
Parameters
config dhcp pool next_server <pool_name 12> <ipaddr>
This command is used to configure the IP address of the server that has the boot file for the
DHCP pool.
<pool_name 12>
− Enter the previously created pool name for which to set the next server.
<ipaddr>
− Enter the IP address of the next server which has the boot file.
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the IP address of the next server:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp pool next_server accounting 10.99.88.77
Command: config dhcp pool next_server accounting 10.99.88.77
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable dhcp_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the DHCP function on the switch.
enable dhcp_server
This command, along with the disable dhcp_server will enable and disable the DHCP server function without affecting configurations.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable DHCP server:
173
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# enable dhcp_server
Command: enable dhcp_server
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable dhcp_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the DHCP function on the switch.
disable dhcp_server
This command, along with the enable dhcp_server will enable and disable the DHCP server function without affecting configurations.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the DHCP server:
DGS-3450:admin# disable dhcp_server
Command: disable dhcp_server
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcp_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the DHCP server settings.
show dhcp_server
This command will display the DHCP server settings for its Global state, ping packet count and ping timeout.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the DHCP server settings:
DGS-3450:admin# show dhcp_server
Command:show dhcp_server
DHCP Server Global State: Disable
Ping Packet Number : 2
Ping Timeout : 500 ms
DGS-3450:admin#
174
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create dhcp excluded_address begin_address
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure IP addresses that will be excluded from the DHCP Server pool of addresses.
create dhcp excluded_address begin_address <ipaddr> end_address <ipaddr>
This command will allow the user to set an IP address, or a range of IP addresses that are
NOT to be included in the range of IP addresses that the Switch will allot to clients requesting
DHCP service.
begin_address <ipaddr>
− Enter the beginning IP address of the range of IP addresses to be excluded from the DHCP pool.
end_address <ipaddr>
− Enter the ending IP address of the range of IP addresses to be excluded from the DHCP pool.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure IP an address that will be excluded from the DHCP server pool of addresses:
DGS-3450:admin# create dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1 end_address
10.10.10.10
Command: create dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1 end_address 10.10.10.10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete dhcp excluded_address
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete IP addresses that have been configured as excluded from the DHCP Server pool of addresses.
delete dhcp excluded_address [begin_address <ipaddr> end_address <ipaddr> | all]
This command will allow the user to delete a previously set IP address, or a range of IP addresses that are NOT to be included in the range of IP addresses that the Switch will allot to clients requesting DHCP service.
begin_address <ipaddr>
− Enter the beginning IP address of the range of IP addresses to be deleted from the excluded IP address list, from the DHCP pool.
end_address <ipaddr>
− Enter the ending IP address of the range of IP addresses to be deleted from the excluded IP address list, from the DHCP pool. all – Enter this command to delete all excluded IP addresses, from the DHCP pool.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete IP addresses that have been configured as excluded from the DHCP server pool of addresses:
175
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# delete dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1 end_address
10.10.10.10
Command: delete dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1 end_address 10.10.10.10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcp excluded_address
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the excluded IP addresses of the DHCP server function.
show dhcp excluded_address
This command is used to display the excluded IP addresses of the DHCP server function.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the DHCP server settings:
DGS-3450:admin#show dhcp excluded_address
Command: show dhcp excluded_address
Index Begin_Address End_Address
----- ------------ ------------
1 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.10
Total Entry: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcp pool
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the DHCP pool information.
show dhcp pool {<pool_name 12>}
This command is used to display the DHCP pool information. Entering the command without the pool name will display all DHCP pool information on the switch.
<pool_name 12> – Enter the name of the DHCP pool for which to view DHCP pool information.
None.
Example usage:
To display the DHCP pool information:
176
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show dhcp pool Floor2
Command: show dhcp pool Floor2
Pool Name :Floor2
Network Address :10.0.0.0/8
Domain Name :
DNS Server Address :0.0.0.0
NetBIOS Name Server :0.0.0.0
NetBIOS Node Type :Broadcast
Default Router :0.0.0.0
Pool Lease :1 Days, 0 Hours, 0 Minutes
Boot File :
Next Server :0.0.0.0
Option 43 :
Option Profile :
Total Pool Entry: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp pool option_43
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to add or delete a DHCP option 43 for a DHCP server pool.
config dhcp pool option_43 <pool_name 12> [add string <mutiword 255> | delete]
This command is used to add or delete DHCP Option 43. The DHCP server may contain this option in the DHCP reply according to Option 55 in the client’s request packet
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
add - Specify to add the DHCP Option 43 string to a DHCP pool.
string <mutiword 255> - Specify the DHCP Option 43 string to be added.
delete - Specify to delete the DHCP Option 43 string.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add a DHCP Option 43 for a DHCP pool:
DGS-3450:admin#config dhcp pool option_43 pool1 add string "abc"
Command: config dhcp pool option_43 pool1 add string "abc"
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp pool option_profile
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to apply an option profile to a specific DHCP pool.
config dhcp pool option_profile <pool_name 12> [add | delete] <profile_name 12>
This command associate an option profile with a specific DHCP pool. Each DHCP pool can only assign one DHCP option profile. The option(s) that exceed(s) 312 bytes will be cut.
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
add - Specifies to add an option profile to the DHCP pool.
177
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcp pool option_profile
Restrictions
delete - Specifies to delete an option profile from the DHCP pool.
<profile_name 12> - Enter the profile name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add an option profile for DHCP profile1 in pool1, and display DHCP pool information:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp pool option_profile pool1 add profile1
Command: config dhcp pool option_profile pool1 add profile1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
Example usage:
To delete an option profile from a DHCP pool:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcp pool option_profile pool1 delete profile1
Command: config dhcp pool option_profile pool1 delete profile1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create dhcp option_profile
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create a DHCP option profile.
create dhcp option_profile <profile_name 12>
This command is used to create a DHCP option profile with a name that is a symbolic string
(such as “profile1”). Create a DHCP option profile in which you can configure DHCP options.
<profile_name 12> - Enter the profile name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a DHCP option profile:
DGS-3450:admin#create dhcp option_profile profile1
Command: create dhcp option_profile profile1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete dhcp option_profile
Purpose
Syntax
Used to delete a DHCP option profile.
delete dhcp option_profile <profile_name 12>
178
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete dhcp option_profile
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to delete a DHCP option profile.
<profile_name 12> - Enter the profile name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a DHCP option profile:
DGS-3450:admin#delete dhcp option_profile profile1
Command: delete dhcp option_profile profile1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcp option_profile
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure an option to DHCP server option profile.
config dhcp option_profile <profile_name 12> [add option <value 1-254> [string
<mutiword 255> | hex <string 254>] | delete option <value 1-254>]
This command is used to configure an option to DHCP server option profile.
<profile_name 12> - Enter the profile name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
add - Specifies to add an option to the DHCP server option profile.
option <value 1-254> - Specfies the option index.
string <mutiword 255> - Specifies the option string.
hex <string 254> - Specifies the hexadecimal string.
delete - Specifies to delete an option from the DHCP server option profile.
option <value 1-254> - Specfies the option index.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add option 55 using hex format:
DGS-3450:admin#admin#config dhcp option_profile profile1 add option 55 hex
4d53465420352e30
Command: config dhcp option_profile profile1 add option 55 hex 4d53465420352e30
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To add option 56 using string format:
179
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#config dhcp option_profile profile1 add option 56 string "11-22-33-44-55-
66"
Command: config dhcp option_profile profile1 add option 56 string "11-22-33-44-55-66"
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcp option_profile
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current DHCP option profile configuration.
show dhcp option_profile {<profile_name 12>}
This command is used to display the current DHCP option profile configuration.
<profile_name 12> - Enter the profile name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
None.
Example usage:
To display the current DHCP option profile configuration:
DGS-3450:admin#show dhcp option_profile
Command: show dhcp option_profile
DHCP Option Profile Name : profile1
Option Type Value
------ ------ ------------------------------------------------------------
55 hex 4d53465420352e30
56 string 11-22-33-44-55-66
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
180
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
23
DHCP
V
6 C
LIENT
C
OMMANDS
The DHCPv6 Client commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
debug dhcpv6_client state debug dhcpv6_client output debug dhcpv6_client packet
Parameters
[enable | disable]
[buffer | console]
{all | receiving| sending} state [enable | disable]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
debug dhcpv6_client state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Enable or disable the DHCPv6 client debug function.
debug dhcpv6_client state [enable | disable]
Use this command to enable or disable the DHCPv6 client debug function.
state - See below:
enable - Enable the DHCPv6 client debug function.
disable - Disable the DHCPv6 client debug function.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enabled the DHCPv6 client debug function:
DGS-3450:admin# debug dhcpv6_client state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_client state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug dhcpv6_client output
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to set the debug message to output to buffer or console.
debug dhcpv6_client output [buffer | console]
Set message output to buffer or console.
buffer - Let the debug message output to buffer.
console - Let the debug message output to console.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set debug information to output to console:
181
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# debug dhcpv6_client output console
Command: debug dhcpv6_client output console
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug dhcpv6_client packet
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable or disable the debug information flag for DHCPv6 client packets, including packet receiving and sending.
debug dhcpv6_client packet {all | receiving| sending} state [enable | disable]
Enable or disable the debug information flag for DHCPv6 client packets, including packet receiving and sending.
all - Set packet receiving and sending debug flags.
receiving - Set packet receiving debug flag.
sending - Set packet sending debug flag.
enable - Enable the designated flags.
disable - Disable the designated flags.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable DHCPv6client packet sending debug flags:
DGS-3450:admin# debug dhcpv6_client packet sending state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_client packet sending state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
182
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
24
DHCP
V
6 R
ELAY
C
OMMANDS
The DHCPv6 Relay commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config dhcpv6_relay hop_count
Parameters
<value 1-32> config dhcpv6_relay config dhcpv6_relay ipif show dhcpv6_relay enable dhcpv6_relay disable dhcpv6_relay debug dhcpv6_relay state
[add | delete] ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr>
[<ipif_name 12> | all] state [enable | disable]
{ipif <ipif_name 12>}
[enable | disable] debug dhcpv6_relay output debug dhcpv6_relay packet
[buffer | console]
{all | receiving | sending} state [enable | disable] debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state [enable | disable]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config dhcpv6_relay hop_count
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the DHCPv6 relay hop count of the switch.
config dhcpv6_relay hop_count <value 1-32>
This command is used to configure the DHCPv6 relay hop count of the switch.
hop_count - The hop count is the number of relay agents that have to be relayed in this message. The range is 1 to 32. The default value is 4.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the maximum hops of a DHCPv6 relay packet that can be transferred to 4:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcpv6_relay hop_count 4
Command: config dhcpv6_relay hop_count 4
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcpv6_relay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
This command is used to add or delete a destination IP address to or from the switch’s
DHCPv6 relay table.
config dhcpv6_relay [add | delete] ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr>
This command can add or delete an IPv6 destination address to forward (relay) DHCPv6 packets.
183
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcpv6_relay
Parameters
Restrictions
add - Add an IPv6 destination to the DHCPv6 relay table.
delete - Delete an IPv6 destination from the DHCPv6 relay table
ipif_name - The name of the IP interface in which DHCPv6 relay is to be enabled.
ipv6addr - The DHCPv6 server IP address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add a DHCPv6 server to the relay table:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcpv6_relay add ipif System 2001:DB8:1234:0:218:FEFF:FEFB:CC0E
Command: config dhcpv6_relay add ipif System 2001:DB8:1234:0:218:FEFF:FEFB:CC0E
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcpv6_relay ipif
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the DHCPv6 relay state of one or all of the specified interfaces.
config dhcpv6_relay ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] state [enable | disable]
This command is used to configure the DHCPv6 relay state of one or all of the specified interfaces.
ipif_name - The name of the IP interface. The value all indicates all configured IP interfaces.
state - See below:
enable - Choose this parameter to enable the DHCPv6 relay state of the interface.
disable - Choose this parameter to disable the DHCPv6 relay state of the interface.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the DHCPv6 relay state of the System interface to enable:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcpv6_relay ipif System state enable
Command: config dhcpv6_relay ipif System state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcpv6_relay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command displays the current DHCPv6 relay configuration.
show dhcpv6_relay {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
This command will display the current DHCPv6 relay configuration of all interfaces, or if an IP interface name is specified, the DHCPv6 relay configuration for that IP interface.
ipif_name - The name of the IP interface that will be displayed in the current DHCPv6 relay configuration.
184
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show dhcpv6_relay
Restrictions
If no IP interface is specified, all configured DHCPv6 relay interfaces will be displayed.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
This is an example to show the DHCPv6 relay configuration of all interfaces:
DGS-3450:admin#show dhcpv6_relay
Command: show dhcpv6_relay
DHCPv6 Relay Global State : Disabled
DHCPv6 Hops Count Limit : 4
---------------------------------------------------------------
IP Interface : System
DHCPv6 Relay Status : Enabled
Server Address :
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
To show the DHCPv6 relay configuration of the System interface:
DGS-3450:admin#show dhcpv6_relay ipif System
Command: show dhcpv6_relay ipif System
DHCPv6 Relay Global State : Disabled
DHCPv6 Hops Count Limit : 4
---------------------------------------------------------------
IP Interface : System
DHCPv6 Relay Status : Enabled
Server Address :
DGS-3450:admin#
enable dhcpv6_relay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the DHCPv6 relay function on the Switch.
enable dhcpv6_relay
This command is used to enable the DHCPv6 relay global state on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the DHCPv6 relay global state to enable:
185
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# enable dhcpv6_relay
Command: enable dhcpv6_relay
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable dhcpv6_relay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the DHCPv6 relay function on the Switch
disable dhcpv6_relay
This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 relay global state on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the DHCPv6 relay global state to disable:
DGS-3450:admin# disable dhcpv6_relay
Command: disable dhcpv6_relay
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug dhcpv6_relay state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to enable or disable DHCPv6 relay debug functions.
debug dhcpv6_relay state [enable | disable]
This command is used to enable or disable DHCPv6 relay debug functions.
state - See below:
enable - Enable the DHCPv6 relay debug function
disable - Disable the DHCPv6 relay debug function
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enabled the DHCPv6 relay debug function:
DGS-3450:admin# debug dhcpv6_relay state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug dhcpv6_relay output
Purpose
Syntax
This command is used to set the debug message to output to a buffer or a console.
debug dhcpv6_relay output [buffer | console]
186
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
debug dhcpv6_relay output
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to set the debug message to output to a buffer or a console.
output - See below:
buffer - Let the debug message output to buffer.
console - Let the debug message output to console.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set debug information to output to a console:
DGS-3450:admin# debug dhcpv6_relay output console
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay output console
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug dhcpv6_relay packet
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to enable or disable the debug information flag of the DHCPv6 relay packet, including packets receiving and sending.
debug dhcpv6_relay packet {all | receiving | sending} state [enable | disable]
This command is used to enable or disable the debug information flag of the DHCPv6 relay packet, including packets receiving and sending.
all - Set packet receiving and sending debug flags.
receiving - Set packet receiving debug flag.
sending - Set packet sending debug flag.
enable - Enable the designated flags.
disable - Disable the designated flags.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enabled the DHCPv6 relay packet sending debug:
DGS-3450:admin# debug dhcpv6_relay packet sending state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay packet sending state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to enable or disable debug information flag about the hop count.
debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state [enable | disable]
This command is used to enable or disable debug information flag about the hop count.
hop_count - The hop count is the number of relay agents that have to be relayed in this message. The range is 1 to 32. The default value is 4.
187
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state
Restrictions
enable - Enable the hop_count state.
disable - Disable the hop_count state.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable debug information flag about the hop count:
DGS-3450:admin# debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state enalbe
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state enalbe
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
188
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
25
DHCP
V
6 S
ERVER
C
OMMANDS
The DHCPv6 Server commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create dhcpv6 pool
Parameters
<pool_name 12> delete dhcpv6 pool show dhcpv6 pool
[<pool_name 12> | all]
{<pool_name 12>} config dhcpv6 pool ipv6network_addr <pool_name 12> begin < ipv6networkaddr> end <ipv6networkaddr> config dhcpv6 pool domain_name config dhcpv6 pool dns_server config dhcpv6 pool lifetime config dhcpv6 pool manual_binding
<pool_name 12> <domain_name 255>
<pool_name 12> <ipv6addr> {<ipv6addr>}
<pool_name 12> preferred_lifetime <sec 60-4294967295> valid_lifetime <sec
60-4294967295>
<pool_name 12> [add [<ipv6addr> | <ipv6networkaddr>]client_duid <string 28> | delete [<ipv6addr>|<ipv6networkaddr> | all]] show dhcpv6 manual_binding show dhcpv6 binding clear dhcpv6 binding enable dhcpv6_server disable dhcpv6_server show dhcpv6_server
{<pool_name 12>}
{<pool_name 12>}
{<pool_name 12>}
{ipif <ipif_name 12>} config dhcpv6 pool excluded_address <pool_name 12> [ add begin < ipv6addr> end < ipv6addr > | delete [ begin < ipv6addr> end < ipv6addr> | all]] show dhcpv6 excluded_address config dhcpv6_server ipif
{<pool_name 12>}
<ipif_name 12> state [enable | disable] debug dhcpv6_server state debug dhcpv6_server packet
[enable | disable]
{all | receiving | sending} state [enable | disable] config dhcpv6 pool prefix_delegation <pool_name 12> <ipv6networkaddr> <value 1-128> <ipif_name 12>
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create dhcpv6 pool
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to create a DHCPv6 pool.
create dhcpv6 pool <pool_name 12>
This command is used to create a DHCPv6 pool for the DHCPv6 server.
<pool_name 12> - Enter a name of up to 12 alphanumeric characters to identify the pool to be created with this command.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
189
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To create a DHCPv6 pool pool1:
DGS-3450:admin# create dhcpv6 pool pool1
Command : create dhcpv6 pool pool1 success
DGS-3450:admin#
delete dhcpv6 pool
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to delete one or all DHCPv6 pools.
delete dhcpv6 pool [<pool_name 12> | all]
This command will delete a DHCPv6 pool that was created with the create dhcpv6 pool command.
pool <pool_name 12> - Enter a name of up to 12 alphanumeric characters to identify the pool to be deleted with this command.
all - If specify this parameter, all DHCPv6 pools on the Switch will be deleted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the DHCPv6 pool by specifying the pool name pool1:
DGS-3450:admin# delete dhcpv6 pool pool1
Command: delete dhcpv6 pool pool1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcpv6 pool
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to display one or all DHCPv6 pools configuration.
show dhcpv6 pool {<pool_name 12>}
This command will show one or all DHCPv6 pools configuration that were created with the create dhcpv6 pool command.
pool <pool_name 12> - Enter the name of the DHCPv6 pool for which to view the pool information.
Entering this command without the pool name will display all pools information of the
DHCPv6 server.
None.
Example usage:
To show the DHCPv6 pool by specifying the pool name pool1:
190
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show dhcpv6 pool pool1
Command: show dhcpv6 pool pool1
Pool Name : pool1
Begin Network Address : 2000::1/64
End Network Address : 2000::32/64
Domain Name : d_link.com
DNS Server Address : 2000::200
: 2000::201
Preferred Lifetime : 80 (sec)
Valid Lifetime : 100 (sec)
Total Pool Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcpv6 pool ipv6networkaddr
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the range of ipv6network address for the DHCPv6 pool
config dhcpv6 pool ipv6network_addr <pool_name 12> begin < ipv6networkaddr> end
<ipv6networkaddr>
Specify the range of ipv6network address for the DHCPv6 pool. The IPv6 addresses in the range are free to be assigned to the DHCPv6 client.
When the DHCPv6 server receives a request from the client, the server will automatically find an available pool to allocate an IPv6 address.
The begin_networkaddr and end_networkaddr must observer some rules as followed:
1. The prefix of the begin_networkaddr and end_networkaddr are not consistence, otherwise, the switch will print an error message: The prefix of begin_networkaddr and end_networkaddr must be consistence.(e.g.: the begin_networkaddr is
2000::1/64, and the end_networkaddr is 3000::100/64)
2. The begin address must not be large than end address, otherwise, the switch will print an error message: The begin IPv6 address must be lower than or equal to the end IPv6 address.(e.g.: the begin_networkaddr is 2000::200/64, and the end_networkaddr is 2000::100/64)
3. There must not be intersection between the IPv6 address ranges of two pools, otherwise, the Switch will print an error message: IPv6network address collision.
(e.g.: pool1: 2000::1/64 --- 2000::100/64, pool2: 2000::50/64 --- 2000::200/64)
4. The IPv6 network address can’t be Link-local address and Multicast address, otherwise, the Switch will print an error message: “The IPv6 network address can’t be
Link-local address or Multicast address. “ (e.g.:: pool1: FE80::1/64 --- FE80::100/64, pool2: FE80::200/64 --- FE80::300/64)
pool <pool_name 12> - Enter the previously created pool name for which to set the network address.
begin <ipv6networkaddr> - The begin IPv6network address of the DHCPv6 pool.
end < ipv6networkaddr> - The end IPv6 network address of the DHCPv6 pool.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the range of ipv6network address for the DHCPv6 pool pool1:
191
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#config dhcpv6 pool ipv6network_addr pool1 begin 2000::1/64 end 2000::32/64
Command: config dhcpv6 pool ipv6network_addr pool1 begin 2000::1/64 end 2000::32/64
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcpv6 pool domain_name
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the domain name for the DHCPv6 pool of the Switch.
config dhcpv6 pool domain_name <pool_name 12> <domain_name 255>
The domain name configured here will be used as the default domain name by the client.
By default, the domain name is empty. If domain name is empty, the domain name information will not be provided to the client.
pool <pool_name 12> - Enter the pool name for which to set the domain name.
domain_name <domain_name 255> - The domain name is used by client when resolving hostnames with DNS.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the domain name for the DHCPv6 pool pool1:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcpv6 pool domain_name pool1 d_link.com
Command: config dhcpv6 pool domain_name pool1 d_link.com
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcpv6 pool dns_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the DNS server’s IPv6 addresses for a specific DHCPv6 pool.
config dhcpv6 pool dns_server <pool_name 12> <ipv6addr> {<ipv6addr>}
This command is used to configure the DNS server IPv6 addresses for a specific DHCPv6 pool. Users may add up to two DNS Server addresses.
If DNS server is not specified, the DNS server information will not be provided to the client.
Users could delete a DNS server address in the method of setting the DNS server address to zero.
For example, users first add two DNS server address: 2000::200, 2000::201, and then delete the DNS server address 2000::200. The procedure is as followed:
Command: config dhcpv6 pool dns_server pool1 2000::200 2000::201
config dhcpv6 pool dns_server pool1 ::
<pool_name 12> - Enter the pool name for which to add one or two DNS server addresses.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the DNS server IPv6 address for this pool. Users may specify up to two
DNS server addresses.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
192
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To configure the DNS server address for a DHCPv6 pool:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcpv6 pool dns_server pool1 2000::200 2000::201
Command: config dhcpv6 pool dns_server pool1 2000::200 2000::201
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcpv6 pool lifetime
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the preferred-lifetime and valid-lifetime of IPv6 address within a DHCPv6 pool.
config dhcpv6 pool lifetime <pool_name 12> preferred_lifetime <sec 60-4294967295> valid_lifetime <sec 60-4294967295>
within a DHCPv6 pool.
preferred lifetime - the length of time that a valid address is preferred (i.e., the time until deprecation). When the preferred lifetime expires, the address becomes deprecated.
valid lifetime - the length of time an address remains in the valid state (i.e., the time until invalidation). When the valid lifetime expires, the address becomes invalid.
The valid lifetime must be greater than or equal to the preferred lifetime.
pool <pool_name 12> - Enter the previously created pool name for which to set the preferredlifetime and valid-lifetime of IPv6 address.
preferred_lifetime <sec 60-4294967295> - The amount of time (in seconds) that the IPv6 address, based on the specified pool, remains in preferred state.
valid_lifetime <sec 60-4294967295> - The amount of time (in seconds) that the IPv6 address, based on the specified pool, remains in valid state.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the preferred-lifetime and valid-lifetime for the DHCPv6 pool:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcpv6 pool lifetime pool1 preferred_lifetime 80 valid_lifetime
100
Command: config dhcpv6 pool lifetime pool1 preferred_lifetime 80 valid_lifetime 100
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcpv6 pool manual_binding
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to configure a DHCPv6 pool manual binding entry.
config dhcpv6 pool manual_binding <pool_name 12> [add [<ipv6addr> |
<ipv6networkaddr>]client_duid <string 28> | delete [<ipv6addr>|<ipv6networkaddr> | all]]
An address binding is a mapping between the IPv6 address and DUID (A DHCPv6 Unique
Identifier for a DHCPv6 participant) of a client.
The IPv6 address specified in the manual binding entry must be in the range of the DHCPv6 pool. If the user specifies a conflict IPv6 address, error message (#9) will be returned.
pool <pool_name 12> - Enter the name of the previously created pool that will contain the
193
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcpv6 pool manual_binding
Restrictions manual binding entry.
add <ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address to be statically bound to a device.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 prefix to be statically bound to a device.
client_duid <string 28> - Enter the DUID of the device to be statically bound to the IPv6 address entered in the previous field. The DUID string must be '0--9', 'a--f' or ' A--F'.
delete - To delete the manual binding entry.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the manual binding entry to be deleted.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 prefix of the manual binding entry to be deleted.
all - Enter this command to delete all manual binding entries for the given pool.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add a manual binding DHCPv6 entry:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcpv6 pool manual_binding pool1 add 2000::3 client_duid
00010006124dd5840021918d4d9f
Command: config dhcpv6 pool manual_binding pool1 add 2000::3 client_duid
00010006124dd5840021918d4d9f success
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcpv6 manual_binding
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to display the manual binding settings.
show dhcpv6 manual_binding {<pool_name 12>}
This command will display the manual binding entries for the selected or all DHCPv6 pools.
pool <pool_name 12> - Enter the name of the DHCPv6 pool for which to view manual binding entries.
Entering this command without the pool name will display all manual binding entries of the
DHCPv6 server.
None.
Example usage:
To display the manual binding entries of the DHCPv6 pool pool1:
194
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show dhcpv6 manual_binding
Command: show dhcpv6 manual_binding
Pool Name: pool1
Entry 1
IPv6 Address : 3000::21
DUID : 00010006124dd584002191454d33
Entry 2
IPv6 Address : 3000::28
DUID : 000300060022d7e50900
Pool Name: pool2
Entry 1
IPv6 Address : 8000:1000:1000:1000:1000:1000:1000:2000
DUID : 00010006124dd584002191454d37
Total Entries: 3
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcpv6 binding
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to show the DHCPv6 dynamic binding information.
show dhcpv6 binding {<pool_name 12>}
This command is used to display the DHCPv6 dynamic binding information. Entering the command without the pool name will display all information regarding DHCPv6 dynamic binding on the switch.
This command only displays the dynamic binding information, not including manual binding information.
<pool_name 12> - Enter the name of the DHCPv6 pool for which to view dynamic binding information.
Entering this command without the pool name will display all dynamic binding entries of the
DHCPv6 server.
None.
Example usage:
To display the DHCPv6 dynamic binding information on the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# show dhcpv6 binding
Command: show dhcpv6 binding
Pool Name: pool1 Ipv6 Address : 2000::3
DUID : 00010006124dd5840021918d4d9f
Preferred(s) : 604800 Valid(s): 2592000
Pool Name: pool1 Ipv6 Address : 2000::1
DUID : 00010006124dd5840021918d8865
Preferred(s) : 620 Valid(s): 800
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3450:admin#
195
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
clear dhcpv6 binding
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to clear the DHCPv6 dynamic binding information.
clear dhcpv6 binding {<pool_name 12>}
This command is used to clear the DHCPv6 dynamic binding information, not including manual binding information. Users could use command (4-1-8) to delete the manual binding information.
<pool_name 12> - Enter the name of the DHCPv6 pool for which to clear the dynamic binding information.
If not specify the parameter, it will delete all dynamic binding entries of the DHCPv6 server.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear the DHCPv6 dynamic binding information on the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# clear dhcpv6 binding
Command: clear dhcpv6 binding
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable dhcpv6_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to enable the DHCPv6 server function on the Switch.
enable dhcpv6_server
This command is used to enable the DHCPv6 server global state on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the DHCPv6 server global state to enable:
DGS-3450:admin# enable dhcpv6_server
Command: enable dhcpv6_server
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable dhcpv6_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 server function on the Switch.
disable dhcpv6_server
This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 server global state on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
196
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To configure the DHCPv6 server global state to disable:
DGS-3450:admin# disable dhcpv6_server
Command: disable dhcpv6_server
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcpv6_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to display the DHCPv6 server setting.
show dhcpv6_server {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
This command will display the DHCPv6 server settings.
ipif <ipif_name 12> - The name of the IP interface.
None.
Example usage:
To display the DHCPv6 server setting:
DGS-3450:admin# show dhcpv6_server
Command: show dhcpv6_server
DHCPv6 Server Global State: Disabled
---------------------------------------------------------------
IP Interface : System
DHCPv6 Server State : Enabled
IP Interface : ipif1
DHCPv6 Server State : Enabled
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcpv6 pool excluded_address
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to configure the reserved IPv6 addresses on the DHCPv6 server
config dhcpv6 pool excluded_address <pool_name 12> [ add begin < ipv6addr> end < ipv6addr > | delete [ begin < ipv6addr> end < ipv6addr> | all]]
This command will configure the IPv6 addresses range that the DHCPv6 server should not assign to DHCPv6 client. The excluded address range must be the subset of the specified pool.
pool <pool_name 12> - Enter the name of the DHCPv6 pool for which to add/delete the excluded address information.
add - Add an excluded address range for a specified pool.
delete - Delete one or all excluded address ranges of a specified pool.
begin <ipv6addr> - Enter the beginning IPv6 address of the range of IPv6 addresses to be excluded from the DHCPv6 pool.
end <ipv6addr> - Enter the ending IPv6 address of the range of IPv6 addresses to be excluded from the DHCPv6 pool.
197
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcpv6 pool excluded_address
Restrictions
all - Delete all excluded address ranges of a specified pool.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add the IPv6 addresses range that DHCPv6 server should not assign to clients:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcpv6 pool excluded_address pool1 add begin 2000::3 end 2000::8
Command: config dhcpv6 pool excluded_address pool1 add begin 2000::3 end 2000::8
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dhcpv6 excluded_address
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to display the groups of IPv6 addresses which are excluded from the legal assigned IPv6 address
show dhcpv6 excluded_address {<pool_name 12>}
This command will display the groups of IPv6 addresses which are excluded from the legal assigned IPv6 address.
<pool_name 12> - Enter the name of the DHCPv6 pool for which to display the excluded address information.
If not specify the pool name, It will display all pool’s excluded address information.
None.
Example usage:
To display the excluded address information:
198
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show dhcpv6 excluded_address
Command: show dhcpv6 excluded_address
Pool1
Range 1
Begin Address: 2000::2
End Address : 2000::5
Range 2
Begin Address: 2000::8
End Address : 2000::8
Pool name: Pool2
Range 1
Begin Address: 3000::2
End Address : 3000::5
Range 2
Begin Address: 3000::8
End Address : 3000::8
Range 3
Begin Address: 3000::18
End Address : 3000::20
Total Entries : 5
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcpv6_server ipif
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the DHCPv6 Server state per interface
config dhcpv6_server ipif <ipif_name 12> state [enable | disable]
This command configures the DHCPv6 Server state on the IP interface.
ipif <ipif_name 12> - The name of the IP interface.
state - See below:
enable - Enable the dhcpv6 server state for a specified interface.
disable - Disable the dhcpv6 server state for a specified interface.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the DHCPv6 Server state of System Interface to enable:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcpv6_server ipif System state enable
Command: config dhcpv6_server ipif System state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug dhcpv6_server state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
This command is used to enable or disable DHCPv6 server debug functions.
debug dhcpv6_server state [enable | disable]
This command is used to enable or disable DHCPv6 server debug functions.
199
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
debug dhcpv6_server state
Parameters
Restrictions
state - See below:
enable - Enable the DHCPv6 server debug function
disable - Disable the DHCPv6 server debug function
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enabled the DHCPv6 server debug function:
DGS-3450:admin# debug dhcpv6_server state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_server state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug dhcpv6_server packet
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to enable or disable the debug information flag of the DHCPv6 server packet, including packets receiving and sending.
debug dhcpv6_server packet {all | receiving | sending} state [enable | disable]
This command is used to enable or disable the debug information flag of the DHCPv6 server packet, including packets receiving and sending.
all - Set packet receiving and sending debug flags.
receiving - Set packet receiving debug flag.
sending - Set packet sending debug flag.
enable - Enable the designated flags.
disable - Disable the designated flags.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enabled the DHCPv6 server packet sending debug:
DGS-3450:admin# debug dhcpv6_server packet sending state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_server packet sending state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dhcpv6 pool prefix_delegation
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the range of ipv6network address or prefix delegation for the DHCPv6 pool.
config dhcpv6 pool prefix_delegation <pool_name 12> <ipv6networkaddr> <value 1-
128> <ipif_name 12>
This command is used to configure the range of ipv6network address or prefix delegation for the DHCPv6 pool.
<pool_name 12> - Enter the pool name here. This can be up to 12 characters long.
200
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dhcpv6 pool prefix_delegation
Restrictions
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 networks address of the DHCPv6 pool here.
<value 1-128> - Enter the prefix length value here. This can be between 1 and 128.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This can be up to 12 characters long.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To To create a DHCPv6 prefix pool prefixpool1 for interface System:
DGS-3450:admin# config dhcpv6 pool prefix_delegation prefixpool1 1111::/48 64 System
Command: config dhcpv6 pool prefix_delegation prefixpool1 1111::/48 64 System
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
201
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
26
D
IGITAL
D
IAGNOSTIC
M
ONITORING
(DDM) C
OMMANDS
This DDM UI specification describes the Digital Diagnostic Monitoring functionality and specifications based on SFF-8472 standard. Functions of this software module apply on L2 and L3 Ethernet switches, which contain SFP interface.
The Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config ddm ports config ddm log config ddm trap config ddm power_unit show ddm ports show ddm ports show ddm
Parameters
[<portlist> | all ] [[temperature_threshold {high_alarm <float>| low_alarm <float> | high_warning <float> | low_warning <float>} | voltage_threshold {high_alarm
<float> | low_alarm <float> | high_warning <float> | low_warning <float>} | bias_current_threshold {high_alarm <float> | low_alarm <float> | high_warning
<float> | low_warning <float>} | tx_power_threshold {high_alarm <mw_or_dbm>
| low_alarm <mw_or_dbm> | high_warning <mw_or_dbm> | low_warning
<mw_or_dbm>} | rx_power_threshold {high_alarm <mw_or_dbm> | low_alarm
<mw_or_dbm> | high_warning <mw_or_dbm> | low_warning <mw_or_dbm>}] |
{state[enable|disable] | shutdown [alarm | warning | none]}]
[enable | disable]
[enable | disable]
[mw |dbm]
{<portlist>} status
{<portlist>} configuration
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config ddm ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the DDM settings of the specified ports.
config ddm ports [<portlist> | all] temperature_threshold { high_alarm < float > | low_alarm < float > | high_warning < float > | low_warning < float >} (1)
The command is used to configure the DDM settings of the specified ports.
<portlist> - Enter the range of ports to be configured here.
all - Specify that all the optic ports’ operating parameters will be configured.
temperature_threshold - Specify the threshold of the optic module’s temperature in centigrade. At least one parameter shall be specified for this threshold.
high_alarm - Specify the high threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<float> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
low_alarm - Specify the low threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<float> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
high_warning - Specify the high threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<float> - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
low_warning - Specify the low threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<float> - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
voltage_threshold - Specify the threshold of optic module’s voltage.
202
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ddm ports
high_alarm - Specify the high threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<float> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
low_alarm - Specify the low threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<float> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
high_warning - Specify the high threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<float> - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
low_warning - Specify the low threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<float> - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
bias_current_threshold - Specify the threshold of the optic module’s bias current.
high_alarm - Specify the high threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<float> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
low_alarm - Specify the low threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<float> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
high_warning - Specify the high threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<float> - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
low_warning - Specify the low threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<float> - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
tx_power_threshold - Specify the threshold of the optic module’s output power.
high_alarm - Specify the high threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<mw_or_dbm> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
low_alarm - Specify the low threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<mw_or_dbm> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
high_warning - Specify the high threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<mw_or_dbm > - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
low_warning - Specify the low threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<mw_or_dbm > - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
rx_power_threshold - Specify the threshold of optic module’s received power.
high_alarm - Specify the high threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<mw_or_dbm > - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
low_alarm - Specify the low threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<mw_or_dbm > - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
high_warning - Specify the high threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<mw_or_dbm > - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
low_warning - Specify the low threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<mw_or_dbm > - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
state - Specify the DDM state to enable or disable. If the state is disabled, no DDM action will
203
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ddm ports
Restrictions take effect.
enable - Specify to enable the DDM state.
disable - Specify to disable the DDM state.
shutdown - Specify whether or not to shutdown the port when the operating parameter exceeds the corresponding alarm threshold or warning threshold. The default value is none.
alarm - Shutdown the port when the configured alarm threshold range is exceeded.
warning - Shutdown the port when the configured warning threshold range is exceeded.
none - The port will never shutdown regardless if the threshold ranges are exceeded or not.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the port 9’s temperature threshold:
DGS-3450:admin# config ddm ports 9 temperature_threshold high_alarm 84.9555 low_alarm -10 high_warning 70 low_warning 2.2525
Command: config ddm ports 9 temperature_threshold high_alarm 84.9555 low_alarm -10
high_warning 70 low_warning 2.2525
According to the DDM precision definition, closest value 84.9531 and 2.25 are cho sen.
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure the port 9’s voltage threshold:
DGS-3450:admin# config ddm ports 9 voltage_threshold high_alarm 4.25 low_alarm 2.5 hi gh_warning 3.5 low_warning 3
Command: config ddm ports 9 voltage_threshold high_alarm 4.25 low_alarm 2.5 high_w arning 3.5 low_warning 3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure the port 9’s bias current threshold:
DGS-3450:admin# config ddm ports 9 bias_current_threshold high_alarm 7.25 low_alarm 0.004 high_warning 0.5 low_warning 0.008
Command: config ddm ports 9 bias_current_threshold high_alarm 7.25 low_alarm 0.004
high_warning 0.5 low_warning 0.008
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure the port 9’s transmit power threshold:
204
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config ddm ports 9 tx_power_threshold high_alarm 0.625 low_alarm 0.006 high_warning 0.55 low_warning 0.008
Command: config ddm ports 9 tx_power_threshold high_alarm 0.625 low_alarm 0.006 hi gh_warning 0.55 low_warning 0.008
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure the port 9’s receive power threshold:
DGS-3450:admin# :config ddm ports 9 rx_power_threshold high_alarm 4.55 low_alarm 0.01 high_warning 3.5 low_warning 0.03
Command: config ddm ports 9 rx_power_threshold high_alarm 4.55 low_alarm 0.01 high
_warning 3.5 low_warning 0.03
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure the port 11’s actions associate with alarm:
DGS-3450:admin# config ddm ports 11 state enable shutdown alarm
Command: config ddm ports 11 state enable shutdown alarm
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ddm log
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Enable or disable log action when the SFP exceed its DDM threshold.
config ddm log [enable | disable]
The command configures the DDM log action when encounter an exceeding alarm or warning thresholds event
log - Specifies whether or not to send log, when the operating parameter exceeds the corresponding threshold.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the port 11’s log state to enable:
DGS-3450:admin# config ddm log enable
Command: config ddm log enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ddm trap
Purpose
Syntax
Enable or disable trap action when the SFP exceed its DDM threshold.
config ddm trap [enable | disable]
205
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ddm trap
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
The command configures the DDM trap action when encounter an exceeding alarm or warning thresholds event.
trap - Specifies whether or not to send trap, when the operating parameter exceeds the corresponding threshold.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the port 11’s trap state to enable:
DGS-3450:admin# config ddm trap enable
Command: config ddm trap enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ddm power_unit
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the unit of DDM TX/RX power.
config ddm power_unit [mw |dbm]
The command is used to configure the DDM TX/RX power unit globally.
power_unit – Specify the unit of DDM TX/RX power. If the unit has been set, the display message and configure value of TX/RX power use the same unit.The default unit is mW.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the unit of DDM TX/RX power:
DGS-3450:admin#config ddm power_unit dbm
Command: config ddm power_unit dbm
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ddm ports status
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the current operating DDM parameters values of the SFP module of the specified ports.
show ddm ports {<portlist> } status
The command displays the current operating parameters of the SFP modules.
portlist - Specified a range of ports to be displayed. (UnitID:port number).
If ‘all’ parameter is chosen, all SFP ports’ operating parameters will be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To show the port 10-12’s operating parameters:
206
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show ddm ports 10-12 status
Command: show ddm ports 10-12 status
Port Temperature Voltage Bias Current TX Power RX Power
(in Celsius) (V) (mA) (mW) (mW)
------ ------------- --------- ------------- ---------- -----------
10 - - - - -
11 21.5 2.5 50 3 4
12 - - - - -
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
show ddm ports configuration
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current configurations of the digital diagnostics monitoring function
show ddm ports {<portlist>} configuration
The command displays the current configurations of the SFP modules. There are two types of threshold, the administrative configuration and the operation configuration threshold.
For the SFP port, when a particular threshold was configured by user, it will be shown on this command with a tag indicate that it is a threshold that user configured, else it would be the threshold read from the SFP module that is being inserted.
portlist - Specified a range of ports to be displayed. (UnitID: port number).
If ‘all’ parameter is chosen, all SFP ports’ operating parameters will be displayed
None.
Example usage:
To show the port 11’s configuration:
DGS-3450:admin# show ddm ports 11 configuration
Command: show ddm ports 11 configuration
Port 11
-----------------------------------
DDM state : Enabled
Shutdown : Alarm
Threshold Temperature Voltage Bias-Current TX-Power RX-Power
(in Celsius) (V) (mA) (mW) (mW)
----------- ------------ -------- -------------- --------- ---------
High Alarm 85(A) 6.55 7.25(A) 0.625 4.5
Low Alarm -10 2.5 0.004 0.006(A) 0.01
High Warning 70(A) 3.5(A) 6 0.5 3.5(A)
Low Warning 0 3 0.006(A) 0.008 0.03
A means that the threshold is administratively configured.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ddm
Purpose
Syntax
Used to display the DDM global setting.
show ddm
207
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show ddm
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
The command displays the DDM global setting.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the global DDM setting:
DGS-3450:admin# show ddm
Command: show ddm
DDM Log : Enabled
DDM Trap : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
208
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
27
D-L
INK
S
INGLE
IP M
ANAGEMENT
C
OMMANDS
Simply put, D-Link Single IP Management is a concept that will stack switches together over Ethernet instead of using stacking ports or modules. Switches using D-Link Single IP Management (labeled here as SIM) must conform to the following rules:
SIM is an optional feature on the Switch and can easily be enabled or disabled. SIM grouping has no effect on the normal operation of the Switch in the user’s network.
There are three classifications for switches using SIM. The Commander Switch(CS), which is the master switch of the group, Member Switch(MS), which is a switch that is recognized by the CS a member of a SIM group, and a Candidate
Switch (CaS), which is a switch that has a physical link to the SIM group but has not been recognized by the CS as a member of the SIM group.
A SIM group can only have one Commander Switch(CS). All switches in a particular SIM group must be in the same IP subnet (broadcast domain). Members of a SIM group cannot cross a router. A SIM group accepts up to 33 switches
(numbered 0-32), including the Commander Switch (numbered 0). There is no limit to the number of SIM groups in the same IP subnet (broadcast domain), however a single switch can only belong to one group. If multiple VLANs are configured, the SIM group will only utilize the management VLAN on any switch. SIM allows intermediate devices that do not support SIM. This enables the user to manage a switch that are more than one hop away from the CS.
The SIM group is a group of switches that are managed as a single entity. The DGS-3400 Series may take on three different roles:
1. Commander Switch (CS) – This is a switch that has been manually configured as the controlling device for a group, and takes on the following characteristics: a. It has an IP Address. b. It is not a Commander Switch or Member Switch of another Single IP group. c. It is connected to the Member Switches through its management VLAN.
2. Member Switch (MS) – This is a switch that has joined a single IP group and is accessible from the CS, and it takes on the following characteristics: a. It is not a CS or MS of another IP group. b. It is connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN.
3. Candidate Switch (CaS) – This is a switch that is ready to join a SIM group but is not yet a member of the SIM group. The Candidate Switch may join the SIM group through an automatic function of the DGS-3400, or by manually configuring it to be a MS of a SIM group. A switch configured as a CaS is not a member of a SIM group and will take on the following characteristics: a. It is not a CS or MS of another Single IP group. b. It is connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN.
The following rules also apply to the above roles:
1. Each device begins in the Candidate state.
2. CSs must change their role to CaS and then to MS, to become a MS of a SIM group. Thus the CS cannot directly be converted to a MS.
3. The user can manually configure a CS to become a CaS.
4. A MS can become a CaS by: a. Being configured as a CaS through the CS. b. If report packets from the CS to the MS time out.
5. The user can manually configure a CaS to become a CS
6. The CaS can be configured through the CS to become a MS.
209
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
After configuring one switch to operate as the CS of a SIM group, additional xStack
®
DGS-3400 series switches may join the group by either an automatic method or by manually configuring the Switch to be a MS. The CS will then serve as the in band entry point for access to the MS. The CS’s IP address will become the path to all MS’s of the group and the CS’s
Administrator’s password, and/or authentication will control access to all MS’s of the SIM group.
With SIM enabled, the applications in the CS will redirect the packet instead of executing the packets. The applications will decode the packet from the administrator, modify some data, then send it to the MS. After execution, the CS may receive a response packet from the MS, which it will encode and send back to the administrator.
When a switch becomes MS of one SIM group, it automatically becomes a member of the first SNMP community (include read/write and read only) to which the CS of this group belongs. However if a MS has its own IP address, it can belong to
SNMP communities to which itself belong.
The Upgrade to v1.6
To better improve SIM management, the xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series switches have been upgraded to version 1.6 in this release. Many improvements have been made, including:
The Commander Switch (CS) now has the capability to automatically rediscover member switches that have left the SIM group, either through a reboot or web malfunction. This feature is accomplished through the use of Discover packets and
Maintain packets that previously set SIM members will emit after a reboot. Once a MS has had its MAC address and password saved to the CS’s database, if a reboot occurs in the MS, the CS will keep this MS information in its database and when a MS has been rediscovered, it will add the MS back into the SIM tree automatically. No configuration will be necessary to rediscover these switches. There are some instances where pre-saved MS switches cannot be rediscovered. For example, if the Switch is still powered down, if it has become the member of another group, or if it has been configured to be a Commander Switch, the rediscovery process cannot occur.
This version will support multiple switch upload and downloads for firmware, configuration files and log files, as follows:
• Firmware – The switch now supports MS firmware downloads from a TFTP server.
• Configuration Files – This switch now supports downloading and uploading of configuration files both to (for configuration restoration) and from (for configuration backup) MS’s, using a TFTP server..
• Log – The switch now supports uploading MS log files to a TFTP server.
NOTE: For more details regarding improvements made in SIMv1.6, please refer to the Single
IP Management White Paper located on the D-Link website.
The SIM commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
210
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Command
enable sim disable sim show sim reconfig config sim_group config sim download sim_ms upload sim_ms
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable sim
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable Single IP Management (SIM) on the Switch
enable sim
This command will enable SIM globally on the Switch. SIM features and functions will not function properly unless this function is enabled.
None.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable SIM on the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# enable sim
Command: enable sim
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
Parameters
{[candidates {<candidate_id 1-100>} | members {<member_id 1-32>} | group
{commander_mac <macaddr>} | neighbor]}
[member_id <value 1-32> | exit]
[add <candidate_id 1-100> {<password>} | delete <member_id 1-32>]
[[commander { group_name <groupname 64>} | candidate] | dp_interval <sec 30-
90> | hold_time <sec 100-255>]
[firmware_from_tftp | configuration_from_tftp] <ipaddr> <path_filename>
{[members <mslist 1-32> | all]}
[configuration_to_tftp | log_to_tftp] <ipaddr> <path_filename> {[members <mslist>
| all]}
disable sim
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Example usage:
To disable SIM on the Switch:
Used to disable Single IP Management (SIM) on the Switch.
disable sim
This command will disable SIM globally on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
211
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# disable sim
Command: disable sim
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show sim
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to view the current information regarding the SIM group on the Switch.
show sim {[candidates {<candidate_id 1-100>} | members {<member_id 1-32>} | group
{commander_mac <macaddr>} | neighbor]}
This command will display the current information regarding the SIM group on the Switch, including the following:
SIM Version – Displays the current Single IP Management version on the Switch.
Firmware Version – Displays the current Firmware version on the Switch.
Device Name – Displays the user-defined device name on the Switch.
MAC Address – Displays the MAC Address of the Switch.
Capabilities – Displays the type of switch, be it Layer 2 (L2) or Layer 3 (L3).
Platform – Switch Description including name and model number.
SIM State –Displays the current Single IP Management State of the Switch, whether it be enabled or disabled.
Role State – Displays the current role the Switch is taking, including Commander, Member or
Candidate.
Discovery Interval – Time in seconds the Switch will send discovery packets out over the network.
Hold time – Displays the time in seconds the Switch will hold discovery results before dropping it or utilizing it.
candidates <candidate_id 1-100> – Entering this parameter will display information concerning candidates of the SIM group. To view a specific candidate, include that candidate’s ID number, listed from 1 to 100.
members <member_id 1-32> – Entering this parameter will display information concerning members of the SIM group. To view a specific member, include that member’s id number, listed from 1 to 32.
group {commander_mac <macaddr>} – Entering this parameter will display information concerning the SIM group. To view a specific group, include the commander’s MAC address of the group.
neighbor – Entering this parameter will display neighboring devices of the Switch. A SIM neighbor is defined as a switch that is physically connected to the Switch but is not part of the
SIM group. This screen will produce the following results:
•
Port – Displays the physical port number of the commander switch where the uplink to the neighbor switch is located.
•
MAC Address – Displays the MAC Address of the neighbor switch.
•
Role – Displays the role(CS, CaS, MS) of the neighbor switch.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show the SIM information in detail:
212
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show sim
Command: show sim
SIM Version : VER-1.61
Firmware Version : 3.00.B10
Device Name :
MAC Address : 00-22-B0-DE-F0-46
Capabilities : L2
Platform : DGS-3450 L2 Switch
SIM State : Disabled
Role State : Candidate
Discovery Interval : 30 sec
Holdtime : 100 sec
DGS-3450:admin#
To show the candidate information in summary, if the candidate ID is not specified:
DGS-3450:admin# show sim candidates
Command: show sim candidates
ID MAC Address Platform / Hold Firmware Device Name
Capability Time Version
--- ---------------- ------------------ ----- --------- ---------------
2 00-55-55-00-55-00 DGS-3450 L2 Switch 140 3.00.B10 default master
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
To show the member information in summary, if the member ID is specified:
DGS-3450:admin# show sim members 1
Command: show sim members 1
== Member Information ==
Member ID : 1
Firmware Version : 3.00.B10
Device Name : The Man
MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-00
Capabilities : L2
Platform : DGS-3450 L2 Switch
Hold Time : 90 sec
To show other groups information in summary:
213
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show sim group
Command: show sim group
SIM Group Name : default
ID MAC Address Platform / Hold Firmware Device Name
Capability Time Version
--- ---------------- ------------------ ----- --------- ---------------
*1 00-01-02-03-04-00 DGS-3450 L2 Switch 40 3.00.B10 Tiberius
SIM Group Name : SIM2
ID MAC Address Platform / Hold Firmware Device Name
Capability Time Version
--- ---------------- ----------------- ----- --------- ---------------
*1 00-01-02-03-04-01 DGS-3450 L2 Switch 40 3.00.B10 Neo
‘*’ means commander switch.
DGS-3450:admin#
Example usage:
To view SIM neighbors:
DGS-3450:admin# show sim neighbor
Command: show sim neighbor
Neighbor Info Table
Port MAC Address Role
------ ------------------ ---------
23 00-35-26-00-11-99 Commander
23 00-35-26-00-11-91 Member
24 00-35-26-00-11-90 Candidate
Total Entries: 3
DGS-3450:admin#
reconfig
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to connect to a member switch, through the commander switch, using telnet.
reconfig [member_id <value 1-32> | exit]
This command is used to reconnect to a member switch using Telnet.
member_id <value 1-32> – Select the ID number of the member switch the user desires to configure.
exit – This command is used to exit from managing the member switch and will return to managing the commander switch.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
Example usage:
To connect to the MS, with member ID 2, through the CS, using the command line interface:
214
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# reconfig member_id 2
Command: reconfig member_id 2
DGS-3450:admin#
Login:
config sim_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to add candidates and delete members from the SIM group.
config sim_group [add <candidate_id 1-100> {<password>} | delete <member_id 1-32>]
This command is used to add candidates and delete members from the SIM group by ID number.
add <candidate_id 1-100> <password> – Use this parameter to change a candidate switch
(CaS) to a member switch (MS) of a SIM group. The CaS may be defined by its ID number and a password (if necessary).
delete <member_id 1-32> – Use this parameter to delete a member switch of a SIM group.
The member switch should be defined by ID number.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add a member:
DGS-3450:admin# config sim_group add 2
Command: config sim_group add 2
Please wait for ACK!!!
SIM Config Success !!!
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To delete a member:
DGS-3450:admin# config sim_group delete 1
Command: config sim_group delete 1
Please wait for ACK!!!
SIM Config Success!!!
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config sim
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure role parameters for the SIM protocol on the Switch.
config sim [[commander {group_name <groupname 64>} | candidate] | dp_interval <sec
30-90> | hold_time <sec 100-255>]
This command is used to configure parameters of switches of the SIM.
commander – Use this parameter to configure the device’s SIM role to commander (CS).
• group_name <groupname 64> – Used to update the name of the group. Enter an
215
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config sim
Restrictions alphanumeric string of up to 64 characters to rename the SIM group.
candidate – Used to change the role of a CS (commander) to a CaS (candidate).
dp_interval <30-90> – The user may set the discovery protocol interval, in seconds that the
Switch will send out SIM packets. Returning information to the CS will include information about other switches connected to it. (Ex. MS, CaS, other CS). The user may set the dp_interval from 30 to 90 seconds.
hold_time <100-255> – Using this parameter, the user may set the time in seconds, the Switch will hold information sent to it from other switches utilizing the discovery interval protocol. The user may set the hold time from 100 to 255 seconds.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
To change the time interval of the discovery protocol:
DGS-3450:admin#config sim dp_interval 40
Command: config sim dp_interval 40
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To change the hold time of the discovery protocol:
DGS-3450:admin# config sim hold_time 120
Command: config sim hold_time 120
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To transfer the CS (commander) to be a CaS (candidate):
DGS-3450:admin# config sim candidate
Command: config sim candidate
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To transfer the Switch to be a CS:
DGS-3450:admin# config sim commander
Command: config sim commander
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To update the name of a group:
216
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config sim commander group_name Demetrius
Command: config sim commander group_name Demetrius
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
download sim_ms
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to download firmware or configuration file to an indicated device.
download sim_ms [firmware_from_tftp | configuration_from_tftp] <ipaddr>
<path_filename> {[members <mslist 1-32> | all]}
This command will download a firmware file or configuration file to a specified device from a
TFTP server.
firmware_from_tftp – Specify this parameter to download firmware to members of a SIM group.
configuration_from_tftp – Specify this parameter to download a switch configuration to members of a SIM group.
<ipaddr> – Enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
<path_filename> – Enter the path and the filename of the firmware or switch on the TFTP server.
members – Enter this parameter to specify the members the user prefers to download firmware or switch configuration files to. The user may specify a member or members by adding one of the following:
<mslist 1-32> – Enter a value, or values to specify which members of the SIM group will receive the firmware or switch configuration.
all – Add this parameter to specify all members of the SIM group will receive the firmware or switch configuration.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To download firmware:
DGS-3450:admin# download sim_ms firmware_from_tftp 10.53.13.94 c:/dgs3450.had all
Command: download sim_ms firmware_from_tftp 10.53.13.94 c:/dgs3450.had all
This device is updating firmware. Please wait several minutes ...
Download Status :
ID MAC Address Result
--- ----------------- -------------
1 00-01-02-03-04-00 Success
2 00-07-06-05-04-03 Success
3 00-07-06-05-04-03 Success
DGS-3450:admin#
To download configuration files:
217
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# download sim_ms configuration_from_tftp 10.53.13.94 c:/dgs3450.txt all
Command: download sim_ms configuration_from_tftp 10.53.13.94 c:/dgs3450.txt all
This device is updating configureation. Please wait several minutes ...
Download Status :
ID MAC Address Result
--- ----------------- ----------------
1 00-01-02-03-04-00 Success
2 00-07-06-05-04-03 Success
DGS-3450:admin#
upload sim_ms
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
User to upload a configuration or log file to a TFTP server from a specified member of a SIM group.
upload sim_ms [configuration_to_tftp | log_to_tftp] <ipaddr> <path_filename>
{[members <mslist> | all]}
This command will upload a configuration or log file to a TFTP server from a specified member of a SIM group.
configuration_to_tftp – Specify this parameter if the user wishes to upload a switch configuration to members of a SIM group.
log_to_tftp – Specify this parameter to upload a switch log to members of a SIM group.
<ipaddr> – Enter the IP address of the TFTP server to upload a configuration or log file to.
<path_filename> – Enter a user-defined path and file name on the TFTP server which is used to upload files to.
members – Enter this parameter to specify the members the user prefers to upload switch configuration or log files from. The user may specify a member or members by adding one of the following:
<mslist> – Enter a value, or values to specify which members of the SIM group will upload the switch configuration or log files.
all – Add this parameter to specify all members of the SIM group will upload the switch configuration or log files.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
Example usage:
To upload configuration files to a TFTP server:
218
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450: admin#upload sim_ms configuration_to_tftp 10.55.47.1 D:\configuration.txt members 1
Command: upload sim_ms configuration_to_tftp 10.55.47.1 D:\configuration.txt memebers 1
This device is uploading configuration. Please wait several minutes ...
Upload Status :
ID MAC Address Result
--- ----------------- ----------------
1 00-01-02-03-04-00 Success
2 00-07-06-05-04-03 Success
DGS-3450:admin#
219
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
28
D-L
INK
U
NIDIRECTIONAL
L
INK
D
ETECTION
(DULD) C
OMMANDS
The D-Link Unidirectional Link Detection (DULD) Resolver commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed
(along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config duld ports show duld ports
Parameters
[<portlist> | all ] {state [enable |disable] | mode [shutdown | normal] | discovery_time <sec 5-65535>}(1)
{<portlist>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config duld ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure unidirectional link detection on port
config duld ports [<portlist> | all ] {state [enable |disable] | mode [shutdown | normal] | discovery_time <sec 5-65535>}(1)
The command used to configure unidirectional link detection on ports.
Unidirectional link detection provides discovery mechanism based on 802.3ah to discovery its neighbor. If the OAM discovery can complete in configured discovery time, it concludes the link is bidirectional. Otherwise, it starts detecting task to detect the link status.
<portlist> - Specify a range of ports.
state - Specifies these ports unidirectional link detection status. The default state is disabled.
mode - See below:
shutdown - If any unidirectional link is detected, disable the port and log an event.
normal - Only log an event when a unidirectional link is detected.
discovery_time - Specifies these ports neighbor discovery time. If the discovery is timeout, the unidirectional link detection will start. The default discovery time is 5 seconds.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable unidirectional link detection on port 1:
DGS-3450:admin# config duld ports 1 state enable
Commands: config duld ports 1 state enable
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
show duld
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to show unidirectional link detection information
show duld ports {<portlist>}
The command used to show ports unidirectional link information including:
Admin state: port’s unidirectional link detection configuration state.
Discovery Time: the neighbor discovery timer.
Link Status: port’s link detection result. It maybe
220
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show duld
Parameters
Restrictions
1. Unknown: either local or remote do not support OAM or unidirectional detection.
2. Bidirectional
3. TX Fault
4. RX Fault
5. Link Down
Oper Status: indicates the detection is operational or not.
1. Enabled: the port supports OAM and unidirectional detection and discover remote peer supporting this detection capability.
2. Disabled: either local or remote do not support OAM or unidirectional detection.
So we should enable OAM when we need to detect the unidirectional link.
<portlist> - Specify a range of ports to display.
If no port specified, all ports will be displayed.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show ports 1-4 unidirectional link detection information:
DGS-3450:admin# config duld ports 1,2,4 state enable
Commands: config duld ports 1,2,4 state enable
Success
DGS-3450:admin# show duld ports 1-4
Commands: show duld ports 1-4 port Admin State Oper Status Mode Link Status Discovery Time(Sec)
---- ----------- ----------- ---------- -------------- -------------------
1 Enabled Enabled Shutdown Bidirectional 5
2 Enabled Enabled Normal RX Fault 5
3 Enabled Enabled Normal TX Fault 5
4 Disabled Disabled Normal Unknown 5
5 Enabled Enabled Normal Link Down 5
DGS-3450:admin#
221
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
29
D
OMAIN
N
AME
S
ERVER
(DNS) R
ESOLVER
C
OMMANDS
The Domain Name Server (DNS) Resolver commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config name_server show name_server create host_name delete host_name show host_name enable dns_resolver disable dns_resolver
Parameters
[[add |delete ] <ipaddr> {primary} | timeout <second 1-60>]
<name 255> <ipaddr>
[<name 255> | all]
{static | dynamic}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config name_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the DNS Resolver name server of the switch.
config name_server [[add |delete ] <ipaddr> {primary} | timeout <second 1-60>]
The config name_server command is used to configure the DNS Resolver name server of the switch. Note that only when add a name server, the parameter “primary” will be resolved.
Other conditions won’t resolve the parameter “primary”. It means that when delete a name server, just check the IP address. If the IP address is the same to the name server’s, the name server will be deleted, don’t check the priority parameter.
When adding a name server, if one primary name server exists in the static name server table, then add a new primary name server, the existing primary name server will be changed to a normal name server. If the added primary name server’s IP address is the same to an existed normal name server’s IP address, the existing normal name server will be changed to a primary name server, but won’t add new name server. When no primary name server is specified, the first configured name server will auto change to primary name server.. If the deleted name server’s IP address equals to one of the existing name servers’ IP addresses, regardless whether a normal name server or primary name server, the name server will be deleted.
add - Add DNS Resolver name server
delete - Delete DNS Resolver name server
ipaddr - The DNS Resolver name server IP address
timeout - The maximum time waiting for a responce from a specified name server.
primary - Specify the name server is a primary name server.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add DNS Resolver primary name server 10.10.10.10:
222
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config name_server add 10.10.10.10 primary
Command: config name_server add 10.10.10.10 primary
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To delete DNS Resolver name server 10.10.10.1:
DGS-3450:admin# config name_server delete 10.10.10.10
Command: config name_server delete 10.10.10.10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure DNS Resolver name server time out to 10 seconds:
DGS-3450:admin# config name_server timeout 10
Command: config name_server timeout 10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show name_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current DNS Resolver name servers and name server time out on the switch.
show name_server
The show name_server command is used to display the current DNS Resolver name servers and name server time out on the switch.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the current DNS Resolver name servers and name server time out:
223
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show name_server
Command: show name_server
Name Server Timeout: 3 seconds
Static Name Server Table:
Server IP Address Priority
---------------------- --------------
20.20.20.20 Secondary
10.1.1.1 Primary
Dynamic Name Server Table:
Server IP Address Priority
---------------------- --------------
10.48.74.122 Primary
DGS-3450:admin#
create host_name
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create the static host name entry of the switch.
create host_name <name 255> <ipaddr>
The create host name command is used to create the static host name entry of the switch. If the created host name entry exists in the dynamic host name table, the existing dynamic host name entry will be deleted, and then add the created host name entry is added into the static host name table and a log for duplicate is recorded.
<name 255> - The host’s host name
<ipaddr> - The host’s IP address
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create static host name “www.example.com”:
DGS-3450:admin# create host_name www.example.com 10.10.10.10
Command: create host_name www.example.com 10.10.10.10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete host_name
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete the static or dynamic host name entries of the switch.
delete host_name [<name 255> | all]
The delete host_name command is used to delete the static or dynamic host name entries of the switch.
<name 255> - The host’s host name.
all - All of the static and dynamic host name entries.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
224
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To delete the static host name entry “www.example.com”:
DGS-3450:admin# delete host_name www.example.com
Command: delete host_name www.example.com
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show host_name
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current host name.
show host_name {static | dynamic}
The show host_name command is used to display the current host name entries. If the parameters for “static” and “dynamic” are not specified, both static and dynamic host name entries will be displayed.
static - Display the static host name entries
dynamic - Display the dynamic host name entries
None.
Example usage:
To display the static and dynamic host name entries:
DGS-3450:admin# show host_name
Command: show host_name
Static Host Name Table
Host Name IP Address
---------------------------------- ------------------ www.example.com 10.10.10.10 www.exampla.com 20.20.20.20
Total Static Entries: 2
Dynamic Host Name Table
Host Name IP Address TTL
---------------------------------- --------------- ------------ www.examplc.com 30.30.30.30 60 minutes www.exampld.com 40.40.40.40 10 minutes
Total Dynamic Entries: 2
DGS-3450:admin#
enable dns_resolver
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the DNS Resolver state of the switch to enabled.
enable dns_resolver
The enable dns_resolver command is used to configure the switch’s DNS Resolver state.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
225
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To configure the DNS Resolver state to enabled:
DGS-3450:admin# enable dns_resolver
Command: enable dns_resolver
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable dns_resolver
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the DNS Resolver state of the switch to disabled.
disable dns_resolver
The disable dns_resolver command is used to configure the switch’s DNS Resolver state to disabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the DNS Resolver state to disabled:
DGS-3450:admin# disable dns_resolver
Command: disable dns_resolver
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
226
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
30
D
OMAIN
N
AME
S
ERVER
(DNS) R
ELAY
C
OMMANDS
The Domain Name Server (DNS) relay commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config dnsr enable dnsr disable dnsr show dnsr
Parameters
[[primary | secondary] nameserver <ipaddr> | [add | delete] static
<domain_name 32> <ipaddr>]
{[cache | static]}
{[cache | static]}
{static}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config dnsr
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the DNS relay function.
config dnsr [[primary | secondary] nameserver <ipaddr> | [add | delete] static
<domain_name 32> <ipaddr>]
This command is used to configure the DNS relay function on the Switch.
primary
− Indicates that the IP address below is the address of the primary DNS server.
secondary
− Indicates that the IP address below is the address of the secondary DNS server.
nameserver <ipaddr>
− The IP address of the DNS nameserver.
[add | delete] – Indicates whether to add or delete the DNS relay function.
<domain_name 32>
− The domain name of the entry.
<ipaddr>
− The IP address of the entry.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set IP address 10.43.21.12 of primary.
DGS-3450:admin# config dnsr primary nameserver 10.43.21.12
Command: config dnsr primary nameserver 10.43.21.12
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
Example usage:
To add an entry domain name dns1, IP address 10.43.21.12 to DNS static table:
227
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config dnsr add static dns1 10.43.21.12
Command: config dnsr add static dns1 10.43.21.12
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
Example usage:
To delete an entry domain name dns1, IP address 10.43.21.12 from DNS static table.
DGS-3450:admin# config dnsr delete static dns1 10.43.21.12
Command: config dnsr delete static dns1 10.43.21.12
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable dnsr
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable DNS relay.
enable dnsr {[cache | static]}
This command is used, in combination with the disable dnsr command below, to enable and disable DNS Relay on the Switch.
cache
− This parameter will allow the user to enable the cache lookup for the DNS rely on the
Switch.
static
− This parameter will allow the user to enable the static table lookup for the DNS rely on the Switch.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable status of DNS relay:
DGS-3450:admin# enable dnsr
Command: enable dnsr
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
Example usage:
To enable cache lookup for DNS relay.
DGS-3450:admin# enable dnsr cache
Command: enable dnsr cache
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
Example usage:
To enable static table lookup for DNS relay.
228
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# enable dnsr static
Command: enable dnsr static
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable dnsr
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable DNS relay on the Switch.
disable dnsr {[cache | static]}
This command is used, in combination with the enable dnsr command above, to enable and disable DNS Relay on the Switch.
cache – This parameter will allow the user to disable the cache lookup for the DNS relay on the
Switch.
static – This parameter will allow the user to disable the static table lookup for the DNS relay on the Switch.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable status of DNS relay.
DGS-3450:admin# disable dnsr
Command: disable dnsr
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
Example usage:
To disable cache lookup for DNS relay.
DGS-3450:admin# disable dnsr cache
Command: disable dnsr cache
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
Example usage:
To disable static table lookup for DNS relay.
DGS-3450:admin# disable dnsr static
Command: disable dnsr static
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dnsr
Purpose Used to display the current DNS relay status.
229
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show dnsr
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
show dnsr {static}
This command is used to display the current DNS relay status.
static
− Allows the display of only the static entries into the DNS relay table. If this parameter is omitted, the entire DNS relay table will be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To display DNS relay status:
DGS-3450:admin# show dnsr
Command: show dnsr
DNSR Status : Disabled
Primary Name Server : 0.0.0.0
Secondary Name Server : 0.0.0.0
DNSR Cache Status : Disabled
DNSR Static Table Status : Disabled
DNS Relay Static Table
Domain Name IP Address
-------------------------------- --------------- www.123.com.tw 10.12.12.123
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
230
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
31
E
THERNET
R
ING
P
ROTECTION
S
WITCHING
(ERPS) C
OMMANDS
ITU-T G.8032 Ethernet Ring protection switching (ERPS) is used to provide a reliable mechanism of malfunction recovery in an Ethernet ring topology network.
The Ethernet Ring Protection Switching (ERPS) Resolver commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed
(along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
enable erps disable erps create erps raps_vlan delete erps raps_vlan config erps raps_vlan config erps raps_vlan config erps raps_vlan config erps raps_vlan config erps raps_vlan config erps log show erps config erps trap config erps raps_vlan config erps raps_vlan config erps raps_vlan
Parameters
<vlanid>
<vlanid>
<vlanid> ring mel <value 0-7>
<vlanid> ring_port [west [<port> | virtual_channel] | east [<port> | virtual_channel]]
<vlanid> [ rpl_port [west | east | none] | rpl_owner [enable | disable] ]
<vlanid> protected_vlan [add | delete] vlanid <vidlist>
<vlanid> timer { holdoff_time <value 0-10000> | guard_time <value 10-2000> | wtr_time <min 5-12>} (1)
[enable | disable]
{raps_vlan <vlanid> {sub_ring}}
[enable | disable]
<vlanid> state [enable | disable]
<vlanid> [add | delete] sub_ring raps_vlan <vlanid>
<vlanid> sub_ring raps_vlan <vlanid> tc_propagation state [enable | disable]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable erps
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the global ERPS function on a switch.
enable erps
This command is used to enable the global ERPS function on a switch. When both the global state and the specified ring ERPS state are enabled, the specified ring will be activated.
The global ERPS function cannot be enabled, when any ERPS ring on the device is enabled and the integrity of any ring parameter is not available. For each ring with the ring state enabled when ERPS is enabled, the following integrity will be checked:
1. R-APS VLAN is created.
2. The Ring port is a tagged member port of the R-APS VLAN.
3. The RPL port is specified if the RPL owner is enabled.
The default state is disabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
231
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To enable ERPS:
DGS-3450:admin# enable erps
Command: enable erps
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable erps
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the global ERPS function on a switch.
disable erps
This command is used to disable the global ERPS function on a switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable ERPS:
DGS-3450:admin# disable erps
Command: disable erps
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create erps raps_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create an R-APS VLAN on a switch.
create erps raps_vlan <vlanid>
This command is used to create an R-APS VLAN on a switch. Only one R-APS VLAN should be used to transfer R-APS messages.
NOTE: The R-APS VLAN must already have been created by the create vlan command.
raps_vlan - Specifies the VLAN which will be the R-APS VLAN.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create and ERPS R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# create erps raps_vlan 4094
Command: create erps raps_vlan 4094
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
232
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete erps raps_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete an R-APS VLAN on a switch.
delete erps raps_vlan <vlanid>
This command is used to delete an R-APS VLAN on a switch. When an R-APS VLAN is deleted, all parameters related to this R-APS VLAN will also be deleted.
This command can only be issued when the ring is not active.
raps_vlan - Specifies the VLAN which will be the R-APS VLAN.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete an ERPS R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# delete erps raps_vlan 4094
Command: delete erps raps_vlan 4094
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config erps ring_mel
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the MEL of the ERPS ring for a specific R-APS VLAN.
config erps raps_vlan <vlanid> ring mel <value 0-7>
This command is used to configure the ring MEL for a R-APS VLAN. The ring MEL is one field in the R-APS PDU.
NOTE: If CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) and ERPS are used at the same time, the
R-APS PDU is one of a suite of Ethernet OAM PDU. The behavior for forwarding of R-APS
PDU should follow the Ethernet OAM. If the MEL of R-APS PDU is not higher than the level of the MEP with the same VLAN on the ring ports, the R-APS PDU cannot be forwarded on the ring.
ring mel - Specifies the ring MEL of the R-APS function. The default ring MEL is 1.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure a MEL of the ERPS ring:
DGS-3450:admin# config erps raps_vlan 4094 ring mel 2
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 ring mel 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config erps raps_vlan ring_port
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to configure the ports of the ERPS ring for a specific R-APS VLAN.
config erps raps_vlan <vlanid> ring_port [west [<port> | virtual_channel] | east [<port>
| virtual_channel]]
This command is used to configure the port that participates in the ERPS ring. Restrictions apply for ports that are included in a link aggregation group. A link aggregation group can be
233
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config erps raps_vlan ring_port
Parameters
Restrictions configured as a ring port by specifying the master port of the link aggregation port. Only the master port can be specified as a ring port. If the specified link aggregation group is eliminated, the master port retains its ring port status. If the ring port configured on virtual channel, the ring which the port connects to will be considered as a sub-ring.
NOTE: The ring ports cannot be modified when ERPS is enabled.
west <port> - Specifies the port as the west ring port.
virtual_channel - Specifies the port as west port on virtual channel.
east <port> - Specifies the port as the east ring port.
virtual_channel - Specifies the port as east port on virtual channel.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the ports of an ERPS ring for a specific R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# config erps raps_vlan 4094 ring_port west 5 east 7
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 ring_port west 5 east 7
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config erps raps_vlan rpl
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the RPL port or the RPL owner for a specific R-APS VLAN.
config erps raps_vlan <vlanid> [ rpl_port [west | east | none] | rpl_owner [enable | disable] ]
This command is used to configure the RPL port and the RPL owner.
RPL port: Specifies one of the R-APS VLAN ring ports as the RPL port. To remove an RPL port from an R-APS VLAN, use the none designation for rpl_port.
RPL owner: Specifies the node as the RPL owner.
NOTE: The RPL port and RPL owner cannot be modified when ERPS is enabled; and the virtual channel cannot be configured as RPL. For example, if a ring port is configured on the virtual channel and the ring port is configured as an RPL port, an error message will be display and the configuration will fail.
port - See below.
west - Specifies the west ring port as the RPL port.
east - Specifies the east ring port as the RPL port.
none - No RPL port on this node. By default, the node has no RPL port.
owner - See below.
enable - Specifies the device as an RPL owner node.
disable - This node is not an RPL owner. By default, the RPS owner is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the RPL port or the RPL owner for a specific R-APS VLAN:
234
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config erps raps_vlan 4094 rpl port west owner enable
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 rpl port west owner enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config erps raps_vlan protected_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the protected VLAN for a specific R-APS VLAN.
config erps raps_vlan <vlanid> protected_vlan [add | delete] vlanid <vidlist>
This command is used to configure the VLANs that are protected by the ERPS function.
The R-APS VLAN cannot be the protected VLAN. The protected VLAN can be one that has already been created, or it can be used for a VLAN that has not yet been created.
protected_vlan - See below:
add - Add VLANs to the protected VLAN group.
delete - Delete VLANs from the protected VLAN group.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the protected VLAN for a specific R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# config erps raps_vlan 4094 protected_vlan add vlanid 10-20
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 protected_vlan add vlanid 10-20
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config erps raps_vlan timer
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to configure the ERPS timers for a specific R-APS VLAN.
config erps raps_vlan <vlanid> timer { holdoff_time <value 0-10000> | guard_time
<value 10-2000> | wtr_time <min 5-12>} (1)
This command is used to configure the protocol timers.
Holdoff timer: The Holdoff timer is used to filter out intermittent link faults when link failures occur during the protection switching process. When a ring node detects a link failure, it will start the holdoff timer and report the link failure event (R-APS BPDU with SF flag) after the link failure is confirmed within period of time specified.
Guard timer: Guard timer is used to prevent ring nodes from receiving outdated R-APS messages. This timer is used during the protection switching process after the link failure recovers. When the link node detects the recovery of the link, it will report the link failure recovery event (R-APS PDU with NR flag) and start the guard timer. Before the guard timer expires, all received R-APS messages are ignored by this ring node, except in the case where a burst of three R-APS event messages that indicates the topology of a sub-ring has changed and the node needs to flush FDB are received on the node. In this case the recovered link does not go into a blocking state. The Guard Timer should be greater than the maximum expected forwarding delay for which one R-APS message circles around the ring.
WTR timer: WTR timer is used to prevent frequent operation of the protection switch due to an intermittent defect. This timer is used during the protection switching process when a link failure recovers. It is only used by the RPL owner. When the RPL owner in protection state receives R-APS PDU with an NR flag, it will start the WTR timer. The RPL owner will block
235
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config erps raps_vlan timer
Parameters
Restrictions the original unblocked RPL port and start to send R-APS PDU with an RB flag after the link recovery is confirmed within this period of time.
holdoff_time - Specifies the holdoff time of the R-APS function. The default holdoff time is 0 milliseconds.
guard_time - Specifies the guard time of the R-APS function. The default guard time is 500 milliseconds.
wtr_time - Specifies the WTR time of the R-APS function. The range is from 5 to 12 minutes.
The default WTR time is 5 minutes.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the ERPS timers for a specific R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# config erps raps_vlan 4094 holdoff_time 100 guard_time 1000 wtr_time 10
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 holdoff_time 100 guard_time 1000 wtr_time 10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config erps log
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the ERPS log state.
config erps log [enable | disable]
This command is used to configure the log state of ERPS events.
log - Enable or disable the log state. The default value is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the ERPS log state:
DGS-3450:admin# config erps log enable
Command: config erps log enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show erps
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to display ERPS information.
show erps {raps_vlan <vlanid> {sub_ring}}
This command is used to display ERPS configuration and operation information.
The port state of the ring port may be as "Forwarding", "Blocking", "Signal Fail". "Forwarding" indicates that traffic is able to be forwarded. "Blocking" indicates that traffic is blocked by
ERPS and a signal failure is not detected on the port. "Signal Fail" indicates that a signal failure is detected on the port and traffic is blocked by ERPS.
The RPL owner administrative state could be configured to "Enabled" or "Disabled". But the
RPL owner operational state may be different from the RPL owner administrative state, for
236
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show erps
Parameters
Restrictions
Example usage:
To display ERPS information: example, the RPL owner conflict occurs. "Active" is used to indicate that the RPL owner administrative state is enabled and the device is operated as the active RPL owner. "Inactive" is used to indicate that the RPL owner administrative state is enabled, but the device is operated as the inactive RPL owner.
raps_vlan <vlanid> - Specifies the R-APS VLAN.
sub_ring - Display sub-ring configuration information.
None.
237
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show erps
Command: show erps
ERPS Information
Global Status : Enabled
Log Status : Disabled
Trap Status : Disabled
------------------------
R-APS VLAN : 4092
Ring Status : Enabled
West Port : 5 (Blocking)
East Port : 7 (Forwarding)
RPL Port : West Port
RPL Owner : Enabled (Active)
Protected VLANs : 100-300, 4093, 4094
Ring MEL : 2
Holdoff Time : 0 milliseconds
Guard Time : 500 milliseconds
WTR Time : 5 minutes
Current Ring State : Idle
------------------------
R-APS VLAN : 4093
Ring Status : Enabled
West Port : Virtual Channel
East Port : 10 (Forwarding)
RPL Port : None
RPL Owner : Disabled
Protected VLANs : 200-220
Ring MEL : 2
Holdoff Time : 0 milliseconds
Guard Time : 500 milliseconds
WTR Time : 5 minutes
Current Ring State : Idle
------------------------
R-APS VLAN : 4094
Ring Status : Enabled
West Port : Virtual Channel
East Port : 12 (Forwarding)
RPL Port : None
RPL Owner : Disabled
Protected VLANs : 250-300
Ring MEL : 2
Holdoff Time : 0 milliseconds
Guard Time : 500 milliseconds
WTR Time : 5 minutes
Current Ring State : Idle
------------------------
Total Ring: 3
DGS-3450:admin#
config erps trap
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the trap state of the ERPS.
config erps trap [enable | disable]
This command is used to configure trap state of ERPS events.
trap - Enable or disable trap state. The default value is disabled.
238
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config erps trap
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the trap state of the ERPS:
DGS-3450:admin# config erps trap enable
Command: config erps trap enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config erps raps_vlan state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the state of the specified ring.
config erps raps_vlan <vlanid> state [enable | disable]
This command is used to configure ring state of the specified ring. When both the global state and the specified ring ERPS state are enabled, the specified ring will be activated. STP and
LBD should be disabled on the ring ports before the specified ring is activated.
The ring cannot be enabled before the R-APS VLAN is created, and ring ports, RPL port,
RPL owner, are configured. Note that these parameters cannot be changed when the ring is activated.
In order to guarantee correct operation, the following integrity will be checked when the ring is enabled and the global ERPS state is enabled.
1. R-APS VLAN is created.
2. The Ring port is the tagged member port of the R-APS VLAN.
3. The RPL port is specified if RPL owner is enabled.
The default state of the ring is disabled.
state - See below:
enable - Enable the state of the specified ring.
disable - Disable the state of the specified ring.
The default value is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the ring state of the ERPS:
DGS-3450:admin# config erps raps_vlan state enable
Command: config erps raps_vlan state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config erps raps_vlan sub_ring
Purpose
Syntax
Used to configure a sub-ring connected to another ring.
config erps raps_vlan <vlanid> [add | delete] sub_ring raps_vlan <vlanid>
239
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config erps raps_vlan sub_ring
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure a sub-ring connected to another ring. This command is applied on the interconnection node.
raps_vlan <vlanid> - Specifies the R-APS VLAN.
add - Connect the sub-ring to another ring.
delete - Disconnect the sub-ring from the connected ring.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure a sub-ring connected to another ring:
DGS-3450:admin# config erps raps_vlan 4094 add sub_ring raps_vlan 4093
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 add sub_ring raps_vlan 4093
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config erps raps_vlan tc_propagation
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the state of topology change propagation for the sub-ring.
config erps raps_vlan <vlanid> sub_ring raps_vlan <vlanid> tc_propagation state
[enable | disable]
This command is used to configure the state of topology change propagation for the sub-ring.
This command is applied on the interconnection node.
raps_vlan <vlanid> - Specifies the R-APS VLAN.
state - See below:
enable - Enable the propagation state of topology change for the sub-ring.
disable - Disable the propagation state of topology change for the sub-ring. The default value is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the state of topology change propagation:
DGS-3450:admin# config erps raps_vlan 4094 sub_ring raps_vlan 4093 tc_propagation state enable
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 sub_ring raps_vlan 4093 tc_propagation state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
240
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
32
F
ILTER
D
ATABASE
(FDB) C
OMMANDS
This section describes the Filter Database functionality and specifications based on IEEE 802.1d 2001 standard and
IEEE 802.1Q-2003 standard. Functions of this software module apply on L2 and L3 Ethernet switches.
The Filter Database (FDB) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create fdb create multicast_fdb config multicast_fdb config fdb aging_time config multicast filtering_mode delete fdb clear fdb show multicast_fdb show fdb show multicast filtering_mode
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> <macaddr> port <port>
<vlan_name 32> <macaddr>
<vlan_name 32> <macaddr> [add | delete] <portlist>
<sec 10-1000000>
[vlan <vlan_name 32> | all ][forward_all_groups| forward_unregistered_groups| filter_unregistered_groups]
<vlan_name 32> <macaddr>
[ vlan <vlan_name 32> | port <port> | all ]
{[ vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid < vidlist > ]| mac_address <macaddr>}
{port <port> | [ vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] | mac_address
<macaddr> | static | aging_time}
{vlan <vlan_name 32>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create fdb
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create a static entry in the unicast MAC address forwarding table (database).
create fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr> port <port>
The create fdb command places an entry into the switch’s unicast MAC address forwarding database
vlan_name - Specifies a VLAN name associated with a MAC address.
macaddr - The MAC address to be added to the static forwarding table.
port - The port number corresponding to the MAC destination address. The switch will always forward traffic to the specified device through this port.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a unicast MAC forwarding:
DGS-3450:admin# create fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02 port 2:5
Command: create fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02 port 2:5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
241
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create multicast_fdb
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create a static entry in the multicast MAC address forwarding table (database).
create multicast_fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr>
The create multicast_fdb is used to make an entry in the switch’s multicast MAC address forwarding database.
vlan_name - The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides. The maximum length is 32.
macaddr - The multicast MAC address to be added to the static forwarding table.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create multicast MAC forwarding:
DGS-3450:admin# create multicast_fdb default 01-00-00-00-00-00
Command: create multicast_fdb default 01-00-00-00-00-00
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config multicast_fdb
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the switch’s multicast MAC address forwarding database.
config multicast_fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr> [add | delete] <portlist>
The config multicast_fdb command is used to configure the multicast MAC address forwarding table.
vlan_name - The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides. The maximum name length is 32.
macaddr - The MAC address that will be added or deleted to the forwarding table.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be configured. (UnitID: port number).
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add multicast MAC forwarding:
DGS-3450:admin# config multicast_fdb default 01-00-00-00-00-00 add 1:1-1:5
Command: config multicast_fdb default 01-00-00-00-00-00 add 1:1-1:5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config fdb aging_time
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to configure the switch’s MAC address aging time.
config fdb aging_time <sec 10-1000000>
The config fdb aging_time command is used to set the age-out timer for the switch’s dynamic unicast MAC address forwarding tables.
242
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config fdb aging_time
Parameters
Restrictions
aging_time - Specifies the time, in seconds, that a dynamically learned MAC address will remain in the switch’s MAC address forwarding table, without being accessed, before being dropped from the database. The range of the value is 10 to 1000000.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the MAC address aging time:
DGS-3450:admin# config fdb aging_time 300
Command: config fdb aging_time 300
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config multicast filtering_mode
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs.
config multicast filtering_mode [ <vlan_name 32>| all ] [forward_all_groups | forward_unregistered_groups | filter_unregistered_groups]
The config multicast_fdb command configures the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs.
This switch support vlan filtering mode.
vlan_name - Specifies the name of the VLAN.
forward_all_groups - All multicast groups forwarded based on VLAN.
forward_unregistered_groups - The registered group forwarded based on register table. The un-register group forwarded based on VLAN.
filter_unregistered_groups - The registered group forwarded based on register table. The unregister group filtered.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs:
DGS-3450:admin# config multicast filtering_mode 200 forward_all_groups
Command: config multicast filtering_mode 200 forward_all_groups
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete fdb
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to delete an entry from the switch’s forwarding database.
delete fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr>
The delete fdb deletes a permanent FDB entry.
vlan_name - The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides. The maximum length is 32 characters.
macaddr - The multicast MAC address to be deleted from the static forwarding table.
243
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete fdb
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a permanent FDB entry:
DGS-3450:admin# delete fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02
Command: delete fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
clear fdb
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to clear the switch’s forwarding database of all dynamically learned MAC addresses.
clear fdb [ vlan <vlan_name 32> | port <port> | all ]
The clear fdb command clears all dynamically learned MAC addresses from the switch’s forwarding database..
vlan_name - The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides. The maximum length is 32 characters.
port - The port number corresponding to the MAC destination address. The switch will always forward traffic to the specified device through this port.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear all FDB dynamic entries:
DGS-3450:admin# clear fdb all
Command: clear fdb all
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show multicast_fdb
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the contents of the switch’s multicast forwarding database.
show multicast_fdb {[ vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid < vidlist > ]| mac_address
<macaddr>}
The show multicast_fdb command displays the entries of the switch’s multicast forwarding database.
vlan_name - The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides. The maximum length is 32 characters.
vlanid - Display the entries for the VLANs indicated by VID list.
macaddr - Specifies a MAC address, for which FDB entries will be displayed.
If no parameter is specified, all multicast FDB entries will be displayed.
None.
244
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To display the multicast MAC address table:
DGS-3450:admin# show multicast_fdb
Command: show multicast_fdb
VLAN Name
MAC Address
Egress Ports
Mode
Total Entries : 1
: default
: 01-00-00-00-00-01
: 1:1-1:5,1:26,2:26
: Static
show fdb
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current unicast MAC address forwarding database.
show fdb { port <port> | [ vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] | mac_address
<macaddr> | static | aging_time}
The show fdb command displays the current unicast MAC address forwarding database.
port - Displays the entries for one port.
vlan_name - Displays the entries for a specific VLAN.
vlanid - Display the entries for the VLANs indicated by VID list.
static - Displays all permanent entries.
aging_time - Displays the unicast MAC address aging time.
If no parameter is specified, system will display the unicast address table.
None.
Example usage:
To display the FDB table:
245
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show fdb
Command: show fdb
Unicast MAC Address Aging Time = 300
VID VLAN Name MAC Address Port Type
---- ---------------- ----------------- ------ ----------------
1 default 00-00-00-00-01-02 2:5 Permanent
1 default 00-01-02-03-04-00 CPU Self
1 default 00-00-00-00-00-07 1:3 Permanent
1 default 00-00-00-00-00-08 1:4 BlockByAddrBind
1 default 00-00-00-00-00-09 1:4 UnblockByAddrBind
1 default 00-00-00-00-00-10 1:5 BlockByMACAuth
1 default 00-00-00-00-00-11 1:5 UnblockByMACAuth
1 default 00-00-00-00-00-12 1:6 BlockBySecurity
1 default 00-00-00-00-00-13 1:6 UnBlockBySecurity
1 default 00-00-00-00-00-14 1:7 JWAC_Authing
1 default 00-00-00-00-10-15 1:7 JWAC_Authed
1 default 00-00-00-00-10-16 1:7 JWAC_Blocked
1 default 00-00-00-00-10-19 - BlackHole
1 default 00-00-00-00-10-21 1:11 Del_on_Reset
1 default 00-00-00-00-10-22 1:12 Del_on_Timeout
1 default 00-00-00-00-10-23 1:13 Secured_Permanent
1 default 00-00-00-00-10-24 1:14 Del_on_Reset
Total Entries: 15
DGS-3450:admin#
show multicast filtering_mode
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs.
show multicast filtering_mode {vlan <vlan_name 32>}
The show multicast vlan_filtering_mode command show the multicast packet filtering mode for VLAN.
vlan – Specifies the VLAN name to be configured.
If no parameter is specified, the device will show all multicast filtering settings in the device.
None.
Example usage:
To show the multicast filtering_mode for VLANs:
246
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show multicast filtering_mode
Command: show multicast filtering_mode
VLAN Name Multicast Filter Mode
-------------------------------- ----------------------------- default forward_unregistered_groups n61 forward_unregistered_groups n101 forward_unregistered_groups n103 forward_unregistered_groups n172 forward_unregistered_groups sue forward_unregistered_groups
DGS-3450:admin#
247
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
33
G
ENERAL
S
WITCH
C
OMMANDS
The General Switch commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
show cpu port
Parameters
{[l2 | l3 {[unicast | multicast]} |type [lacp | stp | gvrp | erps | cfm| 802.1x | lldp | udld | stacking | ctp | rip | ripng | reserved_ipv4_ipmc | reserved_ipv6_ipmc | unknow_ipv4_ipmc | unknow_ipv6_ipmc | arp | icmp | ndp | icmpv6 | sntp | dns | tftp | rcp |telnet | dhcp | dhcpv6]]} clear cpu port enable password_recovery disable password_recovery show password_recovery
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
show cpu port
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to display statistics for L2/L3 control packets that are trapped to CPU.
show cpu port {[l2 | l3 {[unicast | multicast]} |type [lacp | stp | gvrp | erps | cfm| 802.1x | lldp | udld | stacking | ctp | rip | ripng | reserved_ipv4_ipmc | reserved_ipv6_ipmc | unknow_ipv4_ipmc | unknow_ipv6_ipmc | arp | icmp | ndp | icmpv6 | sntp | dns | tftp | rcp |telnet | dhcp | dhcpv6]]}
This command is use to show statistics for L2/L3 control packets that are trapped to CPU. l2 - Display statistic counters of L2 control packets. l3 - Display statistic counters of L3 control packets.
• unicast - Display statistic counters of L3 unicast routing and L3 application control packets.
• multicast - Display statistic counters of L3 multicast routing control packets. type - Specifies the type of packet that will be displayed. The protocol subtype will be displayed.
If not specified, all L2/L3 control packets will be displayed.
None. Restrictions
Example usage:
To display statistics of all L3 control packets:
248
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show cpu port l3
Command: show cpu port l3
Type PPS Total Drop
------------------- ---------- ----------- -----------
RIP 0 0 0
RIPng 0 0 0
DHCP 0 0 0
DHCPv6 0 0 0
Reserved IPv4 IPMC 0 0 0
Reserved IPv6 IPMC 0 0 0
Unknown IPv4 IPMC 0 0 0
Unknown IPv6 IPMC 0 0 0
ICMP 0 0 0
NDP 0 0 0
ICMPv6 0 0 0
SNTP 0 0 0
DNS 0 0 0
TFTP 0 0 0
RCP 0 0 0
TELNET 0 0 0
DGS-3450:admin#
To display statistics of all L3 multicast routing control packets:
DGS-3450:admin#show cpu port l3 multicast
Command: show cpu port l3 multicast
Type PPS Total Drop
------------------- ---------- ----------- -----------
Reserved IPv4 IPMC 0 0 0
Reserved IPv6 IPMC 0 0 0
Unknown IPv4 IPMC 0 0 0
Unknown IPv6 IPMC 0 0 0
DGS-3450:admin#
To display statistics of ICMP packets:
DGS-3450:admin#show cpu port type icmp
Command: show cpu port type icmp
Type PPS Total Drop
------------------- ---------- ----------- -----------
ICMP 0 0 0
Echo - 0 -
Other - 0 -
DGS-3450:admin#
249
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
clear cpu port
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to reset all counters for L2/L3 control packets that are trapped to CPU.
clear cpu port
This command is use to reset all counters for L2/L3 control packets that are trapped to CPU.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To clear all counters for all packets:
DGS-3450:admin#clear cpu port
Command: clear cpu port
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable password_recovery
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the password recovery mode.
enable password_recovery
The command is used to enable the state of the password recovery mode. The configuration does not take effect until being saved.
None.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the password recovery mode:
DGS-3450:admin#enable password_recovery
Command: enable password_recovery
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable password_recovery
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the password recovery mode.
disable password_recovery
This command is used to disable the password recovery mode.
None.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the password recovery mode:
250
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#disable password_recovery
Command: disable password_recovery
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show password_recovery
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the password recovery state.
show password_recovery
The displayed content includes both the running configuration and the NV-RAM configuration.
When the password recovery state is enabled, the user can reboot the Switch and enter the
Password Recovery mode. Otherwise, the user will not be able to enter the special recovery mode.
Note: Only the NV-RAM configuration will take effect when the Switch restarts, the running configuration does not take effect until being saved. That means the password recovery is determined by the state stored in the NV-RAM and takes effect when the Switch starts up the next time. The Running Configuration is the current configured state of the password recovery, the configuration is deleted without being saved, or becomes the NV-RAM configuration when being saved.
None.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display the password recovery state:
DGS-3450:admin#show password_recovery
Command: show password_recovery
Running Configuration : Enabled
NV-RAM Configuration : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
251
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
34
G
RATUITOUS
ARP C
OMMANDS
The Gratuitous ARP commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected config gratuitous_arp learning config gratuitous_arp send periodically enable gratuitous_arp disable gratuitous_arp show gratuitous_arp
Parameters
[enable | disable]
[enable | disable]
[enable | disable] ipif <ipif_name 12> interval <value 0-65535>
{ipif <ipif_name 12>} {trap | log}
{ipif <ipif_name 12>} {trap | log}
{ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable or disable send gratuitous ARP request while IP interface status become up.
config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up [enable | disable]
The command is used to enable/disable sending of gratuitous ARP request packet while IPIF interface become up. This is used to automatically announce the interface’s IP address to other nodes. By default, the state is disabled. After enable this state, one gratuitous ARP packet will be broadcast.
enable - Enable sending of gratuitous ARP when IPIF status become up.
disable - Disable sending of gratuitous ARP when IPIF status become up.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable send gratuitous ARP request in normal situation:
DGS-3450:admin# config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up enable
Command: config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to enable or disable sending of gratuitous ARP request while duplicate IP address is detected.
config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected [enable | disable]
The command is used to enable/disable sending of gratuitous ARP request packet while duplicate IP is detected. By default, the state is disabled. For this command, the duplicate IP
252
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected
Parameters
Restrictions detected means that the system received an ARP request packet that is sent by an IP address that match the system’s own IP address. In this case, the system knows that some body out there uses an IP address that is conflict with the system. In order to reclaim the correct host of this IP address, the system can send out the gratuitous ARP request packet for this duplicate IP address.
enable - Enable sending of gratuitous ARP when duplicate IP is detected.
disable - Disable sending of gratuitous ARP when duplicate IP is detected.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable send gratuitous ARP request when duplicate IP is detected:
DGS-3450:admin# config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected enable
Command: config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config gratuitous_arp learning
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable or disable learning of ARP entry in ARP cache based on the received gratuitous ARP packet.
config gratuitous_arp learning [enable | disable]
Normally, the system will only learn the ARP reply packet or a normal ARP request packet that asks for the MAC address that corresponds to the system’s IP address. The command is used to enable/disable learning of ARP entry in ARP cache based on the received gratuitous
ARP packet. The gratuitous ARP packet is sent by a source IP address that is identical to the
IP that the packet is queries for. Note that, with the gratuitous ARP learning, the system will not learn new entry but only do the update on the ARP table based on the received gratuitous
ARP packet. By default, the state is disabled.
enable - Enable learning of ARP entry based on the received gratuitous ARP packet.
disable - Disable learning of ARP entry based on the received gratuitous ARP packet.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable update ARP table when Gratuitous ARP received:
DGS-3450:admin# config gratuitous_arp learning enable
Command: config gratuitous_arp learning enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config gratuitous_arp periodical_send
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to configure the interval for periodical sending of gratuitous ARP request packet.
config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif <ipif_name 12> interval <value 0-65535>
The command is used to configure the interval for periodical sending of gratuitous ARP request packet. By default, the interval is 0.
253
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config gratuitous_arp periodical_send
Parameters
Restrictions
ipif <ipif_name 12> - Interface name of L3 interface.
interval <value 0-65535> - Periodically send gratuitous ARP interval time in seconds.0 means not send gratuitous ARP periodically.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure gratuitous ARP interval to 5 for IPIF System:
DGS-3450:admin# config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif System interval 5
Command: config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif System interval 5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable gratuitous_arp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable gratuitous ARP trap and log state.
enable gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>} {trap | log}
The command is used to enable gratuitous ARP trap and log state. The switch can trap and log the IP conflict event to inform the administrator. By default, trap is disabled and event log is enabled.
ipif <ipif_name 12> - Interface name of L3 interface
trap – Specify to enable traps for gratuitous ARP.
log – Specify to enable the log for gratuitous ARP.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable system interface’s gratuitous ARP log and trap:
DGS-3450:admin# enable gratuitous_arp ipif System trap log
Command: enable gratuitous_arp ipif System trap log
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable gratuitous_arp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable interface’s gratuitous ARP log and trap.
disable gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>} {trap | log}
The command is used to disable gratuitous ARP trap and log state.
ipif <ipif_name 12> - Interface name of L3 interface
trap – Specify to disable traps for gratuitous ARP.
log – Specify to disable the log for gratuitous ARP.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
254
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To disable system interface’s gratuitous ARP log and trap:
DGS-3450:admin# disable gratuitous_arp ipif System trap log
Command: disable gratuitous_arp ipif System trap log
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show gratuitous_arp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display gratuitous ARP configuration.
show gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
The show gratuitous_arp command is used to display gratuitous ARP configuration.
ipif <ipif_name 12> - Interface name of L3 interface.
None.
Example usage:
To display gratuitous ARP configuration:
DGS-3450:admin# show gratuitous_arp
Command: show gratuitous_arp
Send on IPIF status up : Enabled
Send on Duplicate_IP_Detected : Disabled
Gratuitous ARP Learning : Enabled
IP Interface Name : System
Gratuitous ARP Trap : Disabled
Gratuitous ARP Log : Enabled
Gratuitous ARP Periodical Send Interval : 5
IP Interface Name : ip1
Gratuitous ARP Trap : Enabled
Gratuitous ARP Log : Disabled
Gratuitous ARP Periodical Send Interval : 6
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3450:admin#
255
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
35
IEEE 802.1Q
VLAN C
OMMANDS
Along with normal VLAN configurations, this Switch now incorporate Double VLANs. Better known as Q-IN-Q VLANs,
Double VLANs allow network providers to expand their VLAN configurations to place VLANs within a larger inclusive
VLAN, which adds a new layer to the VLAN configuration. This basically lets large ISP's create L2 Virtual Private
Networks and also create transparent LANs for their customers, which will connect two or more customer LAN points without over complicating configurations on the client's side. Not only will over-complication be avoided, but now the administrator has over 4000 VLANs in which over 4000 VLANs can be placed, therefore greatly expanding the VLAN network.
Implementation of this feature adds a VLAN frame to an existing VLAN frame for the ISP VLAN recognition and classification. To ensure devices notice this added VLAN frame, an Ethernet encapsulation, here known as a tpid, is also added to the frame. The device recognizes this tpid and therefore checks the VLAN tagged packet to see if a provider
VLAN tag has been added. If so, the packet is then routed through this provider VLAN, which contains smaller VLANs with similar configurations to ensure speedy and guaranteed routing destination of the packet.
The IEEE 802.1Q VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
256
Command
create vlan delete vlan config vlan config gvrp enable gvrp disable gvrp show vlan show gvrp enable double_vlan disable double_vlan create double_vlan config double_vlan
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> {tag <vlanid 2-4094> | {advertisement} | type [1q_vlan | private_vlan | protocol-ip | protocol-ipx802dot3 | protocol-ipx802dot2 | protocolipxSnap | protocol-ipxEthernet2 | protocol-appleTalk | protocol-decLat | protocolsna802dot2 | protocol-snaEthernet2 | protocol-netBios | protocol-xns|protocolvines | protocol-ipV6 | protocol-userDefined <hex 0x0-0xffff> encap [Ethernet | llc | snap | all] | protocol-rarp]}
<vlan_name 32>
<vlan_name 32> {[add [tagged | untagged | forbidden] | delete] <portlist> | advertisement [enable | disable]}
[<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | ingress_checking [enable | disable] | acceptable_frame [tagged_only | admit_all] | pvid <vlanid 1-4094>}
{[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] | ports <portlist>}
{<portlist>}
<vlan_name 32> spvid <vlanid 1-4094> {tpid <hex 0x0-0xffff>}
<vlan_name> {[[add [access | uplink] | delete] <portlist> | tpid <hex 0x0-0xffff>]} delete double_vlan show double_vlan enable pvid auto_assign disable pvid auto_assign show pvid auto_assign config private_vlan
<vlan_name>
{<vlan_name>}
[<vlan_name 32> | vid <vlanid 1-4094>] [add [isolated | community] | remove]
[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to create a VLAN on the Switch.
create vlan <vlan_name 32> {tag <vlanid 2-4094> | {advertisement} | type [1q_vlan | private_vlan | protocol-ip | protocol-ipx802dot3 | protocol-ipx802dot2 | protocol-ipxSnap | protocol-ipxEthernet2 | protocol-appleTalk | protocol-decLat | protocol-sna802dot2 | protocol-snaEthernet2 | protocol-netBios | protocol-xns|protocol-vines | protocol-ipV6 | protocol-userDefined <hex 0x0-0xffff> encap [Ethernet | llc | snap | all] | protocol-rarp]}
This command allows the creation of a VLAN on the Switch.
<vlan_name 32>
− The name of the VLAN to be created. tag <vlanid 2-4094>
− The VLAN ID of the VLAN to be created. Allowed values = 2-4094 advertisement
− Specifies that the VLAN is able to join GVRP. type – This parameter uses the type field of the packet header to determine the packet protocol and destination VLAN.
257
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create vlan
Restrictions
Each VLAN name can be up to 32 characters. Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a VLAN v1, tag 2:
DGS-3450:admin# create vlan v1 tag 2
Command: create vlan v1 tag 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete a previously configured VLAN on the Switch.
delete vlan <vlan_name 32>
This command will delete a previously configured VLAN on the Switch.
<vlan_name 32>
− The VLAN name of the VLAN to delete.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To remove the VLAN “v1”:
DGS-3450:admin# delete vlan v1
Command: delete vlan v1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
258
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config vlan add
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to add additional ports to a previously configured VLAN.
config vlan <vlan_name 32> {[add [tagged | untagged | forbidden] | delete ] <portlist> | advertisement [enable | disable]}
This command is used to add ports to the port list of a previously configured VLAN.
Additional ports may be specified as tagging, untagging, or forbidden. The default is to assign the ports as untagging.
<vlan_name 32>
− The name of the VLAN to add or delete ports to.
add
− Specifies which ports to add. The user may also specify if the ports are:
•
tagged
− Specifies the additional ports as tagged.
•
untagged
− Specifies the additional ports as untagged.
•
forbidden
− Specifies the additional ports as forbidden.
delete - Specifies which ports to delete.
<portlist>
− A port or range of ports to add to the VLAN. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash.
advertisement [enable | disable]
− Enables or disables GVRP on the specified VLAN.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add 4 through 8 as tagged ports to the VLAN v1:
DGS-3450:admin# config vlan v1 add tagged 1:4-1:8
Command: config vlan v1 add tagged 1:4-1:8
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config gvrp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure GVRP on the Switch.
config gvrp [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | ingress_checking [enable | disable] | acceptable_frame [tagged_only | admit_all] | pvid <vlanid 1-4094>}
This command is used to configure the GARP VLAN Registration Protocol on the Switch.
Configurable settings include ingress checking, the sending and receiving of GVRP information, and the Port VLAN ID (PVID).
<portlist>
− A port or range of ports for which to configure GVRP. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash.
all
− Specifies all of the ports on the Switch.
state [enable | disable]
− Enables or disables GVRP for the ports specified in the port list.
ingress_checking [enable | disable]
− Enables or disables ingress checking for the specified port list.
acceptable_frame [tagged_only | admit_all] – This parameter states the frame type that will be accepted by the Switch for this function. tagged_only implies that only VLAN tagged frames will be accepted, while admit_all implies tagged and untagged frames will be accepted by the
Switch.
pvid – Specifies the default VLAN ID associated with the port.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
259
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To set the ingress checking status, the sending and receiving GVRP information :
DGS-3450:admin# config gvrp 1:1-1:4 state enable ingress_checking enable acceptable_frame tagged_only pvid 2
Command: config gvrp 1:1-1:4 state enable ingress_checking enable acceptable_frame tagged_only pvid 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable gvrp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
NOTE: When the PVID Auto Assign function is disabled, users must manually configure the PVID for untagged ports or the host may not connect to the Switch correctly.
Used to enable GVRP on the Switch.
enable gvrp
This command, along with disable gvrp below, is used to enable and disable GVRP globally on the Switch, without changing the GVRP configuration on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP):
DGS-3450:admin# enable gvrp
Command: enable gvrp
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable gvrp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to disable GVRP on the Switch.
disable gvrp
This command, along with enable gvrp above, is used to enable and disable GVRP on the
Switch, without changing the GVRP configuration on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Parameters
Restrictions
Example usage:
260
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To disable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP):
DGS-3450:admin# disable gvrp
Command: disable gvrp
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current VLAN configuration on the Switch.
show vlan {[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] | ports <portlist>}
This command displays summary information about each VLAN including the VLAN ID,
VLAN name, the Tagging/Untagging status, and the Member/Non-member/Forbidden status of each port that is a member of the VLAN.
<vlan_name 32>
− The VLAN name of the VLAN for which to display a summary of settings.
vlanid <vidlist>
− Users may alternately choose the VLAN to be displayed by entering the
VLAN ID.
ports <portlist>
− Users may also view VLANs by designated port.
None.
Example usage:
To display the Switch’s current VLAN settings:
DGS-3450:admin# show vlan
Command: show vlan
VID : 1 VLAN Name : default
VLAN Type : Static Advertisement : Enabled
Member Ports : 1:1-1:25
Static Ports : 1:1-1:25
Current Tagged Ports :
Current Untagged Ports: 1:1-1:25
Static Tagged Ports :
Static Untagged Ports : 1:1-1:25
Forbidden Ports :
VID : 4094 VLAN Name : v1
VLAN Type : Static Advertisement : Disabled
Member Ports : 1:4,1:8
Static Ports : 1:4,1:8
Current Tagged Ports : 1:4,1:8
Current Untagged Ports:
Static Tagged Ports : 1:4,1:8
Static Untagged Ports :
Forbidden Ports :
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3450:admin#
261
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show gvrp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the GVRP status for a port list on the Switch.
show gvrp {<portlist>}
This command displays the GVRP status for a port list on the Switch.
<portlist>
− Specifies a range of ports for which the GVRP status is to be displayed.
The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma. (ex: 1-3,7-9)
None.
Example usage:
To display GVRP port status:
DGS-3450:admin# show gvrp
Command: show gvrp
Global GVRP : Disabled
Port PVID GVRP Ingress Checking Acceptable Frame Type
------- ---- -------- ---------------- ----------------------
1:1 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:2 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:3 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:4 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:5 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:6 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:7 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:8 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:9 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:10 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:11 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:12 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:13 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:14 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:15 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:16 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:17 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
1:18 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page Enter Next Entry a All
enable double_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the Double VLAN feature on the Switch.
enable double_vlan
This command, along with the disable double_vlan command, enables and disables the
Double Tag VLAN. When Double VLANs are enabled, the system configurations for VLANs will return to the default setting, except IP address, log, user accounts and banner setting, in order to enable the Double VLAN mode. In the Double VLAN mode, normal VLANs and
GVRP functions are disabled. The Double VLAN default setting is disabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
262
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To enable the Double VLAN feature on the Switch, thus disabling normal VLANs and GVRP.
DGS-3450:admin# enable double_vlan
Command: enable double_vlan
Current Double VLAN mode : Disabled
Enable Double VLAN need to reset system config. Are you sure ?(y/n)y
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable double_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the Double VLAN feature on the Switch.
disable double_vlan
This command, along with the enable double_vlan command, enables and disables the
Double Tag VLAN. When Double VLANs are enabled, the system configurations for VLANs will return to the default setting, except IP address, log, user accounts, and banner setting, in order to enable the Double VLAN mode. In the Double VLAN mode, normal VLANs and
GVRP functions are disabled. The Double VLAN default setting is disabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the Double VLAN feature on the Switch
DGS-3450:admin# disable double_vlan
Command: disable double_vlan
Current Double VLAN mode : Enabled
Disable Double VLAN need to reset system config. Are you sure?(y/n)y
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create double_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create a Double VLAN on the Switch.
create double_vlan <vlan_name 32> spvid <vlanid 1-4094> {tpid <hex 0x0-0xffff>}
This command is used to create a Double VLAN (service provider VLAN) on the Switch.
vlan <vlan_name 32>
− The name of the Double VLAN to be created. The user is to enter an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters to identify this VLAN.
spvid <vlanid 1-4094>
− The VLAN ID of the service provider VLAN. The user is to identify this VLAN with a number between 1 and 4094.
tpid <hex 0x0-0xffff>
− The tag protocol ID. This ID, identified here in hex form, will help identify packets to devices as Double VLAN tagged packets. The default setting is 0x8100.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Users must have the
Switch enabled for Double VLANs.
Example usage:
263
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To create a Double VLAN on the Switch
DGS-3450:admin# create double_vlan RG spvid 2 tpid 0x9100
Command: create double_vlan RG spvid 2 tpid 0x9100
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config double_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to config the parameters for a previously created Double VLAN on the Switch.
config double_vlan <vlan_name> {[[add [access | uplink] | delete] <portlist> | tpid <hex
0x0-0xffff>]}
This command is used to configure a Double VLAN (service provider VLAN) on the Switch.
vlan <vlan_name 32>
− The name of the Double VLAN to be configured. The user is to enter an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters to identify this VLAN.
add – Specify this parameter to add ports configured in the <portlist> as one of the two following types of ports.
•
uplink – Add this parameter to configure these ports as uplink ports. Uplink ports are for connecting Switch VLANs to the Provider VLANs on a remote source. Only gigabit ports can be configured as uplink ports.
•
access
− Add this parameter to configure these ports as access ports. Access ports are for connecting Switch VLANs to customer VLANs.
•
portlist – Enter a list of ports to be added to this VLAN. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma. (ex: 1-3,7-9)
delete
− Specify this parameter to delete ports configured in the <portlist> from this VLAN.
•
portlist – Enter a list of ports to be deleted from this VLAN. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma. (ex: 1-3,7-9)
tpid <hex 0x0-0xffff>
− The tag protocol ID. This ID, identified here in hex form, will help identify packets to devices as Double VLAN tagged packets. The default setting is 0x8100.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Users must have the
Switch enabled for Double VLANs.
Example usage:
To add ports 4 through 8 as access ports to the Double VLAN “RG”:
DGS-3450:admin# config double_vlan RG add access 1:4-1:8
Command: config double_vlan RG add access 1:4-1:8
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
Example usage:
To delete ports 4 through 8 on the Double VLAN “RG”:
264
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config double_vlan RG delete 1:4-1:8
Command: config double_vlan RG delete 1:4-1:8
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show double_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the Double VLAN settings on the Switch.
show double_vlan {<vlan_name>}
This command will display the current double VLAN parameters configured on the Switch.
vlan_name
− Enter the name of a previously created VLAN for which to display the settings.
None.
Example usage:
To display parameters for the Double VLAN “RG”:
DGS-3450:admin# show double_vlan RG
Command: show double_vlan RG
Global Double VLAN : Enabled
====================================================
SPVID : 2
VLAN Name : RG
TPID : 0x9100
Uplink Ports :
Access Ports : 1:4-1:8
Unknow Ports :
----------------------------------------------------
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
enable pvid auto_assign
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable auto assignment of PVID.
enable pvid auto_assign
If “Auto-assign PVID” is enabled, PVID will be possibly changed by PVID or VLAN configuration. When a user configures a port to VLAN X’s untagged membership, this port’s PVID will be updated with VLAN X. In the form of VLAN list command, PVID is updated with the last item of the VLAN list. When a user removes a port from the untagged membership of the PVID’s VLAN, the port’s PVID will be assigned with
“default VLAN”. The default setting is enabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the auto-assign PVID:
265
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# enable pvid auto_assign
Command: enable pvid auto_assign
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable pvid auto_assign
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable auto assignment of PVID.
disable pvid auto_assign
If “auto-assign PVID” is disabled, PVID can only be changed by PVID configuration (user changes explicitly). The VLAN configuration will not automatically change PVID. The default setting is enabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the auto-assign PVID:
DGS-3450:admin# disable pvid auto_assign
Command: disable pvid auto_assign
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show pvid auto_assign
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to display the PVID auto-assign status.
show pvid auto_assign
The show pvid auto_assign command displays the PVID auto assignment state.
Parameters
Restrictions
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the PVID auto assignment state:
DGS-3450:admin#show pvid auto_assign
Command: show pvid auto_assign
PVID Auto-assignment: Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
266
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config private_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the private VLAN feature.
config private_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vid <vlanid 1-4094>] [add [isolated | community]
| remove] [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]
A private VLAN is comprised of a primary VLAN, up to one isolated VLAN, and a number of community VLANs. A private VLAN ID is presented by the VLAN ID of the primary VLAN.
The command used to associate or de-associate a secondary VLAN with a primary VLAN. A primary VLAN is created via the command create vlan type private_vlan. A secondary VLAN is created via the command create vlan type 1q_vlan. A secondary VLAN cannot be associated with multiple primary VLANs. The untagged member port of the primary VLAN is named as the promiscuous port. The tagged member port of the primary VLAN is named as the trunk port. A promiscuous port of a private VLAN cannot be promiscuous port of other private VLANs. The primary VLAN member port cannot be a secondary VLAN member at the same time, or vice versa. A secondary VLAN can only have the untagged member port. The member port of a secondary VLAN cannot be member port of other secondary VLAN at the same time. When a VLAN is associated with a primary VLAN as the secondary VLAN, the promiscuous port of the primary VLAN will behave as the untagged member of the secondary
VLAN, and the trunk port of the primary VLAN will behave as the tagged member of the secondary VLAN. A secondary VLAN cannot be specified with advertisement. Only the primary VLAN can be configured as a layer 3 interface. The private VLAN member port cannot be configured with the traffic segmentation function.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the name of the private VLAN. The maximum length is 32 characters.
vid <vlanid 1-4094> - Specify the VLAN ID of the private VLAN.
add - Specify to add isolated or community.
isolated - Specify the secondary VLAN as an isolated VLAN.
community - Specify the secondary VLAN as a community VLAN.
remove - Specify to remove the specified private VLAN.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the VLAN of a range of secondary VLANs to add to the private
VLAN or remove from it. The maximum length is 32 characters.
vlanid <vidlist> - Specify a range of the second VLAN IDs to add to the private VLAN or remove from it.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To associate a secondary VLAN to private VLAN p1:
DGS-3450:admin#config private_vlan p1 add community vlanid 2-5
Command: config private_vlan p1 add community vlanid 2-5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show private_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to display private VLAN information on the switch.
show private_vlan {[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}
This command is used to display private VLAN information on the switch.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the name of the private VLAN. The maximum length is 32 characters.
vlanid <vidlist> - Specify the VLAN ID of the private VLAN.
267
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show private_vlan
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display private VLAN settings:
DGS-3450:admin# show private_vlan
Command: show private_vlan
Private VLAN 100
------------------
Promiscuous Ports: 1
Trunk Ports : 2
Isolated Ports : 3-5 Isolated VLAN : 20
Community Ports : 6-8 Community VLAN: 30
Community Ports : 9-10 Community VLAN: 40
DGS-3450:admin#
268
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
36
IEEE 802.1Q
IN
Q C
OMMANDS
The IEEE 802.1QinQ commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
enable qinq disable qinq show qinq config qinq ports show qinq ports delete vlan_translation ports show vlan_translation create vlan_translation ports
Parameters
[<portlist> | all] {role [nni | uni] | missdrop [enable | disable] | [outer_ tpid | tpid]<hex 0x1 - 0xffff> | use_inner_priority [enable | disable]}(1)
{<portlist>}
[<portlist> | all ] { cvid <vidlist>} ports <portlist>
[<portlist> | all ] cvid <vidlist> [add | replace] svid <vlanid 1-4094> {priority
<value 0-7>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable qinq
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable QinQ.
enable qinq
When QinQ is enabled, all network port roles will be NNI port and outer TPID will be set to
0x88A8; All existed static VLAN will run as S-VLAN; All dynamic learned L2 address will be cleared; All dynamic registered VLAN entries will be cleared, and GVRP will be disabled.
If need to run GVRP on the switch, administrator should enable GVRP manually. In QinQ mode, GVRP protocol will employ reserve address 01-80-C2-00-00-0D.
The default setting of QinQ is disabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable qinq:
DGS-3450:admin# enable qinq
Command: enable qinq
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable qinq
Purpose
Syntax
Used to disable the QinQ.
disable qinq
269
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
disable qinq
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
When QinQ is disabled, all dynamic learned L2 address will be cleared, all dynamic registered VLAN entries will be cleared, and GVRP will be disabled.
If need to run GVRP on the switch, administrator should enable GVRP manually.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable qinq:
DGS-3450:admin# disable qinq
Command: disable qinq
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show qinq
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show global QinQ status.
show qinq
Use this command to display the global QinQ status.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show qinq:
DGS-3450:admin#show qinq
Command: show qinq
QinQ Status : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
config qinq ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure QinQ ports parameters.
config qinq ports [<portlist> | all] {role [nni | uni] | missdrop [enable | disable] | [outer_ tpid | tpid]<hex 0x1 - 0xffff> | use_inner_priority [enable | disable]}(1)
The command used to configure QinQ port parameters, include:
• Role of a port.
• Missdrop of a port.
• Use inner-priority of a port.
ports - A range of ports to configure.
role - Port role in QinQ mode
UNI - Port is connecting to customer network.
270
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config qinq ports
Restrictions
NNI - Port is connecting to service provider network.
outer_ tpid | tpid - Outer-TPID of a port.
use_inner_priority - Specify whether to use the priority in the C-VLAN tag as the priority in the
S-VLAN tag. By default, the setting is disabled.
missdrop - Enable/disable miss drop of port.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To config port list 1-4 as NNI port, set TPID to 0x88A8:
DGS-3450:admin# config qinq ports 1-4 role nni outer_tpid 0x88a8
Command: config qinq ports 1-4 role nni outer_tpid 0x88a8
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show qinq ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show qinq configuration of ports.
show qinq ports {<portlist>}
The command used to show qinq configuration of ports, include:
• Role of port.
• Outer-TPID of port.
• Miss drop state of port.
• Use inner-priority of a port.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be displayed. (Unit ID: port number).
If no parameter specified, system will display all ports information.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show QinQ mode for ports 1-4 of unit 1:
DGS-3450:admin# show qinq ports 1:1-1:4
Command: show qinq ports 1:1-1:4
Port Role Missdrop TPID Use Inner Priority
----- ------ -------- ----------- ------------------
1:1 Normal Disabled 0x8100 Disabled
1:2 Normal Disabled 0x8100 Disabled
1:3 Normal Disabled 0x8100 Disabled
1:4 Normal Disabled 0x8100 Disabled
DGS-3450:admin#
delete vlan_translation ports
Purpose Used to delete existed VLAN translation rules.
271
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete vlan_translation ports
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
delete vlan_translation ports [ <portlist> | all ] { cvid <vidlist> }
The delete vlan_translation command is used to delete translation relationship between C-
VLAN and S-VLAN.
ports - The translation rule for the specified ports.
cvid - The rules for the specified CVIDs. If CVID is not specified, all rules configured for the port will be deleted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete VLAN translation rule on ports 1-4:
DGS-3450:admin# delete vlan_translation ports 1-4
Command: delete vlan_translation ports 1-4
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show vlan_translation
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show existed C-VLAN based VLAN translation rules.
show vlan_translation ports <portlist>
Used to show existed C-VLAN based VLAN translation rules.
ports - The C-VLAN based VLAN translation rule of the ports.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show C-VLAN based VLAN translation rules in the system:
DGS-3450:admin# show vlan_translation
Commands: show vlan_translation
Port CVID SVID Action Priority
------ ----- ----- ------ --------
1 10 100 Add 4
1 20 100 Add 5
1 30 200 Add 6
2 10 100 Add 7
2 20 100 Add 1
Total Entries: 5
DGS-3450:admin#
create vlan_translation ports
Purpose
Syntax
Use this command to create the CVID VLAN translation rules.
create vlan_translation ports [<portlist> | all ] cvid <vidlist> [add | replace] svid <vlanid
1-4094> {priority <value 0-7>}
272
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create vlan_translation ports
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use this command to create the CVID VLAN translation rules.
portlist - A range of ports on which the S-VLAN will be translated to C-VLAN
add - The action indicates to add a tag for the assigned S-VLAN before the C-VLAN tag.
replace - The action indicates to replace the C-VLAN tag with the SP VLAN.
cvid - Specify the C-VLAN ID to match.
svid - Specify the S-VLAN ID.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To replace C-Tag which CVID is 20 by S-Tag, S-VID is 200, at UNI Port 1:
DGS-3450:admin# create vlan_translation ports 1 cvid 20 replace svid 200
Command: create vlan_translation ports 1 cvid 20 replace svid 200
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To Add S-Tag, S-VID is 300, to a packet which CVID is 30 at UNI Port 1:
DGS-3450:admin# create vlan_translation ports 1 cvid 30 add svid 300
Command: create vlan_translation ports 1 cvid 30 add svid 300
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
273
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
37
IGMP
AND
MLD S
NOOPING
C
OMMANDS
The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 2 or Layer 3 protocol used to manage the membership of
Internet Protocol multicast groups. IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships. IGMP snooping, as implied by the name, is a feature that allows a Layer 2 switch to "listen in" on the IGMP conversation between hosts and routers by processing the Layer 2 or Layer 3 IGMP packets sent in a multicast network.
The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the presence of multicast listeners
(that is, nodes wishing to receive multicast packets) on its directly attached links, and to discover specifically which multicast addresses are of interest to those neighboring nodes.
The IGMP and MLD Snooping commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
274
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Command
config igmp_snooping config igmp_snooping querier config router_ports config router_ports_forbidden enable igmp_snooping disable igmp_snooping create igmp_snooping static_group delete igmp_snooping static_group config igmp_snooping static_group show igmp_snooping static_group show igmp_snooping group show router_ports config mld_snooping config mld_snooping querier
Parameters
[vlan <vlan_name 32> | all] {host_timeout <sec 1-16711450> | router_timeout
<sec 1-16711450> | leave_timer <sec 1-16711450> | state [enable | disable] | fast_leave [enable | disable] | report_suppression [enable | disable]}(1)
[vlan <vlan_name 32> | all]{ query_interval <sec 1-65535> | max_response_time
<sec 1-25> | robustness_variable <value 1-255> | last_member_query_interval
<sec 1-25> | state [enable | disable]| version <value 1-3> }
<vlan_name 32> [add | delete] <portlist>
<vlan_name 32> [add | delete] <portlist>
{forward_mcrouter_only}
{forward_mcrouter_only}
[vlan<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ] <ipaddr>
[vlan<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ] <ipaddr>
[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ] < ipaddr > [ add | delete] <portlist>
{[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] < ipaddr >}
{vlan <vlan_name 32>} {data_driven}
{vlan <vlan_name 32>} {[static | dynamic | forbidden]}
[vlan <vlan_name 32>| all] {node_timeout <sec 1-16711450> | router_timeout
<sec 1-16711450> | done_timer <sec 1-16711450> | state [enable | disable] | fast_done [enable | disable]
[vlan <vlan_name 32> | all] {query_interval <sec 1-65535> | max_response_time
<sec 1-25> | robustness_variable <value 1-255> | last_listener_query_interval
<sec 1-25> | state [enable | disable] | version <value 1-2> }(1)
<vlan_name 32> [add | delete] <portlist>
<vlan_name 32> [add | delete] <portlist> config mld_snooping mrouter_ports config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden enable mld_snooping disable mld_snooping show mld_snooping show mld_snooping group show mld_snooping mrouter_ports config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry config mld_snooping data_driven_learning config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry config igmp_snooping forward_lookup_mode show igmp_snooping forward_lookup_mode
{forward_mcrouter_only}
{forward_mcrouter_only}
{vlan <vlan_name 32>}
{vlan <vlan_name 32>} {data_driven} vlan <vlan_name 32> {[static | dynamic | forbidden]}
[vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all] {state [enable | disable] | aged_out [enable | disable] | expiry_time <sec 1-65535>}(1) config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry <value 1-960>
[vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlanid < vlanid_list > |all] {state [enable | disable] | aged_out [enable | disable] | expiry_time <sec 1-65535>}(1)
<value 1-511>
[ip | mac]
275
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config igmp_snooping
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure IGMP snooping on the switch.
config igmp_snooping [vlan <vlan_name 32> | all] {host_timeout <sec 1-16711450> | router_timeout <sec 1-16711450> | leave_timer <sec 1-16711450> | state
[enable|disable] | fast_leave [enable|disable] | report_suppression [enable | disable]}(1)
The config igmp_snooping command configures IGMP snooping on the switch.
NOTE: A fast leave enabled switch can not be attached to another report suppression enabled switch's downstream interface. That is, if switch A is attached to switch B's downstream interface, you can not enable the fast leave feature on switch A and enable report suppression on switch B simultaneously.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured. All indicates all VLANs.
host_timeout – Specify the host time-out value here.
router_timeout – Specify the rouer time-out value here.
leave_timer – Specify the leave timer value here.
state - Enable or disable IGMP snooping for the chosen VLAN.
fast_leave - Enable or disable the IGMP snooping fast leave function.
If enabled, the membership is immediately removed when the system receives the IGMP leave message.
report_suppression - When IGMP report suppression is enabled (the default), the switch sends the first IGMP report from all hosts for a group to all the multicast routers. The switch does not send the remaining IGMP reports for the group to the multicast routers.
If the multicast router query includes requests only for IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports, the switch forwards only the first IGMPv1 or IGMPv2 report from all hosts for a group to all the multicast routers.
If the multicast router query also includes requests for IGMPv3 reports, the switch forwards all IGMPv3 reports for a group to the multicast devices.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure IGMP snooping:
DGS-3450:admin# config igmp_snooping vlan default state enable
Command: config igmp_snooping vlan default state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config igmp_snooping querier
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the time in seconds between general query transmissions, the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from members, and the permitted packet loss that guarantees IGMP snooping.
config igmp_snooping querier [vlan <vlan_name 32> | all]{ query_interval <sec 1-
65535> | max_response_time <sec 1-25> | robustness_variable <value 1-255> | last_member_query_interval <sec 1-25> | state [enable | disable]| version <value 1-3> }
This command configures the IGMP snooping querier.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping querier is to be configured.
276
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config igmp_snooping querier
Restrictions
query_interval - Specify the amount of time in seconds between general query transmissions.
The default setting is 125 seconds.
max_reponse_time - Specify the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from members.
The default setting is 10 seconds.
robustness_variable - Provides fine-tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet. The value of the robustness variable is used in calculating the following IGMP message intervals:
• Group member interval - Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides there are no more members of a group on a network. This interval is calculated as follows: (robustness variable x query interval) + (1 x query response interval).
• Other querier present interval - Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another multicast router that is the querier. This interval is calculated as follows: (robustness variable x query interval) + (0.5 x query response interval).
• Last member query count - Number of group-specific queries sent before the router assumes there are no local members of a group. The default number is the value of the robustness variable.
• By default, the robustness variable is set to 2. You might want to increase this value if you expect a subnet to be loosely.
last_member_query_interval - Specify the maximum amount of time between group-specific query messages, including those sent in response to leave-group messages. You might lower this interval to reduce the amount of time it takes a router to detect the loss of the last member of a group.
On receiving a leave message, the router will assume there are no local members on the interface if there are no reports received after the response time (which is last member query interval * robustness variable)
state - If the state is enabled, it allows the switch to be selected as an IGMP Querier (sends
IGMP query packets). It the state is disabled, then the switch cannot play the role as a querier.
NOTE: If the l3 router connected to the switch provide only the IGMP proxy function but does not provide the multicast routing function, then this state must be configured as disabled.
Otherwise, if the l3 router is not selected as the querier, it will not send the IGMP query packet. Since it will not send the multicast-routing protocol packet, the port will be timed out as a router port.
version - Specify the version of IGMP packet that will be sent by this port. If an IGMP packet received by the interface has a version higher than the specified version, this packet will be dropped.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the IGMP snooping querier:
DGS-3450:admin# config igmp_snooping querier vlan default query_interval 125 state enable
Command: config igmp_snooping querier vlan default query_interval 125 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config router_ports
Purpose Used to configure ports as router ports.
277
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config router_ports
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
config router_ports <vlan_name 32> [add | delete] <portlist>
This command allows you to designate a range of ports as being connected to multicastenabled routers. This will ensure that all packets with such a router as its destination will reach the multicast-enabled router, regardless of protocol, etc.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
add | delete - Specify to add or delete the router ports.
portlist - Specify a range of ports to be configured. (UnitID:port number)
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set up static router ports:
DGS-3450:admin# config router_ports default add 2:1-2:10
Command: config router_ports default add 2:1-2:10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config router_ports_forbidden
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure ports as forbidden router ports.
config router_ports_forbidden <vlan_name 32> [add | delete] <portlist>
This command allows you to designate a range of ports as being not connected to multicastenabled routers. This ensures that the forbidden router port will not propagate routing packets out.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
add | delete - Specify to add or delete the router ports.
portlist - Specify a range of ports to be configured. (UnitID:port number)
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set up port range 1-10 to forbidden router ports of default VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# config router_ports_forbidden default add 1-10
Command: config router_ports_forbidden default add 1-10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable igmp_snooping
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to enable IGMP snooping on the switch.
enable igmp_snooping {forward_mcrouter_only}
This command allows you to enable IGMP snooping on the switch. The forward mcrouter only function is disabled by default. The enable the IGMP snooping forward mcrouter only command will enable the IGMP snooping function and the forward multicast router only
278
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
enable igmp_snooping
Parameters
Restrictions function.
If the forward multicast router only is enabled, the switch will forward all multicast traffic to the multicast router only. Otherwise, the switch forwards all multicast traffic to any IP router.
forward_mcrouter_only - If specified, the switch will learn the router port based on identification of the multicast routing protocol packet and IGMP control packet.
If not specified, the switch will learn the router port based on identification of the unicast routing protocol packet, the multicast routing protocol packet, and the IGMP control packet.
When the switch receives an IGMP report packet from a port, this port will be learned as a member port of the multicast group that the port is reported, and the router will be a default member of this multicast group. The multicast packet destined for this multicast group will be forwarded to all the members of this multicast group.
The identification of a router port will also affect the forwarding of the IGMP control packet.
When the switch receives the IGMP report packet from the client member, it will forward the packet to the router port. If the switch receives the IGMP query packet from the router port, it will forward the packet to the client member port. (If the switch itself is the querier, then it will issue the query packet to the client member port.)
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable IGMP snooping on the switch:
DGS-3450:admin# enable igmp_snooping
Command: enable igmp_snooping
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable igmp_snooping
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable IGMP snooping on the switch.
disable igmp_snooping {forward_mcrouter_only}
This command disables IGMP snooping on the switch. Disabling the IGMP snooping allows all IGMP and IP multicast traffic to flood within a given IP interface. Note that disabling IGMP snooping will also disable the forward multicast router only function.
The disable mld_snooping forward_mcrouter_only command will only disable the forward multicast router only function.
forward_mcrouter_only - If specified, the switch will learn the router port based on identification of the multicast routing protocol packet and IGMP control packet.
If not specified, the switch will learn the router port based on identification of the unicast routing protocol packet, the multicast routing protocol packet, and the IGMP control packet.
When the switch receives an IGMP report packet from a port, this port will be learned as a member port of the multicast group that the port is reported, and the router will be a default member of this multicast group. The multicast packet destined for this multicast group will be forwarded to all the members of this multicast group.
The identification of a router port will also affect the forwarding of the IGMP control packet.
When the switch receives the IGMP report packet from the client member, it will forward the packet to the router port. If the switch receives the IGMP query packet from the router port, it will forward the packet to the client member port. (If the switch itself is the querier, then it will issue the query packet to the client member port.)
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
279
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To disable IGMP snooping on the switch:
DGS-3450:admin# disable igmp_snooping
Command: disable igmp_snooping
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create igmp_snooping static_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure an IGMP snooping multicast static group.
create igmp_snooping static_group [vlan<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ] < ipaddr >
This command allows you to create an IGMP snooping static group. Member ports can be added to the static group. The static member and the dynamic member port form the member ports of a group.
The static group will only take effect when IGMP snooping is enabled on the VLAN. For those static member ports, the device needs to emulate the IGMP protocol operation to the querier, and forward the traffic destined to the multicast group to the member ports.
For a layer 3 device, the device is also responsible to route the packet destined for this specific group to static member ports.
The static member port will only affect V2 IGMP operation.
The Reserved IP multicast address 224.0.0.X must be excluded from the configured group.
The VLAN must be created first before a static group can be created.
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
ipaddr - Specify the multicast group IP address (for Layer 3 switch).
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create an IGMP snooping static group for “vlan1”, group 239.1.1.1:
DGS-3450:admin# create igmp_snooping static_group vlan vlan1 239.1.1.1
Command: create igmp_snooping static_group vlan vlan1 239.1.1.1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete igmp_snooping static_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to delete a IGMP snooping multicast static group.
delete igmp_snooping static_group [vlan<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ]
<ipaddr>
The deletion of an IGMP snooping static group will not affect the IGMP snooping dynamic member ports for a group.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
ipaddr - Specify the multicast group IP address (for Layer 3 switch).
280
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete igmp_snooping static_group
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete an IGMP snooping static group for “vlan1”, group 239.1.1.1:
DGS-3450:admin# delete igmp_snooping static_group vlan vlan1 239.1.1.1
Command: delete igmp_snooping static_group vlan vlan1 239.1.1.1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config igmp_snooping static_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure an IGMP snooping multicast group static member port.
config igmp_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ] < ipaddr > [ add | delete] <portlist>
When a port is configured as a static member port, the IGMP protocol will not operate on this port. For example, suppose that a port is a dynamic member port learned by IGMP. If this port is configured as a static member later, then the IGMP protocol will stop operating on this port. The IGMP protocol will resume once this port is removed from static member ports.
The static member port will only affect V2 IGMP operation.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
ipaddr - Specify the multicast group IP address (for Layer 3 switch).
add | delete - Specify to add or delete the member ports.
portlist - Specify a range of ports to be configured.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To unset port range 9-10 from IGMP snooping static member ports for group 239.1.1.1 on default VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# config igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1 delete 9-10
Command: create igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1 delete 9-10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show igmp_snooping static_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to display an IGMP Snooping multicast group static member port.
show igmp_snooping static_group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] < ipaddr >}
This command is used to display the IGMP snooping multicast group static members.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
ipaddr - Specify the multicast group IP address (for Layer 3 switch).
281
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show igmp_snooping static_group
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display all the IGMP snooping static groups:
DGS-3450:admin#show igmp_snooping static_group
Command: show igmp_snooping static_group
VLAN ID/Name IP Address Static Member Ports
------------------------------------- --------------- ----------------------
4094/vlan1 239.1.1.1
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
show igmp_snooping group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current IGMP snooping group configuration on the switch.
show igmp_snooping group {vlan <vlan_name 32>} {data_driven}
This command displays the current IGMP snooping group configuration on the switch.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view IGMP snooping group information.
data_driven - Specify to display the dynamic data learning groups.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show IGMP snooping groups when IGMP v3 is supported:
The first item means that for ports 1-2, the data from the 10.0.0.2/225.0.0.2 will be forwarded.
The second item means that for port 3, the data from the 10.0.0.2/225.0.0.3 must not be forwarded.
The third item means that for ports 4-5, the data from 225.0.0.5 will be forwarded, IGMP v2 group. The source address does not matter.
The fourth item is a data-driven learned entry. If the member port list is empty, the multicast packets will be forwarded to the router ports. If the router port list is empty, the packets will be dropped.
282
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show igmp_snooping group
Command: show igmp_snooping group
Source/Group : 10.0.0.2 / 225.0.0.2
VLAN Name/VID : n172/172
Port Member : 1-2
Mode : INCLUDE
Source/Group : 10.0.0.2 / 225.0.0.3
VLAN Name/VID : n172/172
Port Member : 3
Mode : EXCLUDE
Source/Group : NULL / 225.0.0.5
VLAN Name/VID : n172/172
Port Member : 4-5
Mode : EXCLUDE
Source/Group : NULL / 239.255.255.250
VLAN Name/VID : n172/172
Port Member : 2:22
Mode : EXCLUDE
Total Entries : 4
DGS-3450:admin# show igmp_snooping group data_driven
Command: show igmp_snooping group data_driven
Source/Group : NULL/225.0.0.5
VLAN Name/VID
Port Member
Router Ports
Mode
: default/1
:
: 24
: EXCLUDE
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
show router_ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the currently configured router ports on the switch.
show router_ports {vlan <vlan_name 32>} {[static | dynamic | forbidden]}
This command displays the currently configured router ports on the switch.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
static - Displays router ports that have been statically configured.
dynamic - Displays router ports that have been dynamically configured.
forbidden - Displays forbidden router ports that have been statically configured.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all currently configured router ports on the switch.
None.
Example usage:
To display router ports:
283
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show router_ports
Command: show router_ports
VLAN Name : default
Static router port : 1-10
Dynamic router port :
Forbidden router port:
VLAN Name : vlan2
Static router port :
Dynamic router port :
Forbidden router port:
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3450:admin#
config mld_snooping
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure MLD snooping on the switch.
config mld_snooping [vlan <vlan_name 32> | all] {node_timeout <sec 1-16711450> | router_timeout <sec 1-16711450> | done_timer <sec 1-16711450> | state [enable | disable] | fast_done [enable | disable]
This command is used to configure MLD snooping on the switch.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured.
all - Specify all VLANs for which MLD snooping is to be configured.
node_timeout – Specify the node time-out value here.
router_timeout – Specify the router time-out value here.
done_timer – Specify the done timer here.
state - Enable or disable MLD snooping for the chosen VLAN.
fast_done - Enable or disable MLD snooping fast_leave function.
If enable, the membership is immediately removed when the system receive the MLD leave message.
If the multicast router query includes requests only for MLDv1 reports, the switch forwards only the first MLDv1 report from all hosts for a group to all the multicast routers.
If the multicast router query also includes requests for MLDv2 reports, the switch forwards all
MLDv2 reports for a group to the multicast devices.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure MLD snooping:
DGS-3450:admin# config mld_snooping vlan default state enable
Command: config mld_snooping vlan default state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config mld_snooping querier
Purpose Used to configure the time in seconds between general query transmissions, the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from members, and the permitted packet loss that
284
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config mld_snooping querier
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions guarantees MLD snooping.
config mld_snooping querier [vlan <vlan_name 32> | all] {query_interval <sec 1-65535>
| max_response_time <sec 1-25> | robustness_variable <value 1-255> | last_listener_query_interval <sec 1-25> | state [enable | disable] | version <value 1-2>
}(1)
This command configures the timer in seconds between general query transmissions, the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from listeners, and the permitted packet loss that is guaranteed by MLD snooping.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping querier is to be configured.
all - Specify all VLANs for which MLD snooping querier is to be configured.
query_interval - Specify the amount of time in seconds between general query transmissions.
The default setting is 125 seconds..
max_reponse_time - Specify the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from listeners.
The default setting is 10 seconds.
robustness_variable - Provides fine-tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet. The value of the robustness variable is used in calculating the following MLD message intervals:
• Group listener interval - Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides there are no more listeners of a group on a network. This interval is calculated as follows: (robustness variable * query interval) + (1 * query response interval).
• Other querier present interval - Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another multicast router that is the querier. This interval is calculated as follows: (robustness variable * query interval) + (0.5 * query response interval).
• Last listener query count - Number of group-specific queries sent before the router assumes there are no local listeners of a group. The default number is the value of the robustness variable.
• By default, the robustness variable is set to 2. You might want to increase this value if you expect a subnet to be loosely.
last_listener_query_interval - Specify the maximum amount of time between group-specific query messages, including those sent in response to done-group messages. You might lower this interval to reduce the amount of time it takes a router to detect the loss of the last listener of a group.
state - This allows the switch to be specified as an MLD Querier (sends MLD query packets) or a Non-Querier (does not send MLD query packets). Set to enable or disable.
version <value 1-2> - Specify the version of MLD packet that will be sent by this port. If a
MLD packet received by the interface has a version higher than the specified version, this packet will be dropped.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the MLD snooping querier:
DGS-3450:admin# config mld_snooping querier vlan default query_interval 125 state enable
Command: config mld_snooping querier vlan default query_interval 125 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config mld_snooping mrouter_ports
Purpose Used to configure ports as router ports.
285
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config mld_snooping mrouter_ports
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
config mld_snooping mrouter_ports <vlan_name 32> [add | delete] <portlist>
This command allows you to designate a range of ports as being connected to multicastenabled routers. This will ensure that all packets with such a router as its destination will reach the multicast-enabled router, regardless of protocol, etc.
add | delete - Specify to add or delete the router ports.
portlist - Specify a range of ports to be configured. (UnitID:port number)
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set up static router ports:
DGS-3450:admin# config mld_snooping mrouter_ports default add 2:1-2:10
Command: config mld_snooping mrouter_ports default add 2:1-2:10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure ports as forbidden router ports.
config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden <vlan_name 32> [add | delete]
<portlist>
This command allows you to designate a range of ports as being not connected to multicastenabled routers. This ensures that the forbidden router port will not propagate routing packets out.
add | delete - Specify to add or delete the router ports.
portlist - Specify a range of ports to be configured. (UnitID:port number)
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set up port range 1-10 to forbidden router ports of the default VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden default add 1-10
Command: config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden default add 1-10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable mld_snooping
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to enable MLD snooping on the switch.
enable mld_snooping {forward_mcrouter_only}
This command allows you to enable MLD snooping on the switch. The forward_mcrouter_only function is disabled by default. The enable mld_snooping forward_mcrouter_only command will enable the MLD snooping function and the forward multicast router only function.
If forward multicast router only is enabled, the switch will forward all multicast traffic to the
286
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
enable mld_snooping
Parameters
Restrictions multicast router, only. Otherwise, the switch forwards all multicast traffic to any IP router.
forward_mcrouter_only - If specified, the switch will learn the router port based on identification of the multicast routing protocol packet and MLD control packet.
If not specified, the switch will learn the router port based on identification of the unicast routing protocol packet, the multicast routing protocol packet, and the MLD control packet.
When the switch receives an MLD report packet from a port, this port will be learned as a member port of the multicast group that the port is reported, and the router will be a default member of this multicast group. The multicast packet destined for this multicast group will be forwarded to all the members of this multicast group.
The identification of a router port will also affect the forwarding of the MLD control packet.
When the switch receives the MLD report packet from the client member, it will forward the packet to the router port. If the switch receives the MLD query packet from the router port, it will forward the packet to the client member port. (If the switch itself is the querier, then it will issue the query packet to the client member port.)
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable MLD snooping on the switch:
DGS-3450:admin# enable mld_snooping
Command: enable mld_snooping
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable mld_snooping
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable MLD snooping on the switch.
disable mld_snooping {forward_mcrouter_only}
This command disables MLD snooping on the switch. Disabling MLD snooping allows all
MLD and IP multicast traffic to flood within a given IP interface. Note that disabling MLD snooping will also disable the forward multicast router only function.
The disable mld_snooping forward_mcrouter_only command will only disable the forward multicast router only function.
forward_mcrouter_only - If specified, the switch will learn the router port based on identification of the multicast routing protocol packet and MLD control packet.
If not specified, the switch will learn the router port based on identification of the unicast routing protocol packet, the multicast routing protocol packet, and the MLD control packet.
When the switch receives an MLD report packet from a port, this port will be learned as a member port of the multicast group that the port is reported, and the router will be a default member of this multicast group. The multicast packet destined for this multicast group will be forwarded to all the members of this multicast group.
The identification of a router port will also affect the forwarding of the MLD control packet.
When the switch receives the MLD report packet from the client member, it will forward the packet to the router port. If the switch receives the MLD query packet from the router port, it will forward the packet to the client member port. (If the switch itself is the querier, then it will issue the query packet to the client member port.)
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
287
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To disable MLD snooping on the switch:
DGS-3450:admin# disable mld_snooping
Command: disable mld_snooping
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show mld_snooping
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the current status of MLD snooping on the switch.
show mld_snooping {vlan <vlan_name 32>}
This command will display the current MLD snooping configuration on the switch.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view the IGMP snooping configuration.
If VLAN is not specified, the system will display all current MLD snooping configurations.
None.
Example usage:
To show MLD snooping:
DGS-3450:admin# show mld_snooping
Command: show mld_snooping
MLD Snooping Global State : Disabled
Multicast router Only : Disabled
Data Driven Learning Max Entries : 56
VLAN Name : default
Query Interval : 125
Max Response Time : 10
Robustness Value : 2
Last Listener Query Interval : 1
Node Timeout : 260
Router Timeout : 260
Done Timer : 2
Querier State : Enabled
Querier Router Behavior : Non-Querier
State : Disabled
Fast Done : Disabled
Version : 2
Data Driven Learning State : Enabled
Data Driven Learning Aged Out : Disabled
Data Driven Group Expiry Time : 260
DGS-3450:admin#
show mld_snooping group
Purpose
Syntax
Used to display the current MLD snooping group information on the switch.
show mld_snooping group {vlan <vlan_name 32>} {data_driven}
288
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show mld_snooping group
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command displays the current MLD snooping group information on the switch.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view MLD snooping group information.
If VLAN and ports and IP address are not specified, the system will display all current IGMP snooping group information.
None.
Example usage:
To show an MLD snooping group when MLD v2 is supported:
The first item means that for ports 1-2, the data from the 2001::1/FF1E::1 will be forwarded.
The second item means that for port 3, the data from the 2002::2/FF1E::1 must not be forwarded.
The third item means that for ports 4-5, the data from FF1E::2 will be forwarded, MLD v1 group doesn't care about the source address.
The fourth item is a data-driven learned entry. The member port list is empty. The multicast packets will be forwarded to the router ports. If the router port list is empty, the packet will be dropped.
289
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show mld_snooping group
Command: show mld_snooping group
Source/Group
VLAN Name/VID
: 2001::1/FF1E::1
:default/1
Reports
Member Ports
Router Ports
UP Time
: 1
: 1-2
: 24
: 26
Expiry Time
Filter Mode
Source/Group
VLAN Name/VID:
Reports
Member Ports
Source/Group
VLAN Name/VID
Reports
Member Ports
Router Ports
UP Time
Expiry Time
Filter Mode
Source/Group
VLAN Name/VID
Router Ports
UP Time
Expiry Time
Filter Mode
Reports
Member Ports
Router Ports
UP Time
Expiry Time
Filter Mode
: 258
: INCLUDE
: 2002::2/FF1E::1
: default/1
: 1
: 3
: 24
: 29
: 247
: EXCLUDE
: NULL/FF1E::2
: default/1
: 1
: 4-5
: 24
: 40
: 205
: EXCLUDE
: NULL/FF1E::5
: default/1
: 0
:
: 24
: 100
: 200
: EXCLUDE
Total Entries : 4
DGS-3450:admin# show mld_snooping group data_driven
Command: show mld_snooping group data_driven
Source/Group
VLAN Name/VID
Port Member
Router Ports
Mode
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
: NULL/FF1E::5
: default/1
:
: 24
: EXCLUDE
show mld_snooping mrouter_ports
Purpose
Syntax
Used to display the currently configured router ports on the switch.
show mld_snooping mrouter_ports {vlan <vlan_name 32>} {[static | dynamic | forbidden]}
290
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show mld_snooping mrouter_ports
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command displays the currently configured router ports on the switch.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
static - Displays router ports that have been statically configured.
dynamic - Displays router ports that have been dynamically configured.
forbidden - Displays forbidden router ports that have been statically configured.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all currently configured router ports on the switch.
None.
Example usage:
To display the mld_snooping router ports:
DGS-3450:admin#show mld_snooping mrouter_ports
Command: show mld_snooping mrouter_ports
VLAN Name : default
Static mrouter port :
Dynamic mrouter port :
Forbidden mrouter port:
VLAN Name : vlan1
Static mrouter port :
Dynamic mrouter port :
Forbidden mrouter port:
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3450:admin#
config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning
Purpose
Syntax
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the data driven learning of an IGMP snooping group.
config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlanid
<vlanid_list> | all] {state [enable | disable] | aged_out [enable | disable] | expiry_time
<sec 1-65535>}(1)
This command is used to enable or disable the data driven learning of an IGMP snooping group.
When data-driven learning is enabled for the VLAN, when the switch receives the IP multicast traffic on this VLAN, an IGMP snooping group will be created. That is, the learning of an entry is not activated by IGMP membership registration, but activated by the traffic. For an ordinary IGMP snooping entry, the IGMP protocol will take care of the aging out of the entry. For a data-driven entry, the entry can be specified not to be aged out or to be aged out by the aged timer.
When data driven learning is enabled, and the data driven table is not full, the multicast filtering mode for all ports is ignored. That is, the multicast packets will be forwarded to router ports. If the data driven learning table is full, the multicast packets will be forwarded
291
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning
Parameters
Restrictions according to the multicast filtering mode.
Note that if a data-driven group is created and IGMP member ports are learned later, the entry will become an ordinary IGMP snooping entry. That is, the aging out mechanism will follow the ordinary IGMP snooping entry.
vlan_name - Specify the VLAN name to be configured.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID to be configured.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
all - Specify all VLANs to be configured.
state - (Optional) Specify to enable or disable the data driven learning of an IGMP snooping group.
enable - Enter enable to enable the data driven learning option. By default, the state is enabled.
disable - Enter disable to disable the data driven learning option.
aged_out - (Optional) Enable or disable the aging out of the entry.
enable - Enter enable to enable the aging out of the entry.
disable - Enter disable to disable the aging out of the entry. By default, the state is disabled state.
expiry_time - (Optional) Specify the data driven group lifetime in seconds. This parameter is valid only when aged_out is enabled.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the expiry time here. This value must be between 1 and 65535 seconds.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the data driven learning of an IGMP snooping group on the default VLAN:
Prompt# config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning vlan default state enable
Command: config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning vlan default state enable
Success.
Prompt#
config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven.
config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry <value 1-960>
Used to configure the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven.
When the table is full, the system will stop the learning of the new data-driven groups. Traffic for the new groups will be dropped.
max_learned_entry - Specify the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven. The suggested default setting is 56. This default setting may vary depending on projects.
<value 1-960> - Enter the maximum learning entry value here. This value must be between 1 and 960.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
292
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To set the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven:
Prompt# config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 50
Command: config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 50
Success.
Prompt#
config mld_snooping data_driven_learning
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to enable or disable the data-driven learning of an MLD snooping group.
config mld_snooping data_driven_learning [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlanid < vlanid_list > |all] {state [enable | disable] | aged_out [enable | disable] | expiry_time
<sec 1-65535>}(1)
This command is used to enable or disable the data-driven learning of an MLD snooping group.
When data-driven learning is enabled for the VLAN, when the switch receives the IP multicast traffic, on this VLAN, an MLD snooping group will be created. That is, the learning of an entry is not activated by MLD membership registration, but activated by the traffic. For an ordinary MLD snooping entry, the MLD protocol will take care the aging out of the entry.
For a data-driven entry, the entry can be specified not to be aged out or to be aged out by the aged timer.
When the data driven learning is enabled, and the data driven table is not full, the multicast filtering mode for all ports is ignored. That is, the multicast packets will be forwarded to router ports. If the data driven learning table is full, the multicast packets will be forwarded according to the multicast filtering mode.
Note that if a data-driven group is created and MLD member ports are learned later, the entry will become an ordinary MLD snooping entry. That is, the aging out mechanism will follow the ordinary MLD snooping entry.
vlan_name - Specify the VLAN name to be configured.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID to be configured.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
all - Specify that all VLANs are to be configured.
state - (Optional) Specify to enable or disable the data driven learning of MLD snooping groups. By default, the state is enabled.
enable - Enter enable to enable the data driven learning state.
disable - Enter disable to disable the data driven learning state.
aged_out - (Optional) Enable or disable the aging out of entries. By default, the state is disabled.
enable - Enter enable to enable the aged out option.
disable - Enter disable to disable the aged out option.
expiry_time - (Optional) Specify the data driven group lifetime, in seconds. This parameter is valid only when aged_out is enabled.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the expiry time value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535 seconds.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the data driven learning of an MLD snooping group on the default VLAN:
293
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Prompt# config mld_snooping data_driven_learning vlan default state enable
Command: config mld_snooping data_driven_learning vlan default state enable
Success.
Prompt#
config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven.
config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry <value 1-511>
This command is used to configure the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven.
When the table is full, the system will stop the learning of the new data-driven groups. Traffic for the
max_learned_entry - Specify the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven. The suggested default setting is 56. This default setting may vary depending on project.
<value 1-511> - Enter the maximum learned entry value here. This value must be between 1 and 511.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven:
Prompt# config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 50
Command: config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 50
Success.
Prompt#
config igmp_snooping forward_lookup_mode
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure IGMP snooping forward lookup mode.
config igmp_snooping forward_lookup_mode [ip | mac]
The command is used to configure IGMP snooping forward lookup mode on the switch. If this mode is configured to ip, the multicast forwarding is based on IP address; if this mode is configured to mac, the multicast forwarding is based on MAC address.
ip – Specify the multicast forwarding lookup to be based on IP address.
mac – Specify the multicast forwarding lookup to be based on MAC address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the IGMP snooping forward lookup mode to be MAC-based:
294
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#config igmp_snooping forward_lookup_mode mac
Command: config igmp_snooping forward_lookup_mode mac
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show igmp_snooping forward_lookup_mode
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show IGMP snooping forward lookup mode.
show igmp_snooping forward_lookup_mode
The command is used to show IGMP snooping forward lookup mode on the switch.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show IGMP snooping forward lookup mode:
DGS-3450:admin#show igmp_snooping forward_lookup_mode
Command: show igmp_snooping forward_lookup_mode
IGMP snooping forward lookup mode: MAC address.
DGS-3450:admin#
295
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
38
IP D
IRECTED
B
ROADCAST
C
OMMANDS
The IP Directed Broadcast commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create ipif config ipif enable ipif disable ipif enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto show ipif show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto delete ipif
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> <network_address> <vlan_name 32> { secondary | state [ enable | disable ] | proxy_arp [enable|disable] {local [enable|disable]}}
<ipif_name 12> [{ipaddress <network_address> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | state
[enab l e|disable] | proxy_arp [enable | disable] {local [enable | disable]}} | bootp | dhcp | ipv6 ipv6address {prefix_name <string 1-12>} <ipv6networkaddr> | dhcpv6_client [enable | disable] | ip_directed_broadcast [enable | disable] | dhcp_option12 [hostname <hostname 63> | clear_hostname | state [enable | disable]] | dhcpv6_client_pd [enable prefix_name <string 1-12> | disable]]
[<ipif_name 12> | all]
[<ipif_name 12> | all]
[<ipif_name 12> | all]
[<ipif_name 12> | all]
{<ipif_name 12>}
{<ipif_name 12>}
[<ipif_name 12> {ipv6address {prefix_name <string 1-12>} <ipv6networkaddr>} | all]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create ipif
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to create a layer 3 interface.
create ipif <ipif_name 12> <network_address> <vlan_name 32> { secondary | state
[enable | disable ] | proxy_arp [enable | disable] {local [enable | disable]}}
This command creates a L3 interface.
This interface can be configured with IPv4 or IPv6 address. Currently, it has a restriction. An interface can have only one IPv4 address defined. But it can have multiple IPv6 addresses defined. Thus, the multinetting configuration of IPv4 must be done through creation of a secondary interface on the same VLAN, instead of directly configuring multiple IPv4 addresses on the same interface. Configuration of IPv6 address must be done through the command config ipif.
Note that for an IPv6 case, the multicast routing protocol state in secondary IP interfaces must follow master IP interface’s state. For example, if dvmrp state in master IP interface is enabled, the secondary IP interfaces need to be the same.
ipif_name - The name of the interface.
network_address - IPv4 networkaddress (xxx.xxx.xxx/xx). It specifies a host address and length of network mask.
vlan_name - The name of a vlan.
secondary - IPv4secondary interface to be created.
state - State of interface.
proxy_arp - Enable/disable of proxy ARP function. It is for IPv4 function. Default: Disabled.
local - This setting controls whether the system provides the proxy reply for the ARP packets destined for IP address located in the same interface as the received interface.
296
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create ipif
Restrictions
When proxy ARP is enabled for an interface, the system will do the proxy reply for the ARP packets destined for IP address located in a different interface. For ARP packets destined for
IP address located in the same interface, the system will check this setting to determine whether to reply.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create an IP interface called ‘InterS’:
DGS-3450:admin# create ipif InterS 192.168.69.1/24 default secondary
Command: create ipif InterS 192.168.69.1/24 default secondary
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ipif
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to configure the IP directed-broadcast state of the interface.
config ipif <ipif_name 12> [{ipaddress <network_address> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | state [enab l e|disable] | proxy_arp [enable | disable] {local [enable | disable]}} | bootp | dhcp | ipv6 ipv6address {prefix_name <string 1-12>} <ipv6networkaddr> | dhcpv6_client [enable | disable] | ip_directed_broadcast [enable | disable] | dhcp_option12 [hostname <hostname 63> | clear_hostname | state [enable | disable]] | dhcpv6_client_pd [enable prefix_name <string 1-12> | disable]]
For IPv4, only the system interface can be specified for the way to get the IP address. If the mode is set to BOOTP or DHCP, then the IPv4 address will be obtained through the operation of protocols. The manual configuration of the IP address will be of no use. If you configures the mode to the BOOTP or DHCP first, and configure IP address later, the mode will be changed to manual configured mode. For IPv6, multiple addresses can defined on the same L3 interface. For IPv4, multi-netting must be done by creation of a secondary interface.
Note that IPv6 address is not allowed to be configured on a secondary interface.
Only the system interface is allowed to set to DHCP mode.
ipif_name - The name of the interface.
network_address - Configures a network on an ipif. The address should specify a host address and length of network mask. Since an ipif can have only one IPv4 address, the new configured address will overwrite the original one.
vlan - Name of the vlan where the IPIF is operated.
proxy_arp - Enable/disable of proxy ARP function. It is for IPv4 function. Default: Disabled.
local - This setting controls whether the system provides the proxy reply for the ARP packets destined for IP address located in the same interface as the received interface. When proxy
ARP is enabled for an interface, the system will do the proxy reply for the ARP packets destined for IP address located in a different interface. For ARP packets destined for IP address located in the same interface, the system will check this setting to determine whether to reply.
bootp - Use BOOTP to obtain the IPv4 address.
dhcp - Use DHCP to obtain the IPv4 address.
ipv6networkaddr - IPv6 network address. The address should specify a host address and length of network prefix. There can be multiple V6 addresses defined on an interface. Thus, as a new address is defined, it is added on this ipif.
state - Enable or disable state of the ipif.
dhcp_option12 hostname - Specify the host name to be inserted in the DHCPDISCOVER and DHCPREQUEST message. The specified host name must start with a letter, end with a
297
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ipif
Restrictions letter or digit, and have only letters, digits, and hyphen as interior characters; the maximal length is 63.
dhcp_option12 clear_hostname - To clear the hostname setting. If host name is empty, system name will be used to encode option 12. The length of system is more than 63. The superfluous chars will be truncated. If system name is also empty, then product model name will be used to encode option 12.
dhcp_option12 state – Enable or disable insertion of option 12 in the DHCPDISCOVER and
DHCPREQUEST message.
ip_mtu - Specifies the IP layer mtu. The range is 512-1712. The default setting is 1500 bytes.
dhcpv6_client - See below:
enable - Enable the DHCPv6 client state of the interface.
disable - Disable the DHCPv6 client state of the interface.
ip_directed_broadcast - See below:
enable - Enabled the IP directed-broadcast state of the interface.
disable - Disabled the IP directed-broadcast state of the interface.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set the IP Directed Broadcast state of System interface to enable:
DGS-3450:admin# config ipif System ip_directed_broadcast enable
Command: config ipif System ip_directed_broadcast enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To display the IP Directed Broadcast settings of System interface:
DGS-3450:admin#show ipif System
Command: show ipif System
IP Interface : System
VLAN Name : default
Interface Admin State : Enabled
Link Status : LinkUp
IPv4 Address : 10.90.90.90/8 (Manual) Primary
Proxy ARP : Disabled (Local : Disabled)
IP Directed Broadcast : Enabled
IPv4 State : Enabled
DHCPv6 Client State : Disabled
DHCPv6 Client PD State : Disabled
DHCP Option12 State : Disabled
DHCP Option12 Host Name :
DGS-3450:admin#
Example usage:
To configure the DHCPv6 client state of the System interface to enabled:
298
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config ipif System dhcpv6_client state enable
Command : config ipif System dhcpv6_client state enable success
DGS-3450:admin#
To display IP interface settings:
DGS-3450:admin#show ipif System
Command: show ipif System
IP Interface : System
VLAN Name : default
Interface Admin State : Enabled
Link Status : LinkDown
IPv4 Address : 10.90.90.90/8 (Manual) Primary
Proxy ARP : Disabled (Local : Disabled)
Ip_directed-broadcast : Disabled
IPv4 State : Enabled
DHCPv6 Client State : Disabled
DHCPv6 Client PD State : Disabled
DHCP Option12 State : Disabled
DHCP Option12 Host Name :
DGS-3450:admin#
enable ipif
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the admin state for an interface.
enable ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all]
This command is used to enable the state for an IPIF. When the state is enabled, the IPv4 processing will be started when the IPv4 address is configured on the IPIF. The IPv6 processing will be started when the IPv6 address is explicitly configured on the IPIF.
ipif_name - Specifies the name of the IP interface used.
all - Specifies that all the interfaces will be enabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the state for an interface:
DGS-3450:admin#enable ipif InterS
Command: enable ipif InterS
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable ipif
Purpose
Syntax
Used to disable the admin state for an interface.
disable ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all ]
299
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
disable ipif
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to disable the state for an IPIF.
ipif_name - Specifies the name of the IP interface used.
all - Specifies that all the interfaces will be disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable an interface’s state:
DGS-3450:admin#disable ipif InterS
Command: disable ipif InterS
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the auto configuration of link local address when no IPv6 address is configured.
enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto [<ipif_name 12> | all ]
This command is used to enable the auto configuration of link local address when there are no IPv6 addresses explicitly configured. When an IPv6 address is explicitly configured, the link local address will be automatically configured, and the IPv6 processing will be started.
When there is no IPv6 address explicitly configured, by default, link local address is not configured and the IPv6 processing will be disabled. By enable this automatic configuration, the link local address will be automatically configured and IPv6 processing will be started.
ipif_name - Specifies the name of the IPv6 interface used.
all - Specifies that all the interfaces will be enabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the automatic configuration of link local address for an interface:
DGS-3450:admin#enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System
Command: enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to disable the auto configuration of link local address when no IPv6 address are configured.
disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto [<ipif_name 12> | all ]
This command is used to disable the auto configuration of link local address when no IPv6 address is explicitly.
ipif_name - Specifies the name of the IPv6 interface used.
300
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
Restrictions
all - Specifies that all the interfaces will be disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the automatic configuration of link local address for an interface:
DGS-3450:admin#disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System
Command: disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ipif
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the interface’s information.
show ipif {<ipif_name 12>}
This command is used to show an interface’s information. Configuration for both IPv4 and
IPv6’ addresses will be displayed.
ipif_name - Specifies the name of the IP interface used.
None.
Example usage:
To show interface’s information:
301
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show ipif
Command: show ipif
IP Interface : InterS
IP Interface : InterS
Interface Admin State : Enabled
Link Status : LinkUp
IPv4 Address : 192.168.69.1/24 (Manual) Secondary
Proxy ARP : Disabled (Local : Disabled)
IP Directed Broadcast : Disabled
IPv4 State : Enabled
IP Interface : System
VLAN Name : default
Interface Admin State : Enabled
Link Status : LinkUp
IPv4 Address : 10.90.90.90/8 (Manual) Primary
Proxy ARP : Disabled (Local : Disabled)
IP Directed Broadcast : Enabled
IPv4 State : Enabled
DHCPv6 Client State : Disabled
DHCPv6 Client PD State : Disabled
DHCP Option12 State : Disabled
DHCP Option12 Host Name :
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3450:admin#
show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the link local address automatic configuration state.
show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto {<ipif_name 12>}
This command is used to display the link local address automatic configuration state.
ipif_name - Specifies the name of the IP interface used.
None.
Example usage:
To display the link local address automatic configuration:
DGS-3450:admin#show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
Command: show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
IPIF: System Automatic Link Local Address: Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
delete ipif
Purpose
Syntax
Used to delete an interface.
delete ipif [<ipif_name 12> {ipv6address {prefix_name <string 1-12>}
<ipv6networkaddr>} | all]
302
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete ipif
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to delete an interface or all the interfaces.
Note that the system interface can not be deleted. By using this command, a IPv6 address can be deleted from the ipif.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here.
ipv6address - Specifies the IPv6 interface address.
prefix_name <string 1-12> - Specifies the IPv6 interface prefix name.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 interface prefix address here.
all - Specifies that all interfaces will be used.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete an interface:
DGS-3450:admin#delete ipif InterS
Command: delete ipif InterS
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
303
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
39
IP-MAC-P
ORT
B
INDING
(IMPB) C
OMMANDS
IP-MAC-Port Binding (IMPB) is a security application found on edge switches which are usually directly connected to hosts. IMPB enables administrators to configure (or snoop) pairs of MAC and IP addresses that are allowed to access networks through the switch. IP-MAC-Port Binding (IMPB) binds together the network layer IP address, and the Ethernet link layer MAC address, and the receiving port, to allow the transmission of data between the layers.
The IP-MAC-Port Binding (IMPB) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command Parameters
config address_binding ip_mac ports [<portlist> | all ] { state [enable {[strict | loose] | [ipv6 | all ]} | disable {[ ipv6 | all ]}]
| allow_zeroip [enable | disable] | forward_dhcppkt [enable | disable] | mode [arp
| acl ] | stop_learning_threshold<int 0-500>} (1) create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress create address_binding ip_mac
< ipaddr > mac_address < macaddr > {ports [ portlist | all ] delete address_binding config address_binding ip_mac
[ipaddress < ipaddr > | ipv6address <ipv6addr>] mac_address < macaddr > { ports [ portlist | all]}
[ip_mac [[ipaddress < ipaddr > | ipv6address <ipv6addr>] mac_address < macaddr > | all] | blocked [ all | vlan_name < vlan_name > mac_address < macaddr >]]
[ipaddress < ipaddr > | ipv6address <ipv6addr>] mac_address < macaddr >
{ports [ portlist | all]} show address_binding [ip_mac [all | [ipaddress < ipaddr > | ipv6address <ipv6addr>] mac_address < macaddr >] | blocked [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> mac_address <macaddr> ] | ports {<portlist>}] enable address_binding dhcp_snoop {[ipv6 | all]} disable address_binding dhcp_snoop {[ipv6 | all]}
[ <portlist>|all ] {[ipv6 | all]} clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports show address_binding dhcp_snoop config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports
{[max_entry { ports <portlist>} | binding_entry {port <port>}]}
[<portlist> | all] limit [<value 1-50> | no_limit] enable address_binding trap_log disable address_binding trap_log config address_binding recover_learning ports enable address_binding nd_snoop disable address_binding nd_snoop show address_binding nd_snoop show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry
[<portlist> | all]
{port <port>} clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports debug address_binding no debug address_binding
[<portlist> | all]
[event | dhcp | all]
304
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config address_binding ip_mac ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the state of IMPB on the switch for each port.
config address_binding ip_mac ports [< portlist >| all ] {state [ enable {[ strict | loose]} | disable ] | allow_zeroip [enable | disable] | forward_dhcppkt [enable | disable]} (1)
Used to configure the per port state of IMPB on the switch.
If a port has been configured as group member of an aggregated link, then the IMPB function cannot be enabled.
When the binding state is enabled for IP packets and ARP packets received by this port, the switch will check whether the IP address and MAC address matches the binding entry. If the packet does not match it will be dropped.
state - This parameter configures the IMPB port state to be enabled or disabled. When the state is enabled, the port will perform the binding check.
strict - Used to implement a mode of strict control. When strict control is used, all ARP and IP broadcast packets are sent to the CPU and checked for IMPB before forwarding. Packets with MAC addresses that match IMPB entries are set to dynamic state while MAC addresses with no match are set to block. All other packets are dropped. The default mode is strict if not specified.
loose - Used to implement a more loose or less strict mode of control. In loose mode, ARP and IP broadcast packets are sent to the CPU for IMPB checking. Packets are forwarded unless the check finds a specified source MAC address that is blocked. Packets with MAC addresses that match IMPB entries are set to dynamic state while MAC addresses with no match are set to block. All other packets are bypassed.
allow_zeroip - Specify whether to allow an ARP packet with a source IP address of 0.0.0.0. If the IP address 0.0.0.0 is not configured in the binding list and this setting is enabled, ARP packets with the source IP address of 0.0.0.0 will be allowed; If the IP address 0.0.0.0 is not configured in the binding list and this setting is set to disable, ARP packets with the source IP address of 0.0.0.0 will not be allowed. This option does not affect the IMPB ACL Mode.
forward_dhcppkt - By default, DHCP packets with a broadcast DA will be flooded.
When set to disabled, the broadcast DHCP packet received by the specified port will not be forwarded.
This setting is effective when DHCP Snooping is enabled, in this case DHCP packets trapped by the CPU must be forwarded by the software.
This setting controls the forwarding behavior in this situation.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable IMPB on port 1:
DGS-3450:admin# config address_binding ip_mac ports 1 state enable
Command: config address_binding ip_mac ports 1 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config address_binding ip_mac ports
Purpose
Syntax
Used to configure the state of IMPB on the switch for each port.
config address_binding ip_mac ports [<portlist> | all ] { state [enable {[strict | loose] |
305
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config address_binding ip_mac ports
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
[ipv6 | all ]} | disable {[ ipv6 | all ]}] | allow_zeroip [enable | disable] | forward_dhcppkt
[enable | disable] | mode [arp | acl ] | stop_learning_threshold<int 0-500>} (1)
Used to configure the per port state of IMPB on the switch.
If a port has been configured as group member of an aggregated link, then the IMPB function cannot be enabled.
When the binding check state is enabled for IP packets and ARP packets received by this port, the switch will check whether the IP address and MAC address matches the binding entry. If the packet does not match it will be dropped.
For this function, the switch can operate in ACL mode or ARP mode. In ARP mode, only ARP packets are checked for binding. In ACL mode, both ARP packets and IP packets are checked for binding. Therefore, the ACL mode provides more strict checks for packets.
state - This parameter configures the IMPB port state to be enabled or disabled. When the state is enabled, the port will perform the binding check.
ipv6 - For “state enable ipv6”, only the IPv6 filter table applied to the driver.
For “state enable” without specifying “ipv6”, only the IPv4 filtering table is applied to driver.
For “state enable all”, both IPv4 and IPv6 filtering tables are applied to the driver.
For example, if IPv6 is enabled, but IPv4 is disabled, only the IPv6 Snooping entry is used to create a HW filtering table, if the FDB is used as the HW filtering table, and one IPv6 entry is allowed to be forwarded, all IPv4 packets get forwarded.
strict - Used to implement a mode of strict control. When strict control is used, all ARP and IP broadcast packets are sent to the CPU and checked for IMPB before forwarding. Packets with MAC addresses that match IMPB entries are set to dynamic state while MAC addresses with no match are set to block. All other packets are dropped.
loose - Used to implement a more loose or less strict mode of control.
In loose mode, ARP and IP broadcast packets are sent to the CPU for IMPB checking.
Packets are forwarded unless the check finds a specified source MAC address that is blocked. Packets with MAC addresses that match IMPB entries are set to dynamic state while MAC addresses with no match are set to block. All other packets are bypassed.
allow_zeroip - Specify whether to allow ARP packets with a source IP address of 0.0.0.0. If the IP address 0.0.0.0 is not configured in the binding list and this setting is enabled, ARP packets with the source IP address of 0.0.0.0 will be allowed; If the IP address 0.0.0.0 is not configured in the binding list and this setting is disabled, ARP packets with the source IP address of 0.0.0.0 will not be allowed. This option does not affect the IMPB ACL Mode.
forward_dhcppkt - By default, DHCP packets with a broadcast DA will be flooded.
When set to disabled, the broadcast DHCP packet received by the specified port will not be forwarded.
This setting is effective when DHCP Snooping is enabled, in this case DHCP packets trapped by the CPU must be forwarded by the software.
This setting controls the forwarding behavior in this situation.
mode - When configuring the mode of the port to be ACL mode, the switch will create an ACL access entry corresponding to the entries of the port. If the port changes to ARP mode, all
ACL access entries are deleted automatically. The default mode for a port is ARP mode.
stop_learning_threshold - When the number of blocked entries exceeds the threshold, the port will stop learning new addresses. Packets with a new address will be dropped. The range is 0-500. 0 means no limit.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable IMPB on port 1:
306
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config address_binding ip_mac ports 1 state enable
Command: config address_binding ip_mac ports 1 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create address_binding ip_mac
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create an IMPB entry.
create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress < ipaddr > mac_address < macaddr > {ports
[ portlist | all]
Use this command to create an IMPB entry.
One MAC address can map to multiple IP addresses.
ipaddr - Specify the IP address used for the IMPB entry.
macaddr - Specify the MAC address used for the IMPB entry.
ports - Specify the portlist the entry will apply to. If no ports are specified, the settings will be applied to all ports.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create an IMPB entry:
DGS-3450:admin#create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-
00-11
Command: create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create address_binding ip_mac
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create an IMPB entry.
create address_binding ip_mac [ipaddress < ipaddr > | ipv6address <ipv6addr>] mac_address < macaddr > { ports [ portlist | all]}
Use this command to create an IMPB entry.
One MAC address can map to multiple IP address
ipaddr - Specify the IP address used for the IMPB entry.
ipv6addr - Specify the IPv6 address used for the IMPB entry.
macaddr - Specify the MAC address used for the IMPB entry.
ports - Specify the portlist the entry will apply to. If not ports are specified, the settings will be applied to all ports.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create an IMPB entry:
307
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-
00-11
Command: create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To create a static IPv6 IMPB entry:
DGS-3450:admin# create address_binding ip_mac ipv6address fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Command: create address_binding ip_mac ipv6address fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 mac_address 00-
00-00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete address_binding
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete an IMPB entry or blocked entry.
delete address_binding [ip_mac [[ipaddress < ipaddr > | ipv6address <ipv6addr>] mac_address < macaddr > | all] | blocked [ all | vlan_name < vlan_name > mac_address
< macaddr >]]
Use this command to delete an IMPB entry or a blocked entry.
If the ACL mode is enabled, the switch will delete the related ACL access entries automatically.
ip_mac - Specify the user created IMPB database.
blocked - Specify the address database that the system has automatically learned and blocked.
ipaddr - Specify the learned IP address of the entry in the database.
ipv6addr - Specify the learned IPv6 address of the entry in the database.
macaddr - Specify the MAC address of the entry or the blocked MAC address.
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN to which the blocked MAC address belongs.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete an IMPB entry:
DGS-3450:admin# delete address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-
00-11
Command: delete address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To delete a static ipv6 IMPB entry:
308
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# delete address_binding ip_mac ipv6address fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Command: delete address_binding ip_mac ipv6address fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 mac_address 00-
00-00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To delete a blocked address:
DGS-3450:admin# delete address_binding blocked vlan_name v31 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-
11
Command: delete address_binding blocked vlan_name v31 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config address_binding ip_mac
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to update an IMPB entry.
config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address < macaddr > {ports [ portlist | all]
This command is used to update an IMPB entry.
ipaddr - Specify the IP address of the entry being updated.
macaddr - Specify the MAC address of the entry being updated.
ports - Specify which ports are used for the IMPB entry being updated. If not specified, then it is applied to all ports.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure an IMPB entry:
DGS-3450:admin#config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-
00-11
Command: config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config address_binding ip_mac
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to update an IMPB entry.
config address_binding ip_mac [ipaddress < ipaddr > | ipv6address <ipv6addr>] mac_address < macaddr > {ports [ portlist | all]}
This command is used to update an IMPB entry.
ipaddr - Specify the IP address of the entry being updated.
ipv6addr - Specify the IPv6 address of the entry being updated.
macaddr - Specify the MAC address of the entry being updated
ports - Specify which ports are used for the IMPB entry being updated. If not specified, then it
309
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config address_binding ip_mac
Restrictions is applied to all ports.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure an IMPB entry:
DGS-3450:admin# config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-
00-11
Command: config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure a static IPv6 IMPB entry:
DGS-3450:admin#config address_binding ip_mac ipv6address fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Command: config address_binding ip_mac ipv6address fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 mac_address 00-
00-00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show address_binding
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the IMPB entries, blocked MAC entries and port status.
show address_binding [ip_mac [all | [ipaddress < ipaddr > | ipv6address <ipv6addr>] mac_address < macaddr >] | blocked [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> mac_address
<macaddr> ] | ports {<portlist>}]
This command is used to show the IMPB information.
ip_mac - Specify the user created IMPB database.
blocked - Specify the addresses in the database that the system has auto learned and blocked.
ipaddr - Specify the learned IP address of the entry in the database.
ipv6addr - Specify the learned IPv6 address of the entry in the database.
macaddr - Specify the MAC address of the entry or the blocked MAC address.
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN to which the blocked MAC address belongs.
ports - Specify the ports for which the information is displayed. If not specified, all ports are displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To show the IMPB global configuration:
310
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show address_binding
Command: show address_binding
Trap/Log : Enabled
DHCP Snoop(IPv4) : Disabled
DHCP Snoop(IPv6) : Enabled
ND Snoop : Disabled
DGS-3450:admin#
To show the IMPB ports:
DGS-3450:admin#show address_binding ports
Command: show address_binding ports
Port IPv4 IPv6 Mode Zero IP DHCP Packet Stop Learning
State State Threshold/Mode
-------- -------- -------- ---- --------- ----------- --------------
1 Loose Enabled ARP Allow Forward
2 Strict Enabled ARP Not Allow Not Forward
100/Stop
200/Normal
3 Disabled
4 Strict
5 Disabled
6 Strict
7 Disabled
8 Strict
9 Disabled
10 Strict
11 Disabled
12 Strict
DGS-3450:admin#
Enabled ACL Not Allow Not Forward 200/Normal
Disabled ARP Not Allow Not Forward 200/Normal
Disabled ACL Not Allow Not Forward 200/Normal
Disabled ARP Not Allow Not Forward 200/Normal
Disabled ACL Not Allow Not Forward 200/Normal
Disabled ARP Not Allow Not Forward 200/Normal
Disabled ACL Not Allow Not Forward 200/Normal
Disabled ARP Not Allow Not Forward 200/Normal
Disabled ACL Not Allow Not Forward 200/Normal
Disabled ARP Not Allow Not Forward 200/Normal
enable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to enable DHCP snooping mode.
enable address_binding dhcp_snoop {[ipv6 | all]}
By default, DHCP snooping is disabled.
If a user enables DHCP sSnooping mode, all ports which have IMPB disabled will become server ports. (The switch will learn the IP addresses through server ports (by using DHCP
Offer and DHCP ACK packets).
Note that the DHCP discover packet cannot be passed thru the user ports if the allow_zeroip function is disabled on the port.
The auto-learned IMPB entry will be mapped to a specific source port based on the MAC address learning function. This entry will be created as an ACL-mode binding entry for this specific port. Each entry is associated with a lease time. When the lease time has expires, the expired entry will be removed from the port. The auto-learned binding entry can be moved from one port to another port if the DHCP snooping function has learned that the MAC address has moved to a different port.
If a situation occurs where a binding entry learned by DHCP snooping conflicts with a statically configured entry. The binding relation has conflicted. For example, if IP A is binded to MAC X with a static configuration and suppose that the binding entry learned by DHCP snooping is that IP A is bound to MAC Y, and then it is conflict. When the DHCP snooping learned entry binds with the static configured entry, and the DHCP snooping learned entry will not be created.
In a situation where the same IMPB pair has been statically configured, the auto-learned entry will not be created. In a situation where the learned information is consistent with the
311
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
enable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Parameters
Restrictions statically configured entry the auto-learned entry will not be created. In a situation where the entry is statically configured in ARP mode the auto learned entry will not be created. In a situation where the entry is statically configured on one port and the entry is auto-learned on another port, the auto-learned entry will not be created.
ipv6 - Enable DHCP snooping for IPv6.
all - Enable IPv4 and IPv6 DHCP snooping.
If no parameter is specified, IPv4 snooping is enabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable DHCP IPv4 snooping mode:
DGS-3450:admin# enable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Command: enable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To enable DHCP IPv6 snooping mode:
DGS-3450:admin# enable address_binding dhcp_snoop ipv6
Command: enable address_binding dhcp_snoop ipv6
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable DHCP snooping mode.
disable address_binding dhcp_snoop {[ipv6 | all]}
When the DHCP snooping function is disabled, all of the auto-learned binding entries will be removed.
ipv6 - Disable IPv6 DHCP snooping.
all - Disable IPv4 and IPv6 DHCP snooping.
If no parameter is specified, IPv4 snooping is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable DHCP IPv4 snooping mode:
DGS-3450:admin# disable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Command: disable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To disable DHCP IPv6 snooping mode:
312
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# disable address_binding dhcp_snoop ipv6
Command: disable address_binding dhcp_snoop ipv6
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to clear the DHCP snooping entries learned for the specified ports.
clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports [ <portlist>|all ] {[ipv6 | all]}
To clear the DHCP Snooping entries learned for the specified ports.
ports - Specify the list of ports to clear the DHCP snooping learned entries.
ipv6 - Clear IPv6 DHCP snooping learned entries.
all - Clear both IPv4 and IPv6 DHCP snooping learned entries.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear DHCP IPv4 snooping entries on ports 1-3:
DGS-3450:admin# clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports 1-3
Command: clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports 1-3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To clear DHCP IPv6 snooping entries on ports 1-3:
DGS-3450:admin# clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports 1-3 ipv6
Command: clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports 1-3 ipv6
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show address_binding dhcp_snoop
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the DHCP snooping configuration and learning database.
show address_binding dhcp_snoop {[max_entry { ports <portlist>} | binding_entry
{port <port>}]}
This command is used to show all DHCP snooping configuration and learning databases.
max_entry - To show the maximum number of entries per port.
binding_entry - To show DHCP snooping binding entries on ports. If no ports specified show all binding entries.
If no parameters are specified, show DHCP snooping displays the enable/disable state.
None.
Example usage:
To show the DHCP snooping state:
313
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show address_binding dhcp_snoop
Command: show address_binding dhcp_snoop
DHCP Snoop(IPv4) : Enabled
DHCP Snoop(IPv6) : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to specify the maximum number of entries that can be learned by a specified port.
config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports [<portlist> | all] limit [<value 1-
50> | no_limit]
By default, the maximum number of port entries is unlimited.
This command specifies the maximum number of entries that can be learned by the specified ports.
portlist - Specify the list of ports you would like to set the maximum number of entries that can be learned.
all - indicates all ports on the Switch.
limit - See below:
<value 1-50> - Specify the maximum number.
no_limit - Specifies that the maximum number of learned entries is unlimited.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set the maximum number of DHCP IPv4 snooping entries that ports 1–3 can learned to 10:
DGS-3450:admin# config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports 1-3 limit 10.
Command: config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports 1-3 limit 10.
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To set the maximum number of DHCP IPv6 snooping entries that ports 1 –3 can learned to 10:
DGS-3450:admin# config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports 1-3 limit 10 ipv6
Command: config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports 1-3 limit 10 ipv6
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable address_binding trap_log
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable IMPB traps and logs.
enable address_binding trap_log
This command is used to send traps and logs when the IMPB module detects an illegal IP and MAC address.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
314
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To enable the IMPB traps and logs:
DGS-3450:admin# enable address_binding trap_log
Command: enable address_binding trap_log
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable address_binding trap_log
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the IMPB traps and logs.
disable address_binding trap_log
This command is used to disable IMPB traps and logs.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable IMPB traps and logs:
DGS-3450:admin# disable address_binding trap_log
Command: disable address_binding trap_log
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config address_binding recover_learning ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to recover IMPB checking.
config address_binding recover_learning ports [ <portlist> | all]
Use this command to recover the IMPB check function, which was previously stopped.
ports - See below:
<portlist> - Specify the list of ports that need to recover the IMPB check.
all - Indicates all the ports on the Switch.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To recover IMPB checking for ports 6 to 7:
DGS-3450:admin# config address_binding recover_learning ports 6-7
Command: config address_binding recover_learning ports 6-7
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
315
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
enable address_binding nd_snoop
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use to enable ND snooping on the switch.
enable address_binding nd_snoop
This command allows the user to enable ND snooping on the switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the ND snooping function on the switch:
DGS-3450:admin# enable address_binding nd_snoop
Command: enable address_binding nd_snoop
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable address_binding nd_snoop
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use to disable ND snooping on the switch.
disable address_binding nd_snoop
This command allows the user to disable ND Snooping on switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the DHCPv6 snooping function on the switch:
DGS-3450:admin# disable address_binding nd_snoop
Command: disable address_binding nd_snoop
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show address_binding nd_snoop
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use to display the status of ND snooping on the switch.
show address_binding nd_snoop
This command allows the user to display the ND snooping state on the switch.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show ND snooping state:
316
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show address_binding nd_snoop
Command: show address_binding nd_snoop
ND Snoop : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
To show ND snooping maximum entry:
DGS-3450:admin# show address_binding nd_snoop ports 1-12
Command: show address_binding nd_snoop ports 1-12
Port Max Entry
------- -------
1 10
2 10
3 10
4 No Limit
5 No Limit
6 No Limit
7 No Limit
8 No Limit
9 No Limit
10 No Limit
11 No Limit
12 No Limit
DGS-3450:admin#
show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show binding entries of ND snooping on the switch.
show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry {port <port>}
This command allows the user to display binding entries of ND Snooping on the switch.
port - Specify port number
If no parameter is specified, it will show all ND snooping binding entries.
None.
Example usage:
To display the ND snooping binding entry:
DGS-3450:admin# show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry
Command: show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry
S (Status) - A: Active, I: Inactive
Time - Left Time (sec)
IP Address MAC Address S Time Port
--------------------------------------------- --------------------- -- --------- -----
2001:2222:1111:7777:5555:6666:7777:8888 00-00-00-00-00-02 I 50 5
2001::1 00-00-00-00-03-02 A 100 6
Total entries : 2
317
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to clear the ND snooping entries on specified ports.
clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports [<portlist> | all]
To clear the entries learned for the specified ports.
ports - Specify the list of ports that you would like to clear the ND snoop learned entry.
all - Clear all ND snooping learned entries.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear ND snooping entry on ports 1-3:
DGS-3450:admin# clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports 1-3
Command: clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports 1-3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug address_binding
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Start the IMPB debug when the IMPB module receives an ARP/IP packet or a DHCP packet.
debug address_binding [event | dhcp | all]
Use this command to start the IMPB debug when the IMPB module receives an ARP/IP packet or a DHCP packet.
event - To print out the debug messages when IMPB module receives ARP/IP packets.
dhcp - To print out the debug messages when the IMPB module receives the DHCP packets.
all - Print out all debug messages.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To print out all debug IMPB messages:
DGS-3450:admin# debug address_binding all
Command: debug address_binding all
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
no debug address_binding
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Stop the IMPB debug starting when the IMPB module receives an ARP/IP packet or a DHCP packet.
no debug address_binding
Use this command to stop the IMPB debug starting when the IMPB module receives an
ARP/IP packet or a DHCP packet.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
318
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To stop IMPB debug: starting when the IMPB module receives an ARP/IP or DHCP packet:
DGS-3450:admin# no debug address_binding
Command: no debug address_binding
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
319
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
40
IP M
ULTICAST
VLAN R
EPLICATION
C
OMMANDS
The IP Multicast VLAN Replication commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
enable ipmc_vlan_replication disable ipmc_vlan_replication config ipmc_vlan_replication create ipmc_vlan_replication_entry config ipmc_vlan_replication_entry source config ipmc_vlan_replication_entry destination delete ipmc_vlan_replication_entry show ipmc_vlan_replication show ipmc_vlan_replication_entry
Parameters
{ttl [decrese|no_decrease] | src_mac [ replace| no_replace]}(1)
<name 16>
<name 16> [[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] | group [add | delete] [mcast_ip <mcast_address_list> | mcast_ipv6 <mcastv6_address_list>]
{[source_ip <ipaddr> | source_ipv6 <ip6addr>]}]
<name 16> [add | delete] [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] ports
<portlist>
<name 16>
{<name 16> | hardware}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable ipmc_vlan_replication
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable static IP multicast VLAN replication on the switch.
enable ipmc_vlan_replication
This command is used to enable static IP multicast VLAN replication on the switch. By default, the replication function is enabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable static IP multicast VLAN replication:
DGS-3450:admin# enable ipmc_vlan_replication
Command: enable ipmc_vlan_replication
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable ipmc_vlan_replication
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to disable static IP multicast VLAN replication on the switch.
disable ipmc_vlan_replication
This command is used to disable static IP multicast VLAN replication on the switch.
320
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
disable ipmc_vlan_replication
Parameters
Restrictions
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable static IP multicast VLAN replication:
DGS-3450:admin# disable ipmc_vlan_replication
Command: disable ipmc_vlan_replication
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ipmc_vlan_replication
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure IP multicast VLAN replication global setting.
config ipmc_vlan_replication { ttl [decrese|no_decrease] | src_mac [ replace| no_replace]}(1)
Generally, when a multicast packet is forwarded across VLANs, the TTL will be decreased by one. If no_decrease is specified, the TTL will not be decreased. Similarly, it can be specified to replace a source MAC address for a packet to be forwarded across VLANs.
ttl - Species whether to decrease the time to live of packet. By default, the TTL will be decreased.
src_mac - Specifies whether to replace a source MAC address of a packet. By default, the source MAC address will be replaced.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure an IP multicast VLAN replication’s TTL:
DGS-3450:admin# config ipmc_vlan_replication ttl no_decrease
Command: config ipmc_vlan_replication ttl no_decrease
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create ipmc_vlan_replication_entry
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create an IP multicast VLAN replication entry.
create ipmc_vlan_replication_entry <name 16>
This command creates an IPMC VLAN replication entry. The entry will be identified by name.
An IP multicast VLAN replication entry defines what traffic will be replicated and how the packet will be replicated.
name - The name of the IP multicast VLAN replication entry.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
321
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Create an IP multicast VLAN replication entry named mr1:
DGS-3450:admin# create ipmc_vlan_replication_entry mr1
Command: create ipmc_vlan_replication_entry mr1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ipmc_vlan_replication_entry source
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure source traffic of an IP multicast VLAN replication entry.
config ipmc_vlan_replication_entry source <name 16> [[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid 1-4094>] | group [add | delete] [mcast_ip <mcast_address_list> | mcast_ipv6
<mcastv6_address_list>] {[source_ip <ipaddr> | source_ipv6 <ip6addr>]}]
This command is used to configure the traffic to be replicated by the IP multicast VLAN replication entry. The traffic is described as a source VLAN, a list of multicast group address and an optional source IP address associated with the multicast group. Each (V, G, S) will consume one resource entry. The number of supported resource entries is project dependent. Therefore, the resource entry consumed by a replication entry is not constant and it will be determined by the number of (V, G, S) pair defined by the entry.
If the entry (V, G, S) exists in two replication entries, both will take effect. The traffic will be replicated to the destination defined by both entries.
If the entries (V, G, S) and (V, G, *) both exist in the table, the entries (V,G, S) will not take effect.
name - The name of the IP multicast VLAN replication entry to be configured.
vlan - The source VLAN name.
vlanid - The source VLAN ID.
group - Specifies the multicast IP address list.
mcast_ip - The multicast IP address list.
source_ip - The source IP address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set the source VLAN of an IP multicast VLAN replication entry to VLAN v2:
DGS-3450:admin# config ipmc_vlan_replication_entry source mr1 vlan v2
Command: config ipmc_vlan_replication_entry source mr1 vlan v2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ipmc_vlan_replication_entry destination
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the destination of an IP multicast VLAN replication entry.
config ipmc_vlan_replication_entry destination <name 16> [add | delete] [vlan
<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] ports <portlist>
For the traffic that matches an IPMC VLAN replication entry, it will be replicated based on the destination setting. Multiple destination entries can be defined for an IPMC VLAN replication entry. Each destination entry specifies the VLAN and the outgoing port on which the traffic will be replicated. The outgoing port must be a member port of the VLAN. Whether a packet egress to a port is tagged or untagged will be determined by the VLAN setting.
name - The name of the IP multicast VLAN replication entry to be configured.
322
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ipmc_vlan_replication_entry destination
Restrictions
vlan - The outgoing VLAN name.
vlanid - The outgoing VLAN ID.
ports - The outgoing port list.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the destination of an IP multicast VLAN replication entry named mr1:
DGS-3450:admin# config ipmc_vlan_replication_entry mr1 add vlanid 5 port 10-17
Command: config ipmc_vlan_replication_entry mr1 add vlanid 5 port 10-17
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete ipmc_vlan_replication_entry destination
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete an IP multicast VLAN replication entry.
delete ipmc_vlan_replication_entry <name 16>
This command deletes an IP multicast VLAN replication entry.
name - The name of the IP multicast VLAN replication entry to be deleted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete an IP multicast VLAN replication entry named mr1:
DGS-3450:admin# delete ipmc_vlan_replication_entry mr1
Command: delete ipmc_vlan_replication_entry mr1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ipmc_vlan_replication
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the IP multicast VLAN replication global setting.
show ipmc_vlan_replication
This command is used to display the IP multicast VLAN replication global setting.
None.
None.
Example usage:
This example displays the IP multicast VLAN replication global setting:
323
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show ipmc_vlan_replication
Command: show ipmc_vlan_replication
IP Multicast VLAN Replication State : Enabled
TTL : No Decrease
Source MAC Address : No Replace
DGS-3450:admin#
show ipmc_vlan_replication_entry
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the IP multicast VLAN replication entries.
show ipmc_vlan_replication_entry {<name 16> | hardware}
This command is used to display the IP multicast VLAN replication entry. The
“active/inactive” status indicates whether the entry is inserted into chip successfully.
name - The name of the IP multicast VLAN replication entry to be deleted.
hardware - Show the (S,G) groups which are in the chipset.
None.
Example usage:
This example displays the IP multicast VLAN replication entry named mr1:
DGS-3450:admin# show ipmc_vlan_replication_entry mr1
Command: show ipmc_vlan_replication_entry mr1
IP Multicast VLAN Replication Name : mr1
---------------------------------------------
Source
VLAN ID/Name : 1/default
Multicast Group Address List (G/S)
225.1.1.1-225.1.1.10 / *
225.1.1.1-225.1.1.10 / 10.0.0.1
Destination
VLAN ID/Name : 2/ VLAN2
Portlist : 1:1-1:11,1:13
DGS-3450:admin#
This example displays the IP multicast VLAN replication groups’ in the hardware:
324
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show ipmc_vlan_replication_entry hardware
Command: show ipmc_vlan_replication_entry hardware
Name : ipmc_vlan_replication_entry name
Src-v : The source VLAN
Dest-v : The destination VLAN
Name Src-V Group SIP Dest-V Portlist
------------------------------------------------------------------ mr1 1 255.1.1.1 * 2 1:1-1:11, 1:13 mr1 1 255.1.1.1 * 3 1:12, 1:15 mr1 1 255.1.1.1 10.0.0.1 2 1:1-1:11, 1:13 mr1 1 255.1.1.1 10.0.0.1 3 1:12, 1:15 mr2 3 255.1.1.2 * 2 1:5-1:6 mr2 3 255.1.1.2 10.0.0.1 2 1:5-1:6
DGS-3450:admin#
325
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
41
IP
V
6 N
EIGHBOR
D
ISCOVER
C
OMMANDS
The IPv6 Neighbor Discover commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif config ipv6 nd ns ipif config ipv6 nd ra ipif config ipv6 nd ra prefix_option ipif
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> <macaddr>
[<ipif_name 12> | all] [<ipv6addr> | static | dynamic | all]
[<ipif_name 12> | all] [ipv6address <ipv6addr> | static | dynamic | all]
<ipif_name 12> retrans_time <millisecond 0-4294967295>
<ipif_name 12> {state [enable | disable] | life_time <sec 0-9000> | reachable_time < millisecond 0-3400000> | retrans_time <millisecond 0-
4294967295> | hop_limit <value 0-255> | managed_flag [enable | disable] | other_config_flag [enable | disable] | min_rtr_adv_interval <sec 3-1350> | max_rtr_adv_interval <sec 4-1800>} (1)
<ipif_name 12> <ipv6networkaddr> {preferred_life_time <sec 0-4294967295> | valid_life_time <sec 0-4294967295> | on_link_flag [enable | disable] | autonomous_flag [enable | disable]} (1)
{ipif <ipif_name 12>} show ipv6 nd
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create ipv6 neighbor_cache
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Adds a static neighbor on an IPv6 interface.
create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> <macaddr>
Adds a static neighbor on an IPv6 interface.
ipif_name - Interface’s name.
ipv6addr - The address of the neighbor.
macaddr - The MAC address of the neighbor.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a static neighbor cache entry on the interface System, with an IPv6 address of 3ffc::1 and a MAC address of
00:01:02:03:04:05:
DGS-3450:admin# create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3ffc::1 00:01:02:03:04:05
Command: create ipv6 neighbor System _cache ipif 3FFC::1 00:01:02:03:04:05
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete ipv6 neighbor_cache
Purpose
Syntax
Deletes an IPv6 neighbor from the interface neighbor address cache.
delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] [<ipv6addr> | static | dynamic |
326
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete ipv6 neighbor_cache
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
all]
Deletes a neighbor cache entry or static neighbor cache entries from the address cache or all address cache entries on this IP interface. Both static and dynamic entries can be deleted.
ipif_name - The IPv6 interface name
ipv6addr - The neighbor’s address.
all - All entries including static and dynamic entries will be deleted.
dynamic - Delete matching dynamic entries.
static - Delete matching static entries.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the neighbor cache.entry for IPv6 address 3ffc::1 on the IP interface “System”:
DGS-3450:admin# delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3ffc::1
Command: delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3FFC::1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ipv6 neighbor_cache
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Shows the IPv6 neighbor cache.
show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] [ipv6address <ipv6addr> | static | dynamic | all]
Displays the neighbor cache entry for the specified interface. You can display a specific entry, all static entries, all dynamic entries, or all entries.
ipif_name - The IPv6 interface name
ipv6addr - The neighbor’s address.
all - Displays all interfaces.
dynamic - Display all dynamic entries.
static - Display all static neighbor cache entries.
all - Displays all entries including static and dynamic entries.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show all neighbor cache entries for the IP interface “System”:
327
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System all
Command: show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System all
IPv6 Address: 2000::221:91FF:FE8D:4D9F State: Reachable
MAC Address : 00-21-91-8D-4D-9F Port : 1:31
Interface : ipif1 VID : 4094
IPv6 Address: 3000::100 State: Reachable
MAC Address : 00-21-91-8D-4D-9F Port : 1:31
Interface : ipif1 VID : 4094
IPv6 Address: FE80::221:91FF:FE8D:4D9F State: Reachable
MAC Address : 00-21-91-8D-4D-9F Port : 1:31
Interface : ipif1 VID : 4094
Total Entries: 3
DGS-3450:admin#
config ipv6 nd ns retrans_time
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Configures the IPv6 ND neighbor solicitation retransmit time,which is the time between the retransmission of neighbor solicitation messages to a neighbor, when resolving the address or when probing the reachability of a neighbor.
config ipv6 nd ns ipif <ipif_name 12> retrans_time <millisecond 0-4294967295>
Configures the retransmit time of IPv6 ND neighbor solicitation.
ipif_name - The IPv6 interface name.
retrans_time - Neighbor solicitation’s retransmit timer in milliseconds. It has the same value as the RA retrans_time in the config IPv6 ND RA command. If the retrans_time parameter is configured in one of the commands, the retrans_time value in the other command will also change so that the values in both commands are the same.
If the value user configured is less than 1000ms, Neighbor solicitation’s retransmit timer of the device will use 1000ms instead of that value.
If the value user configured is large than 1000ms, Neighbor solicitation’s retransmit timer of the device will use that value.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the retrans_time of IPv6 ND neighbor solicitation to be 1000000 milliseconds:
DGS-3450:admin# config ipv6 nd ns ipif Zira retrans_time 1000000
Command: config ipv6 nd ns ipif Zira retrans_time 1000000
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ipv6 nd ra
Purpose
Syntax
Configures router advertisement related arguments.
config ipv6 nd ra ipif <ipif_name 12> {state [enable | disable] | life_time <sec 0-9000> | reachable_time < millisecond 0-3400000> | retrans_time <millisecond 0-4294967295> | hop_limit <value 0-255> | managed_flag [enable | disable] | other_config_flag [enable |
328
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ipv6 nd ra
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
disable] | min_rtr_adv_interval <sec 3-1350> | max_rtr_adv_interval <sec 4-1800>} (1)
Configures the router advertisement related parameters.
ipif_name - The name of the interface.
state - Router advertisement state.
life_time - Indicates the lifetime of the router as the default router in seconds.
reachable_time - Indicates the amount of time that a node can consider a neighboring node reachable after receiving a reachability confirmation in milliseconds.
retrans_time - Indicates the amount of time between retransmissions of router advertisement messages in milliseconds, where the router advertisement packet will be taken to it’s host.
If the value user configured is less than 1000ms, the device will send RA with that value, but the device’s(which received RA) retransmission time of NS messages will use 1000ms instead of it.
If the value user configured is large than 1000ms, the device will send RA with that value, and the device’s(which received RA) retransmission time of NS messages will also use that value.
hop_limit - Indicates the default value of the hop limit field in the IPv6 header for packets sent by hosts that receive this RA message.
managed_flag - When set to enable, it indicates that hosts receiving this RA must use a stateful address configuration protocol to obtain an address, in addition to the addresses derived from the stateless address configuration.
other_config_flag - When set to enable, it indicates that hosts receiving this RA must use a stateful address configuration protocol to obtain on-address configuration information,.
min_rtr_adv_interval - The minimum time allowed between sending unsolicited multicast
Router Advertisements from the interface, in seconds. MUST be no less than 3 seconds and no greater than .75 * MaxRtrAdvInterval. Default: 0.33 * MaxRtrAdvInterval.
max_rtr_adv_interval - The maximum time allowed between sending unsolicited multicast
Router Advertisements from the interface, in seconds. MUST be no less than 4 seconds and no greater than 1800 seconds. Default: 600 seconds.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the RA state as enabled and the life_time of the “triton” interface to be 1000 seconds:
DGS-3450:admin#config ipv6 nd ra ipif triton state enable life_time 1000
Command: config ipv6 nd ra ipif triton state enable life_time 1000
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ipv6 nd ra prefix_option
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Configures the prefix option for the router advertisement function.
config ipv6 nd ra prefix_option ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6networkaddr>
{preferred_life_time <sec 0-4294967295> | valid_life_time <sec 0-4294967295> | on_link_flag [enable | disable] | autonomous_flag [enable | disable]} (1)
Configures the prefix option for the router advertisement function.
ipif_name - The name of the interface.
preferred_life_time - Indicates the number of seconds that an address, based on the specified prefix using the stateless address configuration, remains in preferred state. For an infinite valid lifetime the value can be set to 0xffffffff.
329
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ipv6 nd ra prefix_option
Restrictions
valid_life_time - Indicates the number of seconds that an address, based on the specified prefix, using the stateless address configuration, remains valid. For an infinite valid lifetime the value can be set to 0xffffffff.
on_link_flag - When set to 1 the addresses implied by the specified prefix are available on the link where the RA message is received.
autonomous_flag - When set to 1 the specified prefix will be used to create an autonomous address configuration.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the value of the preferred_life_time of prefix option to be 1000 seconds for the prefix 3ffe:501:ffff:100::/64, which is the prefix of the ip1 interface :
DGS-3450:admin# config ipv6 nd ra prefix_option ipif ip1 3ffe:501:ffff:100::/64 preferred_life_time 1000
Command: config ipv6 nd ra prefix_option ipif ip1 3ffe:501:ffff:100::/64 preferred_life_time 1000
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ipv6 nd
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to display information regarding neighbor detection on the switch.
show ipv6 nd {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
To show IPv6 ND related configuration.
ipif_name - The name of the interface.
If no IP interface is specified, it will show the IPv6 ND related configuration of all interfaces.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
Example usage:
To show IPv6 ND related configuration:
330
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show ipv6 nd ipif System
Command: show ipv6 nd ipif System
Interface Name : System
Hop Limit : 64
NS Retransmit Time : 0 (ms)
Router Advertisement : Disabled
RA Max Router AdvInterval : 600 (s)
RA Min Router AdvInterval : 198 (s)
RA Router Life Time : 1800 (s)
RA Reachable Time : 1200000 (ms)
RA Retransmit Time : 0 (ms)
RA Managed Flag : Disabled
RA Other Config Flag : Disabled
Prefix Preferred Valid OnLink Autonomous
2000::/64 604800 2592000 Enabled Enabled
2002::/64 604800 2592000 Enabled Enabled
331
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
42
IP
V
6 R
OUTE
C
OMMANDS
The IPv6 Route commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create ipv6route delete ipv6route show ipv6route enable ipv6_route_longprefix disable ipv6_route_longprefix show ipv6_route_longprefix status
Parameters
[default | <ipv6networkaddr>] [[<ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> | <ipv6addr>]
{<metric 1-65535>} {[primary | backup]} | ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>]
[[default |<ipv6networkaddr>] [<ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> | <ipv6addr> | ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>] | all]
{<ipv6networkaddr>} {[static |ripng | hardware]}
{log}
{log}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create ipv6route
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create static IPv6 route entry to Switch’s IPv6 routing table.
create ipv6route [default | <ipv6networkaddr>] [[<ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> |
<ipv6addr>] {<metric 1-65535>} {[primary | backup]} | ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>]
Create a static IPv6 route entry. If the next hop is a global address, it is not needed to indicate the interface name of the next hop. If the next hop is a link local address, then the interface name of the next hop must be specified. And the unspecified address, loop back address or multicast address can’t be configured as the next hop.
NOTE: If an IPv6 global address is added on interface, this local route will be wrote into IPv6 routing table automatically.
If both the destination network address and next hop of the new route entry are the same with existed entry, the created command for the new entry will return failure. If only the destination network address is the same with the existed entry and both primary and backup route entries are already existed, the created command for the new entry will return failure.
The IP tunnel route doesn’t support to create the backup route.
default - Specifies that this route is created as a default route.
ipv6networkaddr - The destination network of the route.
ipif_name - The interface name of the next hop, with the maximum of 12 characters.
ipv6addr - The next hop address of this route.
metric - The metric for this route, the default value is 1.
primary - Specifies the route as the primary route to the destination.
backup - Specifies the route as the backup route to the destination. If the route is not specified as the primary route or the backup route, then it will be auto-assigned by the system. The first created is the primary, the second created is the backup.
tunnel_name - The IP tunnel interface name of the next hop. When this option is specified, it is indicated that this new created route is an IP tunnel route.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add a single static IPv6 route entry in IPv6 format:
332
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# create ipv6route 3004::/64 Intface_1 3000::4
Command: create ipv6route 3004::/64 Intface_1 3000::4
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To add an IP tunnel route entry:
DGS-3450:admin# create ipv6route default ip_tunnel ip6_tn
Command: create ipv6route default ip_tunnel ip6_tn
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete ipv6route
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Delete static IPv6 route entries or specified static route entry from Switch’s IPv6 routing table
delete ipv6route [[default |<ipv6networkaddr>] [<ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> |
<ipv6addr> | ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>] | all]
Delete a static IPv6 route. If the next hop is a global address, it is not needed to specify the interface name of the next hop. If the next hop is a link local address, then the interface name of the next hop must be specified.
default - Specifies that the route to be deleted is a default route.
ipv6networkaddr - The destination network of the route.
ipif_name - The interface name of the next hop, with the maximum of 12 characters.
ipv6addr - The next hop address of the default route.
tunnel_name - The tunnel name of the next hop. When this option is specified, it is indicated that this route to be deleted is an IP tunnel route.
all - All static IPv6 routes will be deleted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Delete a static IPv6 route specified by network address:
DGS-3450:admin# delete ipv6route 3004::/64 Intface_1 3000::4
Command: delete ipv6route 3004::/64 Intface_1 3000::4
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ipv6route
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Display the Switch’s current IPv6 routing table or specified route entries.
show ipv6route {<ipv6networkaddr>} {[static |ripng | hardware]}
Display IPv6 routes in the switch. If this command is not specified by address or route protocol, it will display all the route entries in the routing table. And if this command specified by address or route protocol, it will display the specified IPv6 route entries.
ipv6networkaddr - The destination network of the route.
static - Display the static route entries.
333
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show ipv6route
Restrictions
ripng - Display the RIPng route entries.
hardware - Display the hardware route entries.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Show the IPv6 route entries without specified address or route protocol:
DGS-3450:admin# show ipv6route
Command: show ipv6route
IPv6 Prefix: ::/0 Protocol: Static Metric: 1
Next Hop : 3000::2 IPIF : Intface_1
IPv6 Prefix: 3000::/64 Protocol: Local Metric: 1
Next Hop : :: IPIF : Intface_1
IPv6 Prefix: 3004::/64 Protocol: Static Metric: 1
Next Hop : 3000::4 IPIF : Intface_1
IPv6 Prefix: 3005::/64 Protocol: RIPng Metric: 1
Next Hop : 3000::5 IPIF : Intface_1
IPv6 Prefix: 4000::/64 Protocol: Local Metric: 1
Next Hop : :: IPIF : Intface_2
IPv6 Prefix: 4005::/64 Protocol: RIPng Metric: 1
Next Hop : 4000::5 IPIF : Intface_2
Total Entries: 6
DGS-3450:admin#
enable ipv6_route_longprefix
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable to record syslog for the function supporting IPv6 route with prefix more than
64 bits.
enable ipv6_route_longprefix {log}
If the log is enabled, when one such IPv6 route will not work because of limitation of resource, one syslog will be recorded.
log - Specifies to enable the syslog recording function.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the syslog recording function:
334
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#enable ipv6_route_longprefix log
Command: enable ipv6_route_longprefix log
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable ipv6_route_longprefix
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable to record syslog for the function supporting IPv6 route with prefix more than
64 bits.
disable ipv6_route_longprefix {log}
If the log is disabled, when one such IPv6 route will not work because of limitation of resource, one syslog will not be recorded.
log - Specifies to disable the syslog recording function.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the syslog recording function:
DGS-3450:admin#disable ipv6_route_longprefix log
Command: disable ipv6_route_longprefix log
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ipv6_route_longprefix status
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the settings about IPv6 route with prefix more than 64 bits.
show ipv6_route_longprefix status
This command is used to display the settings about IPv6 route with prefix more than 64 bits.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the settings about IPv6 route with long prefix:
DGS-3450:admin#show ipv6_route_longprefix status
Command: show ipv6_route_longprefix status
IPv6 Route With Long Prefix Settings:
State : Disabled
Log : Disabled
DGS-3450:admin#
335
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
43
IP
V
6 T
UNNEL
C
OMMANDS
Industry is in the early stages of large scale IPv6 production deployment, and first-generation products need to make tradeoffs between available IPv6 services. Although the success of IPv6 will ultimately depend on the new applications that run over IPv6, there might be organizations or hosts within organizations that will continue to use IPv4 indefinitely.
A key part of the IPv6 design is its ability to integrate into and coexist with existing IPv4 networks. It is expected that IPv4 and IPv6 hosts will need to coexist for a substantial time during the steady migration from IPv4 to IPv6, and the development of transition strategies, tools, and mechanisms has been part of the basic IPv6 design from the start.
The IPv6 tunneling mechanism is one of the strategies for solving the transition from IPv4 to IPv6. This document describes three types of IPv6 tunnels: IPv6 Manually Configured tunnels, Automatic 6to4 Tunnels and ISATAP Tunnels.
The IPv6 Tunnel commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create ip_tunnel delete ip_tunnel config ip_tunnel manual config ip_tunnel 6to4 config ip_tunnel isatap show ip_tunnel enable ip_tunnel disable ip_tunnel
Parameters
<tunnel_name 12>
<tunnel_name 12>
<tunnel_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | source <ipaddr> | destination <ipaddr>}(1)
<tunnel_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | source <ipaddr >}(1)
<tunnel_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | source <ipaddr>}(1)
{<tunnel_name 12>}
{<tunnel_name 12>}
{<tunnel_name 12>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create ip_tunnel
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create an IPv6 tunnel interface.
create ip_tunnel < tunnel_name 12>
The create ip_tunnel command is used to create an IPv6 tunnel interface on the Switch.
<tunnel_name 12> - IPv6 Tunnel interface name, maximum of 12 characters.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create an IPv6 tunnel interface (Tunnel name is “tn2”.):
DGS-3450:admin# create ip_tunnel tn2
Command: create ip_tunnel tn2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
336
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete ip_tunnel
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete an IPv6 tunnel interface.
delete ip_tunnel < tunnel_name 12>
The delete ip_tunnel command is used to delete a specific IPv6 tunnel on the switch.
<tunnel_name 12> - IPv6 Tunnel interface name, maximum of 12 characters.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete an IPv6 tunnel interface (Tunnel name is “tn2”):
DGS-3450:admin# delete ip_tunnel tn2
Command: delete ipif tunnel tn2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ip_tunnel manual
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure an IPv6 manual tunnel.
config ip_tunnel manual <tunnel_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | source
<ipaddr> | destination <ipaddr>}(1)
The config ip_tunnel manual command is used to configure an existing IPv6 tunnel as an
IPv6 manual tunnel on the switch. If this tunnel has previously been configured in another mode, the tunnel’s information will still exist in the database. However, whether the tunnel’s former information is invalid or not, will depend on the current mode.
IPv6 Manual tunnels are simple point-to-point tunnels that can be used within a site or between sites.
< tunnel_name 12> - IPv6 Tunnel interface name, maximum of 12 characters.
ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> - The IPv6 address assigned to this IPv6 tunnel interface.
IPv6 processing would be enabled on this IPv6 tunnel interface when an IPv6 address is configured. This IPv6 address is not connected with tunnel source or destination IPv4 address.
source <ipaddr> - The source IPv4 address of this IPv6 tunnel interface. It is used as the source address for packets in this IPv6 tunnel.
destination <ipaddr> - The destination IPv4 address of this IPv6 tunnel interface. It is used as the destination address for packets in this IPv6 tunnel. It is not required for 6to4 and ISATAP tunnels.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure an IPv6 manual tunnel (Tunnel name is “tn2”, Tunnel source IPv4 address is 1.0.0.1, Tunnel destination
IPv4 address is 1.0.0.2, Tunnel IPv6 address is 2001::1/64):
337
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config ip_tunnel manual tn2 source 1.0.0.1 destination 1.0.0.2
Command: config ip_tunnel manual tn2 source 1.0.0.1 destination 1.0.0.2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin# config ip_tunnel manual tn2 ipv6address 2001::1/64
Command: config ip_tunnel manual tn2 ipv6address 2001::1/64
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ip_tunnel 6to4
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure an IPv6 6to4 tunnel.
config ip_tunnel 6to4 <tunnel_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | source
<ipaddr >}(1)
The config ip_tunnel 6to4 command is used to configure an existing IPv6 tunnel as an IPv6
6to4 tunnel on the switch. If this tunnel has previously been configured in another mode, the tunnel’s information will still exist in the database. However, whether the tunnel’s former information is invalid or not will depend on the current mode. A maximum of one IPv6 6to4 tunnel can exist on the system.
IPv6 6to4 tunnels are point-to-multipoint tunnels that can be used to connect isolated IPv6 sites. Each IPv6 site has at least one connection to a shared IPv4 network and this IPv4 network could be the global Internet or a corporate backbone. The key requirement is that each site has a globally unique IPv4 address, which is used to construct a 48-bit globally unique 6to4 IPv6 prefix (It starts with the prefix 2002::/16).
<tunnel_name 12> - IPv6 Tunnel interface name, maximum of 12 characters.
ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> - The IPv6 address assigned to this IPv6 tunnel interface.
IPv6 processing would be enabled on this IPv6 tunnel interface when an IPv6 address is configured. The 32 bits following the initial 2002::/16 prefix correspond to an IPv4 address assigned to the tunnel source.
source <ipaddr> - The source IPv4 address of this IPv6 tunnel interface. It is used as the source address for packets in this IPv6 tunnel. The tunnel destination IPv4 address is extracted from the remote tunnel endpoint’s IPv6 6to4 address that starts with the prefix
2002::/16.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure an IPv6 6to4 tunnel (Tunnel name is “tn2”, Tunnel source IPv4 address is 10.0.0.1, Tunnel IPv6 address is
2002:a00:1::1/64):
DGS-3450:admin# config ip_tunnel 6to4 tn2 source 10.0.0.1
Command: config ip_tunnel 6to4 tn2 source 10.0.0.1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin# config ip_tunnel 6to4 tn2 ipv6address 2002:a00:1::1/64
Command: config ip_tunnel 6to4 tn2 ipv6address 2002:a00:1::1/64
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
338
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ip_tunnel isatap
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure an IPv6 ISATAP tunnel.
config ip_tunnel isatap <tunnel_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | source
<ipaddr>}(1)
The config ip_tunnel isatap command is used to configure an existing IPv6 tunnel as an IPv6
ISATAP tunnel on the switch. If this tunnel has previously been configured in another mode, the tunnel’s information will still exist in the database. However, whether the tunnel’s former information is invalid or not will depend on the current mode. IPv6 ISATAP tunnels are pointto-multipoint tunnels that can be used to connect systems within a site. An IPv6 ISATAP address is a well-defined unicast address that includes a 64-bit unicast IPv6 prefix (it can be link local or global prefixes), a 32-bit value 0000:5EFE and a 32-bit tunnel source IPv4 address.
<tunnel_name 12> - IPv6 Tunnel interface name, maximum of 12 characters.
ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> - The IPv6 address assigned to this IPv6 tunnel interface.
IPv6 processing would be enabled on this IPv6 tunnel interface when an IPv6 address is configured. The last 32 bits of the IPv6 ISATAP address correspond to an IPv4 address assigned to the tunnel source.
source <ipaddr> - The source IPv4 address of this IPv6 tunnel interface. It is used as the source address for packets in this IPv6 tunnel. The tunnel destination IPv4 address is extracted from the last 32 bits of the remote tunnel endpoint’s IPv6 ISATAP address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure an IPv6 ISATAP tunnel (Tunnel name is “tn2”, Tunnel source IPv4 address is 10.0.0.1, Tunnel IPv6 address is 2001::5efe:a00:1/64):
DGS-3450:admin# config ip_tunnel isatap tn2 source 10.0.0.1
Command: config ip_tunnel isatap tn2 source 10.0.0.1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin# config ip_tunnel isatap tn2 ipv6address 2001::5efe:a00:1/64
Command: config ip_tunnel isatap tn2 ipv6address 2001::5efe:a00:1/64
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ip_tunnel
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show one or all IPv6 tunnel interfaces’ information.
show ip_tunnel {<tunnel_name 12>}
The show ip_tunnel command is used to show one or all IPv6 tunnel interfaces’ information.
<tunnel_name 12> - IPv6 Tunnel interface name, maximum of 12 characters.
If no tunnel is specified, all tunnels on the Switch will be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To show an IPv6 tunnel interface’s information (Tunnel name is “tn2”):
339
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show ip_tunnel tn2
Command: show ip_tunnel tn2
Tunnel Interface : tn2
Interface Admin state : Enabled
Tunnel Mode : ISATAP
IPv6 Link-Local Address : FE80::5EFE:A00:1/128
IPv6 Global Unicast Address : 2001::5EFE:A00:1/64
Tunnel Source : 10.0.0.1
Tunnel Destination : Unknown
DGS-3450:admin#
enable ip_tunnel
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable an IPv6 tunnel interface or all IPv6 tunnel interfaces.
enable ip_tunnel {<tunnel_name 12>}
The enable ip_tunnel command is used to enable an IPv6 tunnel or all IPv6 tunnels on the switch.
<tunnel_name 12> - IPv6 Tunnel interface name, maximum of 12 characters.
If no tunnel is specified, all tunnels on the Switch will be enabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable an IPv6 tunnel interface (Tunnel name is “tn2”.):
DGS-3450:admin# enable ipif tunnel tn2
Command: enable ipif tunnel tn2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable ip_tunnel
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable an IPv6 tunnel interface or all tunnel interfaces.
disable ip_tunnel {<tunnel_name 12>}
The disable ip_tunnel command is used to disable an IPv6 tunnel or all IPv6 tunnels on the switch.
<tunnel_name 12> - IPv6 Tunnel interface name, maximum of 12 characters.
If no tunnel is specified, all tunnels on the Switch will be disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable an IPv6 tunnel interface (Tunnel name is “tn2”):
340
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# disable ip_tunnel tn2
Command: disable ip_tunnel tn2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
341
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
44
J
APANESE
W
EB
-
BASED
A
CCESS
C
ONTROL
(JWAC) C
OMMANDS
The Japanese Web-based Access Control (JWAC) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
342
Command
enable jwac disable jwac enable jwac redirect disable jwac redirect enable jwac forcible_logout disable jwac forcible_logout enable jwac udp_filtering disable jwac udp_filtering enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout config jwac redirect config jwac virtual_ip config jwac quarantine_server_url config jwac clear_quarantine_server_url config jwac update_server
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Parameters
<sec 5-300> config jwac switch_http_port config jwac ports config jwac radius_protocol create jwac user config jwac user delete jwac show jwac user clear jwac auth_state config jwac authorization attributes show jwac show jwac update_server show jwac auth_state ports show jwac ports config jwac authentication_page element show jwac authenticate_page
{destination [quarantine_server | jwac_login_page] | delay_time <sec 0-10>} (1)
<ipaddr> {url [<string 128> | clear]}
<string 128>
[add | delete] ipaddress <network_address> {[tcp_port < port_number 1-65535>
| udp_port < port_number 1-65535>]}
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> {[http | https]}
[<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | max_authenticating_host <value 0-50> | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | idle_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time [<sec 0-300>] | auth_mode [host _based | port_based]} (1)
[local | pap | chap | ms_chap | ms_chapv2 | eap_md5]
<username 15> {vlan <vlanid 1-4094>}
<username 15> {vlan <vlanid 1-4094>}
[user <username 15> | all_users]
[ports [all | <portlist>] { authenticated | authenticating | blocked } | mac_addr
<macaddr>]
{radius [enable| disable] | local [enable | disable]} (1)
{<portlist>}
{<portlist>}
[japanese | english] [default | page_title <desc 128> | login_window_title < desc
32> | user_name_title < desc 16> | password_title < desc 16> | logout_window_title < desc 32> | notification_line <value 1-5> <desc 128>]
343
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Command
config jwac authenticate_page
Parameters
[japanese | english]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable jwac
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable JWAC function.
enable jwac
The enable jwac command enables JWAC function.
JWAC and WAC are mutual exclusive function. That is, they can not be enabled at the same time.
Using the JWAC function, PC users need to pass two stages of authentication.
The first stage is to do the authentication with the quarantine server and the second stage is the authentication with the switch. For the second stage, the authentication is similar to WAC, except that there is no port VLAN membership change by JWAC after a host passes authentication. The RADIUS server will share the server configuration defined by 802.1X command set.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable JWAC function:
DGS-3450:admin# enable jwac
Command: enable jwac
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable jwac
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable JWAC function.
disable jwac
The disable jwac command disables JWAC function; all authentication entries related to
JWAC will be deleted.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable JWAC function:
DGS-3450:admin# disable jwac
Command: disable jwac
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
344
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
enable jwac redirect
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable JWAC redirect function.
enable jwac redirect
When redirecting quarantine server is specified, the unauthenticated host will be redirected to quarantine server when it tries to access a random URL. When redirecting JWAC login page is specified, the unauthenticated host will be redirected to JWAC login page in the Switch to finish authentication.
When redirect is enabled, all the web accesses are redirect to quarantine server or JWAC login page.
When redirecting to quarantine server is specified, a quarantine server must be configured first before enabling JWAC globally.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable JWAC redirect function:
DGS-3450:admin# enable jwac redirect
Command: enable jwac redirect
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable jwac redirect
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable JWAC redirect function.
disable jwac redirect
When redirect is disabled, all web accesses are denied except for accesses to quarantine server or JWAC login page.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable JWAC redirect function:
DGS-3450:admin# disable jwac redirect
Command: disable jwac redirect
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable jwac forcible_logout
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to enable JWAC forcibly logout function.
enable jwac forcible_logout
When forcibly logout feature is enabled, a PING packet from an authenticated host to the
JWAC Switch with TTL=1 will be regarded as a logout request, and the host will be moved
345
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
enable jwac forcible_logout
Parameters
Restrictions back to unauthenticated state.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable JWAC forcibly logout function:
DGS-3450:admin# enable jwac forcible_logout
Command: enable jwac forcible_logout
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable jwac forcible_logout
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable JWAC forcibly logout function.
disable jwac forcible_logout
When forcibly logout feature is disabled, even a PING packet from an authenticated host to the JWAC Switch with TTL=1 will be ignored, and the host is still in an authenticated state.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable JWAC forcibly logout function:
DGS-3450:admin# disable jwac forcible_logout
Command: disable jwac forcible_logout
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable jwac udp_filtering
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable or disable JWAC UDP filtering function.
enable jwac udp_filtering
When UDP filtering feature is enabled, all UDP and ICMP packets except for DHCP and DNS packets from unauthenticated hosts will be dropped.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable JWAC UDP filtering function:
346
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# enable jwac udp_filtering
Command: enable jwac udp_filtering
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable jwac udp_filtering
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable JWAC UDP filtering function.
disable jwac udp_filtering
When UDP filtering feature is disabled, all UDP and ICMP packets are permitted.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable JWAC UDP filtering function:
DGS-3450:admin# disable jwac udp_filtering
Command: disable jwac udp_filtering
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable JWAC Quarantien Server monitor function.
enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
When JWAC Quarantine Server monitor feature is enabled, the JWAC Switch will monitor the
Quarantine Server to ensure the server is OK. If the Switch detects no Quarantine Server, it will redirect all unauthenticated HTTP accesses to JWAC Login Page forcibly if the redirect is enabled and the redirect destination is configured to be Quarantine Server.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable JWAC Quarantine Server monitor function:
DGS-3450:admin# enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Command: enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Purpose Used to disable JWAC Quarantien Server monitor function.
347
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Disable JWAC Quarantine Server function enabled previously.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable Quarantine Server monitor function:
DGS-3450:admin# disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Command: disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to set Quarantine Server error timeout.
config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout <sec 5-300>
When Quarantine Server monitor is enabled, the JWAC Switch will periodically check if the
Quarantine works OK. If the Switch does not receive any response from Quarantine Server during the configured error timeout, the Switch then regards it as working improperly.
<sec 5-300> - To specify the error timeout interval.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set Quarantine Server error timeout:
DGS-3450:admin# config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout 60
Command: config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout 60
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config jwac redirect
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure redirect destination and delay time before an unauthenticated host is redirect to Quarantine Server or JWAC login web page.
config jwac redirect {destination [quarantine_server | jwac_login_page] | delay_time
<sec 0-10>} (1)
This command allows you to configure redirect destination and delay time before an unauthenticated host is redirected to Quarantine Server or the JWAC login web page.
0 means no delaying the redirect.
destination - To specify the destination which the unauthenticated host will be redirected to.
delay_time - To specify the time period after which the unauthenticated host will be redirected. Unit of this timer is second.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
348
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To configure the redirect destination and delay time:
DGS-3450:admin# config jwac redirect destination jwac_login_page delay_time 5
Command: config jwac redirect_ destination jwac_login_page delay_time 5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config jwac virtual_ip
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure JWAC virtual ipaddress to accept authentication requests from unauthenticated hosts.
config jwac virtual_ip <ipaddr> {url [<string 128> | clear]}
The virtual IP of JWAC is used to accept authentication request from unauthenticated host.
Only requests sent to this IP will get response correctly.
This IP does not respond to ARP request or ICMP packet!
<ipaddr> - To specify the IP address of the virtual IP.
url - This parameter is used to set the URL of virtual IP.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure virtual IP address to accept authentication request from host:
DGS-3450:admin# config jwac virtual_ip 1.1.1.1 url www.kyoto.ac.jp
Command: config jwac virtual_ip 1.1.1.1 url www.kyoto.ac.jp
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config jwac quarantine_server_url
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure JWAC Quarantine Server URL.
config jwac quarantine_server_url <string 128>
This command allows you to configure URL of Quarantine Server.
If the redirection is enabled and the redirection destination is Quarantine Server, when a
HTTP request from unauthenticated host which is not headed to Quarantine Server reaches the Switch, the Switch will handle this HTTP packet and send back a message to the host to make it access Quarantine Server with the configured URL
When the PC connected to the specified URL, the quarantine server will request the PC user to input the user name and password to authenticate.
NOTE: If the quarantine server is linked to the JWAC enabled port on the switch, it must be added to the static FDB correctly before it can work properly.
<string 128> - To specify the entire URL of authentication page on Quarantine Server
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
349
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To configure Quarantine Server URL:
DGS-3450:admin# config jwac quarantine_server_url http://10.90.90.88/authpage.html
Command: config jwac quarantine_server_url http://10.90.90.88/authpage.html
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config jwac clear_quarantine_server_url
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to clear Quarantine Server configuration.
config jwac clear_quarantine_server_url
This command will clear Quarantine Server configuration.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear Quarantine Server configuration:
DGS-3450:admin# config jwac clear_quarantine_server_url
Command: config jwac clear_quarantine_server_url
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config jwac update_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the update server network that PC need to access in order to complete the
JWAC authentication.
config jwac update_server [add | delete] ipaddress <network_address> {[tcp_port < port_number 1-65535> | udp_port < port_number 1-65535>]}
The config jwac update server command allows you to add or delete server network address to which the traffic from unauthenticated client host will not be blocked by the JWAC Switch.
Any servers (update.microsoft.com or some sites of the Anti-Virus software companies, which the ActiveX needs to access to accomplish the authentication before the client passes the authentication) should be added with its IP address or with the network address it resident. By adding the network address, an entry can serve multiple update servers on the same network.
NOTE: If the update server is linked to the JWAC enabled port on the switch, it must be added to the static FDB before it can work properly.
add - To add an update server network. The total number of Update Servers is depending on project.
delete - To delete a update server network.
ipaddress - To specify the network address for the update server network.
To set a specific IP address, please use the format x.x.x.x/32
If TCP port or UDP port number is not specified, all TCP/UDP ports are accessible.
tcp_port - The accessible TCP port for the specified update server network.
udp_port - The accessible UDP port for the specified update server network.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
350
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To configure the update server which the un-authenticated host need to access:
DGS-3450:admin# config jwac update_server add ipaddress 10.90.90.109/24
Command: config jwac update_server add ipaddress 10.90.90.109/24
Update Server 10.90.90.0/24 is added.
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config jwac switch_http_port
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the HTTP port which the JWAC Switch listens to.
config jwac switch_http_port < tcp_port_number 1-65535> {[http | https]}
The config jwac switch_http_port command allows you to configure the TCP port number which the JWAC Switch listens to. This port number is used in the second stage of the authentication. PC user will connect the page on the switch to input the user name and password.
If not specified, the default port number is 80.
If no protocol specified, the protocol is HTTP.
The HTTP cannot run at TCP port 443, and the HTTPS cannot run at TCP port 80.
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - A TCP port which the JWAC Switch listens to and uses to finish the authenticating process.
http - To specify the JWAC runs HTTP protocol on this TCP port
https - To specify the JWAC runs HTTPS protocol on this TCP port
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the HTTP port which the Switch listens to:
DGS-3450:admin# config jwac switch_http_port 8888 http
Command: config jwac switch_http_port 8888 http
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config jwac ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to configure port’s state of JWAC.
config jwac ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | max_authenticating_host
<value 0-n> | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | idle_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time [<sec 0-300>] | auth_mode [host _based | port_based]} (1)
The config jwac ports command allows you to configure port state of JWAC.
The default value of max_authenticating_host is n (The max allowed value, ‘n’ is project dependent).
The default value of aging_time is 1440 minutes.
The default value of idle_time is infinite.
The default value of block_time is 60 seconds.
351
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config jwac ports
Parameters
Restrictions
<portlist> - A port range to set their JWAC state.
all - All the Switch ports’ JWAC state is to be configured.
state - To specify the port state of JWAC
max_authenticating_host - Max number of host process authentication on each port at the same time
aging_time - A time period during which an authenticated host will keep in authenticated state. “infinite” indicates never to age out the authenticated host on the port
idle_time - If there is no traffic during idle_time, the host will be moved back to unauthenticated state “infinite” indicates never to check the idle state of the authenticated host on the port.
block_time - If a host fails to pass the authentication, it will be blocked for a period specified by block_time.
auth_mode - The port authentication mode can be either host based or port based.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure state and other parameters of the ports:
DGS-3450:admin# config jwac ports 1-9 state enable
Command: config jwac ports 1-9 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config jwac radius_protocol
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure RADIUS protocol used by JWAC.
config jwac radius_protocol [local | pap | chap | ms_chap | ms_chapv2 | eap_md5]
The config jwac radius_protocol command allows you to specify the RADIUS protocol used by JWAC to complete RADIUS authentication.
JWAC shares other RADIUS configuration with 802.1x, when using this command to set the
RADIUS protocol, you must make sure the RASIUS server added by “config radius …” command supports the protocol.
local - JWAC Switch uses local user DB to complete the authentication
pap - JWAC Switch uses PAP to communicate with RADIUS Server
chap - JWAC Switch uses CHAP to communicate with RADIUS Server
ms_chap - JWAC Switch uses MS-CHAP to communicate with RADIUS Server
ms_chapv2 - JWAC Switch uses MS-CHAPv2 to communicate with RADIUS Server
eap_md5 - JWAC Switch uses EAP MD5 to communicate with RADIUS Server
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure authentication protocol:
352
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config jwac radius_protocol ms_chapv2
Command: config jwac radius_protocol ms_chapv2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create jwac user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create JWAC user into local DB.
create jwac user <username 15> {vlan <vlanid 1-4094>}
The create jwac user command creates JWAC users into the local DB. And when “local” is chosen when configuring JWAC RADIUS protocol, the local DB will be used.
<username 15> - The user name to be created
<vlanid 1-4094> - Target VLAN ID for authenticated host which uses this user account to pass authentication
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a local user:
DGS-3450:admin# create jwac user 112233
Command: create jwac user 112233
Enter a case-sensitive new password:***
Enter the new password again for confirmation:***
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config jwac user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to update local user DB.
config jwac user <username 15> {vlan <vlanid 1-4094>}
The config jwac user command updates the local user DB. Only created user can be configured.
<username 15> - The user name to be configured
<vlanid 1-4094> - Target VLAN ID for authenticated host which uses this user account to pass authentication
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure a local user:
353
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# create jwac user juser_tom vlan 3
Command: create jwac user juser_tom vlan 3
Enter a case-sensitive new password:***
Enter the new password again for confirmation:***
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete jwac user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete JWAC user into local DB.
delete jwac [user <username 15> | all_users]
The delete jwac user command deletes JWAC users from the local DB.
user - To specify the user name to be deleted
all_user - All user accounts in local DB will be deleted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a local user.
DGS-3450:admin# delete jwac user juser_tom
Command: delete jwac user juser_tom
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show jwac user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show JWAC user into local DB.
show jwac user
The show jwac user command displays JWAC users in the local DB.
None.
None.
Example usage:
This example displays the JWAC users in the local database:
DGS-3450:admin# show jwac user
Command: show jwac user
Username Password VID
---------- ---------- ------ juser_tom 1 3
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
354
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
clear jwac auth_state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to clear the JWAC authentication entry.
clear jwac auth_state [ports [all | <portlist>] { authenticated | authenticating | blocked }
| mac_addr <macaddr>]
The user can use this command to clear the authentication entry.
ports - To specify the port range to delete host on them.
authenticated - To specify the state of host to delete.
authenticating - To specify the state of host to delete.
blocked - To specify the state of host to delete.
<macaddr> - To delete a specified host with this MAC.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete authentication entry:
DGS-3450:admin# clear jwac auth_state ports all blocked
Command: clear jwac auth_state ports all blocked
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config jwac authorization attributes
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
The enable authorization command will enable acceptance of authorized configuration.
config jwac authorization attributes {radius [enable| disable] | local [enable | disable]}
(1)
Used to enable or disable acceptation of authorized configuration.
When the authorization is enabled for JWAC’s RADIUS, the authorized data assigned by the
RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled.
When the authorization is enabled for JWAC’s local, the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted.
radius - If specified to enable, the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled. The default state is enabled.
local - If specified to enable, the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled. The default state is enabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
The following example will disable the configuration authorized from the local database:
DGS-3450:admin# config jwac authorization attributes local disable
Command: config jwac authorization attributes local disable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
355
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show jwac
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the configuration of JWAC.
show jwac
The show jwac command allows you to show all the configuration of JWAC.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display global configuration of JWAC:
DGS-3450:admin# show jwac
Command: show jwac
State
Enabled Ports
Virtual IP/URL
Switch HTTP Port
UDP Filtering
Forcible Logout
Redirect State
Redirect Delay Time
Redirect Destination
Quarantine Server
Q-Server Monitor
Q-Server Error Timeout
RADIUS Auth-Protocol
RADIUS Authorization
Local Authorization
DGS-3450:admin#
: Enabled
: 1:1,1:11,1:23,1:25,1:35
: 1.1.1.1/www.kyoto.ac.jp
: 21212 (HTTP)
: Enabled
: Enabled
: Enabled
: 3 Seconds
: Quarantine Server
: http://172.18.212.147/pcinventory
: Enabled (Running)
: 5 Seconds
: PAP
: Enabled
: Enabled
show jwac update_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the configuration of JWAC update server.
show jwac update_server
This command displays the configured update server’s network and their accessible ports.
The function will use system’s common resource, thus some entries may not active if the resource is not sufficient when JWAC is enabled.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show update server:
356
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show jwac update_server
Command: show jwac update_server
Index IP TCP/UDP Port State
----- ------------------ ------- ----- --------
1 10.0.0.0/8 - - Inactive
2 10.1.1.1/32 UDP 90 Inactive
3 10.3.3.3/32 TCP 80 Inactive
4 10.3.3.4/32 - - Inactive
5 10.3.3.5/32 - - Inactive
6 10.3.3.6/32 - - Inactive
7 10.3.3.7/32 - - Inactive
8 10.3.3.9/32 - - Inactive
9 10.3.3.10/32 - - Inactive
10 100.100.100.100/32 TCP 9080 Inactive
DGS-3450:admin#
show jwac auth_state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display information of JWAC client host.
show jwac auth_state ports {<portlist>}
The show jwac auth_state command allows you to show the information of JWAC client host.
ports - A port range to show the information of client host.
If no port is specified, all ports’ JWAC authentication state will be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
Supposed that port 1 is in host-based mode:
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-01 is authenticated without VLAN assigned (may be the specified target VLAN does not exist or target VLAN has not been specified at all), the ID of RX VLAN will be displayed (RX VLAN ID is 4004 in this example).
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-02 is authenticated with target VLAN assigned, the ID of target VLAN will be displayed
(target VLAN ID is 1234 in this example)
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-03 failed to pass authentication, the VID field will be shown as “-” indicating that packets with SA 00-00-00-00-00-03 will be dropped no matter which VLAN these packets are from.
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-04 attempts to start authentication, the VID field will be shown as “-“ until authentication completed.
Supposed that port 2 is in port-based mode:
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-10 is the MAC which made port 2 pass authentication, MAC address is followed by “(P)” indicating that this authentication is from a port in port-based mode.
Supposed that port 3 is in port-based mode:
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-20 attempts to start authentication, MAC address is followed by “(P)” to indicate the portbased mode authentication.
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-21 failed to pass authentication, MAC address is followed by “(P)” to indicate the portbased mode authentication.
NOTE: In port-based mode, the VLAN ID field is displayed in the same way as host-based mode.
357
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show jwac auth_state ports 1-2
Command: show jwac auth_state ports 1-2
Pri - Priority. State - A:Authenticated, B:Blocked, -:Authenticating
Time - Aging Time/Idle Time for authenticated entries.
Port MAC Address State VID Pri Time IP User Name
----- ----------------- -- ---- -- -------- ---------------- ----------------
1 00-00-00-00-00-01 A 4004 3 -/40 192.168.101.239 juser_tom
1 00-00-00-00-00-02 A 1234 - -/50 172.18.61.242 name_of_15chars
1 00-00-00-00-00-03 B - - 60 172.18.61.242 Jack
1 00-00-00-00-00-04 - - - 10 - -
2 00-00-00-00-00-10(P) A 1234 2 1440/20 10.10.10.90 Logan
3 00-00-00-00-00-20(P) - - - 20 10.10.10.131 -
3 00-00-00-00-00-21(P) B - - 200 - Victor
Total Authenticating Hosts : 2
Total Authenticated Hosts : 3
Total Blocked Hosts : 2
DGS-3450:admin#
show jwac ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display port configuration of JWAC.
show jwac ports {<portlist>}
The show jwac port command allows you to display port configuration of JWAC.
all - To show all ports’ configuration of JWAC
<portlist> - To specify a port range to show the configuration of JWAC
If no port is specified, the configuration for all ports will be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To display port configuration:
DGS-3450:admin# show jwac ports 1-4
Command: show jwac ports 1-4
Port State Aging Time Idle Time Block Time Auth Mode Max
(min) (min) (sec) Hosts
----- -------- ------------ ------------ ----------- ----------- -------
1 Enabled Infinite 20 10 Port-based 10
2 Disabled 60 10 2 Port-based 10
3 Enabled 1440 Infinite 2 Host-based 50
4 Enabled 600 30 5 Host-based 50
DGS-3450:admin#
config jwac authentication_page element
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to customize the authenticate page.
config jwac authentication_page element [ japanese | english ] [default | page_title
<desc 128> | login_window_title < desc 32> | user_name_title < desc 16> | password_title < desc 16> | logout_window_title < desc 32> | notification_line <value 1-
5> <desc 128>]
This command let administrator customize the JWAC authenticate page.
358
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config jwac authentication_page element
Parameters
Restrictions
japanese - Change to Japanese page.
english - Changeto English page.
default - Reset the page element to default.
page_title - The title of the authenticate page.
login_window_title - The login window title of the authenticate page
user_name_title - The user name title of the authenticate page
password_title - The password title of the authenticate page
logout_window_title - The logout windown title mapping of the authenticate page
notification_line - This parameter is used to set the notification information by line in authentication web pages.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To customize the authenticate page:
DGS-3450:admin# config jwac page_element japanese page_title "
ディーリンクジャパン株式会社
"
Command: config jwac page_element japanese page_title "
ディーリンクジャパン株式会社"
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show jwac authenticate_page
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the element mapping of the customized authenticate page.
show jwac authenticate_page
Used to show the element mapping of the customized authenticate page.
None.
None.
Example usage:
The following example displays the default authentication page:
359
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show jwac authenticate_page
Command: show jwac authenticate_page
Current Page :English Version
English Page Element
------------------------------------------------------------
Page Title : Alpha Networks Inc.
Login Window Title
User Name Title
Password Title
Logout Window Title
: Authentication Login
: User Name
: Password
: Logout
Notification :
Copyright @ 2010 D-Link All Rights Reserved
Site: http://support.dlink.com
Japanese Page Element
--------------------------------------------------------------
Page Title :
Login Window Title
User Name Title
:
社内 LAN 認証ログイン
:
ユーザ ID
Password Title
Logout Window Title
:
パスワード
:
社内 LAN 認証ログアウト
Notification
Copyright @ 2010
ディーリンクジャパン株式会社
:
サイト (http://www.dlink-jp.com)
DGS-3450:admin#
config jwac authenticate_page
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to choose authenticate page language.
config jwac authenticate_page [japanese | english]
This let administrator decide which authenticated page need to be used.
japanese - Choose the Japanese page
english - Choose the English page. This is the default page.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To choose authenticate page language:
DGS-3450:admin# config jwac authenticate_page japanese
Command: config jwac authenticate_page japanese
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
360
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
45
J
UMBO
F
RAME
C
OMMANDS
Certain switches can support jumbo frames (frames larger than the Ethernet frame size of 1536 bytes). To transmit frames of up to 9K (and 9216 bytes tagged), the user can increase the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size from the default of 1536 by enabling the Jumbo Frame command.
The jumbo frame commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
enable jumbo_frame disable jumbo_frame config jumbo_frame ports show jumbo_frame
Parameters
[<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable]}
{<portlist>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable jumbo_frame
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the jumbo frame function on the Switch.
enable jumbo_frame
This command will allow ethernet frames larger than 1536 bytes to be processed by the
Switch. The maximum size of the jumbo frame may not exceed 9216 bytes tagged.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the jumbo frame function on the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# enable jumbo_frame
Command: enable jumbo_frame
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable jumbo_frame
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the jumbo frame function on the Switch.
disable jumbo_frame
This command will disable the jumbo frame function on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
361
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To disable the jumbo frame function on the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# disable jumbo_frame
Command: disable jumbo_frame
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config jumbo_frame ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the jumbo frame state on specified ports.
config jumbo_frame ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable]}
This command is used to configure the jumbo frame state on specified ports.
<portlist> - A range of ports to be configured with the jumbo frame state.
all - Specify all ports of the switch with the jumbo frame state.
state - Specifies the jumbo frame state to be applied to a range of ports specified.
• enable - Enable the jumbo frame state.
• disable - Disable the jumbo frame state.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable jumbo frames on ports 1:1-1:5:
DGS-3450:admin#config jumbo_frame ports 1:1-1:5 state enable
Command: config jumbo_frame ports 1:1-1:5 state enable
The maximum size of jumbo frame is 9216 bytes.
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show jumbo_frame
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the status of the jumbo frame function on the Switch.
show jumbo_frame {<portlist>}
This command will show the status of the jumbo frame function on the Switch.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports to be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To show the jumbo frame status currently configured on the Switch:
362
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show jumbo_frame
Command: show jumbo_frame
Jumbo Frame Global State : Enable
Maximum Jumbo Frame Size : 9216 Bytes
Port Jumbo Frame State
------- --------------------
1:1 Enable
1:2 Enable
1:3 Enable
1:4 Enable
1:5 Enable
1:6 Enable
1:7 Enable
1:8 Enable
1:9 Enable
1:10 Enable
1:11 Enable
1:12 Enable
1:13 Enable
1:14 Enable
1:15 Enable
1:16 Enable
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
363
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
46
L
IMITED
IP M
ULTICAST
A
DDRESS
The Limited IP Multicast command allows the administrator to permit or deny access to a port or range of ports by specifying a range of multicast addresses. The Limited IP Multicast Commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config limited multicast address delete limited multicast address show limited multicast address
Parameters
<portlist> {from <multicast_ipaddr> to <multicast_ipaddr> access [permit | deny]
| state [enable | disable]}
[all | <portlist>]
{<portlist>}
Each command is listed in detail in the following sections.
config limited multicast address
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure limited IP multicast address range.
config limited multicast address <portlist> {from <multicast_ipaddr> to
<multicast_ipaddr> access [permit | deny] | state [enable | disable]}
The config limited multicast address command allows the user to configure the multicast address range, access level, and state.
<portlist>
− A port or range of ports to config the limited multicast address. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma. (ex:1-3, 7-9)
from
− Enter the lowest multicast IP address of the range.
to
− Enter the highest multicast IP address of the range.
access
− Use the access field to either permit or deny to limit or grant access to a specified range of Multicast addresses on a particular port or range of ports.
state
− This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the limited multicast address range on a specific port or range of ports.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. This command is used as a backwards compatible command for legacy devices and firmware.
Example usage:
To configure the limited multicast address on ports 1 to 3:
364
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config limited multicast address 1-3 from 224.1.1.1 to 224.1.1.2 access permit state enable
Command: config limited multicast address 1-3 from 224.1.1.1 to 224.1.1.2 access permit state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete limited multicast address
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to delete Limited IP multicast address range.
delete limited multicast address [all | <portlist>]
The delete limited multicast address command allows the user to delete all multicast address ranges or a selected range based on what port or ports the range has been assigned to.
all
− Allows the user to delete all limited multicast addresses that have been configured on the Switch.
<portlist>
− Allows the user to delete only those multicast address ranges that have been assigned to a particular port or range of ports. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma. (ex: 1-
3,7-9)
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. This command is used as a backwards compatible command for legacy devices.
Example usage:
To delete the limited multicast address on ports 1 to 3:
DGS-3450:admin# delete limited multicast address 1-3
Command: delete limited multicast address 1-3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show limited multicast address
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to show per-port limited IP multicast address range.
show limited multicast address {<portlist>}
The show limited multicast address command allows users to show multicast address range by ports.
<portlist>
− A port or range of ports on which the limited multicast address range to be shown has been assigned. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash.
Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma. (ex: 1-3,7-9)
Restrictions None. This command is used as a backwards compatible command for legacy devices.
Example usage:
365
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To show the limited multicast address on ports 1 to 2:
DGS-3450:admin# show limited multicast address 1-2
Command: show limited multicast address 1-2
Port From To Access Status
---- -------------- --------------- -------- -------
1:1 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 disable
1:2 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 disable
DGS-3450:admin#
366
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
47
L
INK
A
GGREGATION
C
OMMANDS
The link aggregation commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Link aggregation, also known as trunking, is a method of grouping physical link segments of the same media type and speed, and treating them as if they were part of a single, logical link segment. In general, link aggregation provides two important benefits: increased performance and increased resiliency.
Command
create link_aggregation group_id delete link_aggregation group_id config link_aggregation group_id config link_aggregation algorithm show link_aggregation config lacp_port show lacp_port
Parameters
<value 1-32> {type [lacp | static]}
<value 1-32>
<value 1-32> {master_port <port> | ports <portlist> | state [enable | disable]}
[mac_source | mac_destination | mac_source_dest | ip_source | ip_destination | ip_source_dest]
{group_id <value 1-32> | algorithm}
<portlist> mode [active | passive]
{<portlist>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create link_aggregation
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to create a link aggregation group on the Switch.
create link_aggregation group_id <value 1-32> {type [lacp | static]}
This command will create a link aggregation group with a unique identifier.
<value>
− Specifies the group ID. The Switch allows up to 32 link aggregation groups to be configured. The group number identifies each of the groups.
type – Specify the type of link aggregation used for the group. If the type is not specified the default type is static.
•
lacp – This designates the port group as LACP compliant. LACP allows dynamic adjustment to the aggregated port group. LACP compliant ports may be further configured (see config lacp_ports). LACP compliant must be connected to LACP compliant devices.
•
static – This designates the aggregated port group as static. Static port groups can not be changed as easily as LACP compliant port groups since both linked devices must be manually configured if the configuration of the trunked group is changed.
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a link aggregation group:
367
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# create link_aggregation group_id 1
Command: create link_aggregation group_id 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete link_aggregation group_id
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete a previously created link aggregation group.
delete link_aggregation group_id <value 1-32>
This command is used to delete a previously configured link aggregation group.
<value 1-32>
− Specifies the group ID. The Switch allows up to 32 link aggregation groups to be configured. The group number identifies each of the groups.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete link aggregation group:
DGS-3450:admin# delete link_aggregation group_id 6
Command: delete link_aggregation group_id 6
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config link_aggregation
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure a previously created link aggregation group.
config link_aggregation group_id <value 1-32> {master_port <port> | ports <portlist> | state
[enable | disable]
This command allows users to configure a link aggregation group that was created with the create
link_aggregation command above.
group _id <value 32>
− Specifies the group ID. The Switch allows up to 32 link aggregation groups to be configured. The group number identifies each of the groups.
master_port <port>
− Master port ID. Specifies which port (by port number) of the link aggregation group will be the master port. All of the ports in a link aggregation group will share the port configuration with the master port.
ports <portlist>
− Specifies a port or range of ports that will belong to the link aggregation group including the master port. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash.
Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma. (ex: 1-3,7-9)
state [enable | disable]
− Allows users to enable or disable the specified link aggregation group.
Restrictions
Example usage:
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Link aggregation groups may not overlap.
368
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To define a load-sharing group of ports, group-id 1,master port 5 with group members ports 5-7 plus port 9:
DGS-3450:admin# config link_aggregation group_id 1 master_port 1:5 ports 1:5-1:7,9
Command: config link_aggregation group_id 1 master_port 1:5 ports 1:5-1:7,1:9
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config link_aggregation algorithm
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the link aggregation algorithm.
config link_aggregation algorithm [mac_source | mac_destination | mac_source_dest | ip_source | ip_destination | ip_source_dest]
This command configures the part of the packet examined by the Switch when selecting the egress port for transmitting load-sharing data. This feature is only available using the address-based loadsharing algorithm.
mac_source
− Indicates that the Switch should examine the source MAC address.
mac_destination
− Indicates that the Switch should examine the destination MAC address.
mac_source_dest
− Indicates that the Switch should examine the source and destination MAC addresses
ip_source
− Indicates that the Switch should examine the source IP address.
ip_destination
− Indicates that the Switch should examine the destination IP address.
ip_source_dest
− Indicates that the Switch should examine the source and the destination IP address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure link aggregation algorithm for mac-source-dest:
DGS-3450:admin# config link_aggregation algorithm mac_source_dest
Command: config link_aggregation algorithm mac_source_dest
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show link_aggregation
Purpose Used to display the current link aggregation configuration on the Switch.
Syntax
Description
Parameters
show link_aggregation {group_id <value 1-32> | algorithm}
This command will display the current link aggregation configuration of the Switch.
<value 1-32>
− Specifies the group ID. The Switch allows up to 32 link aggregation groups to be configured. The group number identifies each of the groups.
algorithm
− Allows you to specify the display of link aggregation by the algorithm in use by that group.
None. Restrictions
Example usage:
369
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To display Link Aggregation configuration:
DGS-3450:admin# show link_aggregation
Command: show link_aggregation
Link Aggregation Algorithm = IP-source
Group ID : 1
Type : TRUNK
Master Port : 1:5
Member Port : 1:5-1:7,1:9
Active Port :
Status : Disabled
Flooding Port :
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
config lacp_ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure settings for LACP compliant ports.
config lacp_ports <portlist> mode [active | passive]
This command is used to configure ports that have been previously designated as LACP ports
(see create link_aggregation).
<portlist>
− Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma. (ex: 1-3,7-9)
mode – Select the mode to determine if LACP ports will process LACP control frames.
•
active – Active LACP ports are capable of processing and sending LACP control frames. This allows LACP compliant devices to negotiate the aggregated link so the group may be changed dynamically as needs require. In order to utilize the ability to change an aggregated port group, that is, to add or subtract ports from the group, at least one of the participating devices must designate LACP ports as active. Both devices must support LACP.
•
passive – LACP ports that are designated as passive cannot process LACP control frames. In order to allow the linked port group to negotiate adjustments and make changes dynamically, at one end of the connection must have “active” LACP ports
(see above).
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure LACP port mode settings:
DGS-3450:admin# config lacp_port 1:1-1:12 mode active
Command: config lacp_port 1:1-1:12 mode active
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show lacp_port
Purpose Used to display current LACP port mode settings.
370
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show lacp_port
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
show lacp_port {<portlist>}
This command will display the LACP mode settings as they are currently configured.
<portlist>
− Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma. (ex: 1-3,7-9) If no parameter is specified, the system will display the current LACP status for all ports.
None.
Example usage:
To display LACP port mode settings:
DGS-3450:admin# show lacp_port 1-10
Command: show lacp_port 1-10
Port Activity
----- --------
1:1 Active
1:2 Active
1:3 Active
1:4 Active
1:5 Active
1:6 Active
1:7 Active
1:8 Active
1:9 Active
1:10 Active
DGS-3450:admin#
371
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
48
L
INK
L
AYER
D
ISCOVERY
P
ROTOCOL
(LLDP) C
OMMANDS
The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) specified in this standard allows stations attached to an 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same 802 LAN the connectivity and management information necessary to identify to those management entities the station's point of attachment to the 802 LAN. The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard management information base (MIB), making it possible for the information to be accessed by a network management system (NMS) using a management protocol such as the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)
Command
enable lldp disable lldp config lldp config lldp config lldp config lldp config lldp config lldp ports config lldp ports config lldp ports config lldp ports config lldp ports config lldp ports config lldp ports config lldp ports config lldp ports config lldp show lldp show lldp mgt_addr show lldp ports show lldp local_ports show lldp remote_ports show lldp statistics show lldp statistics ports
Parameters
message_tx_interval <sec 5-32768> message_tx_hold_multiplier <int 2–10> tx_delay <sec 1-8192> reinit_delay <sec 1-10> notification_interval <sec 5-3400>
[<portlist>|all] notification [enable | disable]
[<portlist>|all] admin_status [tx_only | rx_only | tx_and_rx | disable]
[<portlist>|all] mgt_addr [ipv4 <ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>] [enable | disable]
[<portlist>|all] basic_tlvs [all | {port_description | system_name | system_description | system_capabilities}] [enable | disable]
[<portlist>|all] dot1_tlv_pvid [enable | disable]
[<portlist>|all] dot1_tlv_protocol_vid [vlan [all | <vlan_name 32> ] | vlanid <vidlist> ]
[enable | disable]
[<portlist>|all] dot1_tlv_vlan_name [vlan [all | <vlan_name 32> ] | vlanid <vidlist> ]
[enable | disable]
[<portlist>|all] dot1_tlv_ protocol_identity[all | { eapol | lacp | gvrp | stp}] [enable | disable]
[<portlist>|all] dot3_tlvs [all | {mac_phy_configuration_status | link aggregation | maximum_frame_size}] [enable | disable] forward_message [enable | disable]
{[ipv4 <ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>]}
{<portlist>}
{<portlist>} {mode [brief | normal | detailed]}
{<portlist>} {mode [brief | normal | detailed]}
{<portlist>}
372
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable lldp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable LLDP operation on the Switch.
enable lldp
This is a global control for the LLDP function. When this function is enabled, the switch can start to transmit LLDP packets and receive and process the LLDP packets. The specific function of each port will depend on the per port LLDP setting. For the advertisement of
LLDP packets, the switch announces the information to its neighbor through ports. For the receiving of LLDP packets, the switch will learn the information from the LLDP packets advertised from the neighbor in the Neighbor’s table. The default state for LLDP is disabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable LLDP:
DGS-3450:admin# enable lldp
Command: enable lldp
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable lldp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable LLDP operation on the Switch.
disable lldp
This command will stop the sending and receiving of LLDP advertisement packets on the
Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable LLDP:
DGS-3450:admin# disable lldp
Command: disable lldp
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
373
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config lldp message_tx_interval
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to change the packet transmission interval.
config lldp message_tx_interval <sec 5 – 32768>
This interval controls how often active ports retransmit advertisements to their neighbors.
message_tx_interval – Changes the interval between consecutive transmissions of LLDP advertisements on any given port. The range is from 5 seconds to 32768 seconds. The default setting is 30 seconds.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the packet transmission interval:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp message_tx_interval 30
Command: config lldp message_tx_interval 30
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config lldp message_tx_hold_multiplier
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the message hold multiplier.
config lldp message_tx_hold_multiplier <int 2-10 >
This parameter is a multiplier on the msgTxInterval that is used to compute the TTL value of txTTL in an LLDPDU. TheTTL will be carried in the LLDPDU packet. The lifetime will be the minimum of 65535 and (message_tx_interval * message_tx_hold_multiplier). At the partner switch, when the tme-to-Live for a given advertisement expires, the advertised data is deleted from the neighbor switch’s MIB
message_hold_multiplier – The range is from 2 to 10. The default setting is 4.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To change the multiplier value:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp message_tx_hold_multiplier 3
Command: config lldp message_tx_ hold_multiplier 3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
374
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config lldp tx_delay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to change the minimum time (delay-interval) LLDP ports will delay in advertising successive LLDP advertisements due to a change in LLDP MIB content. The tx_delay defines the minimum interval between sending of LLDP messages due to constantly change of MIB content.
config lldp tx_delay < sec 1–8192 >
The LLDP message_tx_interval (transmit interval) must be greater than or equal to (4 x tx_delay interval).
tx_delay – The range is from 1 second to 8192 seconds. The default setting is 2 seconds.
NOTE: txDelay should be less than or equal to 0.25 * msgTxInterval
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the delay interval:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp tx_delay 7
Command: config lldp tx_delay 7
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config lldp reinit_delay
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Change the minimum time of the reinitialization delay interval.
config lldp reinit_delay <sec 1 - 10>
A re-enabled LLDP port will wait for reinit_delay after last disable command before reinitializing.
reinit_delay – The range is from 1 second to 10 seconds. The default setting is 2 seconds.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To changes the re-initialization delay interval to five seconds:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp reinit_delay 5
Command: config lldp reinit_delay 5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
375
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config lldp notification _interval
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the timer of the notification interval for sending notification to configured
SNMP trap receiver(s).
config lldp notification_interval <sec 5 – 3400 >
Globally change the interval between successive LLDP change notifications generated by the switch.
notification_interval – The range is from 5 seconds to 3400 seconds. The default setting is 5 seconds.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To change the notification interval to 10 seconds:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp notification_interval 10
Command: config lldp notification_interval 10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config lldp ports notification
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure each port for sending notification to configured SNMP trap receiver(s).
config lldp ports [<portlist>|all] notification [enable | disable]
Enable or disable each port for sending changes notification to configured SNMP trap receiver(s) if an LLDP data change is detected in an advertisement received on the port from an LLDP neighbor. The definition of change includes new available information, information timeout, information update. And the changed type includes any data update /insert/remove.
<portlist> – Use this parameter to define ports to be configured.
all – Use this parameter to set all ports in the system.
notification – Enables or disables the SNMP trap notification of LLDP data changes detected on advertisements received from neighbor devices. The default notification state is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To change the SNMP notification state of ports 1 to 5 to enable:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp ports 1:1-1:5 notification enable
Command: config lldp ports 1:1-1:5 notification enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
376
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config lldp ports admin_status
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure per-port transmit and receive modes.
config lldp ports [<portlist>|all] admin_status [tx_only | rx_only | tx_and_rx | disable]
These options enable the user to control which ports participate in LLDP traffic and whether the participating ports allow LLDP traffic in only one direction or in both directions.
<portlist> – Use this parameter to define ports to be configured.
all – Use this parameter to set all ports in the system.
admin_status – tx_only: Configure the specified port(s) to transmit LLDP packets, but block inbound LLDP packets from neighbor devices; rx_only: Configure the specified port(s) to receive LLDP packets from neighbors, but block outbound packets to neighbors; tx_and_rx:
Configure the specified port(s) to both transmit and receive LLDP packets; disable: Disable
LLDP packet transmit and receive on the specified port(s). The default per port state is
tx_and_rx.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure ports 1 to 5 to transmit and receive:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp ports 1:1-1:5 admin_status tx_and_rx
Command: config lldp ports 1:1-1:5 admin_status tx_and_rx
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config lldp ports mgt_addr
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable or disable port(s) specified for advertising indicated management address instance.
config lldp ports [<portlist>|all] mgt_addr [ipv4 <ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>] [enable | disable]
This command specifies whether the system’s IP address needs to be advertised from the specified port. For layer 3 devices, each managed address can be individually specified. The management addresses that are added in the list will be advertised in the LLDP from the specified interface associated with each management address. The interface for that management address will be also advertised in the if-index form
<portlist> – Use this parameter to define ports to be configured.
all – Use this parameter to set all ports in the system.
ipv4 – The IP address of IPv4.
Ipv6 – The IP address of IPv6.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable ports 1 to 2 to manage address entry:
377
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp ports 1:1-1:2 mgt_addr ipv4 192.168.254.10 enable
Command: config lldp ports 1:1-1:2 mgt_addr ipv4 192.168.254.10 enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config lldp ports basic_tlvs
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more optional TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements. config lldp ports [<portlist>|all] basic_tlvs [all | {port_description | system_name | system_description | system_capabilities}] [enable | disable]
An active LLDP port on the switch always includes the mandatory data in its outbound advertisements. And there are four optional data that can be configured for an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of these data types from outbound LLDP advertisements. The mandatory data type include four basic types of information (end f
LLDPDU TLV, chassis ID TLV, port ID TLV, and Time to Live TLV). The mandatory type can not be disabled. There are also four data types which can be optionally selected. They are
port_description, system_name, system_description, and system_capability.
<portlist> – Use this parameter to define ports to be configured.
all – Use this parameter to set all ports in the system.
port_description – This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit
'Port Description TLV on the port. The default state is disabled.
system_name – This TLV optional data type includes indicates that LLDP agent should transmit 'System Name TLV'. The default state is disabled.
system_description – This TLV optional data type includes indicates that LLDP agent should transmit 'System Description TLV'. The default state is disabled.
system_capabilities – This TLV optional data type includes indicates that LLDP agent should transmit 'System Capabilities TLV'. The system capability will indicate whether the device provides repeater, bridge, or router function, and whether the provided functions are currently enabled. The default state is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure exclude the system name TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp ports all basic_tlvs system_name enable
Command: config lldp ports all basic_tlvs system_name enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
378
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config lldp dot1_tlv_pvid
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of IEEE 802.1 organization port VLAN ID TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements.
config lldp ports [<portlist>|all] dot1_tlv_pvid [enable | disable]
This TLV optional data type determines whether the IEEE 802.1 organization defined port
VLAN TLV transmission is allowed on a given LLDP transmission capable port.
<portlist> – Use this parameter to define ports to be configured.
all – Use this parameter to set all ports in the system.
dot1_tlv_pvid – This TLV optional data type determines whether the IEEE 802.1 organization defined port VLAN ID TLV transmission is allowed on a given LLDP transmission capable port. The default state is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure exclude the Port VLAN ID TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_pvid enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_pvid enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config lldp dot1_tlv_protocol_vid
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of IEEE 802.1 organization port and protocol VLAN ID TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements.
config lldp ports [<portlist>|all] dot1_tlv_protocol_vid [vlan [all | <vlan_name 32> ] | vlanid <vidlist> ] [enable | disable]
This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System’s port and protocol VLAN ID instance will be transmitted on the port. If a port is associated with multiple protocol VLANs, those enabled port and protocol VLAN IDs will be advertised.
<portlist> – Use this parameter to define ports to be configured.
all – Use this parameter to set all ports in the system.
dot1_tlv_protocol_vid – This TLV optional data type determines whether the IEEE 802.1 organization defined port and protocol VLAN ID TLV transmission is allowed on a given
LLDP transmission capable port. The default state is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure exclude the port and protocol VLAN ID TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_vid vlanid 1-3 enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_vid vlanid 1-3 enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
379
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config lldp dot1_tlv_vlan_name
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of IEEE 802.1 organization VLAN name TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements.
config lldp ports [<portlist>|all] dot1_tlv_vlan_name [vlan [all | <vlan_name 32> ] | vlanid <vidlist> ] [enable | disable ]
This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System’s VLAN name instance will be transmitted on the port. If a port is associated with multiple VLANs, those enabled VLAN IDs will be advertised.
<portlist> – Use this parameter to define ports to be configured.
all – Use this parameter to set all ports in the system.
dot1_tlv_vlan_name – This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding
Local System’s VLAN name instance will be transmitted on the port. If a port is associated with multiple VLANs, those enabled VLAN IDs will be advertised. The default state is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure exclude the VLAN name TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_vlan_name vlanid 1-3 enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_vlan_name vlanid 1-3 enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config lldp dot1_tlv_protocol_identity
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of IEEE 802.1 organization protocol identity TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements.
config lldp ports [<portlist>|all] dot1_tlv_ protocol_identity [all | {eapol | lacp | gvrp | stp } [enable | disable]
This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System's Protocol
Identity instance will be transmitted on the port. The Protocol Identity TLV provides a way for stations to advertise protocols that are important to the operation of the network. Such as
Spanning Tree Protocol, the Link Aggregation Control Protocol, and numerous vendor proprietary variations are responsible for maintaining the topology and connectivity of the network. If EAPOL, GVRP, STP (including MSTP), and LACP protocol identity is enabled on this port and it is enabled to be advertised, then this protocol identity will be advertised.
<portlist> – Use this parameter to define ports to be configured.
all – Use this parameter to set all ports in the system.
dot1_tlv_protocol_identity – This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding
Local System's Protocol Identity instance will be transmitted on the port. The Protocol
Identity TLV provides a way for stations to advertise protocols that are important to the operation of the network, such as Spanning Tree Protocol, the Link Aggregation Control
Protocol, and numerous vendor proprietary variations which are responsible for maintaining the topology and connectivity of the network. If EAPOL, GVRP, STP (including MSTP), and
LACP protocol identity is enabled on this port and it is enabled to be advertised, then this protocol identity will be advertised. The default state is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
380
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To configure exclude the protocol identity TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_identity all enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_identity all enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config lldp dot3_tlvs
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of IEEE 802.3 oganization specific TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements.
config lldp ports [<portlist>|all] dot3_tlvs [all | {mac_phy_configuration_status | link_aggregation | maximum_frame_size}] [enable | disable]
Each Specific TLV in this extension can be enabled individually.
<portlist> – Use this parameter to define ports to be configured.
all – Use this parameter to set all ports in the system.
mac_phy_configuration_status – This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit 'MAC/PHY configuration/status TLV'. This type indicates it is possible for two ends of an IEEE 802.3 link to be configured with different and/or speed settings and still establish some limited network connectivity. More precisely, the information includes whether the port support the auto-negotiation function, whether the function is enabled, the autonegotiated advertised capability, and the operational MAU type. The default state is disabled.
link_aggregation – This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit
'Link Aggregation TLV'. This type indicates the current link aggregation status of IEEE 802.3
MACs. More precisely, the information should include whether the port is capable of doing link aggregation, whether the port is aggregated in a aggregated link, and the aggregated port ID. The default state is disabled.
power_via_mdi – This TLV optional data type indicates that the LLDP agent should transmit
'Power via MDI TLV'. Three IEEE 802.3 PMD implementations (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T) allow power to be supplied over the link for connected non-powered systems. The Power Via MDI TLV allows network management to advertise and discover the
MDI power support capabilities of the sending IEEE 802.3 LAN station. The default state is disabled.
NOTE: Not supported in the current release.
maximum_frame_size – This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit 'Maximum-frame-size TLV. The default state is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure exclude the MAC/PHY configuration/status TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp ports all dot3_tlvs mac_phy_configuration_status enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot3_tlvs mac_phy_configuration_status enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
381
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config lldp forward_message
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the forwarding of LLDPDU packets when LLDP is disabled.
config lldp forward_message [enable | disable]
When LLDP is disabled and LLDP forward_message is enabled, the received LLDPDU packets will be forwarded. The default state is disabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure LLDP forward_message:
DGS-3450:admin# config lldp forward_message enable
Command: config lldp forward_message enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show lldp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command displays the switch’s general LLDP configuration status.
show lldp
This command displays the switch’s general LLDP configuration status.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the LLDP system level configuration status:
DGS-3450:admin# show lldp
Command: show lldp
LLDP System Information
Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-19-5B-F5-26-C0
System Name :
System Description : Gigabit Ethernet Switch
System Capabilities : Repeater, Bridge
LLDP Configurations
LLDP Status : Disabled
LLDP Forward Status : Disabled
Message Tx Interval : 30
Message Tx Hold Multiplier: 4
ReInit Delay : 2
Tx Delay : 2
Notification Interval : 5
DGS-3450:admin#
382
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show lldp mgt_addr
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the LLDP management address information.
show lldp mgt_addr {[ipv4 <ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>]}
Displays the LLDP management address information.
ipv4 – The IP address of IPv4.
Ipv6 – The IP address of IPv6.
None.
Example usage:
To display management address information:
DGS-3450:admin show lldp mgt_addr ipv4 10.90.90.90
Command: show lldp mgt_addr ipv4 10.90.90.90
Address 1 :
------------------------------------------------
Subtype : IPv4
Address : 10.90.90.90
IF Type : IfIndex
OID : 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.10.70.6
Advertising Ports :
DGS-3450:admin#
show lldp ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Display the LLDP per port configuration for advertisement options.
show lldp ports {<portlist>}
This command displays the LLDP per port configuration for advertisement options.
<portlist> – Use this parameter to define ports to be configured.
None.
Example usage:
To display the LLDP per port TLV option configuration:
383
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show lldp ports 1
Command: show lldp ports 1
Port ID : 1:1
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Admin Status : TX_and_RX
Notification Status : Disabled
Advertised TLVs Option :
Port Description Disabled
System Name Disabled
System Description Disabled
System Capabilities Disabled
Enabled Management Address
(None)
Port VLAN ID Disabled
Enabled Port_and_Protocol_VLAN_ID
(None)
Enabled VLAN Name
(None)
Enabled Protocol_Identity
(None)
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status Disabled
Link Aggregation Disabled
Maximum Frame Size Disabled
DGS-3450:admin#
show lldp local_ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the per-port information currently available for populating outbound LLDP advertisements.
show lldp local_ports {<portlist>} {mode [brief | normal | detailed]}
This command displays the per-port information currently available for populating outbound
LLDP advertisements.
<portlist> – Use this parameter to define ports to be configured.
brief – Display the information in brief mode.
normal – Display the information in normal mode. This is the default display mode.
detailed – Display the information in detailed mode.
None.
Example usage:
To display outbound LLDP advertisements for port 1:
384
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show lldp local_ports 1:1
Command: show lldp local_ports 1:1
Port ID : 1:1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port ID Subtype : MAC Address
Port ID : 00-22-B0-DE-F0-46
Port Description : D-Link DGS-3450 R3.00.B10 Port
1 on Unit 1
Port PVID : 1
Management Address Count : 1
PPVID Entries Count : 0
VLAN Name Entries Count : 1
Protocol Identity Entries Count : 0
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status : (See Detail)
Link Aggregation : (See Detail)
Maximum Frame Size : 9216
DGS-3450:admin#
show lldp remote_ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the information learned from the neighbor.
show lldp remote_ports {<portlist>} {mode [brief | normal | detailed]}
This command display the information learned from the neighbor parameters. Due to a memory limitation, only 32 VLAN Name entries and 10 Management Address entries can be received.
<portlist> – Use this parameter to define ports to be configured.
mode – Choose from three options:
brief – Display the information in brief mode.
normal – Display the information in normal mode. This is the default display mode.
detailed – Display the information in detailed mode.
None.
Example usage:
To display remote table in brief mode:
DGS-3450:admin# show lldp remote_ports 1-2 mode brief
Command: show lldp remote_ports 1-2 mode brief
Port ID: 1:1
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Entities Count : 1
Entity 1
Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-19-5B-16-60-BF
Port ID Subtype : Local
Port ID : 1/3
Port Description : RMON Port 1 on Unit 3
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page Enter Next Entry a All
385
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show lldp statistics
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the system LLDP statistics information.
show lldp statistics
The global LLDP statistics displays an overview of neighbor detection activity on the switch.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display global statistics information:
DGS-3450:admin# show lldp statistics
Command: show lldp statistics
Last Change Time : 4875
Number of Table Insert : 0
Number of Table Delete : 0
Number of Table Drop : 0
Number of Table Ageout : 0
DGS-3450:admin#
show lldp statistics ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the ports LLDP statistics information.
show lldp statistics ports{<portlist>}
The per-port LLDP statistics command displays per-port LLDP statistics.
<portlist> – Use this parameter to define ports to be configured. When portlist is not specified, information for all ports will be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To display statistics information of port 1:
DGS-3450:admin# show lldp statistics ports 1
Command: show lldp statistics ports 1
Port ID : 1:1
---------------------------------------------
LLDPStatsTxPortFramesTotal : 0
LLDPStatsRxPortFramesDiscardedTotal : 0
LLDPStatsRxPortFramesErrors : 0
LLDPStatsRxPortFramesTotal : 0
LLDPStatsRxPortTLVsDiscardedTotal : 0
LLDPStatsRxPortTLVsUnrecognizedTotal : 0
LLDPStatsRxPortAgeoutsTotal : 0
DGS-3450:admin#
386
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
49
LLDP-MED C
OMMANDS
The LLDP-MED commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count config lldp_med log state config lldp_med notification topo_change ports config lldp_med ports
Parameters
<value 1 - 10>
[enable | disable]
[<portlist>|all] state [enable | disable] show lldp_med show lldp_med local_ports show lldp_med ports show lldp_med remote_ports
[<portlist> | all] med_transmit_capabilities [all | {capabilities | network_policy | power_pse | inventory}] state [enable | disable]
{<portlist>}
{<portlist>}
{<portlist>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to to configure the fast start repeat count.
config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count <value 1 - 10>
When an LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV is detected for an MSAP identifier not associated with an existing LLDP remote system MIB, the application layer shall start the fast start mechanism and set the ‘medFastStart’ timer to ‘medFastStartRepeatCount’ times 1. The default value is 4.
<value 1-10> - Specify a fast start repeat count value between 1 and 10. The default value is
4.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure a LLDP-MED fast start repeat count of 5:
DGS-3450:admin#config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count 5
Command: config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count 5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config lldp_med log state
Purpose Used to configure the log state of LLDP-MED events.
387
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config lldp_med log state
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
config lldp_med log state [enable | disable]
This command is used to configure the log state of LLDP-MED events.
enable - Enable the log state for LLDP-MED events.
disable - Disable the log state for LLDP-MED events. The default is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the log state of LLDP-MED events:
DGS-3450:admin#config lldp_med log state enable
Command: config lldp_med log state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config lldp_med notification topo_change ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable or disable each port for sending topology change notification to configured
SNMP trap receiver(s) if an endpoint device is removed or moved to another port.
config lldp_med notification topo_change ports [<portlist>|all] state [enable | disable]
This command is used to enable or disable each port for sending topology change notification to configured SNMP trap receiver(s) if an endpoint device is removed or moved to another port.
<portlist> - Specify a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specify to set all ports in the system.
state - Enable or disable the SNMP trap notification of topology change detected state.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable topology change notification on ports 1:1 to 1:2:
DGS-3450:admin#config lldp_med notification topo_change ports 1:1-1:2 state enable
Command: config lldp_med notification topo_change ports 1:1-1:2 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config lldp_med ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to enable or disable transmitting LLDP-MED TLVs.
config lldp_med ports [<portlist> | all] med_transmit_capabilities [all | {capabilities | network_policy | power_pse | inventory}] state [enable | disable]
It effectively disables LLDP-MED on a per-port basis by disabling transmission of TLV capabilities. In this case, the remote table’s objects in the LLDP-MED MIB corresponding to the respective port will not be populated.
all - Specify to set all ports in the system.
388
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config lldp_med ports
Restrictions
med_transit_capabilities - Select to send the LLDP-MED TLV capabilities specified.
all - Select to send capabilities, network policy, and inventory.
capabilities - Specify that the LLDP agent should transmit “LLDP-MED capabilities TLV.” If a user wants to transmit LLDP-MED PDU, this TLV type should be enabled. Otherwise, this port cannot transmit LLDP-MED PDU.
network_policy - Specify that the LLDP agent should transmit “LLDP-MED network policy
TLV.”
power_pse - Specify that the LLDP agent should transmit 'LLDP-MED extended Power via
MDI TLV' if the local device is a PSE device.
inventory - Specify that the LLDP agent should transmit “LLDP-MED inventory TLV.”
state - Enable or disable the transmitting of LLDP-MED TLVs.
enable - Enable the transmitting of LLDP-MED TLVs.
disable - Disable the transmitting of LLDP-MED TLVs.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable transmitting all capabilities on all ports:
DGS-3450:admin#config lldp_med ports all med_transmit_capabilities all state enable
Command: config lldp_med ports all med_transmit_capabilities all state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show lldp_med
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display LLDP-MED per port configuration for advertisement options.
show lldp_med
This command is used to display LLDP-MED per port configuration for advertisement options.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display LLDP-MED configuration information for port 1:1:
DGS-3450:admin#show lldp_med ports 1:1
Command: show lldp_med ports 1:1
Port ID : 1:1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Topology Change Notification Status :Enabled
LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV :Enabled
LLDP-MED Network Policy TLV :Enabled
LLDP-MED Extended Power Via MDI PSE TLV :Enabled
LLDP-MED Inventory TLV :Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
389
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show lldp_med local_ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the per-port LLDP-MED information currently available for populating outbound LLDP-MED advertisements.
show lldp_med local_ports {<portlist>}
This command is used to display the per-port LLDP-MED information currently available for populating outbound LLDP-MED advertisements.
<portlist> - Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To display LLDP-MED information currently available for populating outbound LLDP-MED advertisements for port 1:1:
DGS-3450:admin#show lldp_med local_ports 1:1
Command: show lldp_med local_ports 1:1
Port ID : 1:1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
LLDP-MED Capabilities Support:
Capabilities :Support
Network Policy :Support
Location Identification :Not Support
Extended Power Via MDI PSE :Not Support
Extended Power Via MDI PD :Not Support
Inventory :Support
Network Policy:
None
Extended Power Via MDI:
None
DGS-3450:admin#
show lldp_med ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display LLDP-MED per port configuration for advertisement options.
show lldp_med ports {<portlist>}
This command is used to display LLDP-MED per port configuration for advertisement options. If a port list is not specified, information for all ports will be displayed.
<portlist> - Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To display LLDP-MED configuration information for port 1:1:
390
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show lldp_med ports 1:1
Command: show lldp_med ports 1:1
Port ID : 1:1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Topology Change Notification Status :Enabled
LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV :Enabled
LLDP-MED Network Policy TLV :Enabled
LLDP-MED Extended Power Via MDI PSE TLV :Enabled
LLDP-MED Inventory TLV :Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
show lldp_med remote_ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display LLDP-MED information learned from neighbors.
show lldp_med remote_ports {<portlist>}
This command is used to display LLDP-MED information learned from neighbors.
<portlist> - Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To display remote entry information:
DGS-3450:admin#show lldp_med remote_ports 1:1
Command: show lldp_med remote_ports 1:1
Port ID : 1:1
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Entities Count : 1
Entity 1
Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-00
Port ID Subtype : Net Address
Port ID : 172.18.10.11
LLDP-MED capabilities:
LLDP-MED Device Class: Endpoint Device Class III
LLDP-MED Capabilities Support:
Capabilities : Support
Network Policy : Support
Location Identification : Support
Extended Power Via MDI : Support
Inventory : Support
LLDP-MED Capabilities Enabled:
Capabilities : Enabled
Network Policy : Enabled
Location Identification : Enabled
Extended Power Via MDI : Enabled
Inventory : Enabled
Network Policy:
Application Type : Voice
VLAN ID :
391
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Priority :
DSCP :
Unknown : True
Tagged :
Application Type : Softphone Voice
VLAN ID : 200
Priority : 7
DSCP : 5
Unknown : False
Tagged : True
Location Identification:
Location Subtype: CoordinateBased
Location Information :
Location Subtype: CivicAddress
Location Information :
Extended Power Via MDI
Power Device Type: PD Device
Power Priority : High
Power Source : From PSE
Power Request : 8 Watts
Inventory Management:
Hardware Revision :
Firmware Revision :
Software Revision :
Serial Number :
Manufacturer Name :
Model Name :
Asset ID :
DGS-3450:admin#
392
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
50
L
OOPBACK
D
ETECTION
C
OMMANDS
The Loopback Detection commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config loopdetect config loopdetect ports enable loopdetect disable loopdetect show loopdetect show loopdetect ports config loopdetect trap config loopdetect log state config loopdetect vlan
Parameters
{recover_timer [0 | <sec 60-1000000>] | interval <sec 1-32767> | mode [portbased | vlan-based]}
[<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
{<portlist>}
[none | loop_detected | loop_cleared | both]
[enable | disable]
[<vid_list> | all] state [enable | disable]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config loopdetect
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to setup the loop-back detection function (LBD) for the entire Switch.
config loopdetect {recover_timer [0 | <sec 60-1000000>] | interval <sec 1-32767> | mode [port-based | vlan-based]}
This command is used to setup the loop-back detection function (LBD) for the entire Switch.
recover_timer - The time interval (in seconds) used by the Auto-Recovery mechanism to decide how long to check before determining that the loop status has gone. The valid range is from 60 to 1000000. 0 is a special value that specifies that the auto-recovery mechanism should be disabled. When the auto-recovery mechanism is disabled, a user would need to manually recover a disabled port. The default value for the recover timer is 60 seconds.
• 0 - Specifies that the value of 0 will be set to the recovery timer.
• <sec 60-1000000> - Enter the recovery timer value here. This value must be between 60 and 1000000 seconds.
interval <sec - 1-32767> - The time interval (in seconds) that the device will transmit all the
CTP (Configuration Test Protocol) packets to detect a loop-back event. The default setting is
10 seconds. The valid range is from 1 to 32767 seconds.
mode - Specify the loop-detection operation mode. In port-based mode, the port will be shut down (disabled) when loop has been detected In VLAN-based mode, the port cannot process the packets of the VLAN that has detected the loop.
• port-based - Specify that the loop-detection operation mode will be set to port-based mode.
• vlan-based - Specify that the loop-detection operation mode will be set to vlan-based mode.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
393
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To set the auto-recover time to 0, which disables the auto-recovery mechanism, the interval to 20 seconds and specify
VLAN-based mode:
DGS-3450:admin#config loopdetect recover_timer 0 interval 20 mode vlan-based
Command: config loopdetect recover_timer 0 interval 20 mode vlan-based
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config loopdetect ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to set up the loop-back detection function for the interfaces on the Switch.
config loopdetect ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
This command is used to setup the loop-back detection function for the interfaces on the
Switch.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports
all - To set all ports in the system, you may use the “all” parameter.
state - Specify whether the LBD function should be enabled or disabled on the ports specified in the port list. The default state is disabled.
enable - Specify to enable the LBD function.
disable - Specify to disable the LBD function.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the LBD function on ports 1:1-1:5:
DGS-3450:admin#config loopdetect ports 1:1-1:5 state enable
Command: config loopdetect ports 1:1-1:5 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable loopdetect
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the LBD function globally on the Switch.
enable loopdetect
This command is used to enable the LBD function globally on the Switch. The default state is enabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the LBD function globally:
394
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#enable loopdetect
Command: enable loopdetect
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable loopdetect
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the LBD function globally on the Switch.
disable loopdetect
This command is used to disable the LBD function globally on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the LBD function globally:
DGS-3450:admin#disable loopdetect
Command: disable loopdetect
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show loopdetect
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the LBD global configuration.
show loopdetect
This command is used to display the LBD global configuration.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show the LBD global settings:
395
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show loopdetect
Command: show loopdetect
LBD Global Settings
---------------------------
Status : Enabled
Mode : VLAN-Based
Interval : 20 sec
Recover Time : 0 sec
Trap State : None
Enabled VLANs : 1-4094
Log State : Enabled
Function Version : v4.05
DGS-3450:admin#
show loopdetect ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to display the LBD per-port configuration.
show loopdetect ports {<portlist>}
This command is used to display the LBD per-port configuration.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port to be displayed.
If no port is specified, the configuration for all ports will be displayed.
None. Restrictions
Example usage:
To show the LBD settings on ports 1-9:
396
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show loopdetect ports 1:1-1:9
Command: show loopdetect ports 1:1-1:9
Port Loopdetect State Loop VLAN
------ ------------------ ----------
1:1 Enabled None
1:2 Enabled None
1:3 Enabled None
1:4 Enabled None
1:5 Enabled None
1:6 Disabled None
1:7 Disabled None
1:8 Disabled None
1:9 Disabled None
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
config loopdetect trap
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the trap modes for LBD.
config loopdetect trap [none | loop_detected | loop_cleared | both ]
This command is used to configure the trap modes for LBD.
none - There is no trap in the LBD function.
loop_detected - Trap will only be sent when the loop condition is detected.
loop_cleared - Trap will only be sent when the loop condition is cleared.
both - Trap will either be sent when the loop condition is detected or cleared.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To specify that traps will be sent when the loop condition is detected or cleared:
DGS-3450:admin#config loopdetect trap both
Command: config loopdetect trap both
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config loopdetect log state
Purpose
Syntax
Used to configure the log state for LBD.
config loopdetect log state [enable | disable]
397
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config loopdetect log state
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the log state for LBD.
state - Specify the state of the LBD log feature.
enable - Enable the LBD log feature.
disable - Disable the LBD log feature. All LBD-related logs will not be recorded.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To To enable the log state for LBD:
DGS-3450:admin#config loopdetect log state enable
Command: config loopdetect log state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config loopdetect vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the LBD state for the VLANs.
config loopdetect vlan [<vid_list> | all] state [enable | disable]
This command is used to configure the LBD state for the VLANs.
<vid_list> - Enter a list of VLANs to be configures.
all – Specify to configure all VLANs.
state – Enable or disable the LBD state for the VLANs.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the LBD state for all VLANS:
DGS-3450:admin#config loopdetect vlan all state enable
Command: config loopdetect vlan all state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
398
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
51
MAC N
OTIFICATION
C
OMMANDS
The MAC notification commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed, in the following table, along with their appropriate parameters.
Command
enable mac_notification disable mac_notification config mac_notification config mac_notification ports show mac_notification show mac_notification ports
Parameters
{interval <int 1-2147483647> | historysize <int 1-500>}
[<portlist> | all] [enable | disable]
{<portlist>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable mac_notification
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable global MAC address table notification on the Switch.
enable mac_notification
This command is used to enable MAC address notification without changing configuration.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable MAC notification without changing basic configuration:
DGS-3450:admin# enable mac_notification
Command: enable mac_notification
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable mac_notification
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable global MAC address table notification on the Switch.
disable mac_notification
This command is used to disable MAC address notification without changing configuration.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable MAC notification without changing basic configuration:
399
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# disable mac_notification
Command: disable mac_notification
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config mac_notification
Purpose
Syntax
Used to configure MAC address notification.
config mac_notification {interval <int 1-2147483647> | historysize <int 1-500>}
Description
Parameters
MAC address notification is used to monitor MAC addresses learned and entered into the FDB.
interval <sec 1-2147483647> – The time in seconds between notifications. The user may choose an interval between 1 and 2,147,483,647 seconds.
historysize <1-500> – The maximum number of entries listed in the history log used for notification.
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the Switch’s MAC address table notification global settings:
DGS-3450:admin# config mac_notification interval 1 historysize 500
Command: config mac_notification interval 1 historysize 500
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config mac_notification ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure MAC address notification status settings.
config mac_notification ports [<portlist> | all] [enable | disable]
MAC address notification is used to monitor MAC addresses learned and entered into the
FDB.
<portlist> – Specify a port or range of ports to be configured. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma. (ex: 1-3,7-9)
all – Entering this command will set all ports on the system.
[enable | disable] – These commands will enable or disable MAC address table notification on the Switch.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
Example usage:
To enable port 7 for MAC address table notification:
400
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config mac_notification ports 7 enable
Command: config mac_notification ports 7 enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show mac_notification
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the Switch’s MAC address table notification global settings
show mac_notification
This command is used to display the Switch’s MAC address table notification global settings.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To view the Switch’s MAC address table notification global settings:
DGS-3450:admin# show mac_notification
Command: show mac_notification
Global Mac Notification Settings
State : Enabled
Interval : 1
History Size : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
show mac_notification ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the Switch’s MAC address table notification status settings
show mac_notification ports {<portlist>}
This command is used to display the Switch’s MAC address table notification status settings.
<portlist> – Specify a port or group of ports to be viewed. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma.
(ex: 1-3,7-9)
Entering this command without the parameter will display the MAC notification table for all ports.
None.
Example usage:
To display all port’s MAC address table notification status settings:
401
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show mac_notification ports
Command: show mac_notification ports
Port # MAC Address Table Notification State
------ -----------------------------------------
1 Disabled
2 Disabled
3 Disabled
4 Disabled
5 Disabled
6 Disabled
7 Disabled
8 Disabled
9 Disabled
10 Disabled
11 Disabled
12 Disabled
13 Disabled
14 Disabled
15 Disabled
16 Disabled
17 Disabled
18 Disabled
19 Disabled
20 Disabled
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
402
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
52
MAC-
BASED
A
CCESS
C
ONTROL
C
OMMANDS
The MAC-based Access Control commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
enable mac_based_access_control disable mac_based_access_control config mac_based_access_control password config mac_based_access_control method config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports config mac_based_access_control ports
Parameters
<passwd 16>
[local | radius]
<portlist> create mac_based_access_control delete mac_based_access_control clear mac_based_access_control auth_state create mac_based_access_control_local mac config mac_based_access_control_local mac delete mac_based_access_control_local config mac_based_access_control authorization network show mac_based_access_control show mac_based_access_control_local show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports config mac_based_access_control max_users
[<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | mode [port_based | host_based] | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | [block_time | hold_time ] [infinite|<sec 1-
300>] | max_users [<value 1-4000> | no_limit]}(1)
[guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
[guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid < vlanid 1-4094>]
[ports [all | <portlist>] | mac_addr <macaddr>]
<macaddr> {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid < vlanid 1-4094>]}
<macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid < vlanid 1-4094> | clear_vlan]
[mac <macaddr> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid < vlanid 1-4094>]
{radius [enable | disable] | local [enable | disable]} (1)
{ports {<portlist>}}
{[mac <macaddr> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <1-4094>]}
{<portlist>}
[<value 1-4000> | no_limit]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable mac_based_access_control
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to enable MAC-based Access Control.
enable mac_based_access_control
This command enables the MAC-based Access Control function.
403
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
enable mac_based_access_control
Parameters
Restrictions
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the MAC-based Access Control global state:
DGS-3450:admin# enable mac_based_access_control
Command: enable mac_based_access_control
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable mac_based_access_control
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable MAC-based Access Control.
disable mac_based_access_control
This command disables the MAC-based Access Control function.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the MAC-based Access Control global state:
DGS-3450:admin# disable mac_based_access_control
Command: disable mac_based_access_control
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config mac_based_access_control password
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the RADIUS authentication password for MAC-based Access Control.
config mac_based_access_control password <passwd 16>
This command will set the password that will be used for authentication via the RADIUS server.
<passwd 16> - In RADIUS mode, the switch will communicate with the RADIUS server using this password. The maximum length of the key is 16.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set the MAC-based Access Control password:
404
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config mac_based_access_control password switch
Command: config mac_based_access_control password switch
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config mac_based_access_control method
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the MAC-based Access Control authentication method.
config mac_based_access_control method [local | radius]
Specify the authentication method used via the local database or via the RADIUS server.
local - Specify to authenticate via the local database.
radius - Specify to authenticate via a RADIUS server.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set the MAC-based Access Control authentication method as local:
DGS-3450:admin# config mac_based_access_control method local
Command: config mac_based_access_control method local
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN membership.
config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports <portlist>
This command will assign a specified port list to the MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN.
Ports that are not contained in port list will be removed from the MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN.
<portlist> - Specify MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN membership.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set the MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN membership:
DGS-3450:admin# config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports 1-8
Command: config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports 1-8
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config mac_based_access_control ports
Purpose Used to configure the port parameters for MAC-based Access Control.
405
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config mac_based_access_control ports
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
config mac_based_access_control ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | mode [port_based | host_based] | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | [block_time | hold_time ] [infinite|<sec 1-300>] | max_users [<value 1-4000> | no_limit]}(1)
This command allows configures MAC-based Access Control port’s setting.
When the MAC-based Access Control function is enabled for a port and the port is not a
MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN member, the user who is attached to this port will not be forwarded unless the user passes the authentication. A user that does not pass the authentication will not be serviced by the switch. If the user passes the authentication, the user will be able to forward traffic operated under the assigned VLAN.
When the MAC-based Access Control function is enabled for a port, and the port is a MACbased Access Control guest VLAN member, the port(s) will be removed from the original
VLAN(s) member ports, and added to MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN member ports. Before the authentication process starts, the user is able to forward traffic under the guest VLAN. After the authentication process, the user will be able to access the assigned
VLAN.
If the port authorize mode is port based mode, when the port has been moved to the authorized VLAN, the subsequent users will not be authenticated again. They will operate in the current authorized VLAN. If the port authorize mode is host based mode, then each user will be authorized individually and be capable of getting its own assigned VLAN.
ports - Specifies a range of ports for configuring the MAC-based Access Control function parameters.
state - Specifies whether the port’s MAC-based Access Control function is enabled or disabled.
mode - See below:
port_based - Port based means that all users connected to a port share the first authentication result.
host_based - Host based means that each user has its own authentication result. If the Switch does not support MAC-based VLANs, the switch will not allow the host based option for ports that are in guest VLAN mode.
aging_time - A time period during which an authenticated host will be kept in an authenticated state. When the aging time has timed-out, the host will be moved back to unauthenticated state. If the aging time is set to infinite, it means that authorized clients will not be aged out automatically.
block_time - If a host fails to pass the authentication, the next authentication will not start within the block time unless the user clears the entry state manually. If the block time is set to
0, it means do not block the client that failed authentication.
block_time – Specify the block time here.
infinite – Specify to set the time to infinite.
max_users - Specify maximum number of users per port. The range is 1 to 4000. The default value is 1024.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the MAC-based Access Control state for ports 1 to 8:
DGS-3450:admin# config mac_based_access_control ports 1-8 state enable
Command: config mac_based_access_control ports 1-8 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure the MAC-based Access Control authorization mode for ports 1 to 8:
406
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config mac_based_access_control ports 1-8 mode host_based
Command: config mac_based_access_control ports 1-8 mode host_based
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure an unlimited number of maximum users for MAC-based Access Control on ports 1 to 8:
DGS-3450:admin# config mac_based_access_control ports 1-8 max_users no_limit
Command: config mac_based_access_control ports 1-8 max_users no_limit
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure the MAC-based Access Control timer parameters to have an infinite aging time and a block time of 120 seconds on ports 1 to 8:
DGS-3450:admin# config mac_based_access_control ports 1-8 aging_time infinite block_time
120
Command: config mac_based_access_control ports 1-8 aging_time infinite block_time 120
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create mac_based_access_control guest_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to assign a static 802.1Q VLAN as a MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN.
create mac_based_access_control [guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid <vlanid
1-4094>]
Used to assign a static 802.1Q VLAN as a MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN.
This command can be used to manage unauthenticated hosts in this guest VLAN, that is, the unauthenticated host will stay in this guest VLAN until a successful authentication attempt.
guest_vlan - Specify MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN by name, it must be a static 1Q
VLAN.
guest_vlanid - Specify MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN by VID, it must be a static 1Q
VLAN.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# create mac_based_access_control guest_vlan VLAN8
Command: create mac_based_access_control guest_vlan VLAN8
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
407
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete mac_based_access_control guest_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to remove a MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN.
delete mac_based_access_control [guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid < vlanid
1-4094>]
Use this command to remove a MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN. When the guest
VLAN is removed, the guest VLAN function will be disabled.
guest_vlan - Specifies the name of the MAC-based Access Control’s guest VLAN
guest_vlanid - Specifies the VID of the MAC-based Access Control’s guest VLAN
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN called default:
DGS-3450:admin# delete mac_based_access_control guest_vlan default
Command: delete mac_based_access_control guest_vlan default
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
clear mac_based_access_control auth_state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to clear the clients’ authentication information by specific port(s) or MAC address.
clear mac_based_access_control auth_state [ports [all | <portlist>] | mac_addr
<macaddr>]
This command is used to clear the authentication state of a user (or port). The port (or the user) will return to an un-authenticated state. All the timers associated with the port (or the user) will be reset.
ports - To specify the port range to delete MAC addresses on them.
<macaddr> - To delete a specified host with this MAC address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear MAC-based Access Control clients’ authentication information for all ports:
DGS-3450:admin# clear mac_based_access_control auth_state ports all
Command: clear mac_based_access_control auth_state ports all
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To delete the MAC-based Access Control authentication information for the host that has a MAC address of 00-00-00-47-
04-65:
408
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# clear mac_based_access_control auth_state mac_addr 00-00-00-47-04-65
Command: clear mac_based_access_control auth_state mac_addr 00-00-00-47-04-65
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create mac_based_access_control_local
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create a MAC-based Access Control local database entry that will be used for authentication. This command can also specify the VLAN that an authorized host will be assigned to.
create mac_based_access_control_local mac <macaddr> {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid < vlanid 1-4094>]}
This command is used to create a database entry. The user also has the option of specifying a target VLAN for this entry.
mac - Specify the MAC address that can pass local authentication.
vlan - Specify the target VLAN by using the VLAN name. When this host is authorized, it will be assigned to this VLAN.
vlanid - Specify the target VLAN by using the VID. When this host is authorized, it will be assigned to this VLAN if the target VLAN exists.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create one MAC-based Access Control local database entry for MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-01 and specify that the host will be assigned to the “default” VLAN after the host has been authorized:
DGS-3450:admin# create mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan default
Command: create mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan default
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config mac_based_access_control_local
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure a MAC-based Access Control local database entry.
config mac_based_access_control_local mac <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid < vlanid 1-4094> | clear_vlan]
This command is used to configure a MAC-based Access Control local database entry.
mac - Specify the authenticated host’s MAC address.
vlan - Specify the target VLAN by VLAN name. When this host is authorized, the host will be assigned to this VLAN.
vlanid - Specify the target VLAN by VID. When this host is authorized, the host will be assigned to this VLAN if the target VLAN exists.
clear_vlan - Clear target VLAN information for specific hosts from the local database.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the target VLAN “default” for the MAC-based Access Control local database entry 00-00-00-00-00-01:
409
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan default
Command: config mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan default
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete mac_based_access_control_local
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete a MAC-based Access Control local database entry.
delete mac_based_access_control_local [mac <macaddr> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid < vlanid 1-4094>]
This command is used to delete a MAC-based Access Control local database entry.
mac - Delete local database entry by specific MAC address.
vlan - Delete local database entries by specific target VLAN name.
vlanid - Delete local database entries by specific target VLAN ID.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the MAC-based Access Control local database entry for MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-01:
DGS-3450:admin# delete mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01
Command: delete mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To delete the MAC-based Access Control local database entry for the VLAN name VLAN3:
DGS-3450:admin# delete mac_based_access_control_local vlan VLAN3
Command: delete mac_based_access_control_local vlan VLAN3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config mac_based_access_control authorization network
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to enable or disable the acceptation of an authorized configuration.
config mac_based_access_control authorization network {radius [enable | disable] | local [enable | disable]} (1)
Used to enable or disable the acceptation of an authorized configuration.
When authorization is enabled for MAC-based Access Controls with RADIUS authentication, the authorized attributes (for example VLAN, and 802.1p default priority) assigned by the
RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization status is enabled.
When authorization is enabled for MAC-based Access Controls with local authentication, the authorized attributes assigned by the local database will be accepted.
radius - If specified to enable, the authorized attributes (for example VLAN, and 802.1p default priority) assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization status is enabled. The default state is enabled.
local - If specified to enable, the authorized attributes assigned by the local database will be
410
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config mac_based_access_control authorization network
Restrictions accepted if the global authorization status is enabled. The default state is enabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
The following example will disable the configuration authorized from the local database:
DGS-3450:admin#config mac_based_access_control authorization network local enable
Command: config mac_based_access_control authorization network local enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show mac_based_access_control
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the MAC-based Access Control setting.
show mac_based_access_control {ports {<portlist>}}
This command is used to display the MAC-based Access Control settings.
If the ports parameter is not specified, the global MAC-based Access Control settings will be displayed.
<portlist> - Displays the MAC-based Access Control settings for a specific port or range of ports.
If no port list is specified, the settings will be displayed for ports which have MAC-based
Access Control enabled.
None.
Example usage:
To show the MAC-based Access Control port configuration for ports 1 to 4:
Port State Aging Time Block Time Max User
(min) (sec)
----- -------- ---------- --------- --------
1:1 Disabled 1440 300 1024
1:2 Disabled 1440 300 1024
1:3 Disabled 1440 300 1024
1:4 Disabled 1440 300 1024
DGS-3450:admin#
show mac_based_access_control_local
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to display the MAC-based Access Control local database entry(s).
show mac_based_access_control_local {[mac <macaddr> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <1-4094>]}
This command is used to display the MAC-based Access Control local database entries.
Displays all MAC-based Access Control local database entries.
mac - Displays MAC-based Access Control local database entries for a specific MAC address.
vlan - Displays MAC-based Access Control local database entries for a specific target VLAN
411
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show mac_based_access_control_local
Restrictions name.
vlanid - Displays MAC-based Access Control local database entries for a specific target
VLAN ID.
None.
Example usage:
To show the MAC-based Access Control local database:
DGS-3450:admin# show mac_based_access_control_local
Command: show mac_based_access_control_local
MAC Address VID
----------------- ----
00-00-00-00-00-01 1
00-00-00-00-00-02 123
00-00-00-00-00-03 123
00-00-00-00-00-04 1
Total Entries:4
DGS-3450:admin#
To show the MAC-based Access Control local database for the MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-01:
DGS-3450:admin# show mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01
Command: show mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01
MAC Address VID
----------------- ----
00-00-00-00-00-01 1
Total Entries:1
DGS-3450:admin#
To show MAC-based Access Control local database for the VLAN called ‘default’:
DGS-3450:admin# show mac_based_access_control_local vlan default
Command: show mac_based_access_control_local vlan default
MAC Address VID
----------------- ----
00-00-00-00-00-01 1
00-00-00-00-00-04 1
Total Entries:2
DGS-3450:admin#
show mac_based_access_control auth_state
Purpose
Syntax
Used to display the MAC-based Access Control authentication status.
show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports {<portlist>}
412
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show mac_based_access_control auth_state
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to display the MAC-based Access Control authentication status.
<portlist> - Display authentication status by specific port.
If not specified port(s), it will display all of MAC-based Access Control ports authentication status.
None.
Example usage:
Suppose that port 1 is in host based mode:
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-01 is authenticated without a VLAN assigned (may be the specified target VLAN does not exist or the target VLAN has not been specified at all), the ID of the RX VLAN will be displayed (RX VLAN ID is
4004 in this example).
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-02 is authenticated with a target VLAN assigned, the ID of the target VLAN will be displayed (target VLAN ID is 1234 in this example).
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-03 fails to pass authentication, the VID field will be shown as “-”, indicating that packets with SA 00-00-00-00-00-03 will be dropped no matter which VLAN these packets are from.
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-04 attempts to start authentication, the VID field will be shown as “-“until authentication completes.
Suppose that port 2 is in port based mode:
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-10 is the host which causes port 2 to pass authentication; the MAC address is followed by
“(P)” to indicate port based mode authentication.
Suppose that port 3 is in port based mode:
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-20 attempts to start authentication, the MAC address is followed by “(P)” to indicate port based mode authentication.
• MAC 00-00-00-00-00-21 fails to pass authentication, the MAC address is followed by “(P)” to indicate port based mode authentication.
NOTE: In port-based mode, the VLAN ID field is displayed in the same way as host based mode.
To display the MAC-based Access Control authentication status on port 1, 2, 3.
DGS-3450:admin# show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports 1:1-1:3
Command: show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports 1:1-1:3
P:Port based Pri:Priority
Port MAC Address Original State VID Pri Aging Time/
RX VID Block Time
---- ------------------- --------- ------------- ---------- -------- ----------
1 00-00-00-00-00-01 4004 Authenticated 4004 3 Infinite
1 00-00-00-00-00-02 4004 Authenticated 1234 - Infinite
1 00-00-00-00-00-03 4004 Blocked - - 60
1 00-00-00-00-00-04 4004 Authenticating - - 5
2 00-00-00-00-00-10(P) 1 Authenticated 1234 4 1440
3 00-00-00-00-00-20(P) 1 Authenticating - - 20
3 00-00-00-00-00-21(P) 1 Blocked - - 120
DGS-3450:admin#
413
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config mac_based_access_control max_users
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the maximum number of authorized clients.
config mac_based_access_control max_users [<value 1-4000> | no_limit]
This setting is a global limitation on the maximum number of users that can be learned via
MAC-based Access Control.
In addition, to the global limitation, the maximum number of users per port is also limited.
This is specified by the config config mac_based_access_control ports max_users command.
<value 1–4000> - Specify to set the maximum number of authorized clients on the whole device. The default value is 1024.
no_limit - Specify to not limit the maximum number of users on the system.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the maximum number of users the MAC-based Access Control system supports:
DGS-3450:admin# config mac_based_access_control max_users 128
Command: config mac_based_access_control max_users 128
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
414
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
53
M
IRROR
C
OMMANDS
The Mirror commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config mirror port enable mirror disable mirror show mirror create mirror group_id delete mirror group_id config mirror group_id
Parameters
<port> {[add | delete] source ports <portlist> [rx | tx | both]}
{group_id <value 1-4>}
<value 1-4>
<value 1-4>
<value 1-4> {target_port <port> | [add | delete] source ports <portlist> [rx | tx | both] | state [enable | disable]}(1)
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config mirror port
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure a mirror port − source port pair on the switch. Traffic from any source port to a target port can be mirrored for real-time analysis. A logic analyzer or an RMON probe then can be attached to study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner. When mirroring port traffic, please note that the target port must be configured in the same VLAN and operates at the same speed as the source port. If the target port is operating at a lower speed, the source port will be forced to drop its operating speed to match that of the target port.
config mirror port <port> {[add | delete] source ports <portlist> [rx | tx | both]}
The config mirror command allows a range of ports to have all of their traffic also sent to a destination p ort − where a network sniffer or other device can monitor the network traffic. In addition, you can specify that only traffic received by or sent by or both are mirrored to the target port.
This command used for single mirror session configuration primarily. If used for multiple session configurations, it configures the parameters on mirror group 1. If group 1 not exist, create group 1 firstly, and than configure the parameters on group 1.
port - The port that will receive the packets duplicated at the mirror port.
add - The mirror entry to be added.
delete - The mirror entry to be deleted.
portlist - The port that will be mirrored. All packets entering and leaving the source port can be duplicated in the mirror port.
rx - Allows the mirroring packets received (flowing into) the port or ports in the port list. tx - Allows the mirroring packets sent (flowing out of) the port or ports in the port list.
both - Mirrors all the packets received or sent by the port or ports in the port list.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add the mirroring ports:
415
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#config mirror port 1:3 add source ports 1:7-1:12 both
Command: config mirror port 1:3 add source ports 1:7-1:12 both
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable mirror
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable mirror globally.
enable mirror
This command, combined with the disable mirror command below, allows you to enable or disable mirror function without having to modify the mirror session configuration.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable mirroring function:
DGS-3450:admin# enable mirror
Command: enable mirror
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable mirror
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable mirror globally.
disable mirror
This command, combined with the enable mirror command above, allows you to enable or disable mirror function without having to modify the mirror session configuration.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable mirroring function:
DGS-3450:admin# disable mirror
Command: disable mirror
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show mirror
Purpose
Syntax
Used to show the current ports mirroring configuration on the switch.
show mirror {group_id <value 1-4>}
416
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show mirror
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
The show mirror command displays the current mirror function state and mirror session configuration on the switch. If don’t specify the “group_id” parameter, display the all mirror settings.
group_id - The mirror group identify.
value - The mirror group identify value.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display mirroring configuration:
DGS-3450:admin# show mirror
Command: show mirror
Mirror Global State: Enabled
Group State Target Port Source Ports
-----------------------------------------------------
1 Enabled 2:1 RX: 1:1
TX: 1:1
3 Enabled 3:5 RX: 1:24
TX: 1:24
DGS-3450:admin#
create mirror group_id
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create a mirror group on the switch.
create mirror group_id <value 1-4>
This command used to create a mirror group. If the mirror group has existed, do nothing and return success.
group_id - The mirror groups identify.
value - The mirror groups identify value.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create mirror group 3:
DGS-3450:admin# create mirror group_id 3
Command: create mirror group_id 3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete mirror group_id
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to delete a mirror group on the switch.
delete mirror group_id <value 1-4>
This command used to delete a mirror group.
417
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete mirror group_id
Parameters
Restrictions
group_id - The mirror groups identify.
value - The mirror groups identify value.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete mirror group 3:
DGS-3450:admin# delete mirror group_id 3
Command: delete mirror group_id 3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config mirror group_id
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure mirror group on the switch.
config mirror group_id <value 1-4> {target_port <port> | [add | delete] source ports
<portlist> [rx | tx | both] | state [enable | disable]}(1)
This command used to configure mirror group’s parameters. It can configure mirror group’s target port, state and source ports. The mirror group target port can’t be a member of all mirror groups’ source ports. Each mirror group’s target port can be the same port. But each mirror group’s source ports can’t overlap.
group_id - The mirror groups identify.
value - The mirror groups identify value.
target_port - The port that will receive the packets duplicated at the mirror port.
state - The mirror group state to enable or disable the mirror group function
add - The mirror source ports to be add.
delete - The mirror source ports to be delete
portlist - The port list of mirror group source ports
rx - Only the received packets on the mirror group source ports will be mirrored to the mirror group target port.
tx - Only the sent packets on the mirror group source ports will be mirrored to the mirror group target port.
both - Both the received and sent packets on the mirror group source ports will be mirrored to the mirror group target port.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure mirror group 2 with state enable and add source ports 1:4-1:9:
DGS-3450:admin# config mirror group_id 2 state enable add source ports 1:4-1:9 both
Command: config mirror group_id 2 state enable add source ports 1:4-1:9 both
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
418
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
54
MSTP D
EBUG
E
NHANCEMENT
C
OMMANDS
The MSTP Debug Enhancement commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
debug buffer debug output debug stp config ports debug stp show information debug stp show flag debug stp show counter debug stp clear counter debug stp state
Parameters
[utilization | dump | clear | upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>] module mstp [buffer | console]
[ < portlist > | all ] [ event | bpdu | state_machine | all ] state [ disable | brief | detail ]
{ports <portlist>}
{ports [<portlist> | all]}
[ports < portlist > | all ]
[enable | disable]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
debug buffer
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use the debug buffer command to dump, clear, or upload the debug buffer to the TFTP server.
debug buffer [utilization | dump | clear | upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>]
Dump, clear or upload the debug buffer to a TFTP server.
dump - Displays the debug message in the debug message buffer.
clear - Clears the debug message buffer.
upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> - Uploads the debug message buffer to a TFTP server with a specified IP address
<path_filename 64> - Upload the debug message buffer to a TFTP server and name the uploaded file using the string identified in the <path_filename 64> option.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear the debug information in the buffer:
DGS-3450:admin# debug buffer clear
Command: debug buffer clear
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug output
Purpose Use the debug output command to specify if the MSTP debug message output should be to the buffer or console.
419
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
debug output
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
debug output module mstp [buffer | console]
Sets if the MSTP debug message output should be set to the buffer or console.
buffer - Specifies the debug messages of MSTP will output to the buffer.
console - Specifies the debug messages of MSTP will output to the console.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set the MSTP debug information to output to the console:
DGS-3450:admin# debug output module mstp console
Command: debug output module mstp console
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug stp config ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure per-port STP debug level.
debug stp config ports [ < portlist > | all ] [ event | bpdu | state_machine | all ] state [ disable | brief | detail ]
This command used to configure per-port STP debug level on the specified ports.
debug flags - See below:
event - Debug the external operation and event processing.
bpdu - Debug the BPDU’s that have been received and transmitted.
state_machine - Debug the state change of the STP state machine.
all - Debug all of the above.
ports - See below:
portlist - Specifies the STP port range to debug.
all - Specifies to debug all ports on the switch.
state - See below:
disable - Disables the debug mechanism.
brief - Sets the debug level to brief.
detail - Sets the debug level to detail.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure all STP debug flags to brief level on all ports:
DGS-3450:admin# debug stp config ports all all state brief
Command: debug stp config ports all all state brief
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
420
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
debug stp show information
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the STP debug information.
debug stp show information
This command used to display STP detailed information, such as the hardware tables, the
STP state machine, etc.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show STP debug information:
421
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# debug stp show information
Command: debug stp show information
Spanning Tree debug information:
----------------------------------------
Port status in hardware table:
Instance 0:
Port 1 :BLK Port 2 :BLK Port 3 :BLK Port 4 :BLK Port 5 :BLK Port 6 :BLK
Port 7 :FOR Port 8 :BLK Port 9 :BLK Port 10:BLK Port 11:BLK Port 12:BLK
Instance 1:
Port 1 :BLK Port 2 :BLK Port 3 :BLK Port 4 :BLK Port 5 :BLK Port 6 :BLK
Port 7 :FOR Port 8 :BLK Port 9 :BLK Port 10:BLK Port 11:BLK Port 12:BLK
--------------------------------------
Root Priority and Times :
Instance 0:
Designated Root Bridge : 32768/00-01-02-03-04-00
External Root Cost : 0
Regional Root Bridge : 32768/00-01-02-03-04-00
Internal Root Cost : 0
Designated Bridge : 32768/00-01-02-03-04-00
Designated Port : 0
Message Age : 0
Max Age : 20
Forward Delay : 15
Hello Time : 2
Instance 1:
Regional Root Bridge : 32769/00-01-02-03-04-00
Internal Root Cost : 0
Designated Bridge : 32769/00-01-02-03-04-00
Designated Port : 0
Remaining Hops : 20
--------------------------------------
Designated Prioirty and Times
Instance 0:
Port 1 :
Designated Root Bridge : 0 /00-00-00-00-00-00
External Root Cost : 0
Regional Root Bridge : 0 /00-00-00-00-00-00
Internal Root Cost : 0
Designated Bridge : 0 /00-00-00-00-00-00
Designated Port : 0
Message Age : 0
Max Age : 20
Forward Delay : 15
Hello Time : 2
Instance 1:
Port 1 :
Regional Root Bridge : 0 /00-00-00-00-00-00
Internal Root Cost : 0
Designated Bridge : 0 /00-00-00-00-00-00
Designated Port : 0
Remaining Hops : 20
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
422
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
debug stp show flag
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the per-port STP debug level.
debug stp show flag {ports <portlist>}
This command used to display the STP debug level on specified ports.
ports <portlist> - Specifies the STP ports to display
If no parameter is specified, all ports on the switch will be displayed.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display the debug STP levels on all ports:
DGS-3450:admin# debug stp show flag
Command: debug stp show flag
Global State: Enabled
Port Index Event flag BPDU Flag State Machine Flag
---------- ---------- --------- ------------------
1 Detail Brief Disable
2 Detail Brief Disable
3 Detail Brief Disable
4 Detail Brief Disable
5 Detail Brief Disable
6 Detail Brief Disable
7 Detail Brief Disable
8 Detail Brief Disable
9 Detail Brief Disable
10 Detail Brief Disable
11 Detail Brief Disable
12 Detail Brief Disable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug stp show counter
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to show the STP counters.
debug stp show counter { ports [ < portlist > | all ] }
This command used to display the STP counters.
ports <portlist> - Specifies the STP ports for display..
all - Display all port’s counters
If no parameter is specified, display the global counters.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
Example usage:
To show the STP counters for port 9:
423
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#debug stp show counter ports 9
Command: debug stp show counter ports 9
STP Counters
--------------------------------------
Port 9 :
Receive: Transmit:
Total STP Packets :32 Total STP Packets
Configuration BPDU :0 Configuration BPDU
TCN BPDU :0 TCN BPDU
RSTP TC-Flag :15 RSTP TC-Flag
RST BPDU :32 RST BPDU
Discarded:
Total Discard BPDU :0
Global STP Disable :0
Port STP Disabled :0
Invalid Packet Format :0
Invalid Protocol :0
Config BPDU Length :0
TCN BPDU Length :0
RST BPDU Length :0
Invalid Type :0
Invalid Timers :0
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
:32
:0
:0
:7
:32
debug stp clear counter
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to clear STP counters.
debug stp clear counter [ports < portlist > | all ]
This command used to clear the STP counters.
ports <portlist> - Specifies the port range.
all - Clears all port counters.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear all STP counters on the switch:
DGS-3450:admin#debug stp clear counter all
Command : debug stp clear counter all
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug stp state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to configure the STP debug state.
debug stp state [enable | disable]
This command is used to enable or disable the STP debug state.
424
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
debug stp state
Parameters
Restrictions
state - See below:
enable - Enable the STP debug state.
disable - Disable the STP debug state.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the STP debug state to enable, and then disable the STP debug state:
DGS-3450:admin#debug stp state enable
Command: debug stp state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin# debug stp state disable
Command: debug stp state disable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
425
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
55
IGMP S
NOOPING
M
ULTICAST
(ISM) VLAN C
OMMANDS
The IGMP Snooping Multicast (ISM) VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command Parameters
create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> <vlanid 2-4094> { remap_priority [ <value 0-7> | none ] { replace_priority } } config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> {member_port <portlist> | [source_port <portlist> | untag_source_port <portlist>] | tag_member_port <portlist> | state [enable | disable] | replace_source_ip <ipaddr> | remap_priority[<value 0-7> | none]
{replace_priority}} config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group
<vlan_name 32> [add <mcast_address_list> | delete <mcast_address_list> | delete_all]
{< vlan_name 32> } delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan {<vlan_name 32>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create a multicast VLAN.
create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> <vlanid 2-4094> { remap_priority [ <value 0-7> | none ] { replace_priority } }
The create igmp_snooping command creates a multicast VLAN and implements relevant parameters as specified. More than one multicast VLANs can be configured. The maximum number of configurable VLANs is project dependent.
Newly created IGMP snooping must use a unique VLAN ID and name, i.e. they cannot use the VLAN ID or name of any existing 802.1q VLAN.
Also keep in mind the following conditions:
• Multicast VLANs cannot be configured or displayed using 802.1Q VLAN commands.
• An IP interface cannot be bound to a multicast VLAN.
• The multicast VLAN snooping function co-exists with the 802.1q VLAN snooping function.
vlan_name - The name of the multicast VLAN to be created. Each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters.
vlanid - The VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN to be created. The range is 2 - 4094.
remap_priority - The remap priority (0 to 7) to be associated with the data traffic to be forwarded on the multicast VLAN. If none is specified, the packet’s original priority will be used. The default setting is none.
replace_priority - Specify that packet’s priority will be changed by the switch, based on the remap priority. This flag will only take effect when the remap priority is set.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
426
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To create an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN with the VLAN name mv1 and the VID 2:
DGS-3450:admin# create igmp_snoop multicast_vlan mv1 2
Command: create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan mv1 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the parameters of a specific IGMP snooping multicast VLAN.
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> {member_port <portlist> |
[source_port <portlist> | untag_source_port <portlist>] | tag_member_port <portlist> | state [enable | disable] | replace_source_ip <ipaddr> | remap_priority [<value 0-7> | none] {replace_priority}}
The config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan command allows you to add member ports and source ports to a list of multicast VLAN member ports. Member ports automatically become untagged members of the multicast VLAN and source ports automatically become tagged members of the multicast VLAN. If the port list of an existing multicast VLAN is changed without specifying add or delete, the newly added port list replaces the existing port list. A member port list cannot overlap with a source port list of the same multicast VLAN. However, member ports of one multicast VLAN are allowed to overlap with member ports on a different multicast VLAN.
A multicast VLAN must first be created using the create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan command before the multicast VLAN can be configured.
vlan_name - The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured. Can be up to 32 characters.
member_port - A member port or range of member ports to be added to the multicast VLAN.
The specified range of ports will become untagged members of the multicast VLAN.
source_port - A port or range of ports to be added to the multicast VLAN.
untag_source_port - Specify the source port or range of source ports as untagged members of the multicast VLAN. The PVID of the untagged source port is automatically changed to the multicast VLAN. Source ports must be either tagged or untagged for any single multicast
VLAN, i.e. both types cannot be members of the same multicast VLAN.
tag_member_port - A member port or range of member ports to be added to the multicast
VLAN. The specified range of ports will become tagged members of the multicast VLAN.
state - Used to specify if the multicast VLAN for a chosen VLAN should be enabled or disabled.
replace_source_ip - Before forwarding the report packet sent by the host, the source IP address in the join packet must be replaced by this IP address.
remap_priority - The remap priority value (0 to 7) to be associated with the data traffic to be forwarded on the multicast VLAN. If none is specified, the packet’s original priority is used.
The default setting is none.
replace_priority - Specify that the packet priority will be changed to the remap_priority, but only if remap_priority is set.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN with the name “v1”, make ports 1 and 3 members of the VLAN, and set the state to enable:
427
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan v1 member_port 1:1,1:3 state enable
Command: config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan v1 member_port 1:1,1:3 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the IGMP multicast groups learned with the specified multicast VLAN.
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group <vlan_name 32> [add
<mcast_address_list> | delete <mcast_address_list> | delete_all]
Used to configure the multicast group learned with the specific multicast VLAN. The following two cases can be considered for examples:
Case 1- The multicast group is not configured, multicast VLANs do not have any member ports overlapping and the join packet received by the member port is learned on only the multicast VLAN that this port is a member of.
Case 2-The join packet is learned with the multicast VLAN that contains the destination multicast group. If the destination multicast group of the join packet cannot be classified into any multicast VLAN to which this port belongs, then the join packet will be learned on the natural VLAN of the packet.
vlan_name - The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured. Each multicast VLAN is given a name of up to 32 characters.
add - Add a list of MAC addresses.
delete – Delete a list of MAC addresses.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add an IGMP snooping multicast vlan group to a multicast VLAN group with the name “v1”:
DGS-3450:admin# config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group v1 add 239.1.1.1
Command: config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group v1 add 239.1.1.1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN group.
show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group {< vlan_name 32> }
The show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group command allows you to show the multicast
VLAN groups.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the name of the multicast VLAN to be displayed.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show all IGMP snooping multicast VLAN groups setup on the switch:
428
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
should be " DGS-3450:admin# show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group
Command: show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group
VLAN Name VLAN ID Multicast Group Profiles
------------------------------ ------------- --------------------------------- mod 8 test
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#"
delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN.
delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32>
The delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan command allows you to delete a multicast VLAN.
vlan_name - The name of the multicast VLAN to be deleted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN called “v1”:
DGS-3450:admin# delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan v1
Command: delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan v1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display information for a multicast VLAN.
show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan {<vlan_name 32>}
The show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan command allows information for a specific multicast
VLAN to be displayed.
vlan_name - The name of the multicast VLAN to be shown.
None.
Example usage:
To display all IGMP snooping multicast VLANs:
429
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Command: show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
IGMP Multicast VLAN Global State : Disabled
IGMP Multicast VLAN Forward Unmatched: Disabled
VLAN Name :test
VID :100
Member(Untagged) Ports :1
Tagged Member Ports :
Source Ports :3
Untagged Source Ports :
Status :Disabled
Replace Source IP : 0.0.0.0
Remap Priority :None
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
430
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
56
M
ULTIPLE
S
PANNING
T
REE
P
ROTOCOL
(MSTP) C
OMMANDS
The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
show stp show stp instance show stp ports show stp mst_config_id create stp instance_id delete stp instance_id config stp instance_id config stp mst_config_id enable stp disable stp config stp version config stp priority config stp config stp ports config stp mst_ports
Parameters
<value 0-15>
{<portlist>} {instance_id <0-15>}
<value 1-15>
<value 1-15>
<value 1-15> [add_vlan | remove_vlan] <vidlist>
{name <string> | revision_level <int 0-65535>
[mstp | rstp | stp]
<value 0-61440> instance_id <value 0-15>
{maxage <value 6-40> | maxhops <value 1-40> | hellotime <value 1-10> | forwarddelay <value 4-30> | txholdcount <value 1-10> | fbpdu
[enable(3)|disable(2)] | lbd [enable(1)|disable(0)] | lbd_recover_timer [<value 0> |
<value 60-1000000>] | nni_bpdu_addr [dot1d | dot1ad]}(1)
<portlist> {externalCost [auto | <value 1-200000000>] | hellotime <value 1-10> | migrate [yes | no] | edge [true | false | auto] | p2p [true | false | auto] | state
[enable | disable] | restricted_role [true |f alse] | restricted_tcn [true | false] | lbd
[enable | disable] | fbpdu [enable | disable]}(1)
<portlist> instance_id <value 0-15> {internalCost [ auto | <value 1-200000000>] | priority <value 0-240>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
show stp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Example usage:
To show stp:
Used to show the bridge parameters global settings. (CIST or msti id=0)
show stp
The show stp command is used to show the bridge parameters global settings.
None.
None.
431
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show stp
Command: show stp
STP Bridge Global Settings
---------------------------
STP Status : Disabled
STP Version : RSTP
Max Age : 20
Hello Time : 2
Forward Delay : 15
Max Hops : 20
TX Hold Count : 6
Forwarding BPDU : Disabled
Loopback Detection : Enabled
LBD Recover Time : 60
NNI BPDU Address : dot1ad
DGS-3450:admin#
show stp instance
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to show each instance parameters settings.
show stp instance <value 0-15>
This command displays each instance parameters settings. Value means the instance id, if there is no input of this value, all instance will be shown.
instance - MSTP instance id . Instance 0 represents for default instance:CIST. The bridge support total 16 Instance(0-15)at most.
None. Restrictions
Example usage:
To show stp instance:
432
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show stp instance
Command: show stp instance
STP Instance Settings
---------------------------
Instance Type : CIST
Instance Status : Enabled
Instance Priority : 32768(Bridge Priority : 32768, SYS ID Ext : 0 )
STP Instance Operational Status
--------------------------------
Designated Root Bridge : 32768/00-22-22-22-22-00
External Root Cost : 0
Regional Root Bridge : 32768/00-22-22-22-22-00
Internal Root Cost : 0
Designated Bridge : 32768/00-22-22-22-22-00
Root Port : None
Max Age : 20
Forward Delay : 15
Last Topology Change : 2430
Topology Changes Count : 0
DGS-3450:admin#
show stp ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to show the port information includes parameters setting and operational value.
show stp ports {<portlist>}
This command displays each port's parameters settings. If not input the portlist, all ports will be shown . If there are multi instances on this bridge , the parameters of the port on different instances will be shown.
ports - To show parameters of the designated port numbers , to be distinguished from showing parameters of the bridge.
portlist - One of CLI Value Type , restrict the input value and format of the ports, refer to section 1-4 Switch Numerical Ranges.
instance_id - specifies the stp instance id.
None. Restrictions
Example usage:
To show stp ports:
433
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show stp ports
Command: show stp ports
MSTP Port Information
Port Index : 1 , Hello Time: 2 /2 , Port STP : Enabled , LBD : No
External PathCost : Auto/20000 , Edge Port : False/No , P2P : Auto /Yes
Port RestrictedRole : False, Port RestrictedTCN : False
Msti Designated Bridge Internal PathCost Prio Status Role
----- ------------------ ----------------- ---- ---------- ----------
0 N/A 200000 128 Disabled Disabled
2 N/A 200000 128 Disabled Disabled
DGS-3450:admin#
show stp mst_config_id
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the MST Configuration Identification.
show stp mst_config_id
Show the 3 elements of the MST configuration Identification, including: Configuration Name,
Revision Level, and MST configuration Table. The default Configuration name is the MAC address of the bridge.
mst_config_id - If two bridges has the same three elements in mst_config_id, that means they are in the same MST region.
None.
Example usage: show stp mst_config_id:
DGS-3450:admin# show stp mst_config_id
Command: show stp mst_config_id
Current MST Configuration Identification
----------------------------------------
Configuration Name : 00-22-22-22-22-00 Revision Level :0
MSTI ID Vid list
------- -----------
CIST 1-4094
DGS-3450:admin#
create stp instance_id
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
To create an MST Instance without mapping the corresponding VLANs yet.
create stp instance_id <value 1-15>
To create a new MST instance independent from the default Instance: CIST (Instance 0).
After creating the MST instance, need to do the configuration of VLANs, or this newly created
MST instance will still be in disable state.
instance_id - MSTP instance id. Instance 0 represents for default instance, CIST. The DUT support 16 Instance (0-15) at most.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
434
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To create mstp instance:
DGS-3450:admin#create stp instance_id 2
Command: create stp instance_id 2
Warning:There is no VLAN mapping to this instance_id!
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete stp instance_id
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete MST Instance.
delete stp instance_id <value 1-15>
To delete the specified MST Instance . CIST (Instance 0) can not be deleted and only can delete one instance at a time.
instance_id - MSTP instance id. Instance 0 represents for default instance, CIST. The DUT support 16 Instance (0-15) at most.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete mstp instance:
DGS-3450:admin# delete stp instance_id 2
Command: delete stp instance_id 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config stp instance_id
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
To map or remove the VLAN range of the specified MST instance for the existed MST
Instances.
config stp instance_id <value 1-15> [add_vlan | remove_vlan] <vidlist>
There are 2 different action type to deal with an MST Instance. They are listed as follows:
add_vlan: to map specified VLAN lists to an existed MST Instance .
remove_vlan: to delete specified VLAN lists from an existed MST Instance.
instance_id - MSTP instance id . Instance 0 represents for default instance, CIST. The DUT support 16 Instance (0-15) at most.
add_vlan - Defined action type to configure an MST Instance.
remove_vlan - Defined action type to configure an MST Instance.
vidlist - Specifies a list of VLANs by VLAN ID.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To map vlan id to mstp instance:
435
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#config stp instance_id 2 add_vlan 1-3
Command: config stp instance_id 2 add_vlan 1-3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To remove vlan id from mstp instance:
DGS-3450:admin# config stp instance_id 2 remove_vlan 2
Command: config stp instance_id 2 remove_vlan 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config stp mst_config_id
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to change the name or revision level of the MST configuration Identification.
config stp mst_config_id {name <string> | revision_level <int 0-65535>
To configure configuration name, revision level in the MST configuration Identification. The default configuration name is the MAC address of the bridge.
name - The name given for a specified MST region.
revision_level - The same given name with different revision level also represents for different
MST region.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To change the name and revision level of the MST configuration Identification:
DGS-3450:admin# config stp mst_config_id name R&D_BlockG revision_level 1
Commands: config stp mst_config_id name R&D_BlockG revision_level 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable stp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Example usage:
To enable stp:
Used to enable STP globally.
enable stp
May be we could modify to allow user enable stp per instance. But CIST should be enabled first before enable other instances. Current design is when user enable the CIST, all MSTIs will be enabled automatically if FORCE_VERSION is set to MSTP(3) and there is at least one vlan mapped to this instance.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
436
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# enable stp
Command: enable stp
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable stp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable STP globally.
disable stp
To disable STP functionality in every existed instance.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable stp:
DGS-3450:admin# disable stp
Command: disable stp
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config stp version
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable STP globally.
config stp version [mstp | rstp | stp]
If version is configured as stp or rstp, all currently running MSTIs should be disabled. For version is configured as mstp, current design is enabled all available MSTIs (assume that
CIST is enabled). Futher discussion needed to decide whether we let user to enable the
MSTIs.
version - To decide to run under which version of STP.
mstp - Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
rstp - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
stp - Spanning Tree Protocol.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To config stp version:
DGS-3450:admin# config stp version mstp
Command: config stp version mstp
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To config stp version with the same value of old configuration:
437
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config stp version mstp
Command: config stp version mstp
Configure value is the same with current value.
Fail!
DGS-3450:admin#
config stp priority
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the instance priority.
config stp priority <value 0-61440> instance_id <value 0-15>
One of the parameters used to select the Root Bridge.
priority - The bridge priority value must be divisible by 4096.
instance_id - Identifier to distinguish different STP instances.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To config stp instance_id:
DGS-3450:admin# config stp priority 61440 instance_id 0
Command: config stp priority 61440 instance_id 0
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config stp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the bridge management parameters for CIST (instance_id = 0).
config stp {maxage <value 6-40> | maxhops <value 1-40> | hellotime <value 1-10> | forwarddelay <value 4-30> | txholdcount <value 1-10> | fbpdu [enable(3)|disable(2)] | lbd [enable(1)|disable(0)] | lbd_recover_timer [<value 0> | <value 60-1000000>] | nni_bpdu_addr [dot1d | dot1ad]}(1)
This command is used to configure the bridge parameters global settings.
maxage - Used to determine if a BPDU is valid. The default value is 20.
maxhops - Used to restrict the forwarded times of one BPDU. The default value is 20.
forwarddelay - The maximum delay time for one BPDU to be transmitted by a bridge and received from another bridge. The default value is 15.
txholdcount - Used to restrict the numbers of BPDU transmitted in a time interval (per Hello
Time).
fbpdu - To decide if the Bridge will flood STP BPDU when STP functionality is disabled.
nni_bdpu_addr - Used to determine the BPDU protocol address for STP in service provide site. It can use 802.1d STP address, or 802.1ad service provider STP address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To config stp:
438
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config stp maxage 25
Command: config stp maxage 25
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config stp ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the ports management parameters only at CIST level.
config stp ports <portlist> {externalCost [auto | <value 1-200000000>] | hellotime
<value 1-10> | migrate [yes | no] | edge [true | false | auto] | p2p [true | false | auto] | state [enable | disable] | restricted_role [true | false] | restricted_tcn [true | false] | lbd
[enable | disable] | fbpdu [enable | disable]}(1)
This command can configure all the parameters of ports, except for Internal Path Cost and
Port Priority.
portlist - One of CLI Value Type , restrict the input value and format of the ports, refer to section 1-4 Switch Numerical Ranges.
external_cost - The path cost between MST regions from the transmitting Bridge to the CIST
Root Bridge. It is only used at CIST level.
hellotime - The default value is 2 . This is a per-Bridge parameter in RSTP, but it becomes a per-Port parameter in MSTP.
migrate - To decide if the port can continue to transmit RSTP BPDUs.
edge - To decide if this port is connected to a LAN or a Bridged LAN. In auto mode, the bridge will delay for a period to become edge port if no bridge BPUD is received. The default is auto mode.
p2p - To decide if this port is in Full-Duplex or Half-Duplex mode.
state - To decide if this port supports the STP functionality.
restricted_role - To decide if this port not to be selected as Root Port. The default value is false.
restricted_tcn - To decide if this port not to propagate topology change. The default value is false.
lbd – Specifies to enable or disable the LBD option.
fbpdu - To decide if this port will flood STP BPDU when STP functionality is disabled.
When the state is set to enable, the received BPDU will be forwarded.
When the state is set to disable, the received BPDU will be dropped.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To config stp ports:
DGS-3450:admin# config stp ports 1 external_cost auto
Command: config stp ports 1 external_cost auto
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config stp mst_ports
Purpose Used to configure the ports management parameters at CIST (instance_id = 0) or MSTI
(instance_id = 1) level.
439
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config stp mst_ports
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
config stp mst_ports <portlist> instance_id <value 0-15> {internalCost [ auto | <value
1-200000000> ] | priority <value 0-240>}
Internal Path Cost and Port Priority of a Port in MSTI can be separately configured to different values from the configuration of CIST (istance_id = 0).
mst_ports - To be distinguished from the parameters of ports only at CIST level.
portlist - One of CLI Value Type , restrict the input value and format of the ports, refer to section 1-4 Switch Numerical Ranges.
instance_id - Instance = 0 represents for CIST , Instance from 1 to 15 represents for MSTI 1 -
MSTI 15.
internalCost - Port Path Cost used in MSTP.
priority - Port Priority.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To config stp mst_ports:
DGS-3450:admin#config stp mst_ports 1:1 instance_id 0 internalCost auto
Command: config stp mst_ports 1:1 instance_id 0 internalCost auto
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
440
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
57
N
ETWORK
L
OAD
B
ALANCING
(NLB) C
OMMANDS
The NLB indicates the Network Load Balancing: it is a MAC forwarding control for supporting Microsoft’s Network Load
Balancing technique.
The Network Load Balancing (NLB) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create nlb multicast_fdb delete nlb multicast_fdb config nlb multicast_fdb show nlb fdb
Parameters
[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] <macaddr>
[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] <macaddr>
[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] <macaddr> [add | delete] <portlist>
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create nlb multicast_fdb
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use to create the switch’s NLB multicast FDB entry.
create nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] <macaddr>
The create nlb multicast_fdb command creates a NLB multicast FDB entry. The number of supported entries is project dependent.
The network load balancing command set is used to support the Microsoft server load balancing application where multiple servers can share the same IP address and MAC address. The requests from clients will be forwarded to all servers, but will only be processed by one of them. The server can work in multicast mode. In multicast mode, the client use the multicast MAC address as the destination MAC to reach the server. Regarding of the mode, this destination Mac is the named the shared MAC. The server uses its own MAC address
(rather than the shared MAC) as the source MAC address of the reply packet.
The NLB multicast FDB entry will be mutual exclusive with the L2 multicast entry.
vlan_name - Specify the VLAN of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be created.
vlanid <vlanid> - Specify the VLAN by the VLAN ID.
<macaddr> - Specify the MAC address of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be created.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a NLB multicast FDB entry:
DGS-3450:admin# create nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01
Command: create nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete nlb multicast_fdb
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Use to delete the switch’s NLB multicast FDB entry.
delete nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] <macaddr>
The delete nlb multicast_fdb command is used to delete the NLB multicast FDB entry.
441
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete nlb multicast_fdb
Parameters
Restrictions
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the VLAN of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be deleted.
vlanid <vlanid> - Specify the VLAN by VLAN ID.
<macaddr> - Specify the MAC address of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be deleted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete NLB multicast FDB entry:
DGS-3450:admin# delete nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01
Command: delete nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config nlb multicast_fdb
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use to configure the switch’s NLB multicast FDB entry.
config nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] <macaddr> [add | delete]
<portlist>
The config nlb multicast_fdb command is used to add or delete the forwarding ports for the specified NLB multicast FDB entry.
vlan_name - Specify the VLAN of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be configured.
vlanid <vlanid> - Specify the VLAN by the VLAN ID.
<macaddr> - Specify the Mac address of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be configured.
add <portlist> - Specify a list of forwarding ports to be added.
delete <portlist> - Specify a list of forwarding ports to be removed.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure NLB multicast MAC forwarding database:
DGS-3450:admin# config nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01 add 1:1-1:5
Command: config nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01 add 1:1-1:5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show nlb fdb
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show NLB configured entry.
show nlb fdb
The show nlb fdb command is used to show the NLB Configured entry.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the NLB forwarding table:
442
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show nlb fdb
Command: show nlb fdb
MAC Address VLAN ID Egress Ports
----------------- ---------- ----------------------------------
03-bf-01-01-01-01 100 1:1-1:5,1:26,2:26
03-bf-01-01-01-01 1 1:1-1:5,1:26,2:26
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3450:admin#
443
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
58
P
ASSWORD
E
NCRYPTION
C
OMMANDS
The Password Encryption commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
enable password encryption disable password encryption create account config account show account delete account
Parameters
[admin | operator| user] <username 15>
<username> {encrypt [plain_text| sha_1] <password>}
<username>
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable password encryption
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create user accounts.
enable password encryption
The user account configuration information will be stored in the configuration file, and can be applied to the system later.
If the password encryption is enabled, the password will be in encrypted form.
None.
Only Administrator users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the password encryption:
DGS-3450:admin# enable password encryption
Command: enable password encryption
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable password encryption
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to create user accounts
disable password encryption
The user account configuration information will be stored in the configuration file, and can be applied to the system later.
When password encryption is diabled, if the user specifies the password in plain text form, the password will be in plan text form. However, if the user specifies the password in encrypted form, or if the password has been converted to encrypted form by the last enable password encryption command, the password will still be in the encrypted form. It can not be reverted to the plaintext.
444
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
disable password encryption
Parameters
Restrictions
None.
Only Administrator users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the password encryption:
DGS-3450:admin# disable password encryption
Command: disable password encryption
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create account
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create user accounts.
create account [admin | operator| user] <username 15>
The create account command creates user accounts. The username is between 1 and 15 characters, the password is between 0 and 15 characters. It is case sensitive. The number of account (include admin and user) is up to 8.
admin <username 15> - Name of the admin account.
user <username 15> - Name of the user account.
operator <username 15> - Name for a operator user acount.
Only Administrator users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create the admin-level user “dlink”:
DGS-3450:admin# create account admin dlink
Command: create account admin dlink
Enter a case-sensitive new password:****
Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config account
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure user accounts.
config account <username> {encrypt [plain_text| sha_1] <password>}
When the password information is not specified in the command, the system will prompt the user to input the password interactively. For this case, the user can only input the plain text password.
If the password is present in the command, the user can select to input the password in the plain text form or in the encrypted form. The encryption algorithm is based on SHA-I.
<username> - Name of the account. The account must already be defined.
plain_text - Select to specify the password in plain text form.
445
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config account
Restrictions
sha_1 - Select to specify the password in the SHA-I enacrpted form.
<password> - The password for the user account. The length for of password in plain-text form and in encrypted form are different. For the plain-text form, passwords must have a minimum of 0 character and can have a maximum of 15 characters. For the encrypted form password, the length is fixed to 35 bytes long. The assword is case-sensitive.
Only Administrator users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the user password of “dlink” account:
DGS-3450:admin# config account dlink
Command: config account dlink
Enter a old password:****
Enter a case-sensitive new password:****
Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure the user password of “dlink” account:
DGS-3450:admin# config account adminstrator
Command: config account administrator encrypt sha_1 *@&cRDtpNCeBiq15KOQsKVyrA0sAiCIZQwq
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show account
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display user accounts.
show account
The show account command displays user accounts that have been created.
None.
Only Administrator users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display the accounts that have been created:
446
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show account
Command: show account
Current Accounts:
Username Access Level
--------------- ------------
System User dlink Admin
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3450:admin#
delete account
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete an existing account.
delete account <username>
The delete account command deletes an existing account.
<username> - Name of the user who will be deleted.
Only Administrator users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the user account “System”:
DGS-3450:admin# delete account System
Command: delete account System
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
447
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
59
P
ASSWORD
R
ECOVERY
C
OMMANDS
The Password Recovery commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
reset config reboot reset account reset password show account
Parameters
{force_agree(1)}
{force_agree(1)}
{<username>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
reset config
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to reset the configuration.
reset config {force_agree(1)}
Used to reset the configuration.
force_agree – Specify to forcibly agree with the command.
This command is only available in password recovery mode.
Example usage:
To reset the configuration:
DGS-3450:admin# reset config
Command: reset config
Are you sure to proceed with reset config ?(y/n) y
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
reboot
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to exit Reset Configuration Mode and restart the switch.
reboot {force_agree(1)}
The reboot command exit Reset Configuration Mode and restart the switch. And it pops out a confirmation message to save the current setting.
force_agree – Specify to forcibly agree with the command.
This command is only available in password recovery mode.
Example usage:
To exit Reset Configuration Mode and restart the switch:
448
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# reboot
Command: reboot
Save current setting before system restart?(y/n)
Please wait, the switch is rebooting...
reset account
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete the created account.
reset account
The reset account command deletes all of the created user accounts.
None.
This command is only available in password recovery mode.
Example usage:
To delete the created account:
DGS-3450:admin# reset account
Command: reset account
Success
reset password
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to reset the password for user account.
reset password {<username>}
The reset password command resets the password of the specified user to empty. If username is not specified, password of all users will be reset.
<username> - Specify to enter an existing username.
This command is only available in password recovery mode.
Example usage:
To reset the password for user account:
DGS-3450:admin# reset password
Command: reset password
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
show account
Purpose
Syntax
Used to show the created account.
show account
449
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show account
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
The show account command display all already created accounts.
None.
This command is only available in password recovery mode.
Example usage:
To show the created account:
DGS-3450:admin# show account
Command: show account
DGS-3450:admin# show account
Command: show account
Current Accounts:
Username Access Level Password
---------- ------------ -------------- admin1 Admin user1 User *****
Total Entries : 2
450
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
60
P
ING
C
OMMANDS
The Ping commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
ping ping6
Parameters
[<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {times <value 1-255> | timeout <sec 1-99> | source_ip <ipaddr>}
<ipv6addr> {times <value 1-255> | size <value 1-6000> | timeout <sec 1-99> | source_ip <ipv6addr>} enable broadcast_ping_reply disable broadcast_ping_reply show broadcast_ping_reply
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
ping
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to test the connectivity between network devices.
ping [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {times <value 1-255> | timeout <sec 1-99> | source_ip <ipaddr>}
The ping command sends Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo messages to a remote IP address. The remote IP address will then “echo” or return the message. This is used to confirm connectivity between the switch and the remote device.
ipaddr - Specify the IP address of the host.
domain_name - Specify the domain name of the host.
times - The number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent. A value of 0 will send an infinite number of ICMP echo messages. The maximum value is 255. The default is 0, indicating infinity. Press "CTRL+C” to terminate the ping test.
timeout - Specify the time-out period while waiting for a response from the remote device. A value of 1 to 99 seconds can be specified. The default is 1 second.
source_ip - Specify the source IP address of the ping packets. If specified, , this IP address will be used as the packets’ source IP address that ping sends to the remote host.
None.
Example usage:
To send ICMP echo message to “10.51.17.1” for 4 times:
451
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# ping 10.51.17.1 times 4
Command: ping 10.51.17.1 times 4
Reply from 10.51.17.1, time<10ms
Reply from 10.51.17.1, time<10ms
Reply from 10.51.17.1, time<10ms
Reply from 10.51.17.1, time<10ms
Ping Statistics for 10.51.17.1
Packets: Sent =4, Received =4, Lost =0
DGS-3450:admin#
To sse the host domain name for the ping command to test the network connectivity. When the 4th response has been received, press “CTRL+C” to terminate the ping:
DGS-3450:admin# ping www.dlink.com
Command: ping www.dlink.com
Reply from 207.232.83.10, time<10ms
Reply from 207.232.83.10, time<10ms
Reply from 207.232.83.10, time<10ms
Reply from 207.232.83.10, time<10ms
Ping Statistics for 207.232.83.10
Packets: Sent =4, Received =4, Lost =0
DGS-3450:admin#
To send ICMP echo message with source IP address “10.51.17.8” to “10.51.17.2” for 3 times (the Switch’s IP address is
10.51.17.8):
DGS-3450:admin# ping 10.51.17.2 times 3 source_ip 10.51.17.8
Command: ping 10.51.17.2 times 3 source_ip 10.51.17.8
Reply from 10.51.17.2, time<10ms
Reply from 10.51.17.2, time<10ms
Reply from 10.51.17.2, time<10ms
Ping Statistics for 10.51.17.2
Packets: Sent =3, Received =3, Lost =0
DGS-3450:admin#
ping6
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to test the IPv6 connectivity between network devices.
ping6 <ipv6addr> {times <value 1-255> | size <value 1-6000> | timeout <sec 1-99> | source_ip <ipv6addr>}
The ping6 command sends IPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo messages to a remote IPv6 address. The remote IPv6 address will then “echo” or return the message.
This is used to confirm the IPv6 connectivity between the switch and the remote device.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the IPv6 address of the host.
times - Specify the number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent. A value of 0 will send an infinite ICMP echo messages. The maximum value is 255. The default is 0, indicating infinity. Press "CTRL+C” to terminate the ping test.
452
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
ping6
Restrictions
size - Specify the size of the test packet.
timeout - Specify the time-out period while waiting for a response from the remote device. A value of 1 to 10 seconds can be specified. The default is 1 second.
source_ip - Specify the source IPv6 address of the ping packets. If specified, , the IPv6 address will be used as the packets’ source IPv6 address that ping6 sends to the remote host.
None.
Example usage:
To send ICMP echo message to “3000::1” for 4 times:
DGS-3450:admin# ping6 3000::1 times 4
Command: ping6 3000::1 times 4
Reply from 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms
Reply from 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms
Reply from 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms
Reply from 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms
Ping Statistics for 3000::1
Packets: Sent =4, Received =4, Lost =0
DGS-3450:admin#
To send ICMP echo message with source IPV6 address “3000::11” to “3000::1” for 3 times (the Switch’s IP address are
3000::11 and 3000::10):
DGS-3450:admin# ping6 3000::1 times 3 source_ip 3000::11
Command: ping6 3000::1 times 3 source_ip 3000::11
Reply from 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms
Reply from 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms
Reply from 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms
Ping Statistics for 3000::1
Packets: Sent =3, Received =3, Lost =0
DGS-3450:admin#
enable broadcast_ping_reply
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the broadcast ping reply state.
enable broadcast_ping_reply
The device will reply to the broadcast ping request.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the broadcast ping reply state:
453
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# enable broadcast_ping_reply
Command: enable broadcast_ping_reply
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable broadcast_ping_reply
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the broadcast ping reply state.
disable broadcast_ping_reply
The device won’t reply to the broadcast ping request.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the broadcast ping reply state:
DGS-3450:admin# disable broadcast_ping_reply
Command: disable broadcast_ping_reply
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show broadcast_ping_reply
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the broadcast ping reply state.
show broadcast_ping_reply
Show the device broadcast ping reply state.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show the broadcast ping reply state:
DGS-3450:admin# show broadcast_ping_reply
Command: show broadcast_ping_reply
Broadcast Ping Reply State: Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
454
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
61
P
ORT
S
ECURITY
C
OMMANDS
The Port Security commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config port_security ports
Parameters
[<portlist> | all] {admin_state [enable | disable] | max_learning_addr
<max_lock_no 0-64> | lock_address_mode [permanent | delete ontimeout | deleteonreset]}(1) delete port_security_entry vlan_name <vlan_name 32> port <port> mac_address <macaddr> clear port_security_entry port show port_security
<portlist>
{ports <portlist>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config port_security
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to set the port level port security setting.
config port_security ports [<portlist> | all] {admin_state [enable | disable] | max_learning_addr <max_lock_no 0-64> | lock_address_mode [permanent | delete ontimeout | deleteonreset]}(1)
This command configures admin state, maximum learning address and lock address mode.
There is limitation on the learned entry number for a port. If any limitation is exceeded, the new entry will be discarded.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specifies that all ports will be configured.
admin_state - Specifies to enable/disable the port security function on the port. By default, the setting is disabled.
max_learning_addr - Specifies the maximum of port security entries that can be learned on this port. If the value is set to 0, it means that no user can get authorized by port security function on this port. If the setting is smaller than the number of current learned entries on the port, the command will be rejected. The default value is 1.
lock_address_mode - Indicates the mode of locking address. The default mode is deleteonreset.
permanent - The address will never be deleted unless the user removes it manually or the VLAN of the entry is removed or the port is removed from the VLAN, or port security is disabled on the port where the address resides..
deleteontimeout - This entry will be removed if it’s idle for the ageing time.
deleteonreset - This address will be removed if the switch is reset or reboots. The cases under which the permanent entries are deleted also apply to the deleteonreset entries,
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To config port security setting:
455
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config port_security ports 1:6 admin_state enable max_learning_addr 10 lock_address_mode Permanent
Command: config port_security ports 1:6 admin_state enable max_learning_addr 10 lock_address_mode Permanent
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete port_security_entry vlan_name
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete a port security entry.
delete port_security_entry vlan_name <vlan_name 32> port <port> mac_address
<macaddr>
Used to delete a port security entry.
<vlan_name> - Specifies the VLAN by VLAN name.
mac_address - Specifiies the MAC address of the entry.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a port security entry:
DGS-3450:admin# delete port_security_entry vlan_name default port 1 mac_address 00-01-30-
10-2C-C7
Command: delete port_security_entry vlan_name default port 1 mac_address 00-01-30-10-2C-
C7
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
clear port_security_entry port
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to clear the MAC entrieslearned by the port security function.
clear port_security_entry port <portlist>
Used to clear the MAC entries learned by the port security function.
<portlist> - Specifies a range of ports to be configured. The port-security entries learned on the specified port will be cleared.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear port security entry by port(s):
DGS-3450:admin# clear port_security_entry port 1:6
Command: clear port_security_entry port 1:6
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
456
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show port_security
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is to used to display port security configuration.
show port_security {ports <portlist>}
The show port_security command displays the port security related information.
<portlist> - Specifies a range of ports to show their configuration.
None.
Example usage:
To display the port security configuration:
DGS-3450:admin# show port_security
Command: show port_security
Port Admin State Max. Learning Addr. Lock Address Mode
----- ----------- ------------------- -----------------
1:1 Disabled 1 DeleteOnReset
1:2 Disabled 1 DeleteOnReset
1:3 Disabled 1 DeleteOnReset
1:4 Disabled 1 DeleteOnReset
1:5 Disabled 1 DeleteOnReset
1:6 Disabled 1 DeleteOnReset
1:7 Disabled 1 DeleteOnReset
1:8 Disabled 1 DeleteOnReset
1:9 Disabled 1 DeleteOnReset
457
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
62
P
OWER OVER
E
THERNET
(P
O
E) C
OMMANDS
The Power over Ethernet (PoE) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config poe system config poe ports show poe system show poe ports
Parameters
{units [<unitlist> | all ]} {power_limit <value 37-370> | power_disconnect_method
[deny_next_port | deny_low_priority_port] | management_mode [power_limit | auto] | legacy_pd [enable | disable]}(1)
[all | <portlist>] { state [enable | disable] | [time_range <range_name32> | clear_time_range] | priority [critical | high | low] | power_limit [class_0 | class_1 | class_2 | class_3 | user_define <value 1000-16800>]}
{units <unitlist>}
{<portlist>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config poe system
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the parameters for the POE system-wise function.
config poe system {units [<unitlist> | all ]} {power_limit <value 37-370> | power_disconnect_method [deny_next_port | deny_low_priority_port] | management_mode [power_limit | auto] | legacy_pd [enable | disable]}(1)
Configure the parameters for the whole PoE system.
units - Specified the units that will be configured. If no specified units, all supported PoE units in the system will be configured.
power_limit - Configure the power budget of PoE system. The range of value which can be specified is determined by the system. Normally, the minimum setting is 37 W and the maximum setting is 370 W. The actual range will depend on power supply capability.
power_disconnect_method - Configure the disconnection method that will be used when the power budget is running out. When the system attempts to supply power to a new port, if the power budget is insufficient to do this, PoE controller will initiate port disconnection procedure to prevent overloading the power supply. The controller uses one of the following two ways to perform the disconnection procedure.
deny_next_port - The port with max port number will be denied regardless of its priority.
NOTE: that if the disconnect_method is set to deny_next_port, then the power provision will not utilize the system’s maximum power. There is a 19W safe margin. That is, when the system has only 19W remaining, this power cannot be utilized.
deny_low_priority_port - If there are ports that have been supplied power that have a priority lower than the new port, the port with the lowest priority will be disconnected. This process will stop until enough power is released for the new port.
NOTE: that if the disconnect_method is set to deny_low_priority_port, then the power provision can utilize the system’s maximum power.
management_mode - In auto mode, POE supply the max power on a PD is 15.4W. In power_limit mode, POE allocates PD's Power based on PD requirement which is the range of port's POE configuration.
legacy_pd - Configure legacy PDs detection status, enable for support, if set to disable, can’t detect legacy PDs signal.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
458
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To config PoE system-wise was setting:
DGS-3450:admin# config poe system power_limit 250 power_disconnect_method deny_low_priority_port
Command: config poe system power_limit 250 power_disconnect_method deny_low_priority_port
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config poe ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the PoE port settings.
config poe ports [all | <portlist>] { state [enable | disable] | [time_range
<range_name32> | clear_time_range] | priority [critical | high | low] | power_limit
[class_0 | class_1 | class_2 | class_3 | user_define <value 1000-16800>]}
Configure the PoE port settings.
portlist - Specified the list of ports whose setting is under configuration.
all - Specifies that all ports will be used.
state - When the state is set to disable, power will not be supplied to the powered device connected to this port.
time_range - Specifies the time range that applies to the port of the POE. If time range is configured, the power can only be supplied during the period specified by time range.
clear_time_range - Remove the time range.
priority - Port priority determines the priority the system attempts to supply the power to port.
There are three levels of priority that can be selected, critical, high, and low. When multiple ports happen to have the same level of priority, the port ID will be used to determine the priority. The lower port ID has higher priority. The setting of priority will affect the ordering of supplying power. Whether the disconnect_method is set to deny_low_priority_port, priority of port will be used by the system to manage to supply power to ports.
power_limit - Configure the per-port power limit. If a port exceeds its power limit, it will be shut down.
Based on 802.3af, there are 5 kinds of PD classes, class 0, class 1, class 2, and class 3. The power consumption ranges for them are 0.44~12.95W, 0.44~3.84W, 3.84~6.49W,
6.49~12.95W, and 12.95~ 29.5W, respectively.
The five pre-defined settings are for users’ convenience: The following is the power limit applied to the port for these four classes. For each class, the power limit is a little more than the power consumption range for the class. This takes the factor of the power loss on cable into account. Thus, the following are the typical values defined by the chip vendor.
Class_0 : 15400mW class_1 : 4000mW class_2 : 7000mW clase_3 : 15400mW
Other than these four pre-defined settings, users can directly specify any value that the chip supported, Normally, the minimum setting is 1000mW, and the maximum setting is 15400mW for 802.3af and >=35000mW for 802.3at.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
NOTE: PD means powered device, for example, Web Cam, IP phone, wireless AP, etc.
PSE means power sourcing equipment, for example, our PoE switch.
Example usage:
459
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To config PoE port:
DGS-3426P:admin# config poe ports 1-4 state enable priority critical power_limit class_1
Command: config poe ports 1-4 state enable priority critical power_limit class_1
Power limit has been set to 4000mW (Class 1 PD upper power limit 3.84W + power loss on cable).
Success.
DGS-3450:admin# config poe ports 5 state enable priority critical power_limit user_define
1000
Command: config poe ports 5 state enable priority critical power_limit user_define 1000
Power limit has been set to 1000mW.
Success.
DGS-3426P:admin#
show poe system
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the setting and actual values of the whole PoE system.
show poe system {units <unitlist>}
Display the setting and actual values of the whole PoE system.
units - Specified units that will be displayed.
If no parameter specified, the system will display the status of all supported poe units in the systems.
None.
Example usage:
To display PoE system:
DGS-3426P:admin# show poe system units 1
Command: show poe system units 1
Unit 1 PoE System Information
---------------------------------------------------
Power Limit : 250(watts)
Power Consumption : 0(watts)
Power Remained : 250(watts)
Power Disconnection Method : Deny Low Priority Port
Detection Legacy PD : Disabled
If Power Disconnection Method is set to deny next port, then the system cannot utilize its maximum power capacity. The maximum unused watt is 19W.
DGS-3426P:admin#
show poe ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to display the setting and actual values of PoE port.
show poe ports {<portlist>}
Display the setting and actual values of PoE port.
portlist - Specified a list of ports to be displayed.
460
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show poe ports
Restrictions
If no parameter specified, the system will display the status for all ports.
None.
Example usage:
To display PoE port:
DGS-3426P:admin# show poe ports 1-6
Command: show poe ports 1-6
Port State Priority Power Limit(mW) Time Range
Class Power(mW) Voltage(decivolt) Current(mA)
Status
===============================================================================
1 Enabled Critical 15400(Class 0) Time_range_is_32_bytes____
0 0 0 0
OFF : Interim state during line detection
2 Enabled Critical 4000(Class 1)
0 8200 504 162
ON : 802.3af-compliant PD was detected
3 Enabled Critical 7000(Class 2)
0 0 0 0
OFF : Interim state during line detection
4 Enabled Critical 15400(Class 3)
0 400 504 10
ON : 802.3af-compliant PD was detected
5 Enabled Low 15400(User-defined)
0 0 0 0
OFF : Interim state during line detection
6 Enabled Low 10000(User-defined)
0 0 0 0
OFF : Interim state during line detection
DGS-3426P:admin#
461
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
63
P
ROTOCOL
VLAN G
ROUP
C
OMMANDS
For bridges that implement Port-and-Protocol-based VLAN classification, the VID associated with an Untagged or
Priority-tagged Frame is determined based on the Port of arrival of the frame into the bridge and on the protocol identifier of the frame. If there is no protocol VLAN configured on the ingress port, all the untagged packets incoming on the port will be classified into PVID VLAN. This classification mechanism requires defining the protocol groups which specified frame type and protocol value to match for. A protocol group can be bound to a port and given a VLAN ID. If the incoming untagged packet matches the protocol group the VLAN ID will be assigned. A port can bind with multiple protocol groups.
This allows untagged packets be classified into different VLANs based on packet content. The same protocol group can be assigned to multiple ports with different VLAN ID assigned, i.e. the same protocol can be given different VLAN ID through binding to different ports.
The Protocol VLAN Group commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create dot1v_protocol_group config dot1v_protocol_group delete dot1v_protocol_group show dot1v_protocol_group config port dot1v
Parameter
group_id <id> group_id <id> [add | delete] protocol [ethernet_2 | ieee802.3_snap | ieee802.3_llc] <protocol_value> group_id <id>
{group_id <id>} ports [<portlist> | all] [add protocol_group group_id <id> [vlan < vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] | delete protocol_group [group_id <id> | all]]
{ports <portlist>} show port dot1v
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create dot1v_protocol_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to create a protocol group.
create dot1v_protocol_group group_id <id>
This command will create a protocol group. This group is to be configured using the config
dot1v_protocol_group command where users may set the parameters for this group. After being configured, this group may be attached to a port or range of ports using the config port
dot1v command.
Parameters
Restrictions
Example usage:
To create a protocol group:
group_id <id>
− Enter an integer from 1 to 16 to identify the protocol VLAN group being created here.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
462
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# create dot1v_protocol_group group_id 1
Command: create dot1v_protocol_group group_id 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dot1v_protocol_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the parameters for a protocol VLAN group.
config dot1v_protocol_group group_id <id> [add | delete] protocol [ethernet_2 | ieee802.3_snap | ieee802.3_llc] <protocol_value>
This command will configure a protocol template for a group. Users may set the frame type to be added or deleted, along with the appropriate protocol_value in hexidecimal form. After being configured, this group may be attached to a port or range of ports using the config port dot1v command.
group_id <id>
− Enter an integer from 1 to 16 to identify the protocol VLAN group being configured here.
add | delete – Choose whether to add or delete the protocol to this group. This protocol is identified using the following protocol parameter.
protocol – Choose the appropriate frame type to be added to this group. This frame type will be identified by the switch by examining the packet header of incoming packets and matching it to the protocol_value stated here. This frame type must be followed by the correct protocol_value.
The user has three choices:
•
ethernet_2 – Choose this parameter if you wish this protocol group to employ the
Ethernet2 frame type. This frame type is identified by the 16-bit (2 octet) IEEE802.3 type field in the packet header, which is to be stated using the following
protocol_value.
•
ieee802.3_snap – Choose this parameter if you wish this protocol group to employ the
Sub Network Access Protocol (SNAP) frame type. This frame type is identified by the
16-bit (2 octet) IEEE802.3 type field in the packet header, which is to be stated using the following protocol_value.
•
ieee802.3_llc – Choose this parameter if you wish this protocol group to employ the
Link Logical Control (LLC) frame type. This frame type is identified by the 2-octet
IEEE802.3 Link Service Access Point (LSAP) pair field in the packet header, which is to be stated using the following protocol_value. The first octet defines the Destination
Service Access Point value and the second octet is the Source Service Access Point
(SSAP) value.
<protocol_value>
− Enter the corresponding protocol value of the protocol identified in the previous field. This value must be stated in a hexadecimal form.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure a protocol template:
DGS-3450:admin# config dot1v_protocol_group group_id 1 add protocol ethernet_2 86DD
Command: config dot1v_protocol_group group_id 1 add protocol ethernet_2 86DD
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
463
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete dot1v_protocol_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete a protocol VLAN group.
delete dot1v_protocol_group group_id <id>
This command will delete a protocol VLAN group.
group_id <id>
− Enter an integer from 1 to 16 to identify the protocol VLAN group being deleted here.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a protocol VLAN group:
DGS-3450:admin# delete dot1v_protocol_group group_id 1
Command: delete dot1v_protocol_group group_id 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dot1v_protocol_group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the configurations for a protocol VLAN group.
show dot1v_protocol_group {group_id <id>}
This command will display the configurations of a protocol VLAN group.
group_id <id>
− Enter an integer from 1 to 16 to identify the protocol VLAN group to be displayed.
Entering this command without the group_id parameter will display the configurations for all configured protocol VLAN groups.
None.
Example usage:
To display the configurations for a protocol VLAN group:
DGS-3450:admin# show dot1v_protocol_group group_id 1
Command: show dot1v_protocol_group group_id 1
Protocol Group ID Frame Type Protocol Value
------------------ ----------- -----------------------
1 EthernetII 86DD
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
464
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config port dot1v
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to bind a VLAN with a protocol template on one or more ports.
config port dot1v ports [<portlist> | all] [add protocol_group group_id <id> [vlan
<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] | delete protocol_group [group_id <id> | all]]
This command will bind a VLAN with a protocol template on one or more ports. When an ingress untagged packet is identified by the protocol_value stated using the config
dot1v_protocol_group command, the switch will assign a pre-configured VLAN and a priority for these ingress untagged packets in order to properly reach their destination.
ports – Use this parameter to specify ports.
•
<portlist>
− Use this parameter to assign a port or group of ports.
•
all – Use this parameter to specify all ports on the system.
add protocol_group group_id <id>
− Enter an integer from 1 to 16 to identify the protocol VLAN group being assigned to the ports or range of ports configured in the previous field.
vlan – Use this parameter bind a VLAN with a specific protocol template using either of the following parameters:
•
vlan_name 32
− Identify the VLAN name for which to add a tag to ingress untagged packets.
•
vlanid - Identify the VID for which to add a tag to ingress untagged packets.
delete protocol_group – Use this parameter to remove this protocol VLAN group’s association with the ports stated in this command, by using the following parameters:
•
group_id <id>
− Enter this parameter with its corresponding group number, to remove this pre-defined protocol group from the ports specified here.
•
all – Use this parameter to remove all protocol VLAN groups from the ports specified in this command.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To bind a VLAN with a protocol template:
DGS-3450:admin# config port dot1v ports 1:6-1:8 add protocol_group group_id 1 vlan building1
Command: config port dot1v ports 1:6-1:8 add protocol_group group_id 1 vlan building1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show port dot1v
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the bound protocol template on a specific port or ports.
show port dot1v {ports <portlist>}
This command will display the protocol VLAN group and VLAN for individual ports.
ports <portlist>
− Enter the port or group of ports for which to display the protocol VLAN group settings. Entering this command without this parameter will display all ports and their corresponding protocol VLAN group settings.
None.
Example usage:
To show the ports for a protocol VLAN group:
465
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show port dot1v ports 1:6-1:8
Command: show port dot1v ports 1:6-1:8
Port: 1:6
Protocol Group ID VLAN Name
------------------------- ----------------
1 building1
Port: 1:7
Protocol Group ID VLAN Name
------------------------- ----------------
1 building1
Port: 1:8
Protocol Group ID VLAN Name
------------------------- ----------------
1 building1
Total Entries: 3
DGS-3450:admin#
466
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
64
Q
UALITY OF
S
ERVICE
(Q
O
S) C
OMMANDS
The Quality of Service (QoS) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config bandwidth_control
Parameters
[<portlist>| all] {rx_rate [ no_limit | <value 64-10000000>] | tx_rate [ no_limit |
<value 64-10000000>]}
{<portlist>} show bandwidth_control config scheduling config scheduling_mechanism show scheduling show scheduling_mechanism config 802.1p user_priority show 802.1p user_priority config 802.1p default_priority show 802.1p default_priority enable hol_prevention disable hol_prevention show per_queue bandwidth_control config dscp trust show dscp trust config dscp map
{ports [<portlist> | all ]} <class_id 0-6> [max_packet <value 0-15>]
{ports [<portlist> | all ]} [strict | weight_fair]
{<portlist>}
{<portlist>}
{ports [<portlist> | all ]} <priority 0-7> <class_id 0-6>
{<portlist>}
[<portlist> | all ] <priority 0-7>
{<portlist>} show hol_prevention config per_queue bandwidth_control {ports [<portlist> | all ]} <cos_id_list 0-6> {{min_rate [no_limit | <value 64-
10000000>]} max_rate [no_limit | <value 64-10000000 >]}(1)
{<portlist>}
[<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
{<portlist>} show dscp map
[dscp_priority <dscp_list> to <priority 0-7> |dscp_dscp <dscp_list> to <dscp 0-
63>]
[dscp_priority | dscp_dscp ] {dscp <dscp_list>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config bandwidth_control
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Use to configure the port bandwidth limit control.
config bandwidth_control [<portlist>| all] {rx_rate [ no_limit | <value 64-10000000>] | tx_rate [ no_limit | <value 64-10000000>]}
This command sets the maximum limit for port bandwidth.
portlist - Specifies the range of ports to be configured.
rx_rate - Specifies the limitations to apply to the receive data rate.
no_limit - Indicates there is no limit on the amount of bandwidth that can be received on the configured ports.
An integer value from 64 to 10000000 sets the maximum limit in Kbits/sec. The actual bandwidth will be an adjusted value based on the user specified bandwidth. The actual limit may be equal to the user specified limit, but will not exceed it. The actual limit recognized by
467
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config bandwidth_control
Restrictions the device, will be displayed when the command is executed. Actual rate = (inputted rate/ minimum granularity) * minimal granularity
tx_rate - Specifies the limitation applied to the transmit data rate.
no_limit - Indicates that there is no limit on the port TX bandwidth.
An integer value from 64 to 10000000 sets a maximum limit in Kbits/sec. The actual bandwidth will be an adjusted value based on the user specified bandwidth. The actual limit may be equal to the user specified limit, but will not exceed it. The actual limit recognized by the device, will be displayed when the command is executed. Actual rate = (inputted rate/ minimum granularity) * minimal granularity
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the transmit bandwidth rate on port 1:1-1:10 to be 100 Kbits/sec:
DGS-3450:admin# config bandwidth_control 1:1-1:10 tx_rate 100
Command: config bandwidth_control 1:1-1:10 tx_rate 100
The setting value is not an integer multiple of granularity 64. The closest value
64 is chosen.
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show bandwidth_control
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the port bandwidth control table.
show bandwidth_control {<portlist>}
The show bandwidth_control command displays the port bandwidth configuration.
The bandwidth can also be assigned by the RADIUS server through the authentication process. If the RADIUS server has assigned the bandwidth, then the RADIUS-assigned bandwidth will be the effective bandwidth. The authentication with the RADIUS server can be either per port or per user. For per-user authentication, there may be multiple bandwidth control values assigned when there are multiple users attached to the specific port. In this case, the largest assigned bandwidth value will be applied to the effective bandwidth for this specific port. Note that only devices that support MAC-based VLANs can provide per user authentication.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be displayed.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all ports bandwidth configurations.
None.
Example usage:
To display port bandwidth control table for ports 1:1-1:10:
468
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show bandwidth_control 1:1-1:10
Command: show bandwidth_control 1:1-1:10
Bandwidth Control Table
Port RX Rate TX Rate Effective RX Effective TX
(Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec)
---- ---------- ------------- ------------ --------------
1:1 no_limit 64 - 128
1:2 no_limit 64 - -
1:3 no_limit 64 64 64
1:4 no_limit 64 64 64
1:5 no_limit 64 - -
1:6 no_limit 64 64 64
1:7 no_limit 64 - -
1:8 no_limit 64 - -
1:9 no_limit 64 - -
1:10 no_limit 64 - -
DGS-3450:admin#
config scheduling
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each CoS queue.
config scheduling {ports [<portlist> | all ]} <class_id 0-6> [max_packet <value 0-15>]
Used to configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each CoS queue.
ports <portlist> - Specifies the range of ports to be configured. all - To set all ports in the system, you may use the “all” parameter. If no parameter is specified, the system will set all ports.
class_id - This specifies the n+1 hardware priority queues that the config scheduling command will apply to. The four hardware priority queues are identified by a number from
0 to n with the 0 queue being the lowest priority. The determination of n is project dependent.
max_packet - Specifies the maximum number of packets that the hardware priority queue, specified above, will be allowed to transmit before allowing the next lowest priority queue to transmit its packets. A value between 0 and m can be specified. Determination of m is project dependent.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the traffic scheduling on CoS queue 1, with a weight value of 15, on port 1:10:
DGS-3450:admin# config scheduling ports 1:10 1 max_packet 15
Command: config scheduling ports 1:10 1 max_packet 15
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config scheduling_mechanism
Purpose
Syntax
Used to configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each CoS queue.
config scheduling_mechanism {ports [<portlist> | all ]} [strict | weight_fair]
469
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config scheduling_mechanism
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
There are two sets of commands that the project can be choose to implement.
If the project only supports the scheduling mechanism to be set globally, the portlist parameter will not be supported.
This command is used to specify how the switch handles packets in priority queues.
ports <portlist> - Specifies a range of ports to be configured.
all - To set all ports in the system, you may use the “all” parameter. If no parameter is specified, the system will set all ports.
strict - All queues will operate in strict mode.
weight_fair - Each queue will operate based on their settings.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for the CoS queue on port 1:1:
DGS-3450:admin# config scheduling_mechanism ports 1:1 strict
Command: config scheduling_mechanism ports 1:1 strict
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show scheduling
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current traffic scheduling parameters.
show scheduling {<portlist>}
The show scheduling command displays the current traffic scheduling parameters in use on the Switch.
portlist - Specifies the range of ports to be displayed.
If portlist is not specified, for the projects that support the per-port scheduling configure, system will display all ports’ scheduling configurations, for those projects that only support the global scheduling settings, this command will display the global setting only.
None.
Example usage:
To display the traffic scheduling parameters for each CoS queue on port 1:1 (take eight hardware priority queues for example):
470
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show scheduling 1:1
Command: show scheduling 1:1
QOS Output Scheduling On Port: 1:1
Class ID MAX. Packets
-------- ------
Class-0 1
Class-1 2
Class-2 3
Class-3 4
Class-4 5
Class-5 6
Class-6 7
DGS-3450:admin#
show scheduling_mechanism
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the traffic scheduling mechanism.
show scheduling_mechanism { <portlist> }
The show scheduling_mechanism command displays the traffic scheduling mechanism.
portlist - Specifies a range of ports to be displayed.
If no portlist is specified, for the projects that support the per-port scheduling mechanism configure, system will display all ports’ scheduling mechanism configurations, for those projects that only support the global scheduling mechanism settings, this command will display the global setting only.
None.
Example usage:
To show the scheduling mechanism for all ports:
DGS-3450:admin#show scheduling_mechanism 1:1
Command: show scheduling_mechanism 1:1
Port Mode
----- ------
1:1 strict
DGS-3450:admin#
config 802.1p user_priority
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to map the 802.1p user priority of an incoming packet to one of the eight hardware queues available on the Switch.
config 802.1p user_priority { ports [<portlist> | all ]} <priority 0-7> <class_id 0-6>
The config 802.1p user_priority command is used when you want to configure the way that the switch will map an incoming packet, based on its 802.1p user priority, to one of the available hardware priority queues on the switch.
ports <portlist> - Specifies the range of ports to be configured.
all - To set all ports in the system, you may use the “all” parameter. If no parameter is specified, the system will set all ports.
priority - The 802.1p user priority you want to associate the <class_id> (the number of the hardware queue) with.
471
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config 802.1p user_priority
Restrictions
class_id - The number of the switch’s hardware priority queue. The switch has 7 hardware priority queues available. They are numbered between 0 (the lowest priority) and 6 (the highest priority).
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure an 802.1p user priority of 1 and a class_ID of 3 on port 1:1:
DGS-3450:admin# config 802.1p user_priority ports 1:1 1 3
Command: config 802.1p user_priority ports 1:1 1 3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show 802.1p user_priority
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the 802.1p user priority.
show 802.1p user_priority {<portlist>}
The show 802.1p user_priority command displays 802.1p user priority for ports.
portlist - Specifies the range of ports to be displayed.
If no portlist is specified, this command will display the 802.1p user priority for all ports.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
In the case of Project only support global configuration, display the 802.1p user priority:
DGS-3450:admin#show 802.1p user_priority 1:1
Command: show 802.1p user_priority 1:1
QOS Class of Traffic
Port 1:1
Priority-0 -> <Class-2>
Priority-1 -> <Class-0>
Priority-2 -> <Class-1>
Priority-3 -> <Class-3>
Priority-4 -> <Class-4>
Priority-5 -> <Class-5>
Priority-6 -> <Class-6>
Priority-7 -> <Class-6>
DGS-3450:admin#
config 802.1p default_priority
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to configure the 802.1p default priority settings on the Switch. If an untagged packet is received by the Switch, the priority configured with this command will be written to the packet’s priority field.
config 802.1p default_priority [ <portlist> | all ] <priority 0-7>
The configure 802.1p default_priority command allows you to specify default priority handling
472
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config 802.1p default_priority
Parameters
Restrictions of untagged packets received by the Switch. The priority value entered with this command will be used to determine the hardware priority queues that the packet will be forwarded to.
portlist - This specifies the range of ports, which require the default priority settings configured on. That is, the range of ports which receive all untagged packets will be assigned the priority specified below. The port list is specified by listing the lowest switch number and the beginning port number on that switch, separated by a colon. Then the highest switch number, and the highest port number of the range (also separated by a colon) are specified.
The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. For example:
1:3 - Specifies switch number 1, port 3.
2:4 - Specifies switch number 2, port 4.
1:3-2:4 - Specifies all of the ports between switch 1, port 3 and switch 2, port 4, in numerical order.
all - Specifies that the command will apply to all ports on the switch.
priority - The priority value (0 to 7) assigned to untagged packets received by the switch or a range of ports on the switch.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure an 802.1p default priority settings of 5 on all Switch ports:
DGS-3450:admin# config 802.1p default_priority all 5
Command: config 802.1p default_priority all 5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show 802.1p default_priority
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current default priority settings on the Switch.
show 802.1p default_priority { <portlist> }
The command displays the current configured default priority settings on the switch.
The default priority can also be assigned by the RADIUS server through the authentication process. Authentication with the RADIUS server can be either per port or per user. For per port authentication, the priority assigned by the RADIUS server will be the default priority of the effective port. For per user authentication, the priority assigned by RADIUS will not be the effective port default priority, as the will priority associated with MAC address will be assigned. Note that only devices supporting MAC-based VLANs can provide per user authentication.
portlist - Specifies the range of ports to be displayed.
If no parameter is specified, all ports with an 802.1p default priority will be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To display the 802.1p default priority on ports 1:1-1:10:
473
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show 802.1p default_priority 1:1-1:10
Command: show 802.1p default_priority 1:1-1:10
Port Priority Effective Priority
---- ----------- ------------------
1:1 0 0
1:2 0 0
1:3 0 0
1:4 0 0
1:5 0 0
1:6 0 0
1:7 0 0
1:8 0 0
1:9 0 0
1:10 0 0
DGS-3450:admin#
enable hol_prevention
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable HOL prevention.
enable hol_prevention
The enable hol_prevention command enables head of line prevention on the Switch.
Note: This feature only takes effect after a switch reboot.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable HOL prevention on the switch:
DGS-3450:admin# enable hol_prevention
Command: enable hol_prevention
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable hol_prevention
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable HOL prevention.
disable hol_prevention
The command disables head of line prevention on the Switch.
Note: This feature only takes effect after a switch reboot.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable HOL prevention on the Switch:
474
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# disable hol_prevention
Command: disable hol_prevention
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show hol_prevention
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use to show the HOL prevention state.
show hol_prevention
The show hol_prevention command displays the head of line prevention state on the switch.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the HOL prevention state on the switch:
DGS-3450:admin# show hol_prevention
Command: show hol_prevention
Device HOL Prevention State: Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
config per_queue bandwidth_control
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the queue bandwidth control for each port.
config per_queue bandwidth_control {ports [<portlist> | all ]} <cos_id_list 0-6>
{{min_rate [no_limit | <value 64-10000000>]} max_rate [no_limit | <value 64-
10000000>]}(1)
The config per_queue bandwidth_control command sets the bandwidth control for each specific queue on specified ports.
min_rate specifies the minimum guaranteed bandwidth. Specifying no limit for the minimum rate means that bandwidth will not be guaranteed.
max_rate limits the bandwidth. When specified, packets transmitted from the queue will not exceed the specified limit even if extra bandwidth is available.
The specification of min_rate and max_rate are effective regardless of whether the queue is operating in strict mode or in WRR mode.
ports <portlist> - Specifies a range of ports to be configured.
all - To set all ports in the system, you may use the “all” parameter. If no parameter is specified, the system will set all ports.
<cos_id_list 0-6> - Specifies a list of priority queues. The priority queue number is ranged from 0 to 6.
min_rate - Specifies that one of the parameters below (no_limit or 64-10000000) will be applied to the minimum rate, which the above specified class will be allowed to receive packets at.
no_limit - Specifies that there will be no limit on the rate of packets received by the class specified above.
<value 64-10000000> - Specifies the packet limit, in Kbps, that the above ports will be allowed to receive.
475
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config per_queue bandwidth_control
Restrictions
If the specified rate does not have multiple of minimum granularity, the rate will be adjusted:
Actual rate = (inputted rate/ minimum granularity) * minimal granularity.
max_rate - Specifies that one of the parameters below (no_limit or 64-10000000) will be applied to the maximum rate that the class specified above will be allowed to transmit packets at.
no_limit - Specifies that there will be no limit on the rate of packets received by the above specified class.
<value 64-10000000> - Specifies the packet limit, in Kbps, that the above ports will be allowed to receive.
If the specified rate does not have multiple of minimum granularity, the rate will be adjusted:
Actual rate = (inputted rate/ minimum granularity) * minimal granularity.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the minimum rate to be 130 and the maximum rate to be 100000 on CoS bandwidth queue 1 for ports 1:1-
1:10:
DGS-3450:admin# config per_queue bandwidth_control ports 1:1-1:10 1 min_rate 130 max_rate
100000
Command: config per_queue bandwidth_control ports 1:1-1:10 1 min_rate 130 max_rate 100000
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show per_queue bandwidth_control
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the per queue bandwidth control settings for each port.
show per_queue bandwidth_control {<portlist>}
Used to display the per queue bandwidth control settings.
portlist - Specifies the range of ports to be displayed.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display the CoS bandwidth configuration for all ports.
None.
Example usage:
To display the per queue bandwidth control table for port 1:10:
476
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show per_queue bandwidth_control 1:10
Command: show per_queue bandwidth_control 1:10
Queue Bandwidth Control Table On Port: 1:10
Queue Min_Rate (64Kbit/sec) Max_Rate (64Kbit/sec)
---- --------------------- ----------------------
0 640 no_limit
1
2
3
4
5
6
640 no_limit
640 no_limit
640 no_limit
640 no_limit no_limit no_limit
DGS-3450:admin# no_limit no_limit
config dscp trust
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the state of DSCP trust per port.
config dscp trust [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
When DSCP is not trusted, 802.1p is trusted.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
all - Specify that the command apply to all ports on the Switch.
state - Enable or disable to trust DSCP. By default, DSCP trust is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable DSCP trust on ports 1:1-1:8:
DGS-3450:admin#config dscp trust 1:1-1:8 state enable
Command: config dscp trust 1:1-1:8 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dscp trust
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display DSCP trust state for the specified ports on the Switch.
show dscp trust {<portlist>}
This command is used to display DSCP trust state for the specified ports on the Switch. If not specify the port, all ports for DSCP trust status on the Switch will be displayed.
<portlist> - A range of ports to display.
None.
Example usage:
To display DSCP trust status on ports 1:1-1:8:
477
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show dscp trust 1:1-1:8
Command: show dscp trust 1:1-1:8
Port DSCP-Trust
---- ----------
1:1 Enabled
1:2 Enabled
1:3 Enabled
1:4 Enabled
1:5 Enabled
1:6 Enabled
1:7 Enabled
1:8 Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
config dscp map
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure DHCP mapping.
config dscp map [dscp_priority <dscp_list> to <priority 0-7> |dscp_dscp <dscp_list> to
<dscp 0-63>]
The mapping of DSCP to priority will be used to determine the priority of the packet (which will be then used to determine the scheduling queue) when the port is in DSCP trust state.
The mapping of DSCP to color will be used to determine the initial color of the packet when the policing function of the packet is color aware and the packet is DSCP-trusted.
The DSCP-to-DSCP mapping is used in the swap of DSCP of the packet when the packet is ingresses to the port. The remaining processing of the packet will base on the new DSCP. By default, the DSCP is mapped to the same DSCP.
These DSCP mapping will take effect at the same time when IP packet ingress from a DSCPtrusted port.
dscp_priority <dscp_list> - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific priority.
T o<priority 0-7> - Specify that the above or following parameter will be mapped to the previously mentioned parameter.
dscp_dscp <dscp_list> - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific DSCP.
to <dscp 0-63> - Specify that the above or following parameter will be mapped to the previously mentioned parameter.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the global mapping of the DSCP priority to priority 1:
DGS-3450:admin#config dscp map dscp_priority 1 to 1
Command: config dscp map dscp_priority 1 to 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show dscp map
Purpose
Syntax
Used to show DSCP trusted port list and mapped color, priority and DSCP.
show dscp map [dscp_priority | dscp_dscp ] {dscp <dscp_list>}
478
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show dscp map
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to show DSCP trusted port list and mapped color, priority and DSCP.
dscp_priority - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific priority.
dscp_dscp - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific DSCP.
{dscp <dscp_list>} - This specifies DSCP value that will be mapped.
None.
Example usage:
To show DSCP map configuration:
DGS-3450:admin#show dscp map dscp_dscp
Command: show dscp map dscp_dscp
DSCP to DSCP Mapping:
--------------------------------------------------------------
DSCP index | 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-----------+--------------------------------------------------
0 | 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
2 | 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
3 | 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
4 | 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
5 | 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
6 | 60 61 62 63
--------------------------------------------------------------
DGS-3450:admin#
479
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
65
R
EMOTE
C
OPY
P
ROTOCOL
(RCP) C
OMMANDS
RCP is a UNIX Remote Shell service which allows files to be copied between a server and client. RCP is an application that operates above the TCP protocols, and uses port number 514 as the TCP destination port.
The RCP application uses client server architecture and the client can be any machine running the RCP client application.
A Switch that supports the RCP client allows users to copy firmware images, configurations and log files between the
Switch and RCP Server.
Switches that do not support a file system should still be able to run an RCP client to copy firmware images, configurations and logs between the switch and RCP server.
The Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config rcp server config rcp server clear show rcp server download firmware_fromRCP download cfg_fromRCP upload cfg_toRCP upload log_toRCP upload attack_log_toRCP
Parameters
{ipaddress <ipaddr> | username <username 15>}
[ipaddr | username | both]
[{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} {src_file} <path_filename 64> |rcp:
<string 128>] {unit [<unit_id 1-12> |all]} {image_id <int 1-2>}
[{username <username 15>}{<ipaddr>} {src_file} <path_filename 64> |rcp:
<string 128>] {config_id <int 1-2>}
[{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} {dest_file} <path_filename 64> | rcp:
<string 128>] { config_id <int 1-2>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string
80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}
[{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} {dest_file} <path_filename 64> |rcp:
<string 128>]
[{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} {dest_file} <path_filename 64> | rcp:
<string 128>] {unit <unit_id 1-12>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config rcp server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Configure the global RCP server information.
config rcp server {ipaddress <ipaddr> | username <username 15>}
This command is used to configure the global RCP server information. This global RCP
Server setting can be used when the Server or remote user name is not specified.
ONLY one RCP server can be configured for each system.
If a user does not specify the RCP Server in the CLI command, and the global RCP Server was not configured, the Switch will ask the user to input the Server IP address or remote user name while executing the RCP commands.
ipaddress - The IP address or IPv6 address of the global RCP Server. By default, the server is unspecified.
username - The remote user name for logging into the global RCP Server. By default, the global server’s remote user name is unspecified.
Only Administrator level users can issue this command.
480
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To configure the global RCP Server:
DGS-3450:admin# config rcp server ipaddress 172.18.212.106 username rcp_user
Command: config rcp server ipaddress 172.18.212.106 username rcp_user
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config rcp server clear
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to clear the RCP global server information.
config rcp server clear [ipaddr | username | both]
This command is used to configure the global RCP server information. This global RCP
Server setting can be used when the Server or remote user name is not specified.
ONLY one RCP server can be configured for each system.
If a user does not specify the RCP Server in the CLI command, and the global RCP Server was not configured, the Switch will ask the user to input the Server IP address or remote user name while executing the RCP commands.
ipaddress - The IP address or IPv6 address of the global RCP Server. By default, the server is unspecified.
username - The remote user name for logging into the global RCP Server. By default, the global server’s remote user name is unspecified.
both - Both the RCP Server IP address and remote user name.
Only Administrator level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the global RCP Server:
DGS-3450:admin# config rcp server clear username
Command: config rcp server clear username
Success.
DGS-3450:admin# config rcp server clear both
Command: config rcp server clear both
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show rcp server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the global RCP server configured on the switch.
show rcp server
This command displays the global RCP server information.
None.
Only Administrator level users can issue this command.
481
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To display the global RCP Server configuration:
DGS-3450:admin#show rcp server
Command: show rcp server
RCP Server Address : 172.18.212.106
RCP Server Username : rcp_user
DGS-3450:admin#
download firmware_fromRCP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to download firmware from RCP server.
download firmware_fromRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} {src_file}
<path_filename 64> |rcp: <string 128>] {unit [<unit_id 1-12> |all]} {image_id <int 1-2>}
This command is used to download a firmware image file from an RCP server.
username - The remote user name on the RCP Server.
ipaddr - The IP address of the RCP server.
path_filename - The pathname specifies the pathname on the RCP server or local.
NOTE: If user specifies the relative file path, the path search strategy is depending on the server system. For some system, will search the current user working directory firstly, then the environment paths.
unit - Specifies which unit on the stacking system. If it is not specified, it refers to the master unit.
all - When all is specified, the boot_up firmware image on all units will be updated.
image_id - Specifies which firmware image. It is no need to support this argument when only one firmware image is supported. If not specified, it refers to the boot_up image.
rcp: <string 128> - Syntax: rcp: username@ipaddr/directory/filename
Example for FULL path: [email protected]/home/user_name/desxxxx.had
Example for relative path: [email protected]./desxxxx.had
Example for omitted user name in rcp string: 10.1.1.1./desxxxx.had.
NOTE: No SPACE in the whole <string>.
Only Administrator level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To download firmware from RCP:
DGS-3450:admin# download firmware_fromRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.106 src_file
/home/DGS-XXXX.had
Command: download firmware_fromRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.106 src_file /home/DGS-
XXXX.had
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download firmware...................... Done. Do not power off!
Please wait, programming flash......... Done.
Saving current settings to NV-RAM...... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
To download firmware form RCP using string:
482
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# download firmware_fromRCP rcp: [email protected]/home/rcp_user/DGS-
XXXX.had
Command: download firmware_fromRCP rcp: [email protected]/home/rcp_user/DGS-XXXX.had
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download firmware...................... Done. Do not power off!
Please wait, programming flash......... Done.
Saving current settings to NV-RAM...... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
To download firmware from RCP Server using rcp string without user name specified, and global RCP Server was not configured:
DGS-3450:admin# download firmware_fromRCP rcp: 10.1.1.1 DGS-XXXX.had
Command: download firmware_fromRCP rcp: 10.1.1.1 DGS-XXXX.had
Using RCP Server Username : rcp_user
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download firmware...................... Done. Do not power off!
Please wait, programming flash......... Done.
Saving current settings to NV-RAM...... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
To download firmware from RCP using global configured server:
DGS-3450:admin# download firmware_fromRCP src_file /home/DGS-XXXX.had
Command: download firmware_fromRCP src_file /home/DGS-XXXX.had
Using RCP Server IP: 172.18.212.106
Using RCP Server Username : rcp_user
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download firmware...................... Done. Do not power off!
Please wait, programming flash......... Done.
Saving current settings to NV-RAM...... Done.
Please wait, the switch is rebooting...
DGS-3450:admin#
To download firmware from RCP without specifies the RCP Server and remote user:
483
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# download firmware_fromRCP src_file /home/DGS-XXXX.had
Command: download firmware_fromRCP src_file /home/DGS-XXXX.had
No RCP Server IP Configured.
Would you like to specify a RCP Server IP
?(N) 172.18.211.106
No RCP Server Username Configured
Would you like to specify a RCP Server Username
?(N) rcp_user
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download firmware...................... Done. Do not power off!
Please wait, programming flash......... Done.
Saving current settings to NV-RAM...... Done.
Please wait, the switch is rebooting...
DGS-3450:admin#
To download firmware from RCP without specifies the RCP Server and remote user, and the global RCP server was not configured:
DGS-3450:admin# download firmware_fromRCP src_file DGS-XXXX.had
Command: download firmware_fromRCP src_file DGS-XXXX.had
No RCP Server IP configured.
Would you like to specify a RCP Server IP?(N)
RCP: copy file aborted!
Fail!
DGS-3450:admin#
To download DGS-XXXX.had from Global RCP Server and save with default file path & name:
DGS-3450:admin# download firmware_fromRCP src_file DGS-XXXX.had
Command: download firmware_fromRCP src_file DGS-XXXX.had
Using RCP Server IP: 172.18.212.106
Using RCP Server Username : rcp_user
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download firmware...................... Done. Do not power off!
Please wait, programming flash......... Done.
Saving current settings to NV-RAM...... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
download cfg_fromRCP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Download configuration file from the RCP server.
download cfg_fromRCP [{username <username 15>}{<ipaddr>} {src_file}
<path_filename 64> |rcp: <string 128>] {config_id <int 1-2>}
This command is used to download a configuration file from an RCP server.
username - The remote user name on the RCP Server.
ipaddr - The IP address of the RCP server.
path_filename - The pathname specifies the pathname on the RCP server or local RCP client.
484
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
download cfg_fromRCP
Restrictions
NOTE: If a user specifies the relative file path, the path search strategy will depend on the server system. For some systems, the current user working directory will be searched first, followed by the environment paths.
config_id - Specifies the configuration file ID. There is no need to support this argument when only one CFG file is supported. If not specified, it refers to the boot_up configuration file.
rcp: <string 128> - Syntax: rcp: username@ipaddr/directory/filename
Example for FULL path: [email protected]/home/user_name/desxxxx.had
Example for relative path: [email protected]./desxxxx.had
NOTE: No SPACE in the whole <string>.
Only Administrator level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To download a configuration file from an RCP server:
DGS-3450:admin# download cfg_fromRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.106 src_file
/home/DGS-XXXX.cfg
Command: download cfg_fromRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.106 src_file /home/DGS-
XXXX.cfg
Connecting to server.................…. Done.
Download configuration................. Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
To download a configuration using an RCP string:
DGS-3450:admin# download cfg_fromRCP rcp: [email protected]/home/DGS-XXXX.cfg config_id 1
Command: download cfg_fromRCP rcp: [email protected]/home/DGS-XXXX.cfg config_id 1
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download configuration................. Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
upload cfg_toRCP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Upload a configuration file from the device to an RCP server.
upload cfg_toRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} {dest_file} <path_filename
64> | rcp: <string 128>] { config_id <int 1-2>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string
80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}
This command is used to upload a configuration file from the device to an RCP server.
If the remote filename is not specified, the default file name will be modelname-image-id.
username - The remote user name on the RCP Server.
ipaddr - The IP address of the RCP server.
path_filename - The pathname specifies the pathname on the RCP server or local RCP client.
NOTE: If a user specifies the relative file path, the path search strategy will depend on the server system. For some systems, the current user working directory will be searched first, followed by the environment paths.
485
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
upload cfg_toRCP
Restrictions
If a user only specifies the path_filename parameter, only the current device configuration will be uploaded.
config_id - Specifies the configuration file ID. There is no need to support this argument when only one configuration file is supported. If not specified, it refers to the boot_up configuration file.
rcp: <string 128> - Syntax: rcp: username@ipaddr/directory/filename
Example for FULL path: [email protected]/home/user_name/desxxxx.had
Example for relative path: [email protected]./desxxxx.had
NOTE: No SPACES are allowed in the whole <string>.
filter_string - A filter string is enclosed by the “symbol. Therefore, the filter string itself cannot contain the “character. The filter string is case sensitive.
Only Administrator level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To upload the configuration from a single-config device to an RCP server:
DGS-3450:admin# upload cfg_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file /home/DGS-
XXXX.cfg
Command: upload cfg_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file /home/DGS-XXXX.cfg
Connecting to server....................... Done.
Upload Configuration....................... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
To upload the configuration from a multi-config device to an RCP server using an RCP string:
DGS-3450:admin# upload cfg_toRCP rcp: [email protected]/home/DGS-XXXX.cfg config_id
1
Command: upload cfg_toRCP rcp: [email protected]/home/DGS-XXXX.cfg config_id 1
Connecting to server..................... Done.
Upload configuration..................... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
upload log_toRCP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Upload a log file from the device to an RCP server.
upload log_toRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} {dest_file} <path_filename
64> |rcp: <string 128>]
This command is used to upload a system log file from the device to an RCP server.
If a destination file is not specified the file name will be modelname-slog.
username - The remote user name on the RCP Server.
ipaddr - The IP address of the RCP server.
path_filename - The pathname specifies the pathname on the RCP server or local RCP client.
NOTE: If a user specifies the relative file path, the path search strategy will depend on the server system. For some systems, the current user working directory will be searched first, followed by the environment paths.
486
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
upload log_toRCP
Restrictions
rcp: <string 128> - Syntax: rcp: username@ipaddr/directory/filename
Example for FULL path: [email protected]/home/user_name/desxxxx.had
Example for relative path: [email protected]./desxxxx.had
NOTE: No SPACES are allowed in the whole <string>.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To upload the log from the device to an RCP server:
DGS-3450:admin# upload log_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file /home/DGS-
XXXX.log
Command: upload log_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file /home/DGS-XXXX.log
Connecting to server... Done.
Upload log............. Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
To upload log from the device to an RCP server using an RCP string:
DGS-3450:admin# upload log_toRCP rcp: [email protected]/home/DGS-XXXX.log
Command: upload log_toRCP rcp: [email protected]/home/DGS-XXXX.log
Connecting to server................... Done.
Upload configuration................... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
upload attack_log_toRCP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Upload attack log file from the device to an RCP server.
upload attack_log_toRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} {dest_file}
<path_filename 64> | rcp: <string 128>] {unit <unit_id 1-12>}
This command is used to upload the system attack log file from the device to an RCP server.
username - The remote user name on the RCP Server.
ipaddr - The IP address of the RCP server.
path_filename - The pathname specifies the pathname on the RCP server or local RCP client.
NOTE: If a user specifies the relative file path, the path search strategy will depend on the server system. For some systems, the current user working directory will be searched first, followed by the environment paths.
If a user only specifies the path_filename parameter for the RCP server, it will upload the master attack log file.
unit - Specifies which unit on the stacking system. If not specified, it refers to the master unit.
rcp: <string 128> - Syntax: rcp: username@ipaddr/directory/filename
Example for FULL path: [email protected]/home/user_name/desxxxx.had
Example for relative path: [email protected]./desxxxx.had
NOTE: No SPACES allowed in the whole <string>.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
487
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To upload the attack log from the device to an RCP server:
DGS-3450:admin# upload attack_log_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file
/home/DGS-XXXX.alog unit 2
Command: upload attack_log_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file /home/DGS-
XXXX.alog unit 2
Connecting to server...Done.
Upload attack log......Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
To upload the attack log from the device to an RCP server using an RCP string:
DGS-3450:admin# upload attack_log_toRCP rcp: [email protected]/home/DGS-XXXX.alog
Command: upload attack_log_toRCP rcp: [email protected]/home/DGS-XXXX.alog
Connecting to server................ Done.
Upload attack log................... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
488
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
66
R
EMOTE
S
WITCHED
P
ORT
A
NALYZER
(RSPAN) C
OMMANDS
The Remote Switched Port Analyzer (RSPAN) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
enable rspan disable rspan create rspan vlan delete rspan vlan config rspan vlan config rspan vlan
Parameters
[vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <value 1-4094>]
[vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <value 1-4094>]
[vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id < vlanid 1-4094>] source { [ mirror_group_id
<value 1-4> | [add | delete] ports <portlist> [rx | tx | both]]}
[vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] redirect [add | delete] port
<port>
{[vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]} show rspan
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable rspan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the RSPAN globally.
enable rspan
This command controls the RSPAN function.
The purpose of the RSPAN function is to mirror packets to a remote switch.
A packet travels from the switch where the monitored packet is received, passing through the intermediate switch, and then to the switch where the sniffer is attached. The first switch is also named the source switch.
To make the RSPAN function work, the RSPAN VLAN source setting must be configured on the source switch. For the intermediate and the last switch, the RSPAN VLAN redirect setting must be configured.
NOTE: RSPAN VLAN mirroring will only work when RSPAN is enabled (when one RSPAN
VLAN has been configured with a source port).
The RSPAN redirect function will work when RSPAN is enabled and at least one RSPAN
VLAN has been configured with redirect ports.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Configure RSPAN state to enable:
DGS-3450:admin# enable rspan
Command: enable rspan
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
489
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
disable rspan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the RSPAN globally.
disable rspan
This command controls the RSPAN function.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Configure RSPAN state to disabled:
DGS-3450:admin# disable rspan
Command: disable rspan
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create rspan vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create an RSPAN VLAN.
create rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <value 1-4094>]
This command is used to create the RSPAN VLAN. Up to 16 RSPAN VLANs can be created.
vlan_name - Create the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name.
vlan_id - Create the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create an RSPAN VLAN entry by VLAN name “v2”:
DGS-3450:admin# create rspan vlan vlan_name v2
Command: create rspan vlan vlan_name v2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To create an RSPAN VLAN entry by VLAN ID “3”:
DGS-3450:admin# create rspan vlan vlan_id 3
Command: create rspan vlan vlan_id 3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete rspan vlan
Purpose Used to delete an RSPAN VLAN.
490
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete rspan vlan
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
delete rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <value 1-4094>]
This command is used to delete RSPAN VLANs.
vlan_name - Delete RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name.
vlan_id - Delete RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete an RSPAN VLAN entry by VLAN name “v2”:
DGS-3450:admin# delete rspan vlan vlan_name v2
Command: delete rspan vlan vlan_name v2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To delete an RSPAN VLAN entry by VLAN ID “3”:
DGS-3450:admin# delete rspan vlan vlan_id 3
Command: delete rspan vlan vlan_id 3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config rspan vlan source
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used by the source switch to configure the source setting for the RSPAN VLAN.
config rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id < vlanid 1-4094>] source { [ mirror_group_id <value 1-4> | [add | delete] ports <portlist> [rx | tx | both]]}
This command configures the source setting for the RSPAN VLAN on the source switch.
vlan - See below:
vlan_name - Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name.
vlan_id - Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.
source - If the ports are not specified by this command, the source of RSPAN will come from the source specified by the mirror command or the flow-based source specified by an ACL.
If no parameter is specified for source, it deletes the configured source parameters.
add - Add source ports.
delete - Delete source ports.
ports <portlist> - Specify source portlist to add to or delete from the RSPAN source
rx - Only monitor ingress packets.
tx - Only monitor egress packets.
both - Monitor both ingress and egress packets.
mirror_group_id - The mirror group identify that specify which mirror session used for RSPAN source function.
If the mirror group is not specified when configuring the mirror ports, the mirror group 1 will be the default group.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
491
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To configure an RSPAN source entry without source target port:
DGS-3450:admin#config rspan vlan vlan_name vlan2 source add ports 2-5 rx
Command:config rspan vlan vlan_name vlan2 source add ports 2-5 rx
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure an RSPAN source entry for per flow RSPAN, without any source ports:
DGS-3450:admin#config rspan vlan vlan_id 2 source
Command:config rspan vlan vlan_id 2 source
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure an RSPAN entry on a source with mirror group ID:
DGS-3450:admin#config rspan vlan vlan_id 2 source mirror_group_id 3
Command:config rspan vlan vlan_id 2 source mirror_group_id 3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config rspan vlan redirect
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used by the intermediate or last switch to configure the output port for the RSPAN mirrored packet.
config rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] redirect [add | delete] port <port>
This command is used by the intermediate or last switch to configure the output port of the
RSPAN VLAN packets.
The redirect command makes sure that the RSPAN VLAN packets can egress to the redirect ports. In addition, to this redirect command, the VLAN setting must be correctly configured to make the RSPAN VLAN work correctly. That is, for the intermediate switch, the redirect port must be tagged member port of RSPAN VLAN. For the last switch, the redirect port must be either be a tagged member port or an untagged member port of the RSPAN VLAN based on the users’ requirements. If untagged membership is specified, the RSPAN VLAN tag will be removed.
The redirect function will only work when RSPAN is enabled.
Multiple RSPAN VLANs can be configured with the redirect setting at the same time.
A RSPAN VLAN can be configured with the source setting and the redirect setting at the same time.
vlan - See below:
vlan_name - Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name.
vlan_id - Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.
redirect - Specify output portlist for the RSPAN VLAN packets. If the redirect port is a Link
Aggregation port, there will perform the Link Aggregation behavior for RSPAN packets.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
492
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To add redirect ports for special RSPAN VLAN on intermediate or destination switch:
DGS-3450:admin# config rspan vlan vlan_name vlan2 redirect add port 1:18
Command: config rspan vlan vlan_name vlan2 redirect add port 1:18
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show rspan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display RSPAN configuration.
show rspan {[vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]}
This command displays the RSPAN configuration.
vlan_name - Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name
vlan_id - Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.
None.
Example usage:
Display the specific settings:
DGS-3450:admin# show rspan vlan_id 63
Command: show rspan vlan_id 63
RSPAN : Enabled
RSPAN VLAN ID : 63
-------------------
Mirror Group ID : 1
Target Port : 1:1
Source Ports
RX : 1:2-1:5
TX : 1:2-1:5
Redirect Ports : 9
Total RSPAN VLAN : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
Display all settings:
493
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show rspan
Command: show rspan
RSPAN: Enabled
RSPAN VLAN ID: 1
--------------------
Mirror Group ID : 1
Target Port : 1:1
Source Ports
RX:
TX:
RSPAN VLAN ID: 2
--------------------
Redirect Ports : 1:6
RSPAN VLAN ID: 3
----------------------
Redirect Ports : 1:7
Total RSPAN VLAN :3
DGS-3450:admin#
494
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
67
R
OUTING
I
NFORMATION
P
ROTOCOL
(RIP) C
OMMANDS
The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config rip enable rip disable rip show rip
Parameters
[ipif <ipif_name 12>|all] {authentication [ enable <password 16> | disable ] | tx_mode [disable | v1_only | v1_compatible | v2_only] | rx_mode [v1_only | v2_only | v1_or_v2 | disable] | state [enable | disable]}
{ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config rip
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure RIP on the Switch.
config rip [ipif <ipif_name 12>|all] {authentication [ enable <password 16> | disable ] | tx_mode [disable | v1_only | v1_compatible | v2_only] | rx_mode [v1_only | v2_only | v1_or_v2 | disable] | state [enable | disable]}
This command is used to configure RIP on the Switch.
<ipif_name 12>
− The name of the IP interface.
all – To configure all RIP receiving mode for all IP interfaces.
authentication [enable | disable]
− Enables or disables authentication for RIP on the Switch.
•
<password 16>
− Allows the specification of a case-sensitive password.
tx_mode
− Determines how received RIP packets will be interpreted – as RIP version V1 only, V2
Only, or V1 Compatible (V1 and V2). This entry specifies which version of the RIP protocol will be used to transfer RIP packets. The disabled entry prevents the reception of RIP packets.
•
disable
− Prevents the transmission of RIP packets.
•
v1_only
− Specifies that only RIP v1 packets will be transmitted.
•
v1_compatible – Specifies that only RIP v1 compatible packets will be transmitted.
•
v2_only
− Specifies that only RIP v2 packets will be transmitted.
rx_mode
− Determines how received RIP packets will be interpreted – as RIP version V1 only, V2
Only, or V1 or V2. This entry specifies which version of the RIP protocol will be used to receive
RIP packets. The disable entry prevents the reception of RIP packets.
•
v1_only
− Specifies that only RIP v1 packets will be transmitted.
•
v2_only
− Specifies that only RIP v2 packets will be transmitted.
•
v1_or_v2
− Specifies that only RIP v1 or v2 packets will be transmitted.
state [enable | disable]
− Allows RIP to be enabled and disabled on the Switch.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To change the RIP receive mode for the IP interface System:
495
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config rip ipif System rx_mode v1_only
Command: config rip ipif System rx_mode v1_only
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable rip
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable RIP.
enable rip
This command is used to enable RIP on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example Usage:
To enable RIP:
DGS-3450:admin# enable rip
Command: enable rip
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable rip
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable RIP.
disable rip
This command is used to disable RIP on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable RIP:
DGS-3450:admin# disable rip
Command: disable rip
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
496
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show rip
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the RIP configuration and statistics for the Switch.
show rip {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
This command will display the RIP configuration and statistics for a given IP interface or for all IP interfaces.
ipif <ipif_name 12>
− The name of the IP interface for which to display the RIP configuration and settings. If this parameter is not specified, the show rip command will display the global
RIP configuration for the Switch.
None.
Example usage:
To display RIP configuration:
DGS-3450:admin# show rip
Command: show rip
RIP Global State : Disabled
RIP Interface Settings
Interface IP Address TX Mode RX Mode Authen- State
tication
------------- ---------------- ---------- ------------- ---------- -----
System 10.90.90.90/8 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
Example usage:
To display RIP configurations by IP interface:
DGS-3450:admin# show rip ipif System
Command: show rip ipif System
RIP Interface Settings
Interface Name: System IP Address: 10.53.13.33/8 (Link Up)
Interface Metric: 1 Administrative State: Disabled
TX Mode: V2 Only RX Mode: V1 or V2
Authentication: Disabled
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
497
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
68
RIP
NG
C
OMMANDS
The Routing Information Protocol next generation (RIPng) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed
(along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
enable ripng disable ripng show ripng config ripng config ripng ipif debug ripng state debug ripng show flag debug ripng flag
Parameters
{ipif <ipif_name 12>}
{method [no_horizon | split_horizon | poison_reverse] | update <sec 5-65535> | expire <sec 1-65535> | garbage_collection <sec 1-65535>}(1)
[<ipif_name 12> | all] {state [enable | disable] | metric <value 1-15>}(1)
[enable | disable]
[{interface | packet [all | rx | tx] | route}(1) | all] state [enable | disable]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable ripng
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable RIPng globally for the Switch.
enable ripng
This command is used to enable RIPng globally for the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable RIPng globally:
DGS-3450:admin#enable ripng
Command: enable ripng
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable ripng
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable RIPng globally for the Switch.
disable ripng
This command is used to disable RIPng globally on the Switch. The default setting is disabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
498
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To disable RIPng globally:
DGS-3450:admin#disable ripng
Command: disable ripng
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ripng
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the RIPng state on all or specified interfaces.
show ripng {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
This command is used to display the RIPng state on all or specified interfaces.
ipif - Specifies that the RIPng configuration will be displayed on a specific interface.
None.
Example usage:
To display RIPng configurations:
DGS-3450:admin# show ripng
Command: show ripng
Global State: Enabled
Method: Split Horizon
Update Time: 30 seconds
Expire Time: 180 seconds
Garbage Collection Time: 120 seconds
Interface State Metric
-----------------------------------------------------
int8 Disabled 1
int14 Disabled 1
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3450:admin#
config ripng
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to configure the RIPng algorithm and timer.
config ripng {method [no_horizon | split_horizon | poison_reverse] | update <sec 5-
65535> | expire <sec 1-65535> | garbage_collection <sec 1-65535>}(1)
This command is used to specify the RIPng method and timer.
update - The value (in seconds) of the update timer.
expire - The interval (in seconds) when the update expires.
garbage_collection - The value (in seconds) of the garbage-collection timer.
method - See below:
no_horizon - Configured to not use any horizon.
split_horizon - Configured to use basic split horizon. This is the default setting.
499
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ripng
Restrictions
poison_reverse - Configured to use split horizon with poison reverse.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the RIPng method as poison reverse:
DGS-3450:admin#config ripng method poison_reverse
Command: config ripng method poison_reverse
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ripng ipif
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to specify the RIPng state and metric value for one or all interfaces
config ripng ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] {state [enable | disable] | metric <value 1-15>}(1)
This command is used to specify the RIPng state or metric value for one or all interfaces.
all - Specifies that settings will be applied to all IP interfaces.
metric - The cost value of an interface. The RIPng route that was learned from the interface will add this value as a new route metric. The default value is 1.
state - Enable or disable the RIPng state on the specific IP interface. If the state is disabled, then RIPng packets will not be transmitted or received by the interface. The default setting is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the RIPng interface state:
DGS-3450:admin# config ripng ipif System state enable
Command: config ripng ipif System state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug ripng state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable or disable the RIPng debug state globally.
debug ripng state [enable | disable]
This command is used to enable or disable RIPng debug globally.
state - The state of the RIPng debug. The default setting is disabled.
enable - Enable RIPng debug.
disable - Disable RIPng debug.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
500
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To enable RIPng debug globally:
DGS-3450:admin#debug ripng state enable
Command: debug ripng state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
debug ripng show flag
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the RIPng debug flag setting.
debug ripng show flag
This command is used to display the RIPng debug flag setting.
None.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show the current RIPng debug flag setting:
DGS-3450:admin# debug ripng show flag
Command: debug ripng show flag
Current Enabled RIPng Flags:
Interface State Change
Packet Receiving
Packet Sending
Route
DGS-3450:admin#
debug ripng flag
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable or disable the RIPng debug flag .
debug ripng flag [{interface | packet [all | rx | tx] | route}(1) | all] state [enable | disable]
This command is used to enable or disable the RIPng debug flag.
interface - The state of the RIPng interface debug. The default setting is disabled.
packet - See below:
all - Set all packets with debug flags.
rx - Set inbound packets with debug flag.
tx - Set outbound packets with debug flag.
route - The state of the RIPng route debug. The default setting is disabled.
all - Set all debug flags.
state - See below:
enable - Enable the designated flags.
disable - Disable the designated flags.
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the ripng interface debug:
501
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#debug ripng flag interface state enable
Command: debug ripng flag interface state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
After enabling RIPng on an interface, the following information may appear when the interface state changes:
The RIPng interface System has changed the link state to down.
502
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
69
S
AFEGUARD
E
NGINE
C
OMMANDS
Periodically, malicious hosts on the network will attack the Switch by utilizing packet flooding (ARP Storm) or other methods. These attacks may increase the CPU utilization beyond its capability. To alleviate this problem, the Safeguard
Engine function was added to the Switch’s software.
The Safeguard Engine can help the overall operability of the Switch by minimizing the workload of the Switch while the attack is ongoing, thus making it capable to forward essential packets over its network in a limited bandwidth. When the
Switch either (a) receives too many packets to process or (b) exerts too much memory, it will enter an Exhausted mode.
When in this mode, the Switch will perform the following tasks to minimize the CPU usage:
1. It will limit bandwidth of receiving ARP packets. The user may implement this in two ways, by using the config
safeguard_engine command. a. When strict is chosen, the Switch will stop receiving ARP packets not destined for the Switch. This will eliminate all unnecessary ARP packets while allowing the essential ARP packets to pass through to the
Switch’s CPU. b. When fuzzy is chosen, the Switch will minimize the ARP packet bandwidth received by the switch by adjusting the bandwidth for all ARP packets, whether destined for the Switch or not. The Switch uses an internal algorithm to filter ARP packets through, with a higher percentage set aside for ARP packets destined for the Switch.
2. It will limit the bandwidth of IP packets received by the Switch. The user may implement this in two ways, by using the config safeguard_engine command. a. When strict is chosen, the Switch will stop receiving all unnecessary broadcast IP packets, even if the high CPU utilization is not caused by the high reception rate of broadcast IP packets. b. When fuzzy is chosen, the Switch will minimize the IP packet bandwidth received by the Switch by adjusting the bandwidth for all IP packets, by setting a acceptable bandwidth for both unicast and broadcast IP packets. The Switch uses an internal algorithm to filter IP packets through while adjusting the bandwidth dynamically.
IP packets may also be limited by the Switch by configuring only certain IP addresses to be accepted. This method can be accomplished through the CPU Interface Filtering mechanism explained in the previous section. Once the user configures these acceptable IP addresses, other packets containing different IP addresses will be dropped by the Switch, thus limiting the bandwidth of IP packets. To keep the process moving fast, be sure not to add many conditions on which to accept these acceptable IP addresses and their packets, this limiting the CPU utilization.
Once in Exhausted mode, the packet flow will decrease by half of the level that caused the Switch to enter Exhausted mode. After the packet flow has stabilized, the rate will initially increase by 25% and then return to a normal packet flow.
NOTICE: When the Safeguard Engine is enabled, the Switch will allot bandwidth to various traffic flows (ARP, IP) using the FFP (Fast Filter Processor) metering table to control the CPU utilization and limit traffic. This may limit the speed of routing traffic over the network.
The Safeguard Engine commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config safeguard_engine
Parameters
{state [enable | disable] | utilization {rising <value 20-100> | falling <value 20-
100>}(1) | trap_log [enable | disable] | mode [strict | fuzzy]}(1) show safeguard_engine
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
503
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config safeguard_engine
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
To config ARP storm control for system.
config safeguard_engine {state [enable | disable] | utilization {rising <value 20-
100> | falling <value 20-100>}(1) | trap_log [enable | disable] | mode [strict | fuzzy]}(1)
Use this command to configure Safeguard Engine to minimize the effects of an ARP storm.
state [enable | disable] – Select the running state of the Safeguard Engine function as enable or disable.
utilization – Select this option to trigger the Safeguard Engine function to enable based on the following determinates:
•
rising <value 20-100> – The user can set a percentage value of the rising CPU utilization which will trigger the Safeguard Engine function. Once the CPU utilization rises to this percentage, the Safeguard Engine mechanism will initiate.
•
falling <value 20-100> – The user can set a percentage value of the falling
CPU utilization which will trigger the Safeguard Engine function to cease. Once the CPU utilization falls to this percentage, the Safeguard Engine mechanism will shut down.
trap_log [enable | disable] – Choose whether to enable or disable the sending of messages to the device’s SNMP agent and switch log once the Safeguard Engine has been activated by a high CPU utilization rate.
mode - Used to select the type of Safeguard Engine to be activated by the Switch when the CPU utilization reaches a high rate. The user may select:
•
strict – If selected, this function will stop accepting all ARP packets not intended for the Switch, and will stop receiving all unnecessary broadcast IP packets, until the storm has subsided.
•
fuzzy – If selected, this function will instruct the Switch to minimize the IP and
ARP traffic flow to the CPU by dynamically allotting an even bandwidth to all traffic flows.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the safeguard engine for the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# config safeguard_engine state enable utilization rising 45
Command: config safeguard_engine state enable utilization rising 45
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show safeguard_engine
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display current Safeguard Engine settings.
show safeguard_engine
This will list the current status and type of the Safeguard Engine settings currently configured.
None.
None.
Example usage:
504
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To display the safeguard engine status:
DGS-3450:admin# show safeguard_engine
Command: show safeguard_engine
Safeguard engine state : Disabled
Safeguard engine current status : normal mode
=======================================================
CPU utilization information:
Rising : 30%
Falling : 20%
Trap/Log state : Disabled
Mode : Fuzzy
DGS-3450:admin#
505
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
70
S
ECURE
S
HELL
(SSH) C
OMMANDS
The Secure Shell (SSH) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config ssh algorithm show ssh algorithm config ssh authmode show ssh authmode config ssh user show ssh user authmode config ssh server enable ssh disable ssh show ssh server config ssh publickey bypass_login_screen state download ssh client_pub_key upload ssh client_pub_key
Parameters
[3DES | AES128 | AES192 | AES256 | Arcfour | blowfish | cast128 | twofish128 | twofish192 | twofish256 | MD5 | SHA1 | RSA | DSS] [enable | disable]
[password | publickey | hostbased] [enable | disable]
<username 15> authmode [hostbased [hostname <domain_name 32> | hostname_IP <domain_name 32> [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]] | password | publickey]
{maxsession <int 1-8> | contimeout <sec 30-600> | authfail<int 2-20> | rekey
[10min | 30min | 60min | never] | port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
[enable | disable]
[<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] src_file <path_filename 64>
[<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] dest_file <path_filename 64>
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config ssh algorithm
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to config ssh server algorithm.
config ssh algorithm [3DES | AES128 | AES192 | AES256 | Arcfour | blowfish | cast128 | twofish128 | twofish192 | twofish256 | MD5 | SHA1 | RSA | DSS] [enable | disable]
The config ssh algorithm command config the ssh service algorithm.
3DES - Specify ssh server encryption algorithm.
blowfish - Specify ssh server encryption algorithm.
AES(128,192,256) - Specify ssh server encryption algorithm.
arcfour - Specify ssh server encryption algorithm.
cast128 - Specify ssh server encryption algorithm.
twofish(128,192,256) - Specify ssh server encryption algorithm.
MD5 - Specify ssh server data integrality algorithm.
SHA1 - Specify ssh server data integrality algorithm.
DSS - Specify ssh server public key algorithm.
RSA - Specify ssh server public key algorithm.
enable - Specify to enable the algorithm.
disable - Specify to disable the alogirthm.
506
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ssh algorithm
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable ssh server public key algorithm:
DGS-3450:admin# config ssh algorithm DSS enable RSA enable
Command: config ssh algorithm DSS enable RSA enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ssh algorithm
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show ssh server algorithm.
show ssh algorithm
The show ssh algorithm command show the ssh service algorithm.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show server algorithm:
DGS-3450:admin# show ssh algorithm
Command: show ssh algorithm
Encryption Algorithm
--------------------------
3DES : Enabled
AES128 : Enabled
AES192 : Enabled
AES256 : Enabled
Arcfour : Enabled
Blowfish : Enabled
Cast128 : Enabled
Twofish128 : Enabled
Twofish192 : Enabled
Twofish256 : Enabled
Data Integrity Algorithm
--------------------------
MD5 : Enabled
SHA1 : Enabled
Public Key Algorithm
--------------------------
RSA : Enabled
DSA : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
507
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ssh authmode
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to update user authentication for ssh configuration.
config ssh authmode [password | publickey | hostbased] [enable | disable]
The config ssh user command update the ssh user information.
password - Specifies user authentication method.
publickey - Specifies user authentication method.
hostbased - Specifies user authentication method.
enable - Enable user authentication method.
disable - Disable user authentication method.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To config user authentication method:
DGS-3450:admin# config ssh authmode publickey enable
Command: config ssh authmode publickey enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ssh authmode
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show user authentication method.
show ssh authmode
The show ssh authmode command show the user authentication method.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show user authentication method:
DGS-3450:admin# show ssh authmode
Command: show ssh authmode
The SSH authmode
Password : Enabled
Publickey : Enabled
Hostbased : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
config ssh user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to update user information for ssh configuration.
config ssh user <username 15> authmode [hostbased [hostname <domain_name 32> | hostname_IP <domain_name 32> [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]] | password | publickey]
The config ssh user command update the ssh user information.
508
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ssh user
Parameters
Restrictions
username - Specifies the User name.
publickey - Specifies user authentication method.
password - Specifies user authentication method.
hostbased - Specifies user authentication method.
hostname - Specifies host domain name.
hostname_ip - Specifies host domain name and ipaddress.
domain_name - Specifies host name if configuration hostbased mode.
<ipaddr> - Specifies host ip address if configuring hostbased mode.
<ipv6addr> - Specifies the host IPv6 address if configuring host-based mode.
Only Administrator level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To update user “test” authmode:
DGS-3450:admin# config ssh user test publickey
Command: config ssh user test publickey
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ssh user authmode
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show ssh user information.
show ssh user authmode
The show ssh user command show the ssh user information.
None.
Only Administrator level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show user information about ssh configuration:
DGS-3450:admin# show ssh user authmode
Command: show ssh user authmode
Current Accounts
Username Authenticaiton
------------- ------------- test publickey
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
config ssh server
Purpose
Syntax
Used to configure the SSH server.
config ssh server {maxsession <int 1-8> | contimeout <sec 30-600> | authfail<int 2-20>
509
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ssh server
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
| rekey [10min | 30min | 60min | never] | port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
The config ssh server command config the SSH server general information.
maxsession - Specifies ssh server max session at the same time.
contimeout - Specifies ssh server connection timeout.
authfail - Specifies user max fail attempts.
10/30/60 min - Specifies time to re-generate session key.
never - Do not re-generate session key.
port - Specifies the TCP port used to communication between ssh client and server. The default value is 22.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To config ssh server maxsession is 3:
DGS-3450:admin# config ssh server maxsession 3
Command: config ssh server maxsession 3
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable ssh
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the SSH server.
enable ssh
The enable ssh command enables ssh server services. When enabling ssh, telnet will be disabled.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the SSH server:
DGS-3450:admin# enable ssh
Command: enable ssh
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable ssh
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the SSH server service.
disable ssh
The disable ssh command disables ssh server services.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
510
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To disable the SSH server service:
DGS-3450:admin# disable ssh
Command: disable ssh
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ssh server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the SSH server.
show ssh server
The show ssh server command show the ssh server general information.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show the SSH server:
DGS-3450:admin# show ssh server
Command: show ssh server
The SSH Server Configuration
Maximum Session : 3
Connection Timeout : 300
Authentication Fail Attempts : 2
Rekey Timeout : 60min
TCP Port Number : 22
Bypass Login Screen State : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
config ssh publickey bypass_login_screen state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to enable or disable the option to bypass the login screen, to avoid a secondary username/password authentication for users using SSH public key authentication.
config ssh publickey bypass_login_screen state [enable | disable]
This command is used to enable or disable a secondary username/password authentication after using SSH public key authentication. The default configuration of this feature is disabled. The login screen will be displayed and requires a secondary username/password authentication after using SSH public key authentication.
enable - Specifies to bypass the username/password login screen to avoid a secondary authentication after using SSH public key authentication. If this method is specified, the login user using SSH public key authentication can execute command directly with the initial privilege level of the login user.
disable - Specifies to need a secondary username/password authentication after using SSH public key authentication. If this method is specified, the login user using SSH public key authentication must pass username/password authentication before execution shell is obtained. The initial privilege level depends on the secondary username/password
511
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ssh publickey bypass_login_screen state
Restrictions authentication.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the secondary username/password authentication for users using SSH public key authentication:
DGS-3450:admin#config ssh publickey bypass_login_screen state enable
Command: config ssh publickey bypass_login_screen state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
download ssh client_pub_key
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to download the SSH public key file on client computer to the switch through TFTP protocol.
download ssh client_pub_key [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] src_file
<path_filename 64>
This command is used to download the SSH public key file to the switch through TFTP protocol. The SSH public keys should meet the following condition:
• The created public keys’ format should be compliant with OpenSSH.
• All public keys to be downloaded should be copied into a file (The number of public keys can be up to 8).
<ipaddr> - Specifies the IPv4 address of the TFTP server.
<domain_name 255> - Specifies the domain name of the TFTP server. This name can be up to 255 characters long.
src_file <path_filename 64> - Specifies the path name and file name of the TFTP server. It can be a relative path name or an absolute path name. If path name is not specified, it refers to the TFTP server path. The maximum length is 64 characters.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To download a SSH public key file named id_rsa_keys from TFTP server 169.168.10.100 to the switch:
DGS-3450:admin#download ssh client_public_key 169.168.10.100 src_file id_rsa_keys
Command: download ssh client_public_key 169.168.10.100 src_file id_rsa_keys
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download SSH public key.................Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
upload ssh client_pub_key
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to upload the SSH public key file from the switch to a computer through TFTP protocol.
upload ssh client_pub_key [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] dest_file <path_filename
64>
This command is used to upload the SSH public key file from the switch to a computer
512
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
upload ssh client_pub_key
Parameters
Restrictions through TFTP protocol.
<ipaddr> - Specifies the IPv4 address of the TFTP server.
<domain_name 255> - Specifies the domain name of the TFTP server. This name can be up to 255 characters long.
dest_file <path_filename 64> - Specifies the path name and destination file name of the
TFTP server. It can be a relative path name or an absolute path name. If path name is not specified, it refers to the TFTP server path. The maximum length is 64 characters.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To upload a SSH public key file named id_rsa_keys to TFTP server 169.168.10.100 to the switch:
DGS-3450:admin# upload ssh client_public_key 169.168.10.100 dest_file id_rsa_keys
Command: upload ssh client_public_key 169.168.10.100 dest_file id_rsa_keys
Connecting to server................... Done.
Upload SSH public key.................Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
513
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
71
S
ECURE
S
OCKETS
L
AYER
(SSL) C
OMMANDS
Secure Sockets Layer or SSL is a security feature that will provide a secure communication path between a host and client through the use of authentication, digital signatures and encryption. These security functions are implemented through the use of a ciphersuite, which is a security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters, specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session and consists of three levels:
1. Key Exchange: The first part of the ciphersuite string specifies the public key algorithm to be used. This Switch utilizes the Rivest Shamir Adleman (RSA) public key algorithm and the Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA), specified here as the DHE_DSS Diffie-Hellman (DHE) public key algorithm. This is the first authentication process between client and host as they “exchange keys” in looking for a match and therefore authentication to be accepted to negotiate encryptions on the following level.
2. Encryption: The second part of the ciphersuite that includes the encryption used for encrypting the messages sent between client and host. The Switch supports two types of cryptology algorithms: a. Stream Ciphers – There are two types of stream ciphers on the Switch, RC4 with 40-bit keys and RC4 with 128-bit keys. These keys are used to encrypt messages and need to be consistent between client and host for optimal use. b. CBC Block Ciphers – CBC refers to Cipher Block Chaining, which means that a portion of the previously encrypted block of encrypted text is used in the encryption of the current block. The Switch supports the
3DES_EDE encryption code defined by the Data Encryption Standard (DES) to create the encrypted text.
3. Hash Algorithm: This part of the ciphersuite allows the user to choose a message digest function which will determine a Message Authentication Code. This Message Authentication Code will be encrypted with a sent message to provide integrity and prevent against replay attacks. The Switch supports two hash algorithms, MD5
(Message Digest 5) and SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm).
These three parameters are uniquely assembled in four choices on the Switch to create a three layered encryption code for secure communication between the server and the host. The user may implement any one or combination of the ciphersuites available, yet different ciphersuites will affect the security level and the performance of the secured connection. The information included in the ciphersuites is not included with the Switch and requires downloading from a third source in a file form called a certificate. This function of the Switch cannot be executed without the presence and implementation of the certificate file and can be downloaded to the Switch by utilizing a TFTP server. The Switch supports SSLv3 and TLSv1. Other versions of SSL may not be compatible with this Switch and may cause problems upon authentication and transfer of messages from client to host.
Command
enable ssl disable ssl config ssl cachetimeout show ssl show ssl cachetimeout download ssl certificate config ssl certificate chain delete ssl certificate
Parameters
{ciphersuite {RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 | RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA |
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA | RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5}}
{ciphersuite {RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 | RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA |
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA | RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5}}
<value 60-86400>
{certificate {[chain | <path_filename 64>]}}
<ipaddr> certfilename <path_filename 64> {keyfilename <path_filename 64>}
[default | <cert_list>]
<path_filename 64>
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
514
enable ssl
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To enable the SSL function on the Switch.
enable ssl {ciphersuite {RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 | RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA |
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA | RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5}}
This command will enable SSL on the Switch by implementing any one or combination of listed ciphersuites on the Switch. Entering this command without a parameter will enable the SSL status on the Switch. Enabling SSL will disable the web-manager on the Switch.
ciphersuite – A security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters, specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session. The user may choose any combination of the following:
•
RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 – This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange, stream cipher RC4 encryption with 128-bit keys and the MD5 Hash Algorithm.
•
RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA – This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange, CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and the SHA Hash Algorithm.
•
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA – This ciphersuite combines the DSA Diffie
Hellman key exchange, CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and SHA Hash
Algorithm.
•
RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 – This ciphersuite combines the RSA Export key exchange, stream cipher RC4 encryption with 40-bit keys.
The ciphersuites are enabled by default on the Switch, yet the SSL status is disabled by default. Enabling SSL with a ciphersuite will not enable the SSL status on the Switch.
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable SSL on the Switch for all ciphersuites:
DGS-3450:admin# enable ssl
Command:enable ssl
Note: Web will be disabled if SSL is enabled.
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
NOTE: Enabling SSL on the Switch will enable all ciphersuites. To utilize a particular ciphersuite, the user must eliminate other ciphersuites by using the disable ssl command along with the appropriate ciphersuites.
NOTE: Enabling the SSL function on the Switch will disable the port for the web manager (port
80). To log on to the web based manager, the entry of your URL must begin with https://. (ex. https://10.90.90.90)
515
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
disable ssl
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
To disable the SSL function on the Switch.
disable ssl {ciphersuite {RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 | RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA |
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA | RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5}}
This command will disable SSL on the Switch and can be used to disable any one or combination of listed ciphersuites on the Switch.
ciphersuite – A security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters, specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session. The user may choose any combination of the following:
•
RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 – This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange, stream cipher RC4 encryption with 128-bit keys and the MD5 Hash Algorithm.
•
RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA – This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange, CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and the SHA Hash Algorithm.
•
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA – This ciphersuite combines the DSA Diffie
Hellman key exchange, CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and SHA Hash
Algorithm.
•
RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 – This ciphersuite combines the RSA Export key exchange, stream cipher RC4 encryption with 40-bit keys.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the SSL status on the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# disable ssl
Command: disable ssl
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To disable ciphersuite RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 only:
DGS-3450:admin# disable ssl ciphersuite RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5
Command: disable ssl ciphersuite RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ssl cachetimeout
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the SSL cache timeout.
config ssl cachetimeout <value 60-86400>
This command will set the time between a new key exchange between a client and a host using the SSL function. A new SSL session is established every time the client and host go through a key exchange. Specifying a longer timeout will allow the SSL session to reuse the master key on future connections with that particular host, therefore speeding up the negotiation process.
<value 60-86400> – Enter a timeout value between 60 and 86400 seconds to specify the total time an SSL key exchange ID stays valid before the SSL module will require a new, full SSL negotiation for connection. The default cache timeout is 600 seconds
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
516
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To set the SSL cachetimeout for 7200 seconds:
DGS-3450:admin# config ssl cachetimeout 7200
Command: config ssl cachetimeout 7200
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ssl cachetimeout
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the SSL cache timeout.
show ssl cachetimeout
Entering this command will allow the user to view the SSL cache timeout currently implemented on the Switch.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To view the SSL cache timeout on the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# show ssl cachetimeout
Command: show ssl cachetimeout
Cache timeout is 600 second(s).
DGS-3450:admin#
show ssl
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to view the SSL status and the certificate file status on the Switch.
show ssl {certificate {[chain | <path_filename 64>] }}
This command is used to
1. Show the certificates which were downloaded on the Switch.
2. Show the SSL certificate chain on the Switch.
3. Show detailed information which have been specified.
certificate - Specifies to use this parameter to display the SSL certificate file information currently implemented on the Switch.
chain - Specifies the chain.
<path_filename 64> - Specifies the certification file name on the Switch.
None.
Example usage:
To view the SSL status on the Switch:
517
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show ssl
Command: show ssl
SSL status Disabled
RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5 0x0004 Enabled
RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA 0x000A Enabled
DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA 0x0013 Enabled
RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_MD5 0x0003 Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
Example usage:
To view certificate file information on the Switch:
DGS-3450: admin#show ssl certificate
Command: show ssl certificate
DGS-3450:admin#
download ssl certificate
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to download a certificate file for the SSL function on the Switch.
download ssl certificate <ipaddr> certfilename <path_filename 64> {keyfilename
<path_filename 64>}
This command is used to download a certificate file for the SSL function on the Switch from a TFTP server. The certificate file is a data record used for authenticating devices on the network. It contains information on the owner, keys for authentication and digital signatures.
Both the server and the client must have consistent certificate files for optimal use of the
SSL function. The Switch only supports certificate files with .der file extensions.
<ipaddr> – Enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
certfilename <path_filename 64> – Enter the path and the filename of the certificate file you wish to download.
keyfilename <path_filename 64> – Enter the path and the filename of the key exchange file you wish to download.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To download a certificate file and key file to the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# download ssl certificate 10.53.13.94 certfilename c:/cert.der keyfilename c:/pkey.der
Command: download ssl certificate 10.53.13.94 certfilename c:/cert.der keyfilename c:/pkey.der
Certificate loaded successfully.
DGS-3450:admin#
config ssl certificate chain
Purpose
Syntax
Used to specify the certificate chain on the Switch.
config ssl certificate chain [default | <cert_list>]
518
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ssl certificate chain
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command used to specify the certificate chain on the Switch. The format of the certificate should be kept consistent.
default - Specifies that all the certificates will be constituted for a certificate chain which were downloaded on the Switch.
<cert_list> - Enter the chain of certifications on the Switch.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To specify the certificate chain on the switch:
DGS-3450:admin# config ssl certificate chain web_ca2.cer,server.crt
Command: config ssl certificate chain web_ca2.cer,server.crt
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete ssl certificate
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete a certificate or certificate chain on the Switch.
delete ssl certificate <path_filename 64>
This command is used to delete a certificate or certificate chain on the Switch.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the certification file name.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a certificate:
DGS-3450:admin# delete ssl certificate web_ca2.cer
Command: delete ssl certificate web_ca2.cer
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
519
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
72
S
F
LOW
C
OMMANDS
The sFlow commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create sflow flow_sampler config sflow flow_sampler delete sflow flow_sampler create sflow counter_poller config sflow counter_poller delete sflow counter_poller create sflow analyzer_server config sflow analyzer_server delete sflow analyzer_server enable sflow disable sflow show sflow show sflow flow_sampler show sflow counter_poller show sflow analyzer_server
Parameters
ports [<portlist> | all] analyzer_server_id < value 1-4> {rate <value 0-65535> | tx_rate <value 0-65535> | maxheadersize <value 18-256> ports [<portlist> | all] {rate <value 0-65535> | tx_rate <value 0-65535> | maxheadersize < value 18-256 >}(1) ports [<portlist> | all] ports [<portlist> | all] analyzer_server_id < value 1-4> {interval [ disable | <sec
20-120>]} ports [<portlist> | all] interval [disable | <sec 20-120>] ports [<portlist> | all]
< value 1-4 > owner<name 16> {timeout [<sec 1-2000000> | infinite] | collectoraddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] | collectorport <udp_port_number 1-
65535> | maxdatagramsize < value m-n>}
< value 1-4 > {timeout [<sec 1-2000000 > | infinity] | collectoraddress [ <ipaddr>
| <ipv6addr>] | collectorport <udp_port_number 1-65535> | maxdatagramsize < value 300-1400 >}(1)
< value 1-4 >
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create sflow flow_sampler
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to create the sFlow flow_sampler.
create sflow flow_sampler ports [<portlist> | all] analyzer_server_id < value 1-4> {rate
<value 0-65535> | tx_rate <value 0-65535> | maxheadersize <value 18-256>
Used to create the sFlow flow_sampler. By configuring the sampling function for a port, a sample packet received by this port will be encapsulated and forwarded to analyzer server at the specified interval.
ports - Specifies the list of ports to be configured.
analyzer_server_id - Specifies the ID of a server analyzer where the packet will be forwarded.
rate - The sampling rate for packet Rx sampling.
tx_rate - The sampling rate for packet Tx sampling.
maxheadersize - The maximum number of leading bytes in the packet which has been sampled that will be encapsulated and forwarded to the server. If not specified, the default
520
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create sflow flow_sampler
Restrictions value is 128
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Create sFlow flow sampler:
DGS-3450:admin# create sflow flow_sampler ports 1 analyzer_server_id 1 rate 1 maxheadersize 18
Command: create sflow flow_sampler ports 1 analyzer_server_id 1 rate 1 maxheadersize 18
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config sflow flow_sampler
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to config the sFlow flow_sampler parameters.
config sflow flow_sampler ports [<portlist> | all] {rate <value 0-65535> | tx_rate <value
0-65535> | maxheadersize <value 18-256>}(1)
Configures the sFlow flow sampler parameters. In order to change the analyzer_server_id, first delete the flow_sampler and create a new one.
ports - Specifies the list of ports to be configured.
rate - The sampling rate for packet Rx sampling.
tx_rate - The sampling rate for packet Tx sampling.
maxheadersize - The maximum number of leading bytes in the packet which has been sampled that will be encapsulated and forwarded to the server. If not specified, the default value is 128.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Configure the sFlow sampler the rate of port 1 to be 0:
DGS-3450:admin# config sflow flow_sampler ports 1 rate 0 tx_rate 1
Command: config sflow flow_sampler ports 1 rate 0 tx_rate 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete sflow flow_sampler
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete the sFlow flow_sampler.
delete sflow flow_sampler ports [<portlist> | all]
Used to delete the sFlow flow_sampler.
ports - Specifies the list of ports to be configured.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
521
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Delete the sFlow sampler port 1:
DGS-3450:admin# delete sflow flow_sampler ports 1
Command: delete sflow flow_sampler ports 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create sflow counter_poller
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create the sFlow counter_poller:
create sflow counter_poller ports [<portlist> | all] analyzer_server_id < value 1-4>
{interval [ disable | <sec 20-120>]}
This command is used to create the sFlow counter poller. The poller function instructs the switch to forward statistics counter information with respect to a port. The counters are RFC
2233 counters.
analyzer_server_id - The analyzer_server_id is the id of a analyzer_server,
interval - The maximum number of seconds between successive statistic counters information.
If set to 0, the counter-poller is disabled.
If interval is not specified, its default value is 0.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Create sFlow counter poller,which sample port 1 to analyzer server 1:
DGS-3450:admin# create sflow counter_poller ports 1 analyzer_server_id 1
Command: create sflow counter_poller ports 1 analyzer_server_id 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config sflow counter_poller
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to config the sFlow counter_poller parameters.
config sflow counter_poller ports [<portlist> | all] interval [disable | <sec 20-120>]
This command is used to configure the sFlow counter_poller parameters. If the user wants the change the analyzer_server_id, he needs to delete the counter_poller and creates a new one.
interval - The maximum number of seconds between successive samples of the counters.
If set it 0, the counter-sample is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Configure the interval of sFlow counter poller port 1 to be 0:
522
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config sflow counter_poller ports 1 interval disable
Command: config sflow counter_poller ports 1 interval disable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete sflow counter_poller
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete the sFlow counter poller.
delete sflow counter_poller ports [<portlist> | all]
Delete the sFlow counter_poller from the specified port.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Delete sFlow counter poller on port 1:
DGS-3450:admin# delete sflow counter_poller ports 1
Command: delete sflow counter_poller ports 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create sflow analyzer_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create the analyzer server.
create sflow analyzer_server < value 1-4 > owner<name 16> {timeout [<sec m-n> | infinite] | collectoraddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] | collectorport <udp_port_number 1-
65535> | maxdatagramsize < value m-n>}
Creates the analyzer_server. You can specify more than one analyzer_server with the same
IP address but with different UDP port numbers. You can have up to four unique combinations of IP address and UDP port number.
owner - The entity making use of this sFlow analyzer_server. When owner is set or modified, the timeout value will become 400 automaticly.
timeout - The length of time before the server is timed out. When the analyzer_server times out, all of the flow_samplers and counter_pollers associated with this analyzer_server will be deleted. If not specified, its default value is 400.
collectoraddress - The IP address of the analyzer_server. If this is set to 0 or not specified, the IPv4 address is 0.0.0.0 and the entry is not active. It is not only IPv4 address, but also
IPv6 address.
collectorport - The destination UDP port for sending the sFlow datagrams. If not specified, the default value is 6364.
maxdatagramsize - The maximum number of data bytes that can be packed in a single sample datagram. If not specified, the default value is 1400.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create the analyzer_server:
523
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# create sflow analyzer_server 2 owner monitor timeout infinite collect oraddress 10.0.0.1 collectorport 65524 maxdatagramsize 300
Command: create sflow analyzer_server 2 owner monitor timeout infinite collector address 10.0.0.1 collectorport 65524 maxdatagramsize 300
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config sflow analyzer_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to config the analyzer server information.
config sflow analyzer_server <value 1-4> {timeout [<sec 1-2000000 > | infinity] | collectoraddress [ <ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] | collectorport <udp_port_number 1-65535>
| maxdatagramsize < value 300-1400 >}(1)
Configures the receiver information. You can specify more than one collector with the same
IP address if the UDP port numbers are unique.
timeout - The time (in seconds) remaining before the sample is released and stops sampling.
When the analyzer_server times out, all of the flow_samplers and counter_pollers associated with this analyzer_server will be deleted.
collectoraddress - The IP address of the server.
If not specified or set a 0 address, sFlow packets will not be sent to this server.
collectorport - The destination port for sending sFlow datagrams
maxdatagramsize - The maximum number of data bytes that can be packed in a single sample datagram.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Configure the sFlow analyzer server to be 10.90.90.90:
DGS-3450:admin# config sflow analyzer_server 1 collectoraddress 10.90.90.90
Command: config sflow analyzer_server 1 collectoraddress 10.90.90.90
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete sflow_analyzer_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete the analyzer_server.
delete sflow analyzer_server < value 1-4 >
Used to delete the analyzer_server.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the analyzer_server:
524
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# delete sflow analyzer_server 1
Command: delete sflow analyzer_server 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable sflow
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the sFlow function.
enable sflow
Enable the sFlow function.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Enable sFlow:
DGS-3450:admin# enable sflow
Command: enable sflow
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable sflow
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the sFlow function.
disable sflow
Disable the sFlow function.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the sFlow function:
DGS-3450:admin# disable sflow
Command: disable sflow
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show sflow
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Show the sFlow information.
show sflow
This command is used to show the sFlow information.
sFlow Address: The IPv4 address associated with this agent.
sFlow AddressV6: The IPv6 address associated with this agent.
525
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show sflow
Parameters
Restrictions
sFlow State: The current state of the sFlow agent.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show the sFlow information:
DGS-3450:admin# show sflow
Command: show sflow sFlow Version : V5 sFlow Address : 10.90.90.90 sFlow AddressV6 : FE80::285:43FF:FE26:3101 sFlow State : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
show sflow flow_sampler
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to displaythe the sFlow flow_sampler information of ports which have been created.
show sflow flow_sampler
This command is used to show the sFlow flow_sampler configured for ports. The actual value rate is 256 times the displayed rate value. There are two types of rates. The Configured Rate is configured by the user. In order to limit the number of packets sent to the CPU when the rate of traffic to the CPU is high, the sampling rate will be decreased. This is specified as the active rate.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show the sFlow flow_sampler information of ports which have been created:
DGS-3450:admin# show sflow flow_sampler
Command: show sflow flow_sampler
Port Analyzer Configured Configured Active Active Max Header
Server ID Rx Rate Tx Rate Rx Rate Tx Rate Size
------ --------- ---------- ---------- ------- ------- -----------
10 1 1 2 0 0 20
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
show sflow flow_poller
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to display the sFlow counter_poller information of ports which have been created.
show sflow counter_poller
This command is used to show the sFlow counter_pollers which have been configured for
526
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show sflow flow_poller
Parameters
Restrictions port.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show the sFlow counter_poller information of ports which have been created:
DGS-3450:admin# show sflow counter_poller
Command: show sflow counter_poller
Port Analyzer Server ID Polling Interval (secs)
---- ------------------ -----------------------
1 1 disable
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
show sflow analyzer_server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the sFlow analyzer server information.
show sflow analyzer_server
This command is used to show the sFlow analyzer_server information. The Timeout field specifies the time configured by user. The Current Countdown Time is the current time remaining before the server timeout.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show the sFlow flow_sampler information of ports which have been created:
DGS-3450:admin# show sflow analyzer_server
Command: show sflow analyzer_server
sFlow Analyzer_server Information
------------------------------
Server ID : 1
Owner : 1
Timeout : Infinite
Current Countdown Time : Infinite
Collector Address : 10.0.0.1
Collector Port : 655
Max Datagram Size : 301
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
527
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
73
S
IMPLE
N
ETWORK
M
ANAGMEMENT
P
ROTOCOL
(SNMP) C
OMMANDS
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create snmp community delete snmp community show snmp community create snmp user delete snmp user show snmp user create snmp group delete snmp group show snmp groups create snmp view delete snmp view show snmp view create snmp delete snmp show snmp host show snmp v6host config snmp engineID show snmp engineID create snmp community_masking view enable community_encryption disable community_encryption show community_encryption
Parameters
<community_string 32> view <view_name 32> [read_only | read_write]
<community_string 32>
{ <community_string 32> }
<user_name 32> <groupname 32> {encrypted [by_password auth [ md5
<auth_password 8-16 > | sha <auth_password 8-20 >] priv [none | des
<priv_password 8-16>] | by_key auth [md5 <auth_key 32-32> | sha <auth_key
40-40>] priv [none | des <priv_key 32-32>]]}
<user_name 32>
<groupname 32> [v1 | v2c | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv | auth_priv]]
{read_view <view_name 32> | write_view <view_name 32> | notify_view
<view_name 32>}
<groupname 32>
<view_name 32> <oid> view_type [included | excluded]
<view_name 32> [all | <oid>]
{<view_name 32>}
[host <ipaddr> | v6host <ipv6addr>] [v1 | v2c | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv | auth_priv]] <auth_string 32>
[host <ipaddr> | v6host <ipv6addr>]
{ <ipaddr> }
{ <ipv6addr> }
<snmp_engineID 10-64>
<view_name 32> [read_only | read_write]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create snmp community view
Purpose Use to create an SNMP community string.
528
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create snmp community view
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
create snmp community <community_string 32> view <view_name 32> [read_only | read_write]
Use an SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager and the agent. The community string acts like a password to permit access to the agent on the switch. You can specify one or more of the following characteristics associated with the string:
An access list of IP addresses of the SNMP managers that are permitted to use the community string to gain access to the agent.
A MIB view, which defines the subset of all MIB objects accessible to the given community.
Read and write or read-only permission for the MIB objects accessible to the community.
<community_string 32> - Community string. Max string length is 32. The acceptable chars for community string are the same as a general octet string, except that ‘#’ is not accepted.
view - A MIB view name.
[read_only | read_write] - Read and write or read-only permission. Allows the user using the above community string to have read only or read and write access to the switch’s SNMP agent.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a read-only level SNMP community “System” with a “CommunityView” view:
DGS-3450:admin#create snmp community System view CommunityView read_only
Command: create snmp community System view CommunityView read_only
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete snmp community
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use to remove an SNMP community string.
delete snmp community <community_string 32>
This command is used to delete an SNMP community string.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
<community_string 32> - Community string. Max string length is 32. The acceptable chars for community string are the same as a general octet string, except that ‘#’ is not accepted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a SNMP community:
DGS-3450:admin#delete snmp community System
Command: delete snmp community System
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
529
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show snmp community
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the community string configurations.
show snmp community {<community_string 32>}
This command is used to display the community string configurations.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
community_string - Community string.
If not specify community string , all community string information will be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To display SNMP community:
DGS-3450:admin#show snmp community
Command: show snmp community
SNMP Community Table
Community Name View Name Access Right
-------------------------------- -------------------------------- ------------
System CommunityView read_only private CommunityView read_write public CommunityView read_only
Total Entries: 3
DGS-3450:admin#
create snmp user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to create a new user to an SNMP group originated by this command.
create snmp user <user_name 32> <groupname 32> {encrypted [by_password auth
[md5 <auth_password 8-16 > | sha <auth_password 8-20>] priv [none | des
<priv_password 8-16>] | by_key auth [md5 <auth_key 32-32> | sha <auth_key 40-40>] priv [none | des <priv_key 32-32>]]}
This command is used to create a new user to an SNMP group originated by this command.
User can chose input authentication and privacy by password or by key.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
username - The name of the user on the host that connects to the agent. The range is 1 to
32.
groupname - The name of the group to which the user is associated. The range is 1 to 32.
encrypted - Specifies whether the password appears in encrypted format.
by_password - Indicate input password for authentication and privacy.
by_key - Indicate input key for authentication and privacy.
auth - Initiates an authentication level setting session. The options are md5 and sha.
md5 - The HMAC-MD5-96 authentication level.
sha - The HMAC-SHA-96 authentication level.
auth_password - An authentication string used by MD5 or SHA1.
priv_password - A privacy string used by DES.
auth_key - An authentication key used by MD5 or SHA1, it is hex string type.
priv_key - A privacy key used by DES, it is hex string type.
530
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create snmp user
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a SNMP user “user123” with group “group123”:
DGS-3450:admin#create snmp user user123 group123 encrypted by_password auth md512345678 priv des 12345678
Command: create snmp user user123 group123 encrypted by_password auth md5 12345678 priv des 12345678
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete snmp user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to remove a user from an SNMP group and delete the associated group in SNMP group.
delete snmp user <user_name 32>
This command is used to remove a user from a SNMP group and deletes the associated group in SNMP group.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
<username32> - The name of the user on the host that connects to the agent. The range is 1 to 32.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a SNMP user “user123”:
DGS-3450:admin#delete snmp user user123
Command: delete snmp user user123
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show snmp user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display information on each SNMP username in the group username table.
show snmp user
This command is used to display information on each SNMP username in the group username table.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show SNMP user:
531
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show snmp user
Command: show snmp user
Username Group Name VerAuthPriv
-------------------------------- -------------------------------- ----------- initial initial V3 NoneNone user123 group123 V3 MD5 DES
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3450:admin#
create snmp group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create a new SNMP group, or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views.
create snmp group <groupname 32> [v1 | v2c | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv | auth_priv]] {read_view <view_name 32> | write_view <view_name 32> | notify_view
<view_name 32>}
This command is used to create a new SNMP group.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
groupname - The name of the group.
v1 - The least secure of the possible security models.
v2c - The second least secure of the possible security models.
v3 - The most secure of the possible. Specifies authentication of a packet.
• noauth_nopriv - Neither support packet authentication nor encrypting.
• auth_nopriv - Support packet authentication.
• auth_priv - Support packet authentication and encrypting.
view_name - View name.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create SNMP group “group123”:
DGS-3450:admin#create snmp group group123 v3 auth_priv read_view CoomunityView write_view
CommunityView notify_view CommunityView
Command: create snmp group group123 v3 auth_priv read_view CoomunityView write_view
CommunityView notify_view CommunityView
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete snmp group
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to remove a SNMP group.
delete snmp group <groupname 32>
This command is used to remove a SNMP group.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
<groupname 32> - The name of the group will be deleted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
532
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To delete SNMP group “group123”:
DGS-3450:admin#delete snmp group group123
Command: delete snmp group group123
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show snmp groups
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the names of groups on the switch and the security model, level, the status of the different views.
show snmp groups
This command is used to display the names of groups on the switch and the security model, level, the status of the different views.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show SNMP groups:
DGS-3450:admin#show snmp groups
Command: show snmp groups
Vacm Access Table Settings
Group Name : System
ReadView Name : CommunityView
WriteView Name :
Notify View Name : CommunityView
Securiy Model : SNMPv1
Securiy Level : NoAuthNoPriv
Group Name : System
ReadView Name : CommunityView
WriteView Name :
Notify View Name : CommunityView
Securiy Model : SNMPv2
Securiy Level : NoAuthNoPriv
Group Name : public
ReadView Name : CommunityView
WriteView Name :
Notify View Name : CommunityView
Securiy Model : SNMPv1
Securiy Level : NoAuthNoPriv
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
533
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create snmp view
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to assign views to community strings to limit which MIB objects an SNMP manager can access.
create snmp view <view_name 32> <oid> view_type [included | excluded]
This command is used to assign views to community strings to limit which MIB objects an
SNMP manager can access.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
view_name - View name to be created.
oid - Object-Identified tree, MIB tree.
view_type - Specify the access type of the MIB tree in this view.
included - Includes for this view.
excluded - Excluded for this view.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create SNMP view “view123”:
DGS-3450:admin#create snmp view view123 1.3.6 view_type included
Command: create snmp view view123 1.3.6 view_type included
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete snmp view
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to remove a view record.
delete snmp view <view_name 32> [all | <oid>]
This command is used to remove a view record.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
view_name - View name to be deleted.
all - All view record.
oid - Object-Identified tree, MIB tree.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete SNMP view “view123”:
DGS-3450:admin#delete snmp view view123 all
Command: delete snmp view view123 all
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show snmp view
Purpose Used to display the SNMP view record.
534
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show snmp view
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
show snmp view {<view_name 32>}
This command is used to display the SNMP view record.
view_name - View name of the user who likes to show.
None.
Example usage:
To show SNMP view:
DGS-3450:admin#show snmp view
Command: show snmp view
Vacm View Table Settings
View Name Subtree View Type
-------------------------------- ---------------------------------- ---------- restricted 1.3.6.1.2.1.1 Included restricted 1.3.6.1.2.1.11 Included restricted 1.3.6.1.6.3.10.2.1 Included restricted 1.3.6.1.6.3.11.2.1 Included restricted 1.3.6.1.6.3.15.1.1 Included
CommunityView 1 Included
CommunityView 1.3.6.1.6.3 Excluded
CommunityView 1.3.6.1.6.3.1 Included
Total Entries: 8
DGS-3450:admin#
create snmp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to create a recipient of an SNMP trap operation.
create snmp [host <ipaddr> | v6host <ipv6addr>] [v1 | v2c | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv | auth_priv]] <auth_string 32>
This command is used to create a recipient of an SNMP operation.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
<ipaddr> - The IP address of the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
<ipv6addr> - Specifies the IPv6 host address to which the trap packet will be sent.
v1 - The least secure of the possible security models.
v2c - The second least secure of the possible security models.
v3 - The most secure of the possible.
• noauth_nopriv - Neither support packet authentication nor encrypting.
• auth_nopriv - Support packet authentication.
• auth_priv - Support packet authentication and encrypting.
<auth_string 32> - Authentication string. If the v1 or v2 is specified, the auth_string presents the community string, and it must be one of the entries in community table. If the v3 is specified, the auth_string presents the user name, and it must be one of the entries in the user table.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
Example usage:
535
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To create SNMP host “10.0.0.1” with community string “public”:
DGS-3450:admin#create snmp host 10.0.0.1 v1 public
Command: create snmp host 10.0.0.1 v1 public
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To create SNMP host “3FFE::51” with community string “public”:
DGS-3450:admin#create snmp v6host 3FFE::51 v1 public
Command: create snmp v6host 3FFE::51 v1 public
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To create SNMP host “3FFE::4” with user name “user123”:
DGS-3450:admin#create snmp v6host 3FFE::4 v3 auth_nopriv user123
Command: create snmp v6host 3FFE::4 v3 auth_nopriv user123
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete snmp host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete a recipient of an SNMP trap operation.
delete snmp [host <ipaddr> | v6host <ipv6addr>]
This command is used to delete a recipient of an SNMP trap operation.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
host - The IP address of the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
v6host - Specifies the IPv6 host address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete SNMP host “10.0.0.1”:
DGS-3450:admin#delete snmp host 10.0.0.1
Command: delete snmp host 10.0.0.1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show snmp host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to display the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
show snmp host {<ipaddr>}
This command is used to display the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
536
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show snmp host
Parameters
Restrictions
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
<ipaddr> - The IP address of the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
If no parameter specified, all SNMP hosts will be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To show SNMP host:
DGS-3450:admin#show snmp host
Command: show snmp host
SNMP Host Table
Host IP Address SNMP Version Community Name / SNMPv3 User Name
--------------- --------------- ---------------------------------
10.0.0.1 V1 public
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
show snmp v6host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
show snmp v6host {<ipv6addr>}
This command is used to display the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
<ipaddr> - Specifies the IPv6 host address.
If no parameter specified, all SNMP hosts will be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To show SNMP v6host:
DGS-3450:admin#show snmp v6host
Command: show snmp v6host
SNMP Host Table
------------------------------------------------------------------
Host IPv6 Address : 3FFE::51
SNMP Version : V1
Community Name/SNMPv3 User Name : public
Host IPv6 Address : 3FFE::4
SNMP Version : V3 a/np
Community Name/SNMPv3 User Name : user123
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3450:admin#
537
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config snmp engineID
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure a identifier for the SNMP engine on the switch.
config snmp engineID <snmp_engineID 10-64>
This command is used to configure an identifier for the SNMP engine on the switch.
Associated with each SNMP entity is a unique engineID.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
snmp_engineID - Identify for the SNMP engine on the switch. It is octet string type. It accepts the hex number directly.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure SNMP engine ID to “1023457890”:
DGS-3450:admin#config snmp engineID 1023457890
Command: config snmp engineID 1023457890
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show snmp engineID
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the identification of the SNMP engine on the switch.
show snmp engineID
This command is used to display the identification of the SNMP engine on the switch. The default value is suggested in RFC2271. The very first bit is 1, and the first four octets are set to the binary equivalent of the agent’s SNMP management private enterprise number as assigned by IANA, D_Link is 171. The fifth octet is 03 to indicates the rest is the MAC address of this device. The 6th –11th octets is MAC address.
Note: This is SNMPv3 command, if it is used; All SNMPv1/v2 commands are not necessary.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show SNMP engine ID:
DGS-3450:admin#show snmp engineID
Command: show snmp engineID
SNMP Engine ID : 1023457890
DGS-3450:admin#
create snmp community_masking view
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to choose a security method for creating an SNMP community string, but the community string encrypted or not depends on the SNMP community encryption state.
create snmp community_masking view <view_name 32> [read_only| read_write]
If users use this command to create an SNMP community string, the community string that
538
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create snmp community_masking view
Parameters
Restrictions the user inputs will be displayed as “*”, and the user will have to double input (confirm) the
SNMP community string when creating an SNMP community.
<view_name 32> - Enter the MIB view name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
read_only - Specifies that the user, using the community string, will have read only access to the switch’s SNMP agent.
read_write - Specifies that the user, using the community string, will have read/write access to the switch’s SNMP agent.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create an SNMP community string called “communityView” with the “read_only” security method:
DGS-3450:admin#create snmp community_masking view CommunityView read_only
Command: create snmp community_masking view CommunityView read_only
Enter a case-sensitive community:********
Enter the community again for confirmation:********
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
enable community_encryption
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the encryption state on SNMP community string.
enable community_encryption
This command is used to enable the encryption state on SNMP community string.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the encryption state on SNMP community string:
DGS-3450:admin#enable community_encryption
Command: enable community_encryption
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable community_encryption
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the encryption state on SNMP community string.
disable community_encryption
This command is used to disable the encryption state on SNMP community string.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
539
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To disable the encryption state on SNMP community string:
DGS-3450:admin#disable community_encryption
Command: disable community_encryption
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show community_encryption
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the encryption state on SNMP community string.
show community_encryption
This command is used to display the encryption state on SNMP community string.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the encryption state on SNMP community string:
DGS-3450:admin#show community_encryption
Command: show community_encryption
SNMP Community Encryption State : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
540
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
74
S
TACKING
C
OMMANDS
Stacking protocol is a special communication mechanism between devices. It is responsible for allowing multiple devices to combine together, working in the same configuration. To users, these devices work as a whole.
Stacking devices can provide more network bandwidth and reliability for users. A device down will not influence other devices in the same stacking topology.
The Stacking commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config stacking_mode show stacking_mode config box_priority current_box_id config box_id current_box_id show stack_information show stack_device config stacking force_master_role state
Parameters
[disable | enable] {<string>}
<value 1-12> priority <value 1-63>
<value 1-12> new_box_id [auto | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12]
[enable | disable]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config stacking_mode
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the stacking mode.
config stacking_mode [disable | enable] {<string>}
The config stacking_mode command configures the state of the stacking function. By default stacking mode is disabled. Administrators need to specifically configure the stacking mode to make the switch stackable. The user can only change the stacking mode when the Switch is operating in standalone mode.
stacking_mode - Used to enable or disable the switch’s stacking capability.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable stacking mode:
DGS-3450:admin# config stacking_mode enable
Command: config stacking_mode enable
Changing the stacking mode may cause the device to restart. Do you still want to continue?(y/n) y
Please wait, the switch is rebooting...
541
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show stacking_mode
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current stacking mode.
show stacking_mode
The show stacking_mode command displays the current stacking mode.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display the stacking mode:
DGS-3450:admin# show stacking_mode
Command: show stacking_mode
Stacking mode : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
config box_priority
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the box priority of the switch.
config box_priority current_box_id <value 1-12> priority <value 1-63>
This command is used to configure the box priority of the switch, which determines the box that will become the master. A lower number means a higher priority.
current_box_id - Specifies the switch being configured. The range is 1-12
priority - Specifies the priority assigned to the box, with a lower number meaning a higher priority. The range is 1-63.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the box priority of the Switch to have an ID of 1 and a priority value of 1:
DGS-3450:admin# config box_priority current_box_id 1 priority 1
Command: config box_priority current_box_id 1 priority 1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config box_id
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the box ID. Users can use this command to reassign box IDs.
config box_id current_box_id <value 1-12> new_box_id [auto | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 |
9 | 10 | 11 | 12]
The config box_id command configures the box ID. By default, the box ID is automatically assigned by the system based topology election results. Administrators can assign box IDs statically. The new box ID will take effect after the unit reboots. Each unit in the Switch stack must have a unique box ID. If there are duplicate IDs, the stack system will not stack properly.
current_box_id - Specifies the switch being configured. The parameter range is 1-12.
542
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config box_id
Restrictions
new_box_id - Specifies the new ID that will be assigned to the box. The parameter range is
1-12.
auto - Allows the box ID to be assigned automatically by the stack system. The new box ID will take effect after the next reboot.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the Switch that has a current box ID of 1 to have an automatic ID assigned by the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# config box_id current_box_id 1 new_box_id auto
Command: config box_id current_box_id 1 new_box_id auto
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show stack_information
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the stack information.
show stack_information
The show stack_information command displays stacking information.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the stack information:
543
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show stack_information
Command: show stack_information
Topology :Duplex_Chain
My Box ID :1
Master ID :1
Box Count :1
Force Master Role: Disabled
Box User Prio- PROM Firmware H/W
ID Set Type Exist rity MAC Version Version Version
--- ---- ------------ ----- ---- ------------------ -------- -------- --------
1 Auto DGS-3450 Exist 32 00-22-B0-DE-F0-46 1.00-B13 3.00.B10 A2
2 - Not_Exist No
3 - Not_Exist No
4 - Not_Exist No
5 - Not_Exist No
6 - Not_Exist No
7 - Not_Exist No
8 - Not_Exist No
9 - Not_Exist No
10 - Not_Exist No
11 - Not_Exist No
12 - Not_Exist No
DGS-3450:admin#
show stack_device
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display information about the devices in the stack.
show stack_device
The show stack_device command displays stack device information.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the stack device information:
544
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show stack_device
Command: show stack_device
Box ID Box Type H/W Version Serial Number
------- --------------- ------------ ----------------
1 DGS-3450 0A1 1234567890123
3 DGS-3450 0A1 2345678901234
DGS-3450:admin#
config stacking force_master_role
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to configure the stacking force master role state.
config stacking force_master_role state [enable | disable]
This command is used to ensure the master role is unchanged when new device add to current stacking topology. If the state is enabled, the master’s priority will become zero after the stacking has stabilized.
force_master_role - Used to enable or disable the switch’s Stacking Force Master Role state.
The default setting is disabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the stacking force master role state:
DGS-3450:admin# config stacking force_master_role state enable
Command: config stacking force_master_role state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
545
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
75
S
TATIC
MAC-B
ASED
VLAN C
OMMANDS
The Static MAC-Based VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
For bridges that implement MAC-based VLAN classification, the VID associated with an Untagged or Priority-tagged
Frame is determined based on the source MAC address. The each entry of VLAN_MAC table specifies a relationship for a source MAC address with a VLAN. If the source MAC address of ingress untagged or priority-tagged frame is match with the entry, the VLAN of the frame will be assigned according VLAN assignment rule in the entry.
Command Parameters
create mac_based_vlan mac_address delete mac_based_vlan show mac_based_vlan
<macaddr> vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
[mac_address <macaddr> | all]
{mac_address <macaddr> | [vlan <vlan_name 32>]}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create mac_based_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create a static mac-based vlan entry.
create mac_based_vlan mac_address <macaddr> vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-
4094>]
This command only needs to be supported by the model which supports mac-based VLAN.
The user can use this command to create a static mac-based VLAN entry.
When a static mac_based_vlan entry is created for a user, the traffic from this user will be able to be serviced under the specified VLAN regardless of the authentiucation function operated on this port.
There is a global limitation of the maximum entries supported for the static mac-based entry. The maximum value is 1024.
mac_address
− The MAC address.
vlan
− The VLAN to be associated with the MAC address.
vlanid - The VLAN ID to be associated with the MAC address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage
To create MAC-based VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin# create mac_based_vlan mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan default
Command: create mac_based_vlan mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan default
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
546
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete mac_based_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete the static MAC-based VLAN entry.
delete mac_based_vlan [mac_address <macaddr> | all]
Use this command to delete a database entry. If the mac_address and vlan is not specified, all static entries associated with the port will be removed.
mac_address
− The MAC address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage
To delete a static mac-based-vlan entry:
DGS-3450:admin# delete mac_based_vlan mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-01
Command: delete mac_based_vlan mac mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-01
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show mac_based_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the static or dynamic MAC-based VLAN entry.
show mac_based_vlan {mac_address <macaddr> | [vlan <vlan_name 32>]}
User can use this command to display the static or dynamic MAC-Based VLAN entry.
mac_address
− Specifies the entry that you would like to display.
vlan
− Specifies the VLAN to be associated with the MAC address that you would like to display.
None.
Example usage
To display the static MAC-based VLAN entry:
DGS-3450:admin# show mac_based_vlan
Command: show mac_based_vlan
MAC Address VLAN Status Type
------------- ----------- ------------- ------------
00-80-e0-14-a7-57 200 Active Static
00-80-c2-33-c3-45 200 Inactive Mac based access control
00-80-c2-33-c3-45 300 Active JWAC
00-80-c2-33-c3-90 400 Active WAC
00-a2-44-17-32-98 500 Active Multiple Authentication
00-a2-44-17-32-97 500 Active 802.1x
Total Entries : 6
DGS-3450:admin#
547
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
76
S
UBNET
VLAN C
OMMANDS
The Subnet VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create subnet_vlan delete subnet_vlan show subnet_vlan config vlan_precedence ports show vlan_precedence ports
Parameters
[network <network_address> | ipv6network <ipv6networkaddr>] [vlan
<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> ] {priority <value 0-7>}
[network <network_address> | ipv6network <ipv6networkaddr>] | vlan
<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>| all]
{[network <network_address> | ipv6network <ipv6networkaddr>] | vlan
<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}
<portlist> [mac_based_vlan | subnet_vlan]
{<portlist>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create subnet_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use this command to create a subnet VLAN entry.
create subnet_vlan [network <network_address> | ipv6network <ipv6networkaddr>]
[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> ]{ priority <value 0-7>}
The user can use this command to create a subnet VLAN entry.
A subnet VLAN entry is an IP subnet-based VLAN classification rule. If an untagged or priority-tagged IP packet is received on a port, its source IP address will be used to match the subnet VLAN entries. If the source IP is in the subnet of an entry, the packet will be classified to the VLANdefined for this subnet.
network - To specify an IPv4 network address. The format is ipaddress/prefix length.
ipv6network - To specify an IPv6 network address. The format is ipaddress/prefix length.The prefix length of IPv6 network address shall not be greater than 64.
vlan - The vlan to be associated with the subnet. You can specify a vlan name or vlan ID. The vlan must be existed static vlan.
priority - The priority to be associated with the subnet. Its range is 0-7.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
This example shows how to create a subnet VLAN entry:
DGS-3450:admin#create subnet_vlan network 172.168.1.1/24 vlan v2 priority 2
Command: create subnet_vlan network 172.168.1.1/24 vlan v2 priority 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
This example shows how to create an IPv6 subnet VLAN entry:
548
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#create subnet_vlan ipv6network FE80:250:BAFF::/64 vlan v2 priority 2
Command: create subnet_vlan ipv6network FE80:250:BAFF::/64 vlan v2 priority 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete subnet_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use this command to delete subnet vlan entry.
delete subnet_vlan [network <network_address> | ipv6network <ipv6networkaddr>] | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>| all]
This command is used to delete subnet vlan entry from switch. You can delete subnet vlan entry by IP subnet or vlan, or delete all subnet vlan entries.
network - To specify an IPv4 network address or IPv6 network addres. The format is ipaddress / prefix length.
ipv6network - To specify an IPv6 network address. The format is ipaddress / prefix length.The prefix length of IPv6 network address shall not be greater than 64.
vlan - If specify the vlan, all subnet vlan entries that associated with this vlan will be deleted.
vidlist - Specifies a list of VLANs by VLAN ID.
all - If specify all, all subnet vlan entries will be deleted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
This example shows how to delete a subnet VLAN entry:
DGS-3450:admin# delete subnet_vlan network 172.168.1.1/24
Command:delete subnet_vlan network 172.168.1.1/24
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
This example shows how to delete all subnet VLAN entries:
DGS-3450:admin# delete subnet_vlan all
Command:delete subnet_vlan all
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show subnet_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Use this command to display subnet vlan entry information.
show subnet_vlan {[network <network_address> | ipv6network <ipv6networkaddr>] | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}
This command is used to display subnet vlan entry information.
network - To specify an IPv4 network address. If network address is not specifed, all subnet vlan entries will be displayed.
ipv6network - To specify an IPv6 network address. If network address is not specifed, all subnet vlan entries will be displayed.
549
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show subnet_vlan
Restrictions
vlan - If specify the vlan, all subnet vlan entries that associated with this vlan will be displayed. If no parameter is specified, all subnet vlan entries will be displayed.
vidlist - Specifies a list of VLANs by VLAN ID.
None.
Example usage:
This example shows how to show a specified subnet VLAN entry:
DGS-3450:admin# show subnet_vlan network 172.168.1.1/24
Command:show subnet_vlan network 172.168.1.1/24
IP Address/Subnet Mask VLAN Priority
-------------------------------------------- ------- ---------
172.168.1.0/255.255.255.0 4094 2
DGS-3450:admin#
This example shows how to display a specified IPv6 subnet VLAN entry:
DGS-3450:admin# show subnet_vlan ipv6network FE80:250:BAFF::/64
Command: show subnet_vlan ipv6network FE80:250:BAFF::/64
IP Address/Subnet Mask VLAN Priority
-------------------------- ------ ---------
FE80:250:BAFF::/64 10 1
DGS-3450:admin#
This example shows how to show all subnet VLAN entries:
DGS-3450:admin#show subnet_vlan
Command:show subnet_vlan
IP Address/Subnet Mask VLAN Priority
-------------------------------------------- ------- ---------
172.168.1.0/255.255.255.0 4094 2
172.18.211.1/255.255.255.0 20 3
FE80:250:BAFF::/64 10 2
Total Entries:3
DGS-3450:admin#
config vlan_precedence ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Use this command to configure the vlan classification precedence.
config vlan_precedence ports <portlist> [mac_based_vlan | subnet_vlan]
This command is used to configure vlan classification precedence on each port.
You can specify the order of MAC-based VLAN classification and subnet VLAN classification.
If a port’s VLAN classification is MAC-based precedence, MAC-based VLAN classification will process at first. If MAC-based VLAN classification fails, the subnet VLAN classification will be executed.
550
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config vlan_precedence ports
Parameters
Restrictions
If a port’s VLAN classification is subnet VLAN precedence, the subnet VLAN classification will process at first. If subnet VLAN classification fails, the MAC-based VLAN classification will be executed.
portlist - A range of ports to configure.
mac_based_vlan - If the parameter is specified, the MAC-based VLAN classification is precedence than subnet VLAN classification.
subnet_vlan - If the parameter is specified, the subnet VLAN classification is precedence than MAC-based VLAN classification.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
This example shows how to configure subnet VLAN classification precedence on port 1:
DGS-3450:admin# config vlan_precedence 1 subnet_vlan
Command: config vlan_precedence 1 subnet_vlan
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show vlan_precedence ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Use this command to show vlan classification precedence.
show vlan_precedence ports {<portlist>}
This command is used to show vlan classification precedence.
portlist - A range of ports will display. If no parameters is specified, all ports vlan classification precedence will display.
None.
Example usage:
This example shows how to display VLAN classification precedence on ports 1-3:
DGS-3450:admin# show vlan_precedence
Command: show vlan_precedence
Port VLAN Precedence
---- -----------------
1 MAC-Based VLAN
2 Subnet VLAN
3 MAC-Based VLAN
Total entry: 3
DGS-3450:admin#
551
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
77
S
WITCH
P
ORT
C
OMMANDS
The switch port commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command Parameters
config ports [ <portlist> | all ] {medium_type [fiber | copper]} { speed[auto
{capability_advertised {10_half | 10_full | 100_half | 100_full | 1000_full } }|
10_half | 10_full | 100_half | 100_full | 1000_full {[master | slave]} ] | auto_negotiation restart_an |flow_control [enable | disable] | learning [enable | disable ] | state [enable | disable] | [description <desc 1-32> | clear_description]} show ports {<portlist>} {[description | err_disabled | auto_negotiation | details | media_type]}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
552
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the Switch’s Ethernet port settings.
config ports [ <portlist> | all] {medium_type [fiber | copper]} {speed[auto {capability_advertised
{10_half | 10_full | 100_half | 100_full | 1000_full } }| 10_half | 10_full | 100_half | 100_full |
1000_full {[master | slave]} ] | auto_negotiation restart_an |flow_control [enable | disable] | learning [enable | disable ] | state [enable | disable] | [description <desc 1-32> |
clear_description]}
This command allows for the configuration of the Switch’s Ethernet ports. Only the ports listed in the
<portlist> will be affected.
all
− Configure all ports on the Switch.
<portlist>
− Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash.
medium_type [fiber | copper] – This applies only to the Combo ports. If configuring the Combo ports this defines the type of transport medium used.
speed – Allows the user to adjust the speed for a port or range of ports. The user has a choice of the following:
•
auto
− Enables auto-negotiation for the specified range of ports.
•
[10 | 100 | 1000]
− Configures the speed in Mbps for the specified range of ports. Gigabit ports are statically set to 1000 and cannot be set to slower speeds.
•
[half | full]
− Configures the specified range of ports as either full-duplex or half-duplex.
•
[master | slave] – The master setting (1000M/Full_M) will allow the port to advertise capabilities related to duplex, speed and physical layer type. The master setting will also determine the master and slave relationship between the two connected physical layers. This relationship is necessary for establishing the timing control between the two physical layers.
The timing control is set on a master physical layer by a local source. The slave setting
(1000M/Full_S) uses loop timing, where the timing comes form a data stream received from the master. If one connection is set for 1000M/Full_M, the other side of the connection must be set for 1000M/Full_S. Any other configuration will result in a link down status for both ports.
flow_control [enable | disable] – Enable or disable flow control for the specified ports. Note: This feature will not work through switches that are stacked.
learning [enable | disable]
− Enables or disables the MAC address learning on the specified range of ports.
state [enable | disable]
− Enables or disables the specified range of ports. If the specific ports are in an error-disabled state configuring their state to enable will recover these ports from disabled to enabled state.
description <desc 1-32>
− Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to describe a selected port interface.
clear_description
− Enter this command to clear the port description of the selected port(s).
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
NOTE: Gigabit Ethernet ports are statically set to 1 Gbps, and their speed cannot be modified. The
DGS-3400 series fiber ports only support 1000M_full.
Example usage:
To configure the speed of ports 1 to 3 of unit 1 to be 10 Mbps, full duplex, with learning, state and flow control enabled:
553
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config ports 1:1-1:3 speed 10_full learning enable state enable flow_control enable
Command: config ports 1:1-1:3 speed 10_full learning enable state enable flow_control enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To configure the speed of ports 1 to 3 of unit 1 to be auto, capability advertised with half duplex and full duplex ports:
DGS-3450:admin# config ports 1:1-1:3 speed auto capability_advertised 10_half 10_full
Command: config ports 1:1-1:3 speed auto capability_advertised 10_half 10_full
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to display the current configuration of a range of ports.
show ports {<portlist>} {[description | err_disabled | auto_negotiation | details | media_type]}
This command is used to display the current configuration of a range of ports.
<portlist>
− Specifies a port or range of ports to be displayed. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash.
{description} – Adding this parameter to the show ports command indicates that a previously entered port description will be included in the display.
err_disabled – Choosing this parameter will display ports that have been disconnected due to an error on the port, such as a Loopback Detection.
auto_negoriation – Choosing this parameter will display the port auto-negotiation information in the display.
details - Displays the port detailed information
media_type - Displays port transceiver type and SFP information .SFP information is displayed when SFP exists.
None. Restrictions
Example usage:
To display the configuration of all ports on a switch:
554
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show ports
Command: show ports
Port Port Settings Connection Address
State Speed/Duplex/FlowCtrl Speed/Duplex/FlowCtrl Learning
------- -------- --------------------- ---------------------- ---------
1:1 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:2 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:3 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:4 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:5 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:6 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:7 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:8 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:9 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:10 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:11 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:12 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:13 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:14 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:15 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:16 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:17 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:18 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
1:19 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
To display the configuration of all ports on the Switch, with a description:
DGS-3450:admin# show ports description
Command: show ports description
Port Port Settings Connection Address
State Speed/Duplex/FlowCtrl Speed/Duplex/FlowCtrl Learning
------- -------- --------------------- ---------------------- ---------
1:1 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
Description:
1:2 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
Description:
1:3 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
Description:
1:4 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
Description:
1:5 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
Description:
1:6 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
Description:
1:7 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
Description:
1:8 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
Description:
1:9 Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled
Description:
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
555
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To display the Error Disabled ports:
DGS-3450:admin# show ports err_disabled
Command : show ports err_disabled
Port Port Connection status Reason
State
------ -------- --------------------- ----------------
1:2 Enabled Err-disabled Storm control
Desc: Port 2
1:8 Enabled Err-disabled Storm control
Desc: Port 8
DGS-3450:admin#
To display the auto_negotiation ports:
DGS-3450:admin#show ports 1:1-1:3 auto_negotiation
Command: show ports 1:1-1:3 auto_negotiation
Port : 1:1
--------------------
Auto Negotiation : Enabled
Capability Bits : 10M_Half,10M_Full,100M_Half,100M_Full,1000M_Full
Capbility Advertised Bits : 10M_Half,10M_Full,100M_Half,100M_Full,1000M_Full
Capbility Received Bits : 10M_Half,10M_Full,100M_Half,100M_Full,1000M_Full
Port : 1:2
--------------------
Auto Negotiation : Enabled
Capability Bits : 10M_Half,10M_Full,100M_Half,100M_Full,1000M_Full
Capbility Advertised Bits : 10M_Half,10M_Full,100M_Half,100M_Full,1000M_Full
Capbility Received Bits :
Port : 1:3
--------------------
Auto Negotiation : Enabled
Capability Bits : 10M_Half,10M_Full,100M_Half,100M_Full,1000M_Full
Capbility Advertised Bits : 10M_Half,10M_Full,100M_Half,100M_Full,1000M_Full
Capbility Received Bits :
DGS-3450:admin#
556
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
78
S
YSLOG OR
T
RAP
S
OURCE
-I
NTERFACE
C
OMMANDS
The syslog or trap source-interface function is used for selecting a fixed interface as the source interface to send syslog or trap message. It also provides a mechanism to select a certain IP address from the specified interface as the source address to send the message. The servers beyond different networks receive the syslog or trap message always come from a fixed source IP address, it is helpful to use the source IP address to identify the switch.
The Syslog or Trap Source-Interface commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config syslog source_ipif show syslog source_ipif config trap source_ipif show trap source_ipif
Parameters
[<ipif_name> {<ipaddr>} | none]
[<ipif_name> {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>} | none]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config syslog source_ipif
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Configure syslog source IP interface.
config syslog source_ipif [<ipif_name> {<ipaddr>} | none]
This command is used to configure syslog source IP interface.
ipif_name - IP interface name. If only specify this parameter, the least IPv4 address and the smallest IPv6 address of ipif_name will be used as source IP addresses.
none - For clear the configured source IP interface.
ipaddr - Specify the IPv4 address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Configure syslog source IP interface:
DGS-3450:admin# config syslog source_ipif ipif3 14.0.0.5
Command: config syslog source_ipif ipif3 14.0.0.5
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
To clear the configured source IP interface for syslog:
DGS-3450:admin# config syslog source_ipif none
Command: config syslog source_ipif none
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
557
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show syslog source_ipif
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Show syslog source IP interface.
show syslog source_ipif
This command is used to display the syslog source IP interface.
None.
None.
Example usage:
Show syslog source IP interface:
DGS-3450:admin# show syslog source_ipif
Command: show syslog source_ipif
Syslog Source IP Interface Configuration:
IP Interface : ipif3
IPv4 Address : 14.0.0.3
DGS-3450:admin#
config trap source_ipif
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Configure trap source IP interface.
config trap source_ipif [<ipif_name> {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>} | none]
This command is used to configure trap source IP interface.
ipif_name - IP interface name. If only specify this parameter, the least IPv4 address and the smallest IPv6 address of ipif_name will be used as source IP addresses.
none - For clearing the configured source IP interface.
ipaddr - IPv4 address.
ipv6addr - IPv6 address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Configure trap source IP interface:
DGS-3450:admin# config trap source_ipif inter4
Command: config trap source_ipif inter4
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
To clear the configured trap source IP interface:
558
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config trap source_ipif none
Command: config trap source_ipif none
Success
DGS-3450:admin#
show trap source_ipif
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Show trap source IP interface.
show trap source_ipif
This command is used to display the trap source IP interface.
None.
None.
Example usage:
Show trap source IP interface:
DGS-3450:admin# show trap source_ipif
Command: show trap source_ipif
Trap Source IP Interface Configuration:
IP Interface : ipif4
IPv4 Address : None
IPv6 address : 3000::52
DGS-3450:admin#
559
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
79
S
YSTEM
L
OG
C
OMMANDS
The System Log commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
clear log show log enable syslog disable syslog show syslog config syslog host create syslog host delete syslog host show syslog host config log_save_timing show log_save_timing show attack_log clear attack_log upload attack_log_toTFTP upload attack_log_toRCP
Parameters
{[index <value_list> | severity {emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice
| informational| debug |<level_list 0-7>}]}
<index 1-4> [severity [emergency | alert| critical | error | warning | notice | informational | debug | <level 0-7>] | facility [local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] | udp_port <udp_port_number> | ipaddress
<ipaddr>| state [enable | disable]](1)
<index 1-4> {severity [ emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice | informational |debug| all | <level 0-7>] | facility [ local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] | udp_port <udp_port_number> | ipaddress<ipaddr> | state [ enable | disable]}
[<index 1-4> | all]
{<index 1-4>}
[time_interval <min 1-65535> | on_demand | log_trigger]
{unit <unit_id 1-12>} {index <value_list>}
{unit <unit_id 1-12> all}
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> |<domain_name 255>] dest_file <path_filename 64> {unit
<unit_id 1-12>}
[{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} dest_file <path_filename 64> | rcp:
<string 128> ] {unit <unit_id 1-12>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
clear log
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to clear the switch’s history log.
clear log
This command clears the switch’s history log.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear the switch’s history log:
560
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# clear log
Command: clear log
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show log
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the switch’s history log.
show log {[index <value_list> | severity {emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice | informational| debug |<level_list 0-7>}]}
This command displays the switch’s history log.
When the log is empty, the prompt message “Log is empty.” will be displayed.
index - The show log command will display the history log between the log number of X and
Y. For example, showing log index 1-5 will display the history log from 1 to 5.
If no parameter is specified, all history log entries will be displayed.
severity emergency Severity level 0
alert Severity level 1
critical
error
warning
notice
Severity level 2
Severity level 3
Severity level 4
Severity level 5
informational
debug
Severity level 6
Severity level 7
level_list - Specifies a list of severity levels to be displayed. If there is more than one severity level, please separate them by comma. The level number is from 0 to 7.
None.
Example usage:
To display the switch’s history log:
DGS-3450:admin# show log index 1-3
Command: show log index 1-3
Index Date Time Level Log Text
----- ---------- -------- ------- ----------------------------------------------
3 2008-10-17 15:00:14 INFO(1) CLI(1):Successful login through Console (User
name: Anonymous)
2 2008-10-17 10:50:36 WARN(3) CLI(3):Console session timed out (Username: A
nonymous)
1 2008-10-16 15:19:17 CRIT(5) SNMP(2):SNMP request received from 10.0.0.27 with
invalid community string!
DGS-3450:admin#
enable syslog
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to enable the sending of syslog messages.
enable syslog
This command enables the sending of syslog messages.
561
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
enable syslog
Parameters
Restrictions
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the sending of syslog messages:
DGS-3450:admin# enable syslog
Command: enable syslog
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable syslog
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the sending of syslog messages.
disable syslog
This command disables the sending of syslog messages.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable the sending of syslog messages:
DGS-3450:admin# disable syslog
Command: disable syslog
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show syslog
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the syslog protocol global state.
show syslog
This command displays the syslog protocol global state.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the syslog protocol global state:
562
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show syslog
Command: show syslog
Syslog Global State: Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
config syslog host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the syslog host configurations.
config syslog host <index 1-4> [severity [emergency | alert| critical | error | warning | notice | informational | debug | <level 0-7>] | facility [local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] | udp_port <udp_port_number> | ipaddress <ipaddr>| state [enable | disable]](1)
This command configures the syslog host configurations. The user can choose and report a specific level of messages to a specific host. When the user chooses a specific level for a specific host, messages which are at that severity level or higher will be reported to the specified host.
When the specified host doesn’t exist, the prompt message, “The entry does not exist.” will be displayed and this configuration will fail.
When the IP address is invalid, the prompt message, “Invalid IP address.” will be displayed and this configuration will fail.
The prompt message, “The IP address has already been configured.” will be prompted to the user when configuring syslog hosts with “all” option and just assigning one IP address to those hosts. This configuration will fail.
When the specified IP address already exists, the prompt message, “The host IP address already exists.” will be displayed and this configuration will fail.
host - The host index or all hosts.
severity - emergency
alert
Severity level 0
Severity level 1
critical
error
warning
notice
Severity level 2
Severity level 3
Severity level 4
Severity level 5
informational
debug
Severity level 6
Severity level 7
facility - Some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned facility values. Processes and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a facility may use any of the "local use" facilities or they may use the "user-level" facility. Those facilities that have been designated are shown below. This facility setting will be put in the syslog packet when it is sent to a specific syslog server.
local0 user-defined facility
local1
local2
local3
local4 user-defined facility user-defined facility user-defined facility user-defined facility
local5
local6 user-defined facility user-defined facility
local7 user-defined facility
udp_port - The UDP port number.
ipaddr - Specify the IP address for the host.
ipv6addr - Specify the IPv6 address for the host.
563
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config syslog host
Restrictions
state - The syslog protocol is used for the transmission of event notification messages across networks to a host. The option enables or disables the host to receive such messages.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure syslog host configuration:
DGS-3450:admin# config syslog host all severity all facility local0
Command: config syslog host all severity all facility local0
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create syslog host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to create a new syslog host.
create syslog host <index 1-4> {severity [ emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice | informational |debug| all | <level 0-7>] | facility [ local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] | udp_port <udp_port_number> | ipaddress<ipaddr> | state [ enable | disable]}
This command creates a new syslog host. The user can choose and report specific levels of messages to a specific host. When the user chooses a specific level for a specific host, messages which are at that severity level or higher will be reported to that host.
When the IP address is invalid, the prompt message, “Invalid IP address,” will be displayed and this configuration will fail.
When the specified IP address already exists, the prompt message, “The host IP address already exists,” will be displayed and this configuration will fail.
When the specified host already exists, the prompt message, “The entry already exists,” will be displayed and this configuration will fail.
host - The host index or all hosts
severity emergency Severity level 0
alert
critical
error
Severity level 1
Severity level 2
Severity level 3
warning
notice
Severity level 4
Severity level 5
informational Severity level 6
debug Severity level 7
all Severity level All
facility - Some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned facility values. Processes and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a facility may use any of the "local use" facilities or they may use the "user-level" facility. The facilities that have been designated are shown below.
local0
local1 user-defined facility user-defined facility
local2
local3
local4 user-defined facility user-defined facility user-defined facility
564
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create syslog host
Restrictions
local5
local6
local7 user-defined facility user-defined facility user-defined facility
udp_port - The UDP port number.
state - The syslog protocol is used for the transmission of event notification messages across networks to a host. This option enables or disables the hosts that will receive such messages.
ipaddress – Specify the IP address used here.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a new syslog host:
DGS-3450:admin# create syslog host 1 ipaddress 10.90.90.1 severity all facility local0
Command: create syslog host 1 ipaddress 10.90.90.1 severity all facility local0
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete syslog host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete the syslog host(s).
delete syslog host [<index 1-4> | all]
This command deletes the syslog host(s).
When the specified host doesn’t exist, the prompt message, “The entry does not exist,” will be displayed and this configuration will fail.
host [ <index 1-4> | all ] - Host index or all hosts.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a syslog host:
DGS-3450:admin# delete syslog host 4
Command: delete syslog host 4
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show syslog host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to display syslog host configurations.
show syslog host {<index 1-4>}
This command displays the syslog host configurations.
index - The host index.
If no parameter is specified, all hosts will be displayed.
565
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show syslog host
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display syslog host configurations:
DGS-3450:admin# show syslog host
Command: show syslog host
Syslog Global State: Disabled
Host 1
IP Address : 10.1.1.2
Severity : Warning
Facility : Local0
UDP port : 514
Status : Disabled
Host 2
IP Address : 3000:501:100:ffff:101:202:303:1
Severity : Emergency
Facility : Local0
UDP port : 514
Status : Disabled
Host 3
IP Address : 10.21.13.1
Severity : All
Facility : Local0
UDP port : 514
Status : Disabled
Total Entries : 3
DGS-3450:admin#
config log_save_timing
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the method for saving the log.
config log_save_timing [time_interval <min 1-65535> | on_demand | log_trigger]
This command is used to set the method for saving the log.
time_interval - Save log to flash every xxx minutes. (If no new log events occur in this period, don't save.)
on_demand - Save log to flash whenever the user enters the "save log" or "save all" command. The default setting is on_demand.
log_trigger - Save log to flash whenever a new log event arrives.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the method for saving a log as on demand:
566
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config log_save_timing on_demand
Command: config log_save_timing on_demand
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show log_save_timing
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the method for saving the log.
show log_save_timing
To show the method for saving the log.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show the timing method used for saving the log:
DGS-3450:admin# show log_save_timing
Command: show log_save_timing
Saving log method: on_demand
DGS-3450:admin#
show attack_log
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Displays the attack log messages.
show attack_log {unit <unit_id 1-n>} {index <value_list>}
Displays the attack log messages. The attack log message refers to log messages driven by modules such as DOS and the IP-MAC-port binding module. This type of log message may generate a large amount of messages and quickly cause the system to run out of system log storage. Therefore, for this type of log messages only the first log that is generated each minute can be stored in the system log, with the rest of them being stored in a separate table named attack log.
When the attack log is empty, the prompt message, “Log is empty,” will be displayed.
unit - The attack log messages on the specified unit will be displayed.
If unit ID is specified, then this unit will be referred to as the master unit.
index - The list of index numbers of the entries that need to be displayed. For example, show attack_log index 1-5 will display the attack log messages from 1 to 5.
If no parameter is specified, all entries in the attack log will be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To show dangerous messages on the master:
567
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show attack_log index 1
Command: show attack_log index 1
Index Date Time Level Log Text
----- ---------- -------- -------- ----------------------------------------------
1 2008-10-17 15:00:14 CRIT(2) Land attack is blocked from (IP: 10.72.24.1
Port: 7)
DGS-3450:admin#
clear attack_log
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to clear the attack log.
clear attack_log {unit <unit_id 1-n>|all}
Used to clear the attack log.
unit - The attack log messages on the specified unit will be cleared.
If specified, this unit will be referred to as the master unit.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear the master’s attack log:
DGS-3450:admin# clear attack_log
Command: clear attack_log
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
upload attack_log_toTFTP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to upload the attack log on a unit.
upload attack_log_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> |<domain_name 255>] dest_file
<path_filename 64> {unit <unit_id 1-12>}
To upload the attack log stored on a unit.
When the attack log is empty, the prompt message, “Log is empty,” will be displayed.
unit - The attack log messages on the specified unit will be uploaded to the TFTP server. If specified, this unit will be referred to as the master unit.
<ipaddr> - The IPv4 address of the TFTP server.
<ipv6addr> - The IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
<domain_name 255> - The domain name of the TFTP server.
dest_file – The destination file name.
<path_filename 64> - Specifies the path name on the TFTP server to hold the attack log.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To upload the master’s dangerous log:
568
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# upload attack_log_toTFTP 10.9.68.9 dest_file test
Command: upload attack_log_toTFTP 10.9.68.9 dest_file test
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
upload attack_log_toRCP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to upload the attack log file from the device to an RCP server.
upload attack_log_toRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} dest_file
<path_filename 64> | rcp: <string 128> ] {unit <unit_id 1-12>}
This command is used to upload the attack log file from the device to an RCP server.
username - The remote user name on the RCP Server.
<ipaddr> - The IPv4 address of the RCP server.
path_filename - The pathname specifies the pathname on the RCP server or local device.
NOTE: If a user specifies the relative file path, the path search strategy will depend on the server system. For some systems, it will search the current user working directory first, and then search the environment paths.
dest_file – Specify the destination file here.
rcp: <string 128> - Syntax: rcp: username@ipaddr/directory/filename
Example for FULL path: [email protected]/home/user_name/desxxxx.had
Example for relative path: [email protected]./desxxxx.had
NOTE: Do not use any blank spaces in the <string>.
unitid - The attack log messages on the specified unit will be uploaded to the RCP server. If specified, this unit will be referred to as the master unit.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To upload the attack log from the device to an RCP server:
DGS-3450:admin# upload attack_log_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 /home/DGS-
XXXX.log unit 2
Command: upload attack_log_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 /home/DGS-XXXX.log unit
2
Connecting to server.......... Done.
Upload Attack log............. Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
569
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
80
T
ECHNICAL
S
UPPORT
C
OMMANDS
The Technical Support commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
show tech_support upload tech_support_toTFTP
Parameters
<ipaddr> <path_filename 64>
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
show tech_support
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show the information of technique’s support.
show tech_support
This command is especially used by the technical support personnel to dump the device overall operation information. The information is project dependent and includes the following information.
• Basic System information
• system log
• Running configuration
• Layer 1 information
• Layer 2 information
• Layer 3 information
• Application
• OS status
• Controller’s status
This command can be interrupted by Ctrl - C or ESC when it is executing.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To show the information of technique’s support:
570
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show tech_support
Command: show tech_support
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# DGS-3450 Gigabit Ethernet Switch
# Technical Support Information
#
# Firmware: Build 2.70.B56
# Copyright(C) 2010 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
******************** Basic System Information ********************
[SYS 2000-5-6 23:36:27]
Boot Time : 6 May 2000 23:29:19
RTC Time : 2000/05/06 23:36:27
Boot PROM Version : Build 1.00-B13
Firmware Version : Build 2.70.B56
Hardware Version : A2
Serial number : H2FT29C000004
MAC Address : 00-26-5A-87-41-15
[STACKING 2000-5-6 23:36:27]
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
upload tech_support_toTFTP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to upload the information of technique’s support.
upload tech_support_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>
The upload tech_support_toTFTP command is used to upload the information of technique’s support to TFTP server. The information is project dependent and includes the following information.
• Basic System information
• system log
• Running configuration
• Layer 1 information
• Layer 2 information
• Layer 3 information
• Application
• OS status
• Controller’s status
This command can be interrupted by Ctrl - C or ESC when it is executing.
ipaddr - Specifies the IP address of TFTP server.
path_filename - Specifies the file name to store the information of technique’s support in
TFTP server. The max size of the file name is 64.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To upload the information of technique’s support:
571
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# upload tech_support_to_TFTP 10.0.0.66 tech_report.txt
Command: upload tech_support_to_TFTP 10.0.0.66 tech_report.txt
Connecting to server................... Done.
Upload techsupport file................ Done.
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
572
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
81
T
ELNET
C
LIENT
C
OMMANDS
The Telnet Client commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
telnet
Parameters
[<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {tcp_port(1) <value 0-65535>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
telnet
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to initiate a Telnet client session with a specific Telnet server.
telnet [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {tcp_port(1) <value 1-65535>}
The Telnet command establishes a single Telnet client connection with a specified server.
The parameters specified by the command will only be used for the establishment of this specific session. They will not affect the establishment of other sessions.
ipaddr - The IP address of the Telnet server.
domain_name - Specify the domain name of the Telnet server.
tcp_port - Specifies the Telnet server port number to be connected. If not specified, the default port is 23.
None.
Example usage:
Telnet to a Switch by specifying the IP address:
DGS-3450:admin# telnet 10.90.90.90
Command: telnet 10.90.90.90
DGS-XXXX Fast Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface
Firmware: Build 2.70.B56
Copyright(C) 2006-2010 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
UserName:
Telnet to a host by specifying the domain name and the server port:
DGS-3450:admin# telnet ctrl.iplanet.org tcp_port 2323
Command: telnet ctrl.iplanet.org tcp_port 2323
Login:
573
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
82
TFTP C
LIENT
C
OMMANDS
The TFTP Client commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
download firmware_fromTFTP download cfg_fromTFTP upload cfg_toTFTP upload log_toTFTP upload attack_log_toTFTP
Parameters
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] {src_file} <path_filename 64>
{image_id <int 1-2>} {unit [all |<unitid 1-12>]}
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] {src_file} <path_filename 64>
{[<config_id 1-2> | increment]}
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] {dest_file} <path_filename 64>
{<config_id 1-2>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_ string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin]
<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> |<domain_name 255>] {dest_file} <path_filename 64>
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> |<domain_name 255>] {dest_file} <path_filename 64>
{unit <unit_id 1-12>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
download firmware_fromTFTP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to download the firmware image from TFTP server.
download firmware_fromTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] {src_file}
<path_filename 64> {image_id <int 1-2>} {unit [all |<unitid 1-12>]}
This command is used to download a firmware image file from the TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - The IP address of the TFTP server.
<ipv6addr> - The IPV6 address of the TFTP server.
<domain_name 255> - The domain name of the TFTP server.
{src_file} <path_filename 64> - Used to identify the parameter “path_filename”. The pathname specifies the pathname on the TFTP server. It can be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname. The drive ID can be specified in this string.
image_id - Specifies the firmware image ID. If image ID is not specified, it refers to the boot_up image. unit - Specifies which unit on the stacking system. If it is not specified, it refers to the master unit.
all - When all is specified, the firmware image on all units will be updated.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To download firmware from TFTP:
574
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# download firmware_fromTFTP 10.54.71.1 src_file px.had
Command: download firmware_fromTFTP 10.54.71.1 src_file px.had
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download firmware...................... Done. Do not power off!
Please wait, programming flash......... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
download cfg_fromTFTP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to download configuration file from the TFTP server.
download cfg_fromTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] {src_file}
<path_filename 64> {[<config_id 1-2> | increment]}
This command is used to download a configuration file from a TFTP server.
ipaddr - The IP address of the TFTP server.
ipv6addr - The IPV6 address of the TFTP server.
domain_name - The domain name of the TFTP server.
src_file - Used to identify the parameter “path_filename”.
path_filename - The pathname specifies the pathname on the TFTP server. It can be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname.
config_id - Specifies the configuration file ID. I If cfg_id is not specified, it refers to the boot_up configuration file.
increment - This argument is only required for system which does not have file system and only support one configuration file since the download of a configuration will automatically apply the setting to the system. If increment is specified, then the existing configuration will not be cleared before applying of the new configuration. If it is not specified, then the existing configuration will be cleared before applying of the new configuration.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To download configuration from TFTP:
DGS-3450:admin# download cfg_fromTFTP 10.54.71.1 src_file cfg01.txt
Command: download cfg_fromTFTP 10.54.71.1 src_file cfg01.txt
Connecting to server.................…. Done.
Download configuration................. Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
upload cfg_toTFTP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to upload a configuration file from device to TFTP server. This command is required to be supported when file system is not supported on device’s FLASH EPROM.
upload cfg_toTFTP cfg_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>]
{dest_file} <path_filename 64> {<config_id 1-2>} {[include | exclude | begin]
<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin]
<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin]
<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}
This command is used to upload a configuration file from the device to the TFTP server.
ipaddr - The IP address of the TFTP server.
575
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
upload cfg_toTFTP
Restrictions
ipv6addr - The IPV6 address of the TFTP server.
domain_name - The domain name of the TFTP server.
dest_file - Used to identify the parameter “path_filename”.
path_filename - The pathname specifies the pathname on the TFTP server. It can be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname.
config_id - Specifies the configuration file ID. I If cfg_id is not specified, it refers to the boot_up configuration file.
filter_string - A filter string is enclosed by symbol. Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the character. The filter string is case sensitive.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To upload configuration from TFTP:
DGS-3450:admin# upload cfg_toTFTP 10.48.74.121 dest_file C:\test
Command: upload cfg_toTFTP 10.48.74.121 dest_file C:\test
Connecting to server... Done.
Upload Configuration... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
upload log_toTFTP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to upload a log file from device to TFTP server. This command is required to be supported when file system is not supported on device’s FLASH EPROM.
upload log_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> |<domain_name 255>] {dest_file}
<path_filename 64>
This command is used to upload a log file from device to TFTP server.
ipaddr - The IP address of the TFTP server.
ipv6addr - The IPV6 address of the TFTP server.
domain_name - The domain name of the TFTP server.
dest_file - Used to identify the parameter “path_filename”.
path_filename - The pathname specifies the pathname on the TFTP server. It can be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To upload a log file from TFTP server:
DGS-3450:admin# upload log_toTFTP 10.48.74.121 dest_file C:\LOG
Command: upload log_toTFTP 10.48.74.121 dest_file C:\LOG
Connecting to server... Done.
Upload log... Done.
DGS-3450:admin#
576
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
upload attack_log_toTFTP
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to upload the attack log on a unit.
upload attack_log_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> |<domain_name 255>] {dest_file}
<path_filename 64> {unit <unit_id 1-12>}
This command is used to upload the attack log on a unit.
ipaddr - The IP address of the TFTP server.
ipv6addr - The IPV6 address of the TFTP server.
domain_name - The domain name of the TFTP server.
dest_file - Used to identify the parameter “path_filename”.
path_filename - Specifies the path name on the TFTP server to hold the attack log.
unit - The attack log messages on the specified unit will be uploaded to the TFTP server. If it is not specified, it refers to the master unit.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To upload the master’s dangerous log:
DGS-3450:admin# upload attack_log 10.90.90.1 dest_file C:\alert.txt
Command: upload attack_log 10.90.90.1 dest_file C:\alert.txt
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
577
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
83
T
IME AND
SNTP C
OMMANDS
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) (an adaptation of the Network Time Protocol (NTP)) commands in the
Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config sntp show sntp enable sntp disable sntp config time config time_zone config dst show time config sntp ipv6server
Parameters
{primary <ipaddr> | secondary <ipaddr> | poll-interval <int 30-99999>}
<date ddmthyyyy> <time hh:mm:ss>
{operator [+ | -] | hour <gmt_hour 0-13> | min <minute 0-59>}
[disable | repeating {s_week <start_week 1-4,last> | s_day <start_day sun-sat>| s_mth <start_mth 1-12> | s_time <start_time hh:mm> | e_week <end_week 1-
4,last> | e-day <end_day sun-sat> | e_mth <end_mth 1-12> | e_time <end_time hh:mm> | offset [30 | 60 | 90 | 120]} | annual {s_date <start_date 1-31> | s_mth
<start_mth 1-12> | s_time <start_time hh:mm> | e_date <end_date 1-31> | e_mth <end_mth 1-12> | e_time <end_time hh:mm> | offset [30 | 60 | 90 | 120]}]
{primary <ipv6addr> | secondary <ipv6addr>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config sntp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to setup SNTP service.
config sntp {primary <ipaddr> | secondary <ipaddr> | poll-interval <int 30-99999>}
Use this command to configure SNTP service from an SNTP server. SNTP must be enabled for this command to function (See enable sntp).
primary
− This is the primary server the SNTP information will be taken from.
•
<ipaddr>
− The IP address of the primary server.
secondary
− This is the secondary server the SNTP information will be taken from in the event the primary server is unavailable.
•
<ipaddr>
− The IP address for the secondary server.
poll-interval <int 30-99999>
− This is the interval between requests for updated SNTP information. The polling interval ranges from 30 to 99,999 seconds.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. SNTP service must be enabled for this command to function (enable sntp).
Example usage:
To configure SNTP settings:
578
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config sntp primary 10.1.1.1 secondary 10.1.1.2 poll-interval 30
Command: config sntp primary 10.1.1.1 secondary 10.1.1.2 poll-interval 30
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show sntp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the SNTP information.
show sntp
This command will display SNTP settings information including the source IP address, time and poll interval.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display SNTP configuration information:
DGS-3450:admin# show sntp
Command: show sntp
Current Time Source : System Clock
SNTP : Disabled
SNTP Primary Server : 10.1.1.1
SNTP Secondary Server : 10.1.1.2
SNTP Poll Interval : 720 sec
DGS-3450:admin#
enable sntp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
To enable SNTP server support.
enable sntp
This will enable SNTP support. SNTP service must be separately configured (see config
sntp). Enabling and configuring SNTP support will override any manually configured system time settings.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. SNTP settings must be configured for SNTP to function (config sntp).
Example usage:
To enable the SNTP function:
579
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# enable sntp
Command: enable sntp
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable sntp
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
To disable SNTP server support.
disable sntp
This will disable SNTP support. SNTP service must be separately configured (see config
sntp).
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example:
To disable SNTP support:
DGS-3450:admin# disable sntp
Command: disable sntp
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config time
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to manually configure system time and date settings.
config time <date ddmthyyyy> <time hh:mm:ss>
This will configure the system time and date settings. These will be overridden if SNTP is configured and enabled.
date – Express the date using two numerical characters for the day of the month, three alphabetical characters for the name of the month, and four numerical characters for the year. For example: 03aug2003.
time – Express the system time using the format hh:mm:ss, that is, two numerical characters each for the hour using a 24-hour clock, the minute and second. For example: 19:42:30.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Manually configured system time and date settings are overridden if SNTP support is enabled.
Example usage:
To manually set system time and date settings:
DGS-3450:admin# config time 30jun2003 16:30:30
Command: config time 30jun2003 16:30:30
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
580
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config time_zone
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to determine the time zone used in order to adjust the system clock.
config time_zone {operator [+ | -] | hour <gmt_hour 0-13> | min <minute 0-59>}
This will adjust system clock settings according to the time zone. Time zone settings will adjust SNTP information accordingly.
operator – Choose to add (+) or subtract (-) time to adjust for time zone relative to GMT.
hour – Select the number of hours different from GMT.
min – Select the number of minutes difference added or subtracted to adjust the time zone.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure time zone settings:
DGS-3450:admin# config time_zone operator + hour 2 min 30
Command: config time_zone operator + hour 2 min 30
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config dst
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to enable and configure time adjustments to allow for the use of Daylight Savings Time (DST).
config dst [disable | repeating {s_week <start_week 1-4,last> | s_day <start_day sun-sat> | s_mth <start_mth 1-12> | s_time start_time hh:mm> | e_week <end_week 1-4,last> | e_day <end_day sun-sat> | e_mth <end_mth 1-12> | e_time <end_time hh:mm> | offset [30 | 60 |
90 | 120]} | annual {s_date start_date 1-31> | s_mth <start_mth 1-12> | s_time <start_time hh:mm> | e_date <end_date 1-31> | e_mth <end_mth 1-12> | e_time <end_time hh:mm> | offset
[30 | 60 | 90 | 120]}]
DST can be enabled and configured using this command. When enabled this will adjust the system clock to comply with any DST requirement. DST adjustment effects system time for both manually configured time and time set using SNTP service.
disable – Disable the DST seasonal time adjustment for the Switch.
repeating – Using repeating mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment. Repeating mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified using a formula. For example, specify to begin DST on Saturday during the second week of April and end DST on Sunday during the last week of October.
annual – Using annual mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment. Annual mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified concisely. For example, specify to begin DST on
April 3 and end DST on October 14.
581
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config dst
s_week – Configure the week of the month in which DST begins.
<start_week 1-4,last> – The number of the week during the month in which DST begins where 1 is the first week, 2 is the second week and so on, last is the last week of the month.
e_week – Configure the week of the month in which DST ends.
•
<end_week 1-4,last> – The number of the week during the month in which DST ends where
1 is the first week, 2 is the second week and so on, last is the last week of the month.
s_day – Configure the day of the week in which DST begins.
•
<start_day sun-sat> – The day of the week in which DST begins expressed using a three character abbreviation (sun, mon, tue, wed, thu, fri, sat)
e_day – Configure the day of the week in which DST ends.
•
<end_day sun-sat> – The day of the week in which DST ends expressed using a three character abbreviation (sun, mon, tue, wed, thu, fri, sat)
s_mth – Configure the month in which DST begins.
•
<start_mth 1-12> – The month to begin DST expressed as a number.
e_mth – Configure the month in which DST ends.
•
<end_mth 1-12> – The month to end DST expressed as a number.
s_time – Configure the time of day to begin DST.
•
<start_time hh:mm> - Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, in hours and minutes.
e_time – Configure the time of day to end DST.
•
<end_time hh:mm> – Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, in hours and minutes.
s_date – Configure the specific date (day of the month) to begin DST.
•
<start_date 1-31> – The start date is expressed numerically.
e_date – Configure the specific date (day of the month) to begin DST.
•
<end_date 1-31> – The end date is expressed numerically.
offset [30 | 60 | 90 | 120] – Indicates number of minutes to add or to subtract during the summertime.
The possible offset times are 30, 60, 90, and 120. The default value is 60.
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure daylight savings time on the Switch:
DGS-3450:admin# config dst repeating s_week 2 s_day tue s_mth 4 s_time 15:00 e_week 2 e_day wed e_mth 10 e_time 15:30 offset 30
Command: config dst repeating s_week 2 s_day tue s_mth 4 s_time 15:00 e_week 2 e_day wed e_mth 10 e_time 15:30 offset 30
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
582
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show time
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current time settings and status.
show time
This will display system time and date configuration as well as display current system time.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To show the time currently set on the Switch’s System clock:
DGS-3450:admin# show time
Command: show time
Current Time Source : System Clock
Boot Time : 27 Nov 2008 09:33:16
Current Time : 27 Nov 2008 16:17:45
Time Zone : GMT +00:00
Daylight Saving Time : Disabled
Offset in minutes : 60
Repeating From : Apr 1st Sun 00:00
To : Oct last Sun 00:00
Annual From : 29 Apr 00:00
To : 12 Oct 00:00
DGS-3450:admin#
config sntp ipv6server
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the IPv6 server for the SNTP function.
config sntp ipv6server {primary <ipv6addr> | secondary <ipv6addr>}
If both IPv4 and IPv6 servers are configured, the IPv4 server has the higher priority, it first sync its time to the IPv4 server.
primary <ipv6addr> - Specifies the primary SNTP IPv6 server address.
secondary <ipv6addr> - Specifies the secondary SNTP IPv6 server address.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure SNTP (primary IPv6 server: 1000::1, secondary IPv6 server: 1000::2):
DGS-3450:admin#config sntp ipv6server primary 1000::1 secondary 1000::2
Command: config sntp ipv6server primary 1000::1 secondary 1000::2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
583
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
84
T
IME
R
ANGE
C
OMMANDS
The Time Range commands are used in conjunction with the Access Profile commands listed in the previous chapter to determine a starting point and an ending point, based on days of the week, when an Access Profile configuration will be enabled on the Switch. Once configured here, the time range are to be applied to an access profile rule using the config
access_profile profile_id command.
NOTE: The Time Range commands are based on the time settings of the Switch. Make sure to configure the time for the Switch appropriately for these commands using commands listed in the
Time and SNTP Commands chapter later in this manual.
The Time Range commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command Parameters
config time_range show time_range
<range_name 32> [hours start_time <time hh:mm:ss> end_time <time hh:mm:ss> weekdays <daylist> | delete]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config time_range
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure a time range in which an access profile rule is to be enabled.
config time_range <range_name 32> [hours start_time <time hh:mm:ss> end_time <time hh:mm:ss> weekdays <daylist> | delete]
This command is to be used in conjunction with an access profile rule to determine a period of time when an access profile and an associated rule are to be enabled on the Switch. Remember, this time range can only be applied to one period of time and also, it is based on the time set on the Switch.
range_name 32 – Enter a name of no more than 32 alphanumeric characters that will be used to identify this time range on the Switch. This range name will be used in the config
access_profile profile_id command to identify the access profile and associated rule to be enabled for this time range.
hours – This parameter is used to set the time in the day that this time range is to be set using the following parameters:
•
start_time <time hh:mm:ss>
− Use this parameter to identify the starting time of the time range, in hours, minutes and seconds, based on the 24-hour time system.
•
end_time <time hh:mm:ss>
− Use this parameter to identify the ending time of the time range, in hours, minutes and seconds, based on the 24-hour time system.
weekdays – Use this parameter to determine the days of the week to set this time range.
•
<daylist>
− The user may set the days of the week here to set this time range in the three letter format (mon, tue, wed…). To specify a day range, separate the daylist using a dash (mon-fri would mean Monday through Friday). To specify a list of days in a week, separate the daylist using a comma, with no spaces (mon,tue,fri would mean
Monday, Tuesday and Friday).
delete – Use this parameter to delete a previously configured time range from the system.
584
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config time_range
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the time range time1 to be between 6:30 a.m. and 9:40 p.m., Monday to Friday:
DGS-3450:admin# config time_range time1 hours start_time 6:30:00 end_time 21:40:00 weekdays mon-fri
Command: config time_range time1 hours start_time 6:30:00 end_time 21:40:00 weekdays monfri
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show time_range
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
To view the current configurations of the time range set on the Switch.
show time_range
This command is used to display the currently configured time range(s) set on the Switch.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To view the current time range settings.
DGS-3450:admin# show time_range
Command: show time_range
Time Range information
--------------------------------------------
Range name : time1
Weekdays : Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri
Start time : 06:30:00
End time : 21:40:00
Total entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
585
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
85
T
RACE
R
OUTE
C
OMMANDS
The Trace Route commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
traceroute traceroute6
Parameters
[<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {ttl <value 1-60> | port <value 30000-64900> | timeout <sec 1-65535> | probe <value 1-9>}
<ipv6addr> {ttl <value 1-60> | port <value 30000-64900> | timeout <sec 1-
65535> | probe <value 1-9>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
traceroute
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
This command is used to trace the routed path between the switch and a destination end station.
traceroute [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {ttl <value 1-60> | port <value 30000-
64900> | timeout <sec 1-65535> | probe <value 1-9>}
To track the route of an IP packet, traceroute launches UDP probe packets with a small TTL
(time to live) and then listens for an ICMP "time exceeded" reply from a gateway. Probes start with a TTL of one and increase by one until either an ICMP "port unreachable" is returned, indicating that the packet reached the host, or the maximum number of hops is exceeded. At each TTL setting, one probe packet is launched (the number can be changed by specifying the parameter “probe”) and traceroute prints a line showing the round trip time and the address of the gateway of each probe, or time out of each probe. If there is no response within the 5 seconds timeout interval, an asterisk (*) is printed for that probe.
ipaddr - IP address of the destination end station.
<domain_name 255> - The domain name of the destination end station.
ttl <value 1-60> - The time to live value of the trace route request. This is the maximum number of routers that a trace route packet can cross, while seeking the network path between two devices. The range for the TTL is 1 to 60 hops.
port <value 30000–64900> - Specify the destination UDP port number. The UDP port range is from 30000 to 64900.
timeout <sec 1-65535> - Define the timeout period while waiting for a response from the remote device. A value of 1 to 65535 seconds can be specified. The default is 5 seconds.
probe <value 1-9> - Specify the number of probe packets for each TTL. The default is 1.
NOTE: The probe will be terminated once the destination is reached.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To trace the routed path between the switch and 10.48.74.121:
586
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# traceroute 10.48.74.121 probe 3
Command: traceroute 10.48.74.121 probe 3
<10 ms 10.12.73.254
<10 ms 10.12.73.254
<10 ms 10.12.73.254
<10 ms 10.19.68.1
<10 ms 10.19.68.1
* Request timed out.
<10 ms 10.48.74.121
Trace complete.
DGS-3450:admin#
To trace the routed path between the switch and intra.example.com:
DGS-3450:admin# traceroute intra.example.com timeout 10
Command: traceroute intra.example.com timeout 10
<10 ms 10.12.73.254
<10 ms 10.19.68.1
<10 ms intra.example.com [10.48.74.100]
Trace complete.
DGS-3450:admin#
traceroute6
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
This command is used to trace the IPv6 routed path between the switch and a destination end station.
traceroute6 <ipv6addr> {ttl <value 1-60> | port <value 30000-64900> | timeout <sec 1-
65535> | probe <value 1-9>}
To track the route of an IPv6 packet, traceroute6 launches UDP probe packets with a small
TTL (time to live) and then listens for an ICMP "time exceeded" reply from a gateway. Probes start with a TTL of one and increase by one until either an ICMP "port unreachable" is returned, indicating that the packet reached the host, or the maximum number of hops is exceeded. At each TTL setting, one probe are launched (the number can be changed by specifying the parameter “probe”) and traceroute prints a line showing the round trip time and the address of the gateway of each probe, or time out of each probe. If there is no response within the 5 seconds timeout interval, an asterisk (*) is printed for that probe.
ipv6addr - IPv6 address of the destination end station.
ttl <value 1-60> - The time to live value of the trace route request. This is the maximum number of routers that a trace route v6 packet can cross, while seeking the network path between two devices. The range for the TTL is 1 to 60 hops.
port <value 30000-64900> - Specify the destination UDP port number. The UDP port range is from 30000 to 64900.
timeout <sec 1-65535> - Define the timeout period while waiting for a response from the remote device. A value of 1 to 65535 seconds can be specified. The default is 5 seconds.
probe <value 1-9> - Specify the number of probe packets for each hop. The default is 1.
NOTE: The probe will be terminated once the destination is reached.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. Restrictions
Example usage:
To trace the IPv6 routed path between the switch and 3000::1:
587
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# traceroute6 3000::1 probe 3
Command: traceroute6 3000::1 probe 3
<10 ms 1345:142::11
<10 ms 1345:142::11
<10 ms 1345:142::11
<10 ms 2011:14::100
<10 ms 2011:14::100
* Request timed out.
<10 ms 3000::1
Trace complete.
DGS-3450:admin#
To trace the IPv6 routed path between the switch and 1210:100::11 with port 40000:
DGS-3450:admin# traceroute6 1210:100::11 port 40000
Command: traceroute6 1210:100::11 port 40000
<10 ms 3100::25
<10 ms 4130::100
<10 ms 1210:100::11
Trace complete.
DGS-3450:admin#
588
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
86
T
RAFFIC
C
ONTROL
C
OMMANDS
There are two modes used for packet storm control on the Switch, Drop mode and Shutdown mode. Drop mode is hardware-based (chip-based) and Shutdown mode is a function of software. The two modes are incompatible with each other, therefore it is necessary to determine which method is best suited to the network environment where it is used.
Drop mode
The Drop mode storm control function is used to configure three chip-based hardware tables for state and a single threshold value (threshold value is the same for all three tables). If the threshold value is exceeded on a port, the Switch will drop all packets on the port. In Drop mode, some parameters such as “time interval” and “count down,” as well as the
CLI command, “config traffic control auto_recover_time” are software-based functions and therefore not applicable for
Drop mode traffic control.
Shutdown mode
Shutdown mode is a software-based storm control function. When shutdown mode is used, the state of the hardware tables used for Drop mode are set to disable. Shutdown mode does not support DLF storm control. All configurations except the port state are saved in the software table. The CPU receives the port state from the counter table (updated at
2 second intervals). If a counter is exceeded on a port, the CPU is shutdown. All packets, except BPDU packets, on the port are dropped. If the port remains in shutdown status for a configurable period (the count down value), the port enters shutdown forever status. The port link is down and remains disabled until either the configurable recover timer is timed out or the CLI command “config ports [ <portlist> | all ] state enable" is manually entered.
The Traffic Control commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
config traffic control config traffic trap show traffic control config traffic control auto_recover_time config traffic control_recover
Parameters
[<portlist> | all] {broadcast [enable| disable] | multicast [enable | disable] | [dlf | unicast ] [enable | disable] | action [ drop | shutdown ] | threshold <value 0-
255000 > | countdown [<min 0> | <min 3-30> | disable] | time_interval <sec 5-
600>}
[ none | storm_occurred | storm_cleared | both ]
{<portlist>}
[<min 0> | <min 1-65535>]
[<portlist> | all]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config traffic control
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure broadcast/multicast packet storm control. Shutdown mode is provided to monitor the traffic rate in addition to the storm control drop mode. If traffic rate is too high, this port will be shut down.
config traffic control [<portlist> | all] {broadcast [enable| disable] | multicast [enable | disable] | [dlf | unicast ] [enable | disable] | action [ drop | shutdown ] | threshold
<value 0-255000 > | countdown [<min 0> | <min 3-30> | disable] | time_interval <sec 5-
600>}
The config traffic control command configures broadcast/multicast/DLF storm control.
portlist - Used to specify a range of ports to be configured.
broadcast - Enable or disable broadcast storm control.
589
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config traffic control
Restrictions
multicast - Enable or disable multicast storm control.
dlf - Enable or disable unknown packet storm control. ( Supported for drop mode only)
action - One of the two options for action are specified for storm control, shutdown of drop mode. Shutdown mode is a function of software, drop mode is implemented by the chip. If shutdown mode is specified, it is necessary to configure values for the back_off and time_interval parameters.
threshold - The upper threshold, at which point the specified storm control is triggered. The
<value>is the number of broadcast/multicast packets per second received by the switch that will trigger the storm traffic control measure. The threshold is expressed as PPS (packets per second) and must be an unsigned integer.
time_interval - The sampling interval of received packet counts. The possible value will be 5-
600 seconds. The parameter is not applicable if “drop” (mode) is specified for the “action” parameter.
countdown - Timer for shutdown mode. If a port enters the shutdown Rx state and this timer runs out, port will be shutdown forever. The parameter is not applicable if “drop” (mode) is specified for the “action” parameter. Default is 0 minutes. 0 disables the forever state, meaning that the port will not enter the shut down forever state.
disable – Specifies that the countdown is disabled. The port will directly shutdown when the switch detects a storm.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the parameters so that the traffic control status is enabled on ports 1-12:
DGS-3450:admin# config traffic control 1-12 broadcast enable action shutdown threshold 1 countdown 5 time_interval 10
Command: config traffic control 1-12 broadcast enable action shutdown threshold 1 countdown 5 time_interval 10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config traffic trap
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure trap modes.
config traffic trap [ none | storm_occurred | storm_cleared | both ]
Occurred Mode: This trap is sent when a packet storm is detected by the packet storm mechanism.
Cleared Mode: This trap is sent when the packet storm is cleared by the packet storm mechanism.
none - No trap state is specified for storm control.
storm_occurred - Occurred mode is enabled and cleared mode is disabled.
storm_cleared - Occurred mode is disabled and cleared mode is enabled.
both - Both occurred and cleared modes are enabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable both the occurred mode and cleared mode traffic control traps:
590
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config traffic trap both
Command: config traffic trap both
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show traffic control
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current traffic control settings.
show traffic control { <portlist>}
The show traffic control command displays the current traffic control settings.
portlist - Used to specify the range of ports to be shown.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display the packet storm control configuration for all ports.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To display the traffic control parameters for ports 1 to 10:
DGS-3450:admin# show traffic control 1-10
Command: show traffic control 1-10
Traffic Control Trap : [None]
Traffic Control Auto Recover Time : 5 Minutes
Port Thres Broadcast Multicast Unicast Action Count Time Shutdown
hold Storm Storm Storm down Interval Forever
---- ------ --------- --------- -------- -------- ----- -------- --------
1 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Shutdown 5 10
2 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Shutdown 5 10
3 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Shutdown 5 10
4 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Shutdown 5 10
5 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Shutdown 5 10
6 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Shutdown 5 10
7 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Shutdown 5 10
8 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Shutdown 5 10
9 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Shutdown 5 10
10 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Shutdown 5 10
DGS-3450:admin#
config traffic control auto_recover_time
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to configure the traffic auto recover time used to specify the time allowed for a port to recover from shutdown forever status.
config traffic control auto_recover_time [<min 0> | <min 1-65535>]
Configure all ports’ auto recover time from shutdown forever state.
minutes - The time allowed for auto recovery from shutdown for a port. The default value is 0, so no auto recovery is possible; the port remains in shutdown forever mode. This requires manual entry of the CLI command “config ports [ <portlist> | all ] state enable" to return the port to a forwarding state.
The default value is 0, which means disable auto recover mode, shutdown forever.
591
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config traffic control auto_recover_time
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the auto recover time to 5 minutes:
DGS-3450:admin# config traffic control auto_recover_time 5
Command: config traffic control auto_recover_time 5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config traffic control_recover
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure traffic control recover for any or all ports.
config traffic control_recover [<portlist> | all]
Configuring a port for traffic control recover will require an administrator to restart the specified ports if storm control shuts down the port or ports. That is, if a storm triggers the action shutdown for a port, it will remain in the shutdown even if the threshold falls below the value that triggers the storm control action.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports to be configured here.
all - Specifies that all the ports will be included in the configuration.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
592
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
87
T
RAFFIC
S
EGMENTATION
C
OMMANDS
Traffic segmentation allows users to further sub-divide VLANs into smaller groups of ports that will help to reduce traffic on the VLAN. The VLAN rules take precedence, and then the traffic segmentation rules are applied.
Command
config traffic_segmentation show traffic_segmentation
Parameters
[<portlist> | all] forward_list [null | all | <portlist>]
{<portlist>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
config traffic_segmentation
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure traffic segmentation on the Switch.
config traffic_segmentation [<portlist> | all] forward_list [null | all | <portlist>]
The config traffic_segmentation command is used to configure traffic segmentation on the
Switch.
<portlist>
− Specifies a port or range of ports that will be configured for traffic segmentation. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma. (ex: 1-3,7-9)
forward_list
− Specifies a range of ports that will receive forwarded frames from the ports specified in the portlist, above.
•
null
− No ports are specified.
•
all – All ports are specified.
•
<portlist>
− Specifies a range of ports for the forwarding list. This list must be on the same Switch previously specified for traffic segmentation (i.e. following the <portlist> specified above for config traffic_segmentation). The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma. (ex:1-3,7-9)
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure ports 1 through 5 to be able to forward frames to port 6 through 10:
DGS-3450:admin# config traffic_segmentation 1-5 forward_list 6-10
Command: config traffic_segmentation 1-5 forward_list 6-10
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
593
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
show traffic_segmentation
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the current traffic segmentation configuration on the Switch.
show traffic_segmentation {<portlist>}
The show traffic_segmentation command is used to display the current traffic segmentation configuration on the Switch.
<portlist>
− Specifies a port or range of ports for which the current traffic segmentation configuration on the Switch will be displayed. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. Non-contiguous portlist entries are separated by a comma. (ex: 1-3,7-9)
The port lists for segmentation and the forward list must be on the same Switch.
Example usage:
To display the current traffic segmentation configuration on the Switch.
DGS-3450:admin# show traffic_segmentation
Command: show traffic_segmentation
Traffic Segmentation Table
Port Forward Portlist
---- -------------------------------------------------
1:1 1:1-1:25
1:2 1:1-1:25
1:3 1:1-1:25
1:4 1:1-1:25
1:5 1:1-1:25
1:6 1:1-1:25
1:7 1:1-1:25
1:8 1:1-1:25
1:9 1:1-1:25
1:10 1:1-1:25
1:11 1:1-1:25
1:12 1:1-1:25
1:13 1:1-1:25
1:14 1:1-1:25
1:15 1:1-1:25
1:16 1:1-1:25
1:17 1:1-1:25
1:18 1:1-1:25
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page Enter Next Entry a All
594
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
88
T
RUSTED
H
OST
C
OMMANDS
Trusted Host is a security feature which denies an illegal network address to access the switch.
The Trusted Host commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create trusted_host delete trusted_host show trusted_host
Parameters
[<ipaddr> | network <network_address>]
[ipaddr <ipaddr> | network <network_address> | all]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create trusted_host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create the trusted host.
create trusted_host [<ipaddr> | network <network_address>]
The create trusted host command creates the trusted host. The switch allows you to specify up to three IP addresses that are allowed to manage the switch via in-band SNMP or Telnet based management software. These IP addresses must be members of the Management
VLAN. If no IP addresses are specified, then there is nothing to prevent any IP address from accessing the switch, provided the user knows the Username and Password.
When the access interface is not specified, the trusted host will be created for all interfaces.
ipaddr - The IP address of the trusted host.
network - The network address of the trusted network. The form of network address is xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/y.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a trusted host:
DGS-3450:admin# create trusted_host 10.48.74.121
Command: create trusted_host 10.48.74.121
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete trusted_host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to delete a trusted host entry made using the create trusted_host command above.
delete trusted_host [ipaddr <ipaddr> | network <network_address> | all]
The delete trusted_host command is used to delete a trusted host entry made using the create trusted_host command above.
ipaddr - The IP address of the trusted host.
network - The network address of the trusted network.
595
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
delete trusted_host
Restrictions
all - All trusted hosts will be deleted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the trusted host:
DGS-3450:admin# delete trusted_host 10.48.74.121
Command: delete trusted_host 10.48.74.121
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show trusted_host
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display a list of trusted hosts entered on the switch using the create trusted_host command above.
show trusted_host
The show trusted host command displays the trusted hosts.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display a trusted host:
DGS-3450:admin# show trusted_host
Command: show trusted_host
Management Stations
IP Addrress
------------------------
10.48.93.100
10.51.17.1
10.50.95.90
Total Entries : 3
DGS-3450:admin#
596
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
89
U
NICAST
R
OUTE
C
OMMANDS
The Unicast Route commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
create iproute delete iproute show iproute config route preference show route preference create route redistribute dst rip delete route redistribute config route redistribute dst rip show route redistribute
Parameters
[default | <network_address>] <ipaddr> {<metric 1-65535>} {[primary|backup]}
[default | <network_address>] <ipaddr>
{[<network_address> | <ipaddr>]} {[static | rip | hardware]}
[static | default | rip] <value 1-999>
{[local | static | default | rip]} src [local | static] {metric <value 0-16>}
[dst rip src [static | local]] src [local | static]] {metric <value 0-16>}
{dst rip | src [static | local]}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
create iproute
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to create an IP route entry to the switch’s IP routing table.
create iproute [default | <network_address>]<ipaddr> {<metric 1-65535>} {[primary | backup]}
Use this command to create an IP static route.
Selecting “primary” or “backup” means the newly created route is a floating static route.
If none of the following, “primary”, or “backup” is selected, the static route will:
1. be primary if there is no primary route that has the same destination;
2. be backup if there has been a primary route that has the same destination.
3. fail to create if there have been a primary route and a backup route that have the same destination.
default - Create an IP default route (0.0.0.0/0).
network_address - The IP address and net mask of the destination of the route. The address and the mask can be set by the traditional format (for example, 10.1.2.3/255.0.0.0 or in CIDR format, 10.1.2.3/16).
ipaddr - The IP address for the next hop router.
metric - The default setting is 1.
primary - Specify the route as the primary route to the destination.
backup - Specify the route as the backup route to the destination.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add a floating static route:
597
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# create iproute 10.48.74.121/255.0.0.0 10.1.1.254 primary
Command: create iproute 10.48.74.121/8 10.1.1.254 primary
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete iproute default
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete an IP route entry from the switch’s IP routing table.
delete iproute [default | <network_address>] <ipaddr>
Use this command to delete an IP static route.
default - Deletes an IP default route (0.0.0.0/0).
network_address - The IP address and net mask of the destination of the route. The address and the mask can be set by the traditional format (for example, 10.1.2.3/255.0.0.0 or in CIDR format, 10.1.2.3/16).
ipaddr - Specify the next hop IP address of the route need to be deleted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete an IP static route:
DGS-3450:admin# delete iproute 10.48.74.121/255.0.0.0 10.1.1.254
Command: delete iproute 10.48.74.121/8 10.1.1.254
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show iproute
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the switch’s current IP routing table.
show iproute {[<network_address> | <ipaddr>]} {[static | rip | hardware]}
Use this command to display the switch’s IP routing table.
network_address - Specify the destination network address of the route to be displayed.
ipaddr - Specify the destination IP address of the route to be displayed. The longest prefix matched route will be displayed.
static - Specify to display only static routes. One static route may be active or inactive.
rip - Specify to display only RIP routes.
hardware - Specify to display only the routes that have been written into the chip.
None.
Example usage:
To display the contents of the IP routing table:
598
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show iproute
Command: show iproute
Routing Table
IP Address/Netmask Gateway Interface Cost Protocol
------------------ --------------- ------------ -------- --------
10.1.1.0/24 0.0.0.0 System 1 Local
192.168.1.0/24 0.0.0.0 ip1 1 Local
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3450:admin# show iproute static
Command: show iproute static
Routing Table
IP Address/Netmask Gateway Cost Protocol Backup Status
------------------ --------------- ----- -------- -------- --------
0.0.0.0/0 101.1.1.101 1 Default Backup Inactive
12.1.0.0/16 61.1.1.61 1 Static Backup Inactive
12.1.0.0/16 101.1.1.101 1 Static Primary Inactive
123.0.0.0/8 101.1.1.7 2 Static Primary Active
Total Entries : 4
DGS-3450:admin# show iproute hardware
Command: show iproute hardware
Routing Table
IP Address/Netmask Gateway Interface
------------------ --------------- ------------
0.0.0.0/0 10.1.1.11 ip1
10.1.1.0/24 0.0.0.0 System
100.1.1.0/24 10.1.1.11 ip1
192.168.1.0/24 10.1.1.11 ip1
Total Entries : 4
DGS-3450:admin#
config route preference
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure route type preference.
config route preference [static | default | rip] <value 1-999>
Use this command to configure route preference. The route with smaller preference has higher priority. The preference for local routes is fixed to 0.
static - Configure the preference of static route. The default value is 60.
default - Configure the preference of default route. The default value is 1.
rip - Configure the preference of RIP route. The default value is 100.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
599
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Example usage:
To configure the route preference for static routes to 70:
DGS-3450:admin# config route preference static 70
Command: config route preference static 70
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show route preference
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the route preference of each route type.
show route preference {[local | static | default | rip]}
This command is used to display route preference setting.
local - Display the preference of local route.
static - Display the preference of static route.
default - Display the preference of default route.
rip - Display the preference of RIP route.
None.
Example usage:
To display the route preference for all route types:
DGS-3450:admin# show route preference
Command: show route preference
Route Preference Settings
Protocol Preference
---------- ----------
RIP 100
Static 60
Default 999
Local 0
DGS-3450:admin#
create route redistribute dst rip
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to redistribute routing information from other routing protocols to RIP.
create route redistribute dst rip src [local | static] {metric <value 0-16>}
This command is used to redistribute routing information from other routing protocols to RIP.
When the metric is specified as 0, the metric in the original route will become the metric of the redistributing RIP routes transparently. If the metric of the original routes is greater than
16, the route will be not redistributed.
dst - Specify the target protocol.
src - Specify the source protocol.
static - To redistribute static routes to RIP.
local - To redistribute local routes to RIP.
metric - Specifies the RIP route metric value for the redistributed routes. The valid value is 0 to 16. The default value is 0.
600
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
create route redistribute dst rip
Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add route redistribution settings:
DGS-3450:admin# create route redistribute dst rip src local metric 2
Command: create route redistribute dst rip src local metric 2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete route redistribute
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete route redistribute configuration on the switch.
delete route redistribute [dst rip src [static | local]]
This command is used to stop redistribution of routes from one source protocol to another destination protocol.
dst - Specify the target protocol.
src - Specify the source protocol.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete route redistribution settings:
DGS-3450:admin# delete route redistribute dst rip src local
Command: delete route redistribute dst rip src local
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config route redistribute dst rip
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to update the metric to be associated with the redistributed routes from a specific protocol to RIP protocol.
config route redistribute dst rip src [local | static] {metric <value 0-16>}
This command is used to update the metric to be associated with the redistributed routes from a specific protocol to RIP protocol.
dst - Specify the target protocol.
src - Specify the source protocol.
static - To redistribute static routes to RIP.
local - To redistribute local routes to RIP.
metric - Specifies the RIP metric value for the redistributed routes. The valid value is 0 to 16.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure route redistributions:
601
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config route redistribute dst rip src static
Command: config route redistribute dst rip src static
Succuss.
DGS-3450:admin#
show route redistribute
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the route redistribution settings on the switch.
show route redistribute {dst [rip] | src [static | local]}
This command is used to display the route redistributions settings.
dst - Specify the target protocol.
rip - Display the redistribution with the target protocol RIP.
src - Specify the source protocol.
static - Display the redistribution with the source static.
local - Display the redistribution with the source local.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all route redistributions.
None.
Example usage:
To display route redistributions:
DGS-3450:admin# show route redistribute
Command: show route redistribute
Route Redistribution Settings
Source Destination Type Metric
Protocol Protocol
-------- ------------ -------- ----------
LOCAL RIP All 2
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3450:admin#
602
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
90
U
TILIZATION
C
OMMANDS
The Utilization commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
show utilization
Parameters
[cpu | ports | dram { unit <unit_id>} | flash {unit <unit_id>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
show utilization
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display real-time port utilization statistics.
show utilization [cpu | ports | dram { unit <unitid>}| flash {unit <unitid>}]
The show utilization command displays real-time CPU ,ports,dram or flash utilization statistics
ports - Specifies a range of ports to be displayed. (UnitID:port number).
dram - To show dram memory utilization.
flash - To show flash memory utilization.
unit - Specifys the unit to be displayed. If not specified, all units will not be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To display the ports utilization:
603
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show utilization ports
Command: show utilization ports
Port TX/sec RX/sec Util Port TX/sec RX/sec Util
------ ------- ---------- ---- ------ ---------- ---------- ----
1:1 0 0 0 1:22 0 0 0
1:2 0 0 0 1:23 0 0 0
1:3 0 0 0 1:24 0 0 0
1:4 0 0 0 1:25 0 0 0
1:5 0 0 0 1:26 19 49 1
1:6 0 0 0 2:1 0 0 0
1:7 0 0 0 2:2 0 0 0
1:8 0 0 0 2:3 0 0 0
1:9 0 0 0 2:4 0 0 0
1:10 0 0 0 2:5 0 0 0
1:11 0 0 0 2:6 0 0 0
1:12 0 0 0 2:7 0 30 1
1:13 0 0 0 2:8 0 0 0
1:14 0 0 0 2:9 30 0 1
1:15 0 0 0 2:10 0 0 0
1:16 0 0 0 2:11 0 0 0
1:17 0 0 0 2:12 0 0 0
1:18 0 0 0 2:13 0 0 0
1:19 0 0 0 2:14 0 0 0
1:20 0 0 0 2:15 0 0 0
1:21 0 0 0 2:16 0 0 0
Port TX/sec RX/sec Util Port TX/sec RX/sec Util
------ -------- -------- ------ ------ ---------- ---------- ----
2:17 0 0 0
2:18 0 0 0
2:19 0 0 0
2:20 0 0 0
2:21 0 0 0
2:22 0 0 0
2:23 0 0 0
2:24 0 0 0
2:25 0 0 0
2:26 11 2 1
To display the CPU utilization:
DGS-3450:admin# show utilization cpu
Command: show utilization cpu
CPU utilization :
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Five seconds – 20% One minute – 10% Five minutes – 70%
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To display DRAM utilization:
604
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show utilization dram
Command: show utilization dram
DRAM Utilization :
Total DRAM : 262,144 KB
Used DRAM : 212,568 KB
Utilization : 81%
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To display FLASH utilization:
DGS-3450:admin# show utilization flash
Command: show utilization flash
FLASH Memory Utilization :
Total FLASH : 16,384 KB
Used FLASH : 13,440 KB
Utilization : 82%
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
605
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
91
V
OICE
VLAN C
OMMANDS
The Voice VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
enable voice_vlan disable voice_vlan config voice_vlan priority config voice_vlan oui config voice_vlan ports config voice_vlan log state config voice_vlan aging_time show voice_vlan show voice_vlan oui show voice_vlan ports show voice_vlan voice_device show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device
Parameters
[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
<int 0-7>
[add | delete] <macaddr> <macmask> {description <desc 32>}
[<portlist> | all] [state [enable | disable] | mode [auto | manual]]
[enable | disable]
<min 1-65535>
{<portlist>}
{ports <portlist>}
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable voice_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable the global voice VLAN function on a switch.
enable voice_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
To enable the voice VLAN, the voice VLAN must be also assigned. At the same time, the
VLAN must be an existing static 802.1Q VLAN. To change the voice VLAN, the user must disable the voice VLAN function, and re-issue this command. By default, the global voice
VLAN state is disabled.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the name of the voice VLAN. The maximum length is 32 characters. The name must be an existing static VLAN name.
vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> - Specify the VLAN ID of the voice VLAN. The ID must be an existing static VLAN ID.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable voice VLAN named v2:
606
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#enable voice_vlan v2
Command: enable voice_vlan v2
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable voice_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable the voice VLAN function on a switch.
disable voice_vlan
When the voice VLAN function is disabled, the voice VLAN will become unassigned.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable voice VLAN:
DGS-3450:admin#disable voice_vlan
Command: disable voice_vlan
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config voice_vlan priority
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure voice VLAN priority.
config voice_vlan priority <int 0-7>
The voice VLAN priority will be the priority associated with the voice VLAN traffic to distinguish the QoS of the voice traffic from data traffic.
<int 0-7> - Specify the priority of the voice VLAN. The range is 0 to 7. The default priority is 5.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set the priority of the voice VLAN to be six:
DGS-3450:admin#config voice_vlan priority 6
Command: config voice_vlan priority 6
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config voice_vlan oui
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Used to configure the user-defined voice traffic’s OUI.
config voice_vlan oui [add | delete] <macaddr> < macmask> {description <desc 32>}
The OUI is used to identify the voice traffic. There are a number of pre-defined OUIs. The
607
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config voice_vlan oui
Parameters
Restrictions user can further define the user-defined OUIs if needed. The user-defined OUI cannot be the same as the pre-defined OUI.
add - Specify to add a user-defined OUI of Voice device vendor.
delete - Specify to delete a user-defined OUI of Voice device vendor.
<macaddr> - Specify a user-defined OUI MAC address.
<macmask> - Specify a user-defined OUI MAC address mask.
description - Specify a description for the user-defined OUI.
<desc 32> - Specify a description for the user-defined OUI. The maximum length is 32 characters.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add a user-defined OUI of a voice device:
DGS-3450:admin#config voice_vlan oui add 00-0A-0B-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00
Command: config voice_vlan oui add 00-0A-0B-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config voice_vlan ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to enable or disable the voice VLAN function on ports or mode per port.
config voice_vlan ports [<portlist> | all] [state [enable | disable] | mode [auto | manual]]
This command is used to enable or disable the voice VLAN function on ports or mode per port.
<portlist> - Specify a range of ports to set.
all - Specify to set all ports.
state - Specify the voice VLAN function state on ports. The default state is disabled.
enable - Specify to enable the voice VLAN function state on ports.
disable - Specify to disable the voice VLAN function state on ports.
mode - The voice VLAN mode. The default mode is auto.
auto - When the mode is auto, the port may become the voice VLAN member port by autolearning. If the MAC address of the received packet matches the configured OUI, the port will be learned as dynamic member port. The dynamic membership will be removed via the aging out mechanism.
manual - When the mode is set to manual, the port needs to be manually added into or removed from the voice VLAN by 802.1Q VLAN configuration command.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure voice VLAN ports 1:4 to 1:6 to enable:
608
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#config voice_vlan ports 1:4-1:6 state enable
Command: config voice_vlan ports 1:4-1:6 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
To set voice VLAN ports 1:4 to 1:6 to auto mode:
DGS-3450:admin#config voice_vlan ports 1:4-1:6 mode auto
Command: config voice_vlan ports 1:4-1:6 mode auto
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config voice_vlan log state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure the voice VLAN log state.
config voice_vlan log state [enable | disable]
This command is used to configure the voice VLAN log state.
enable - Specify to enable the voice VLAN log state.
disable - Specify to disable the voice VLAN log state.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the voice VLAN log state:
DGS-3450:admin#config voice_vlan log state enable
Command: config voice_vlan log state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config voice_vlan aging_time
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to set the aging time of the voice VLAN.
config voice_vlan aging_time <min 1-65535>
The aging time is used to remove a port from voice VLAN if the port is an automatic VLAN member. When the last voice device stops sending traffic and the MAC address of this voice device is aged out, the voice VLAN aging timer will be started. The port will be removed from the voice VLAN after expiration of voice VLAN aging timer. If the voice traffic resumes during the aging time, the aging timer will be reset and stop.
<min 1-65535> - Specify the aging time. The range is 1 to 65535 minutes. The default value is 720 minutes.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To set 60 minutes as the aging time of voice VLAN:
609
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#config voice_vlan aging_time 60
Command: config voice_vlan aging_time 60
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show voice_vlan
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display voice VLAN global information.
show voice_vlan
This command is used to display voice VLAN global information.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display voice VLAN information:
DGS-3450:admin#show voice_vlan
Command: show voice_vlan
Voice VLAN State : Enabled
VLAN ID : 4094
VLAN Name : v2
Priority : 6
Aging Time : 60 minutes
Log State : Enabled
Member Ports :
Dynamic Member Ports :
DGS-3450:admin#
show voice_vlan oui
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the OUI information for voice VLAN.
show voice_vlan oui
This command is used to display the OUI information for voice VLAN.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display voice VLAN OUI:
610
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin#show voice_vlan oui
Command: show voice_vlan oui
OUI Address Mask Description
------------------ ----------------- --------------
00-01-E3-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Siemens
00-03-6B-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Cisco
00-09-6E-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Avaya
00-0A-0B-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00
00-0F-E2-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Huawei&3COM
00-60-B9-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 NEC&Philips
00-D0-1E-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Pingtel
00-E0-75-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Veritel
00-E0-BB-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 3COM
Total Entries: 9
DGS-3450:admin#
show voice_vlan ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display port voice VLAN information.
show voice_vlan ports {<portlist>}
This command is used to display port voice VLAN information.
<portlist> - Specify a range of ports to display.
None.
Example usage:
To display voice VLAN ports 1:1 to 1:3:
DGS-3450:admin#show voice_vlan ports 1:1-1:3
Command: show voice_vlan ports 1:1-1:3
Ports Status Mode
----- --------- --------
1:1 Disabled Auto
1:2 Disabled Auto
1:3 Disabled Auto
DGS-3450:admin#
show voice_vlan voice_device
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to show voice devices that are connected to the ports.
show voice_vlan voice_device {ports <portlist>}
The start time is the time when the device is detected on this port and the activate time is the latest time when the device sends the traffic.
{ports <portlist>} - Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
611
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
To display voice VLAN device ports 1:1 to 1:2:
DGS-3450:admin#show voice_vlan voice_device ports 1:1-1:2
Command: show voice_vlan voice_device ports 1:1-1:2
Ports Voice Device Start Time Last Active Time
----- ----------------- ---------------- ----------------
Total Entries : 0
DGS-3450:admin#
show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the voice devices that are discovered by LLDP-MED.
show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device
This command is used to display the voice devices that are discovered by LLDP-MED.
None.
None.
Example usage:
To display the voice devices that were discovered by LLDP-MED:
DGS-3450:admin# show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device
Command: show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device
Index : 1
Local Port : 1:1
Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-E0-BB-00-00-11
Port ID Subtype : Network Address
Port ID : 00-01-E3-00-00-00
Create Time : 10/6/2008 09:00
Remain Time : 120 Seconds
Index : 2
Local Port : 1:3
Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-E0-BB-00-00-12
Port ID Subtype : Network Address
Port ID : 00-01-E3-00-00-00
Create Time : 10/6/2008 09:00
Remain Time : 120 Seconds
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3450:admin#
612
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
92
W
EB
-
BASED
A
CCESS
C
ONTROL
(WAC) C
OMMANDS
The Web-based Access Control (WAC) commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the following table.
Command
enable wac disable wac config wac ports config wac method config wac default_redirpath config wac clear_default_redirpath config wac virtual_ip config wac switch_http_port create wac user delete wac config wac user config wac authorization attributes show wac show wac ports show wac user show wac auth_state ports clear wac auth_state
Parameters
[<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | idle_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time [<sec 0-300>]}(1)
[local | radius]
<string 128>
{ < ipaddr > | < ipv6addr > } (1)
< tcp_port_number 1-65535> { [ http | https ] }
<username 15> {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
[user <username 15> | all_users]
<username 15> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | clear_vlan]
{radius [enable| disable] | local [enable | disable]}(1)
{ <portlist> }
{ <portlist> }
[ports [ <portlist> | all ] { authenticated | authenticating | blocked } | macaddr
<macaddr>]
Each command is listed, in detail, in the following sections.
enable wac
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Example usage:
To enable WAC:
Used to enable WAC function.
enable wac
The enable wac command enables WAC function.
WAC and JWAC are mutual exclusive function. That is, they can not be enabled at the same time.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
613
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# enable wac
Command: enable WAC
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
disable wac
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to disable WAC function.
disable wac
The disable wac command disables WAC function; all authentication entries related to WAC will be deleted.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable WAC:
DGS-3450:admin# disable wac
Command: disable wac
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config wac ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to config state and other parameters of the ports.
config wac ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-
1440>] | idle_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time [<sec 0-300>]}(1)
The config wac ports command allows you to configure port state of WAC.
The default value of aging time is 1440 minutes.
The default value of idle time is infinite.
The default value of block_time is 60 seconds.
portlist - A port range to set their WAC state.
all - All the Switch ports’ WAC state is to be configured.
state - To specify the port state of WAC
aging_time - A time period during which an authenticated host will keep in authenticated state. “infinite” indicates never to age out the authenticated host on the port
idle_time - If there is no traffic during idle time, the host will be moved back to unauthenticated state. “infinite” indicates never to check the idle state of the authenticated host on the port.
block_time - If a host fails to pass the authentication, it will be blocked for a period specified by “block_time”.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To config state and other parameters of the ports:
614
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config wac ports 1-9 state enable
Command: config wac ports 1-9 state enable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config wac method
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure WAC auth method.
config wac method [local | radius]
The config wac radius_protocol command allows you to specify the RADIUS protocol used by
WAC to complete RADIUS authentication.
WAC shares other RADIUS configuration with 802.1x, when using this command to set the
RADIUS protocol, you must make sure the RASIUS server added by “config radius …” command supports the protocol.
local - The authentication will be done via the local database.
radius - The authentication will be done via the RADIUS server.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure WAC auth method:
DGS-3450:admin# config wac method radius
Command: config wac method radius
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config wac default_redirpath
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to config WAC default redirect URL.
config wac default_redirpath <string 128>
If default redirect path is configured, the user will be redirected to the default redirect path after successful authentication.
When the string is cleared, the client will not be redirected to another URL after successful authentication.
string - The URL that the client will be redirected to after successful authentication. By default, the redirected path is cleared
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To config WAC default redirect URL:
615
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config wac default_redirpath http://www.dlink.com
Command: config wac default_redirpath http://www.dlink.com
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config wac clear_default_redirpath
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to clear WAC default redirect URL.
config wac clear_default_redirpath
When the string is cleared, the client will not be redirected to another URL after successful authentication.
None.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To clear WAC default redirect URL:
DGS-3450:admin# config wac clear_default_redirpath
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config wac virtual_ip
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to config the virtual IP address for WAC.
config wac virtual_ip { < ipaddr > | < ipv6addr > } (1)
The virtual IP of WAC is used to accept authentication request from unauthenticated host.
Only requests sent to this IP will get response correctly.
This IP does not respond to ARP request or ICMP packet!
ipaddr - To specify the IP address of the virtual IP.
ipv6addr - To specify the IPv6 address of the virtual IP.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
Set IPv4 virtual IP address:
DGS-3450:admin# config wac virtual_ip 1.1.1.1
Command: config wac virtual_ip 1.1.1.1
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
Set IPv6 virtual IP address:
616
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# config wac virtual_ip 30::20
Command: config wac virtual_ip 30::20
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config wac switch_http_port
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to config HTTP(s) port of the switch used by WAC.
config wac switch_http_port < tcp_port_number 1-65535> { [ http | https ] }
The TCP port for HTTP or HTTPs is used to identify the HTTP or HTTPs packets
That will be trapped to CPU for authentication processing, or to access the login page.
If not specified, the default port number for HTTP is 80, and the default port number for
HTTPS is 443.
If no protocol specified, the protocol is HTTP.
The HTTP cannot run at TCP port 443, and the HTTPS cannot run at TCP port 80.
tcp_port_number - A TCP port which the WAC Switch listens to and uses to finish the authenticating process. The range of port number is 1-65535.
http - To specify the WAC runs HTTP protocol on this TCP port
https - To specify the WAC runs HTTPS protocol on this TCP port
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To config HTTP(s) port of the switch used by WAC:
Used to config HTTP(s) port of the switch used by WAC.
DGS-3450:admin# config wac switch_http_port 8888 http
Command: config wac switch_http_port 8888 http
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
create wac user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Example usage:
To create a WAC local user:
Used to create a WAC local user.
create wac user <username 15> {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
The create wac user command allows you to create account for web-base access control.
This user account is independent with login user account.
If VLAN is not specified, the user will not get a VLAN assigned after the authentication.
username - User account for web-base access control.
vlan - Authentication VLAN name.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
617
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# create wac user vlan Jim
Command: create wac user vlan Jim
Enter a case-sensitive new password:**
Enter the new password again for confirmation:**
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
delete wac user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to delete a WAC local user.
delete wac [user <username 15> | all_users]
The delete wac user command deletes WAC users from the local DB.
user - To specify the user name to be deleted
all_user - All user accounts in local DB will be deleted.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a WAC local user:
DGS-3450:admin# delete wac user 123
Command: delete wac user 123
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
config wac user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to configure WAC local user.
config wac user <username 15> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | clear_vlan]
The config wac user command updates the local user DB. Only created user can be configured
username - The user name to be configured
vlanid - Target VLAN ID for authenticated host which uses this user account to pass authentication
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure WAC local user:
DGS-3450:admin# config wac user Jim vlan 3
Command: config wac user Jim vlan 3
Enter a case-sensitive new password:***
Enter the new password again for confirmation:***
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
618
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
config wac authorization attributes
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
The enable authorization command will enable acceptation of authorized configuration.
config wac authorization attributes {radius [enable| disable] | local [enable | disable]}(1)
Used to enable or disable acceptation of authorized configuration.
When the authorization is enabled for WAC’s radius, the authorized data assigned by the
RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled.
When the authorization is enabled for WAC’s local, the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted.
radius - If specified to enable, the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled. The default state is enabled.
local - If specified to enable, the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled. The default state is enabled.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
The enable authorization command will enable acceptation of authorized configuration:
DGS-3450:admin# config wac authorization attributes local disable
Command: config wac authorization attributes local disable
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show wac
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display web authentication global setting.
show wac
This command allows the user to display the WAC global setting.
None.
None.
Example usage:
Show global configuration about WAC:
619
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show wac
Command: show wac
Web-Base Access Control
-----------------------------
State : Enabled
Method : RADIUS
Redirect Path : http://tw.yaholl.com
Virtual IP : 0.0.0.0
Virtual IPv6 : 2000::20
Switch HTTP Port : 80 (HTTP)
RADIUS Authorization : Enabled
Local Authorization : Enabled
DGS-3450:admin#
show wac ports
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display web authentication port level setting.
show wac ports { <portlist> }
This command allows the user to display the port level setting.
ports - A range of member ports to show the status.
None.
Example usage:
To show WAC port state and other parameters:
DGS-3450:admin# show wac ports 1-3
Command: show wac ports 1-3
Port State Aging Time Idle Time Block Time
(min) (min) (sec)
------- ------------- ------------- ------------ ------------
1:1 Enabled 60 30 120
1:2 Enabled 60 30 120
1:3 Enabled 120 60 120
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
show wac user
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Example usage:
To show WAC local user:
Used to user account for web authentication.
show wac user
The show wac user command allows you to show web authentication account.
None.
None.
620
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
DGS-3450:admin# show wac user
Command: show wac user
Username Password VID
--------- ---------- ------
Jim pasx 1000
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3450:admin#
show wac auth_state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Used to display the authentication state of a port.
show wac auth_state ports { <portlist> }
Used to display the authentication state for ports.
ports - Specifies the list of ports whose WAC state will be displayed.
None.
Example usage:
To show WAC authentication information:
DGS-3450:admin# show wac auth_state ports 1-3
Command: show wac auth_state ports 1-3
P:Port-based Pri:Priority
Port MAC Address Original State VID Pri Aging Time/ Idle
RX VID Block Time Time
------------- ------- ---------- -------------------------------------
1 00-00-00-00-00-01 1 Authenticated 4004 3 Infinite 40
1 00-00-00-00-00-02 1 Authenticated 1234 - Infinite 50
1 00-00-00-00-00-03 1 Blocked - - 60 -
1 00-00-00-00-00-04 1 Authenticating - - 10 -
2 00-00-00-00-00-10(P) 1 Authenticated 1234 2 1440 20
3 00-00-00-00-00-20(P) 1 Authenticating - - 5 -
3 00-00-00-00-00-21(P) 1 Blocked - - 100 -
Total Authenticating Hosts :2
Total Authenticated Hosts :3
Total Blocked Hosts :2
DGS-3450:admin#
clear wac auth_state
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Used to delete the authentication entries.
clear wac auth_state [ports [ <portlist> | all ] { authenticated | authenticating | blocked }
| macaddr <macaddr>]
Used to clear the authentication state of a port. If the port is port-based mode, the port will return to un-authenticated state. The entire timer associated with the port will be reset.
If the port is host based mode, users on this port will be cleared. The user needs to be reauthenticated to access the network.
ports - Specifies the list of ports whose WAC state will be cleared.
621
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
clear wac auth_state
Restrictions
authenticated - Specified to clear all authenticated users for a port.
authenticating - Specified to clear all authenticating users for a port.
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete WAC host:
DGS-3450:admin# clear wac auth_state ports 1-5
Command: clear wac auth_state ports 1-5
Success.
DGS-3450:admin#
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Example usage:
To:
Used to
Purpose
Syntax
Description
Parameters
Restrictions
Example usage:
To:
Used to
622
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
A
T
ECHNICAL
S
PECIFICATIONS
Specifications listed here apply to all Switches in the DGS-3400 Series except where otherwise noted.
General
Standards
Protocols
Data Transfer Rates:
Ethernet
Fast Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet
Fiber Optic
Topology
Network Cables
IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet
IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet
IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-T (SFP “Mini GBIC”)
IEEE 802.3ae (10G Optional Modules)
IEEE 802.1D/w/s Spanning Tree (Rapid, Multiple)
IEEE 802.1P/Q VLAN
IEEE 802.1p Priority Queues
IEEE 802.1v Protocol VLAN
IEEE 802.1X Network Access Control
IEEE 802.3 Nway auto-negotiation
IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control
IEEE 802.3x Full-duplex Flow Control
IEEE 802.1u Fast Ethernet
IEEE 802.3af Power-over-Ethernet
CSMA/CD
Half-duplex
10 Mbps
100Mbps
Full-duplex
20Mbps
200Mbps
1000Mbps 2000Mbps
SFP (Mini GBIC) Support
IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-LX (DEM-310GT transceiver)
IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-SX (DEM-311GT transceiver)
IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-SX (DEM-312GT2 transceiver)
IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-LH (DEM-314GT transceiver)
IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-ZX (DEM-315GT transceiver)
WDM Single Mode Transceiver 10km (DEM-330T/R)
WDM Single Mode Transceiver 40km (DEM-331T/R)
Duplex Ring, Duplex Chain
Cat.5 Enhanced for 1000BASE-T
UTP Cat.5, Cat. 5 Enhanced for 100BASE-TX
UTP Cat.3, 4, 5 for 10BASE-T
EIA/TIA-568 100-ohm screened twisted-pair (STP)(100m)
623
Internal Power Supply
Redundant Power Supply
Power Consumption
DC Fan:
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Dimensions
Weight
EMI:
Safety:
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
Physical and Environmental
AC Input: 100 - 240 VAC, 50-60 Hz
DGS-3400 Series
DGS-3426 (78.2 Watts)
DGS-3426P (496 Watts)
DGS-3427 (86.68 Watts)
DGS-3450 (144.47 Watts)
12v
0 - 40°C
-40 - 70°C
5 - 95% non-condensing
441mm x 389mm x 44mm
DGS-3400 Series
DGS-3426 (5.42 kg)
DGS-3426P (6 kg)
DGS-3427 (5.51 kg)
DGS-3450 (5.74 kg)
CE class A, FCC Class A
CSA International, CB Report
Module Inserts
DEM-410CX (0.015 Watts)
DEM-410X (6.16 Watts)
Module Inserts
DEM-410CX (0.16 kg)
DEM-410X (0.18 kg)
Transmission Method
Packet Buffer
Packet Filtering / Forwarding Rate
MAC Address Learning
Priority Queues
Forwarding Table Age Time
Performance
Store-and-forward
0.75 MB per device
Full-wire speed for all connections
1,488,095 pps per port (for 1000Mbps)
Automatic update. Supports 8K MAC address.
8 Priority Queues per port.
Max age: 10-1000000 seconds. Default = 300.
624
xStack
®
DGS-3400 Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Manual
B
P
ASSWORD
R
ECOVERY
P
ROCEDURE
This chapter describes the procedure for resetting passwords on D-Link Switches. Authenticating any user who tries to access networks is necessary and important. The basic authentication method used to accept qualified users is through a local login, utilizing a Username and Password. Sometimes, passwords get forgotten or destroyed, so network administrators need to reset these passwords. This chapter explains how the Password Recovery feature can help network administrators reach this goal.
The following steps explain how to use the Password Recovery feature on D-Link devices to easily recover passwords.
Complete these steps to reset the password:
1. For security reasons, the Password Recovery feature requires the user to physically access the device.
Therefore this feature is only applicable when there is a direct connection to the console port of the device. It is necessary for the user needs to attach a terminal or PC with terminal emulation to the console port of the switch.
2. Power on the Switch. After the runtime image is loaded to 100%, the Switch will allow 2 seconds for the user to press the hotkey [^] (Shift + 6) to enter the “Password Recovery Mode.” Once the Switch enters the “Password
Recovery Mode,” all ports on the Switch will be disabled.
Boot Procedure 1.00-B13
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Power On Self Test ...................................... 100 %
MAC Address : 00-26-5A-87-41-15
H/W Version : A2
Please wait, loading V2.70.B56 Runtime image ............ 100 %
Password Recovery Mode
>
3. In the “Password Recovery Mode” only the following commands can be used.
Command reset config reboot reset account reset password
{<username>} show account
Parameter
The reset config command resets the whole configuration back to the default values.
The reboot command exits the Reset Password Recovery Mode and restarts the switch. A confirmation message will be displayed to allow the user to save the current settings.
The reset account command deletes all the previously created accounts.
The reset password command resets the password of the specified user. If a username is not specified, the passwords of all users will be reset.
The show account command displays all previously created accounts.
625
Stiahnuť
Reklama